SECTION 5: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

114
1
Sl. No Description Page No.

1. Section 5A100 - Outline Specifications-Architecture

2. Section 5A200 - Outline Specifications-Landscape

3. Section 5A300 - Outline Specifications-Civil Structures &

Steel Structure

4. Section 5A400 - Outline Specifications-Building MEP Services

A. Outline Specifications- Plumbing Services

B. Outline Specifications- IBMS Services

C. Outline Specifications- HVAC Services

D. Outline Specifications-Fire fighting Services

E. Outline Specifications-Electrical Services

F. Outline Specifications-Lift & Escalators Services

G. Outline Specifications-EMS

115
2
Sl. No Description

1. Section 5A100 - Outline Specifications-Architecture

2. Section 5A200 - Outline Specifications-Landscape

3. Section 5A300 - Outline Specifications-Civil Structures & Steel Structure

4. Section 5A400 - Outline Specifications-Building MEP Services

116
3
5A 100 : OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS – ARCHITECTURE

4
117
5A 100 : OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS – ARCHITECTURE

5.1. General Specifications

5.1.1 Architecture and Finishes

(a) All works and finishing will be in accordance with the latest CPWD specifications. All details
and requirements contained in annexures and schedules are in variation to these specifications.
All deviations from CPWD specifications are listed below and detailed technical specifications
have been provided for the same in Sections below.

(b) These specifications are for work to be performed, items to be supplied and materials to be used
in the works as shown and defined in the drawings/finishes schedule and List of Approved Makes
in the attached annexures and herein to the satisfaction of the Employer/ Engineer in Charge.

(c) If specification for any item of work or material are not available either in CPWD
Specifications or in these particular specifications, in such cases relevant IS specifications or
National Building Code (NBC) 2016 shall be followed. If all of CPWD Specifications and IS
codes are unavailable, then International Standards shall apply, and in case non-availability of
those, prior approval of the Engineer will be taken before commencing work.

(d) The workmanship is to be the best possible and of a high standard. The contractor shall take all
steps necessary to address deficiencies, if any, identified by the Engineer. Use must be made of
special craftsmen / tradesmen in all aspects of the work and allowance must be made in the
rates for the same. To ensure the same, the contractor shall implement a highly effective and
comprehensive QA/QC program and shall adhere to the same.

(e) The materials to be provided by the contractor shall be in accordance with the samples already
approved by the Engineer and conform to the specification and approved list of manufacture and
brand, as per the attached annexures. The contractor shall produce all invoices, vouchers or
receipts for any materials if called upon to do so by the Engineer.

(f) A sample of all materials along with technical specifications is to be submitted to the Engineer
for their approval before the contractor orders or delivers the material to the site. Samples
together with their packing are to be provided free of charge by the contractor and should any
materials be rejected they will be removed from the site at the contractor’s expense. All samples
will be retained by the Engineer for comparison with materials which will be delivered at site.
Also the contractor will be required to submit specimen finishes colours, glass, etc., for approval
of the Engineer before proceeding with the works.

(g) All materials to be provided in subject contract shall be ISI marked. In cases where ISI marked
materials are not available, materials superior or conforming to BIS standards and approved by
the Engineer shall be used. Materials for which manufacturers names have been mentioned in
contract, makes as approved from list of manufacturers mentioned in contract shall be
provided by the contractor. I n c a s e o f n o n - a v a i l a b i l i t y o f s e l e c t e d b r a n d s ,
Contractor may provide materials which are equivalent or superior than the ones specified in
the list of makes after approval of the engineer in charge, complying to Technical specifications
and International / National standards. The manufacturers having ISI marked material shall be
preferred.

(h) Contractor shall maintain uniform quality and consistency in workmanship throughout the
execution of the work.

(i) The contractor shall provide, all materials, labour, maintenance, fixing, carrying, cleaning, and
making good, etc. temporary canvas, plastics and any other requisite protection of the works,

5
118
 all the necessary equipment, labour and removal of the same at the completion of the work. The
Engineer will be the sole judge in deciding as to the suitability of the tools or plants that may be
brought on the works by the contractors, for the proper execution of the work.

(j) Structural system for the building is proposed as Tubular Steel Structure with braces and shear
walls having Steel Tubular beams and concrete filled columns. Floor plan is proposed as deck
slab arrangement with secondary beams.
Tubes shall be manufactured by Electric resistance welding (ERW).

Deck slab with MS tube beam

(k) Each part of all the floors of all building and external area in to the cleaned properly and the
premises left clean, perfect and water tight upon completion. However, proper care needs to be
taken during such cleaning works so as to ensure no scratch/damage to the original finishing
such as polishing, painting, anodizing, powder coating etc. In case of any such damage, the
contractor shall have to reinstate the same as original as per the instructions of Engineer, without
any cost to Employer.

(l) Templates, boxes and moulds shall be accurately set out and rigidly constructed so as to remain
accurate during the time they are in use.

(m) All unexposed surfaces of timber e.g., backing fillets, backs of door frames, cupboard framing,
grounds, etc., are to be treated with two coats of approved timber preservative before fixing or
covering.

(n) Workmanship- All works shall be to true line, level; plumb and square corners and edges in all
cases shall be unbroken and finished neat.

(o) The Engineer may order for the inspection of any finished work as he chooses and, in a manner,
he decides, and the contractors shall bear all expenses in this connection. If the results of such
inspection prove that the material used and/or workmanship is not of the standard required, the
work will be rejected and removed forthwith and be replaced by works of the accepted standard
of quality and material without any extra cost.

(p) The contractor shall produce all invoices vouchers or receipts for any materials if called upon to
do so by the Employer.

5.1.2 Shop & fabrication Drawings

(a) Shop/fabrication drawings shall be prepared by the contractor for all specialized items of work
as indicated in the specifications before starting manufacturing of the items. These shall be
6
119
 carefully prepared in accordance with the specifications and drawings and best trade practices
and shall contain all the relevant information required.

(b) Unless otherwise mentioned, the engineer will take 21 working days for reviewing & comments
or approving any drawings/ designs submitted by the contractor for approval. Before
submission, the contractor shall check the shop drawings and ensure that these are correct,
complete and drawn to the required scale and fully coordinated with all relevant disciplines.
Whenever required the contractor shall arrange a meeting of his design team/consultant with the
engineer’s designer for any clarification on the drawings/ design documents submitted for
design approval at engineer’s designer place at his own cost.

(c) Shop drawings shall be prepared by the contractor at least for the following works unless
specified otherwise: -

(i) Structural steel works

(ii) UPVC Doors and Windows.
(iii) Curtain walls/façade Glazing system.
(iv) Tile works / Stonework.
(v) Lift Machine Room
(vi) Coordinated Panels in case of Cast in situ Concrete Panels.
(vii) Finishing drawings and details
(viii) Shaft/Duct Covering.
(ix) Woodwork.
(x) Modular Cabinets.
(xi) Fire Doors.
(xii) Waterproofing.
(xiii) Railings.
(xiv) Mild steel works/fabrications.

5.2. Detailed Specifications Architecture

The latest CPWD Specifications and norms and relevant IS codes applicable as on 30 days
prior to submission of the bid, are to be followed for all purposes including workmanship,
materials, finishing, warranty etc., unless mentioned otherwise. In case of multiple
workmanship procedures or conflicting requirements, prior approval must be taken from the
Engineer before commencement of work. In case of additional/omitted items not mentioned
here, latest CPWD Specifications or relevant IS codes to be followed. These specifications are
to be read in conjunction with the Schedule of finishes and the List of Approved Makes in the
attached annexures.
The latest CPWD Specifications will be applicable for the points mentioned below. The list
given below is indicative and not exhaustive.

(a) External works

(b) RCC and blockwork superstructure
(c) Wall plaster (amenity buildings)
(d) Flooring stone (includes internal, external, staircases and skirting of all stone flooring)
(e) Flooring Tile (including skirting)
(f) Paint works (internal, external, metal, wood)
(g) Sealants
(h) Wall cladding
(i) Stone counter tops
(j) Wooden interior doors
(k) Aluminum exterior doors
(l) Wooden Fire doors All Fire doors shall be wooden fire doors.
(m) Wooden flooring (engineered wood / laminated wooden)
7
120
 (n) Mild steel works
(o) Structural steel works
(p) Glass (windows, mirror and railings)
(q) False ceilings
(r) Bathroom fixtures
(s) Kitchen fixtures
(t) Woodwork - cabinetry and furniture
(u) Hardware / ironmongery
(v) Structural glazing
(w) Lifts
(x) Safety and architectural railings

The following specifications will be taken in appendix to the CPWD specifications and IS Codes
for specific conditions, namely –

5.3. Anti-Termite Treatment

The Contractor must take special care in performing anti-termite treatment since the construction
site / project location is prone to termite infestation.

5.3.1 Chemicals
The chemicals used for the soil treatment shall be any one or combination of the following with
the concentration shown against each aqueous emulsion: Chemicals concentration: Imidacloprid
30.50 SC (by weight)
The quantity of all chemicals will be as per CPWD Specifications or as per manufacturers
specification.

5.3.2 Treatment of column pits, wall trenches and basement excavations

The bottom surface and sides (up to a height of 30 cm from the bottom) of the excavations made
for column pits and trenches shall be treated with the chemical emulsion mentioned above at 5
litres/ sq. meter of surface area.

5.3.3 Treatment to Backfill Earth

After the column foundations and wall foundations come up, the backfill in immediate contact
with the foundation structure shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at the rate of 15 litres/
Sq.m of the vertical surface of the sub-structure for each side. The earth is usually returned in
layers and the treatment shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be
directed towards the concrete or masonry surfaces of the columns and walls so that the earth in
contact with these surfaces is well treated with the chemical.

5.3.4 Treatment for R.C.C Framed Structures

The treatment described above applies essentially to masonry foundations where there are voids in
the joints through which termites can seek entry into the superstructure. Hence the foundations
require to be completely enveloped by a chemical barrier. In the case of RCC framed
structures with columns and plinth beams, the concrete mix is rich and dense (being 1:2:4 or
richer), it is unnecessary to start the treatment from the bottom excavations for columns, plinth
beams and basement walls. The treatment shall start at depth of 50cm below ground level. From
this depth, the backfill around the columns, beams and RCC basement walls shall be treated at
the rate of 15-liters/ Sq.m. of the vertical surface. The other details of the treatment shall be as
laid down above.

5.3.5 Treatment of Top Surface of Plinth Filling

After the earth filling is completed in the plinth area and before the dry rubble packing or sub
grade is laid, the entire surface of the filled earth shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at
the rate of the 5 litres per Sq.m. Light rodding may be carried out in the soil surface to facilitate

8
121
 absorption of the emulsion.

5.3.6 Treatment at Junction of Walls and Floor

Special care shall be taken to establish continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on inner wall
surface from the ground level up to the level of the filled earth surface. To achieve this, a small
channel 3 x 3 cm shall be made at all the junctions of wall and columns with floor (before laying
the sub grade) and rod holes made in the channel up to the ground level 15 cm apart and the rod
moved backward and forward to break up the earth and chemical emulsion poured along the
channel at the rate of 15 litre/ Sq.m of the area of the vertical surface of the wall surface of the
sub-structure so as to soak the soil right to the bottom. The soil should be tamped back into
place after this operation.

5.3.7 Treatment to Soil along External Perimeter of Building

Finally, the earth around the external perimeter of the building up to a depth of 30cm shall be
treated at the rate of 4.5 litres per running meter of plinth wall. To facilitate this treatment, solid
M.S. rods should be driven into the soil as close as possible to plinth wall at intervals of 15 cm
and up to a depth of 30 cm and the rods moved backwards and forwards in a direction parallel to
the wall to break up the earth so that the chemical emulsion mixes intimately with soil.

5.3.8 Treatment of Soil Surrounding Pipes, Wastes and Conduits

When pipes, wastes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundation, the soil
surrounding the point of entry must be loosened around each such pipe waste or conduit for a
distance of 15 cm and up to a depth of 7.5 cm before the treatment is commenced. When they
enter the soil external to the foundations, they shall be similarly treated unless they stand clear of
the walls of the building by about 7.5 cm for a distance of over 30 cm.

5.3.9 Termite Proof Course or DPC (PCC) in Plinth

Where there is the provision of a damp-proof course in the construction, it is located just below
the level of the filled earth. Although this acts as an effective barrier impervious to termite entry
the PCC surface should be treated at 5 litres per Sq.m immediately after the course is laid and the
concrete is green.
Where there is no provision for a DPC, the top surface of the masonry course just below the
level of plinth filling mentioned above should be soaked with the chemical emulsion at the rate of
5 litres per Sq.m. of the surface. The application should be carried out slowly to enable the
masonry surface to absorb the emulsion.

5.3.10 Anti-Termite Treatment at Points of Contact of Wood Work

Refer to CPWD Specifications
5.3.11 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee the anti-termite work for a period of 10 years from date of
completion. The guarantee will cover the surfaces treated and will bind the Contractor to
perform remedial measures, at his expense including but not limited to repeat of anti-termite
work in the affected area/zone.
Contractors must ensure that the work is done through a professional pest control operator who is
a member of Indian Pest Control Association or other recognized professional body. A list of
termite control jobs successfully undertaken for Government Departments, Statutory bodies or
large private organizations are to be provided to prove that they are capable of handling anti-
termite work.

5.4 Vacuum Dewatered Concreting/ Trimix Flooring

5.4.1 Preparation
(a) The surface to receive flooring shall be clean, free from dirt and free from foreign material.
(b) Any undulations or mortar remaining on the floor shall be trimmed.
(c) Base course shall be trimmed.
9
122
 (d) The base shall be cleaned and watered before laying the floor.
(e) Work includes application at all depths and heights.
(f) The finished surface shall be kept wet for a maximum period of one week.

5.4.2 Concreting
(a) Concreting shall have a concrete base of M20 of specified thickness.
(b) Flooring shall have hard top on the concrete base.
(c) Flooring shall be laid in strips.

5.4.3 Materials
Structural Steel Tubes (IS4923)
Deck Sheet
Cement ordinary Portland
Sand natural/Manufactured sand
Aggregate - max. size 10 to 20mm
Water - potable
Floor hardener - @3kg/Sq.m
Fire Intumescent Paint / Coating

5.4.4 Execution
(a) Mix cement, sand and aggregates as per grade M20 thoroughly with water to get an appropriate
consistency.
(b) Prepared concrete shall be laid immediately after mixing.
(c) The base shall be free from water and other foreign materials, dust and dirt.
(d) A coat of cement slurry of the consistency of thick cream shall be brushed on the surface of the
base course.
(e) The concrete shall then be spread over this base evenly and levelled carefully.
(f) Low areas shall be filled with concrete and humps removed. Devacuumization shall be done for
removing the voids.
(g) The whole concrete surface shall be levelled, compacted by ramming and trowelling.
(h) Prepared surface shall be allowed to set.
(i) Hardener screed
(j) Hard top to be prepared as per the specifications with Nitohardner and one part of dry cement.
(k) The hard top shall be provided over concrete base immediately after it is set, compacted and
levelled with a steel trowel.
(l) The surface shall be trowelled to bring the hardener coat to a levelled surface.
(m) Excessive trowelling shall be avoided.
(n) After the initial set, further compaction shall be done by steel trowelling.
(o) Final brushing shall be made before the floor top becomes too hard.
(p) The overall thickness of Vacuum Dewatered Flooring will not be less than 75mm.

5.4.5 Curing
(a) Curing shall commence as soon as the surface is hard enough to receive the water.
(b) The surface shall be covered with sacks or sand and shall be kept continuously wet for a period of
at least one week.

5.5 Waterproofing and Insulation

These specifications cover the general requirements of waterproofing systems to the various
parts of the structure. The contractor shall consider the prescribed requirements carefully and
assess the best suited system for a particular part of the structure, keeping in mind the heavy
rainfall of the region and high- w a t e r table possibility along with adverse chemicals like
sulphate & chloride etc. The contractor is fully and totally responsible to provide buildings and
infrastructure that are water tight and leak proof. The contractor will submit a waterproofing
and sealant plan to be approved by the Engineer along within 45 Days of commencement of

10
123
 contract.

5.5.1 Codes References

(a) IS 73: Paving Bitumen Specifications
(b) IS 702: Specifications for Industrial Bitumen
(c) IS 1322: Specifications for Bitumen felts for Water Proofing and Damp Proofing.
(d) IS 2645: Specifications for Integral Cement Water Proofing Compounds
(e) IS 3370: (Part -1) Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the Storage of Liquid: Part -1
General Requirements.
(f) IS 3384: Specifications for Bitumen Primer for Water Proofing and Damp Proofing
(g) IS 7193: Specification for Glass Fiber Bitumen Felts
(h) IS 12200: Provision of Water Stops at Transfers Construction Joints in Masonry and
Concrete Dams - Code of Practice.
(i) IS 12432: (Part-3) Application for Spray Applied Insulation-Code of Practice Part-3
Polyurethane/ Polyisocyanurate

5.5.2 General Waterproofing Requirements

(a) The work shall be carried out by an approved specialized waterproofing agency that has
minimum of 10 years of experience in the proposed waterproofing system.
(b) The specifications given below against each item are indicative in nature. The contractor in
consultation with the proposed specialized waterproofing agency shall propose their detailed
specification in line with the requirements given below including consumption to achieve
required thickness (including wastage) and shall submit such specifications for approval by
the Engineer.
(c) For certain items two optional specifications are mentioned. The Contractor shall quote for
both and shall furnish the detailed specification including makes for both options. The
Employer may select an appropriate option based on its merits.
(d) On award of work to the Contractor, such specifications after incorporation of modifications
suggested by the Engineer (if any) shall become part of the contract specifications and
Contractor shall execute all waterproofing works accordingly.
(e) On completion of the works, Contractor has to submit a comprehensive guarantee valid for
minimum 10 years.
(f) The extent of waterproofing required for different structural elements shall be as approved
by the Engineer and Contractor's specifications shall match such requirements.
(g) Integral waterproofing to be done in all wet areas mandatorily.
(h) Additional waterproofing measures for basement protection to be done by the contractor
through HDPE and vertical HDPE membrane.
(i) The contractor shall have to submit a Bank Guarantee of percentage fixed by the client as
security against warranty to be released after the warranty period of waterproofing given by
contractor expires.
(j) In case of exposed water proofing treatments, required slopes shall be given to the
finished surfaces of waterproofing treatment to ensure drain out of water in the desired
direction.
(k) A shop drawing shall be submitted for review before executing the treatments with all
relevant details of rainwater down take pipes, flashing, coving, ridge, valley, drip moulds etc.
(l) The Contractor is liable for all preparatory works to effect a defect free treatment,
staging, scaffolding, curing, all chemicals, dewatering, ponding test for the duration as
instructed by the Engineer, protection against damages of waterproofed layer, working at all
levels and heights etc.
(m) Ponding test is mandatory over all water proofing works for the durations as specified by the
Engineer.
(n) Measurement for all terrace, toilet, kitchen and balcony works shall be made only for the plan
areas measured clear. Works done on vertical surfaces including 'vattas' shall not be paid
separately.

11
124
 (o) Waterproofing details to be submitted by contractor for the joint between the beam bottom
and filler wall for review and approval.
(p) Waterproofing of following areas shall be covered in this specification :
a. Basement Waterproofing Treatment
b. Basement top / Podiums / Fire Tender Movement Area / Driveway / Landscape / Ramp
Waterproofing Treatment
c. Water tank Internal Area Waterproofing Treatment
d. STP / ETP Internal Area Waterproofing Treatment
e. Pipe Inlet / Outlet Waterproofing Treatment
f. Any other area subject to water / moisture and as instructed by Engineer -in- charge.

5.5.3 Material Requirements

(a) Acceptable Manufacturers:
The following is a list of acceptable manufacturers but is not limited to and may be amended
upon showing relevant and merit supporting evidence. Contractor can provide materials which
are equivalent or superior then the ones specified after approval of the engineer in charge.: MYK
Arment, Grace, Kryton & MC Bauchemie.
(b) Acceptable Proprietary Products:
The following is an indicative, non-exhaustive list of proprietary products.
(i) Acrylic Polymer Modified Two Component Cementitious system
(ii) SBS polymer reinforced membrane system
(iii) Liquid Spray applied elastomeric polyurethane membrane system
(iv) Spray applied polyurethane foam system
The waterproofing system chosen for various structures is subject to approval from the Engineer.
(c) Source Quality:
The contractor must obtain proprietary waterproofing products directly from the manufacturer.
(d) Other civil material related with waterproofing:
The contractor must obtain cement, screened river sand, brick-bats, aggregates, integral
waterproofing compounds, etc. required for screeds, protective toppings and plasters shall
conform to the pertaining IS standards (IS 269, IS 8112, IS 13286, IS 383, IS 2645, IS 12118 and
IS 3495). The Employer/Engineer may demand the conformance of these materials from the
Specialized Executing Waterproofing Agencies / civil contractor from time to time and they shall
have to produce test reports / documents to prove the conformance of these materials with their
applicable standards, without any argument.
(e) Mixes:
The contractor must mix waterproofing material as specified by the manufacturer. Follow exact
instructions as mentioned in the respective technical literature. Mix waterproofing in quantities
that can be applied within 20 to 30 minutes from time of mixing. The liquid applied
coatings/membranes may be applied by brush, roller, squeegee, trowel or spray. Prefabricated
membranes may be applied by priming and torching or as specified in the Manufacturer’s
literature.

5.5.4 Execution
(a) Examination
(i) Site Visit:
Prior to waterproofing installation, arrange visit to project site with waterproofing
Manufacturer’s representative. Representative shall inspect and certify that the concrete
surfaces are in acceptable condition to receive the waterproofing treatment.
(ii) Verification of Substrates:
Verify that concrete surfaces are sound and clean, and that form release agents and materials
used to cure the concrete are compatible with waterproofing treatment.
(iii) Examination of Defects:
Examine surfaces to be waterproofed for form tie holes and structural defects such as
honeycombing, rock pockets, faulty construction joints and cracks. Such defects are toe

12
125
 repaired in accordance to manufacturer’s product data and point below.
(b) Preparation
(i) Concrete Finish:
Prior Concrete surfaces to receive waterproofing treatment shall be free from scale, excess
oil, laitance, curing compounds and foreign matter. Horizontal surfaces shall have a rough
wood float, smooth or broom finish, as required by the waterproofing manufacturer.
(ii) Surface Preparation:
Smooth surfaces (e.g., where steel forms are used) or surfaces covered with excess form oil
or other contaminants shall be washed, lightly sandblasted, water blasted, or acid etched
with muriatic acid (as necessary) to provide a clean absorbent surface. Surfaces to be acid-
etched shall be saturated with water prior to application of acid.
(iii) Repair of Defects:
Form Tie Holes Construction Joints Cracks: Chip our defective areas in a U-shaped slot 25
mm wide and a minimum of 25 mm deep. Clean slot of debris and dust. Soak area with
water and remove excess surface water. Apply a polymer modified cementitious bonding
coat of approved material to the slot. Then fill cavity with a non-shrink, waterproof,
cementitious grout / epoxy mortar, while the bonding coat is tacky. Compress tightly into
cavity using pneumatic packer or block and hammer. Where the concrete is defective, do
injection grouting with high pressure (140 psi) grouting machine using cement admixed
with non- shrink grouting admixture. Rock Pockets, Honeycombing or Other Defective
Concrete: Rout out defective areas to sound concrete. Remove loose materials and saturate
with water. Remove excess surface water and apply a polymer modified cementitious
bonding coat of approved material to the area. While the bonding coat is still tacky, fill
cavity to surface level with non-shrink grout. Where the concrete is defective, do injection
grouting with high pressure (140 psi) grouting machine using cement admixed with non-
shrink grouting admixture.
(c) Application
(i) Construction Joints:
Apply cementitious/other suitable bonding material/epoxy Nito bond in slurry form to joint
surfaces between concrete pours, just prior to pouring fresh concrete. Moisten surfaces
prior to the bonding coat application. Where joint surfaces are not accessible prior to
pouring new concrete contractor must consult manufacturer for application procedure.

(ii) Coves:
Make a minimum 4 inch (diagonal) cove / vata at all 900 interfaces in concrete surfaces
where waterproofing is carried out, without fail.
(iii) Surface Application:
After repairs, surface preparation, treatment of construction joints, cracks, honeycombs, tie
-holes, etc., have been completed in accordance with Manufacturers product data and as
specified herein. Apply / provide the waterproofing material as specified in the
manufacturers technical and application data sheet to concrete surfaces. Application rates,
thicknesses and locations shall be as indicated in the drawing. When brushing, work slurry
well into surface of the concrete, filling surface pores and hairline cracks. When spraying,
hold nozzle close enough to ensure that slurry is forced into pores and hairline cracks.
When torching, uniformly burn the surface when overlapping, to ensure that the membrane
adheres uniformly.
(iv) Sandwich (Topping) Application:
When treated structural slabs are to receive a concrete or other topping, place the topping
only after the initial curing period of the material is being used, is completed. Lightly pre-
water when rapid drying conditions exist.
(d) Application
(i) General:
For cementitious materials, begin curing as soon as the applied waterproofing material has
hardened sufficiently so as not to be damaged by a fine spray. Cure The treatment with

13
126
 water as per manufacturers instruction. In warm climates more-than-normal curing duration
may be necessary to prevent excessive drying of coating. For liquid applied membranes /
pre-fabricated membranes, natural air Curing for duration as described in the
manufacturer’s technical data sheet.
(ii) Air circulation:
Do not lay plastic sheeting directly on the waterproofing coating as air contact is required
for proper curing. If poor circulation exists in treated areas, it may be necessary to provide
fans or blown air to aid curing of waterproofing treatment.
(iii) Water-holding structures:
For concrete water-holding structures such as swimming pools, reservoirs, water treatment
tanks and wet wells, cure the waterproofing system for a minimum of 3 days and then
allow the waterproofing system to set for 7 days before structure with liquid. For structures
holding hot or corrosive liquids, cure waterproofing system for 3 days and allow setting for
15 days.
(iv) Protection:
During the curing period, protect the treated surfaces from damage by wind, sun rain and
temperatures below 20 C. If plastic sheeting is used for protection, it must be raised off the
waterproofing coating to allow sufficient air circulation.
(e) Interface with other materials
(i) Backfilling:
Do not backfill for 36 hours after application. If backfill takes place within seven days after
application, then backfill material shall be moist so as not to draw moisture from
waterproof coating.
(ii) Paint, epoxy or similar coatings:
Do not apply paint or other coatings until waterproofing treatment has cured and set for a
minimum of 21 days. Before applying or coating, neutralize treated surface by dampening
with water and then washing waterproofed surface with 15% (HCL) muriatic acid, diluted i
a ratio of one part acid to four parts waters by volume. Flush acid off treated concrete
surfaces.
(iii) Grout, Cement Parge Coat, Plaster or Stucco:
Because the waterproof coating forms a relatively smooth surface and the resulting
waterproof coating reduces the suction characteristics of the concrete, it may be necessary
to use a suitable bonding agent for proper bonding of cementitious systems (IPS, screed,
plaster, etc.) if they are applied.
(iv) Responsibility to Ensure Compatibility:
The respective manufacturers must confirm in writing regarding compatibility of their
waterproofing treatments with other coatings, plaster, stuccos, tiles or other surface-applied
materials. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer / installer of the waterproofing
material to take whatever measures are necessary, including testing, to ensure acceptance
by or adhesion to their waterproofing system.
(f) Field Quality Control
(i) Observation:
Do not conceal installed waterproofing system before it has been observed by Engineer.
Waterproofing manufacturer’s representative and other designated entities.
(ii) Flood Testing:
Perform flood test on completed waterproofing installation for a minimum of 72 hours
before of other construction. Plug or dam drains and fill area with water to a depth of at
least 100mm. If leaks are discovered, make repairs and repeat tests until no leaks or
dampness is observed.
(g) Cleaning & Protection
(i) Cleaning:
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent surfaces using appropriate cleaning agents and
procedures. Ensure that cleaning agents do not harm or damage the waterproofing coating
in any way what so ever.

14
127
 (ii) Protection:
Take measures to protect completed waterproofing system from damage immediately after
application. Do not permit traffic on unprotected coating or membrane.

5.5.5 Submittals
(a) General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the contract and ensure
every submittal is complete and correct in every way before submitting.
(b) Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturers specifications, installation
instructions, and general recommendations for waterproofing applications. Also include
Manufacturers certifications or other data substantiating that products comply with requirements
of the contract documents.
(c) Test Reports: Submit for acceptance, complete test reports from government/NABL approved
independent testing laboratories certifying that waterproofing system conforms to performance
characteristics and testing requirements specified herein.
(d) Manufacturers Certification: Provide certificates signed by manufacturer or manufacturer’s
representative certifying that the materials to be installed comply in all respects with the
requirements of this specification, and that the specialize executing waterproofing agency is with
manufacturers product data qualified and approved to install the materials in accordance
(e) Manufacturers Field Report: provide copy of report from manufacturer’s representative
conforming that the surfaces to which waterproofing I to be applied are in a condition suitable
to receive the same.

5.5.6 Quality Assurance

(a) Manufacturer: Provide products of manufacturer with no less than 20 years’ experience in
manufacturing the waterproofing and insulation materials offered by them for the required work
along with details of where the product is manufactured. Manufacturers that cannot provide the
performance test data specified herein will not be considered for the project.
(b) Specialized Waterproofing agency: Specialized executing waterproofing agency shall be
experience in the installation of the offered waterproofing materials as demonstrated by previous
successful installations, and shall be approved by the manufacturer in writing. The agency shall
have experience in executing waterproofing works amounting to at least 15,000 Sqm. in the
past seven (07) years for the waterproofing systems proposed for this project. This requirement
can be achieved through one or more projects.
(c) Pre-installation conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing, conduct meeting with
waterproofing agency, Engineer in Charge, employer’s representative and waterproofing
manufacturer’s representative to verify and revies the following:
(d) Project requirements for waterproofing as set out in the contract documents.
(e) Manufacturers product data including application instruction
(f) Substrate conditions and procedures for substrate preparation and waterproofing installation.
(g) Technical Consultation: The waterproofing manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical
consultation on waterproofing application. The manufacturer through the Contractor shall submit
drawings for typical details and terminations, shall conduct regular site visits and carry out
inspections during execution of waterproofing works.

5.5.7 Delivery and Storage

(a) Delivery: Deliver packaged waterproofing materials to the project site in original undamaged /
unopened containers / pallets with manufacturers label and seals intact. Each delivery should be
accompanied by manufacturers certificate for quality parameters and date of approved by the
contractor. Material delivered shall be manufacture / expiry.
(b) Storage: Material shall be stored in a dry, well-ventilated and covered storage. Ensure that
material is not in contact with earth and is stored as per guidance of the Manufacturers
literature.
(c) Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data regarding condition of substrate to

15
128
 receive waterproofing, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the
installed waterproofing system.
5.5.8 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee the waterproofing installation against defects caused by faulty
workmanship or materials for a period of 10 years from date of substantial completion. The
guarantee will cover the surfaces treated and will bind the Contractor to repair, at his expense,
any and all leaks through the treated surfaces which are not due to structural weakness or other
causes beyond his control such as fire, earthquake, tornado and hurricane.

5.5.9 Areas of Application & Indicative Method

(a) RAFT SLAB/FOOTINGS
Supplying and installing 1.5mm thick self-adhesive HDPE membrane, having puncture resistance of
1000N as per ASTM E 154, Tensile strength of 25 Mpa as per ASTM D412, Elongation of >500% as per
ASTM D 412, Resistance to hydrostatic head > 60M as per ASTM D 5385, Peel adhesion to concrete
880N/m as per ASTMD903, 45 Days UV Exposure Test-Pass and conforming to IS 16471:2017
requirements of UG waterproofing structures.
Preformed HDPE fully bonded membrane bonds to the wet concrete cast. After the membrane bonds with
the concrete, it forms an integral seal which prevents lateral water migration and makes it unaffected by
any substrate settlement below the raft slabs. Reinforcement can be directly laid on top of the membrane
and it does not require screed protection. The system should be fully bonded to the RCC and consists of
Virgin HDPE layer, a pressure sensitive -adhesive layer which is covered by a weather proof protective
layer. The membrane shall have minimum of 75 mm side and end laps which shall be sealed with double
sided adhesive tape. The size of the membrane should not be less than 2.4 Mtr. x 20 Mtr. to minimize no
of joints. No Protection Required for Fully Bonded HDPE Membrane allowing Faster Construction. The
waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10 years of complete system
guarantee against leakage.

The fully bonded HDPE waterproofing membrane shall have following technical properties:
Property Typical Value Test Method
Colour White
Roll Size 2.4 Mtr x 20 Mtr
Thickness 1.5 mm ASTM D 3767
Tensile Strength, Film 25 Mpa ASTM D 412 Modified
Elongation 500% ASTM D 412 Modified
Low Temperature Flexibility -25oC Pass ASTM D 1970
Resistance to Hydrostatic >60 M ASTM D 5385 Modified
Head
Crack Cycling Pass ASTM D 836/ASTM C
1305 Modified
Peel Adhesion to Concrete 880 N/m ASTM D 903 Modified
Dimension Stability 0.5 % ASTM D 1204
Puncture Resistance 1000 N (± 5 to 10%) ASTM E 154
UV resistance Test 45 days Pass

METHOD OF APPLICATION
1. The entire area shall be taken up for through surface preparation and mechanical removal of Debris,
laitance and protrusions.
2. Place the membrane HDPE film side to the substrate with the adhesive /coated side up facing towards the
concrete pour and it shall be extended inside the shuttering on the vertical surface before casting the raft
slab. End laps should be staggered to avoid a build-up of layers.
3. Leave the plastic release liner in position until overlap procedure is completed.
4. Accurately position succeeding sheets to overlap the previous sheet 75 mm along the marked selvedge.
Ensure the underside of the succeeding sheet is clean, dry and free from contamination before attempting
to overlap.
16
129
 5. Peel back the plastic release liner from between the overlaps as the two layers are bonded together.
Ensure a continuous bond is achieved without creases and roll firmly with a heavy roller.

(b) RETAINING WALL

Providing and laying of 1.5 mm thick SBS based self-adhesive waterproofing membrane topped with
hdpe cross laminated film with the following technical properties-Softening point of 105 (0C) as per
ASTM D36 ,Tensile Strength (L/T)- 3.5 N/sq.mm as per ASTM D412,Elongation (L/T) L- 180 % ,T -
180 % as per ASTM D 412, Tear Resistance 125 N as per ASTM D 4073, Puncture Resistance- 200 N as
per ASTM E 154, Hydrostatic pressure > 60 m (6BAR) No leakage as per DIN 1048, including cleaning
the surface, priming the surface with cold applied bituminous primer@4-6 sqmtr/litre, properly sealing
the joints & maintaining 75 mm overlap between the membrane selvedge & 100 mm overlap on the end
joints of the membrane over the slab etc. complete.
The system shall be a SBS modified self-adhesive cold applied waterproofing membrane based on a
tropical grade of polymer modified bitumen. The bitumen compound is laminated onto an impervious,
non-perforated, HDPE film. The membrane is protected on the self-adhesive side with a silicone coated
release film.

Termination: Supplying and applying aluminum strip flashing with fasteners at the top and sealing the
joints with PU sealant the laid membrane shall be covered with protection board - spot bonded on
retaining wall before backfilling -8mm thick dimple board of compressive strength not less than
200kN/m2. The waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10 years of
complete system guarantee against leakage

The SBS Self-adhesive membrane shall have following technical properties:

Product Test Standard Results
Top surface Cross laminated HDPE valeron
Softening point (oC) ASTM D36 105

Tensile Strength (L/T) ASTM D 412-06 3.5

N/sq.mm(compound
membrane)
Elongation (L/T), (%) ASTM D 412 -06 180
(compound membrane)

Tear Resistance (N) ASTM D 4073 125

(compound membrane)
Puncture Resistance, (N) ASTM E 200
154
Adhesion to self-lap adhesion ASTM D 1000 2.4
N/mm
Hydrostatic pressure DIN 1048 > 60 m (6 BAR) No leakage

Crack Bridging Ability, (mm) ASTM C 836 1.5

METHOD OF APPLICATION:
 The substrate must be free of all dirt, oil grease and loosely adhering particles and made dry. Honeycomb
and spalled concrete are to be repaired and all nail heads and protrusions that are likely to puncture the
membranes must be removed. All tie rod holes to be packed with shrink material.

17
130
  Injection grouting (cementitious grouting) at all construction joints & weaker sections @ 1m C/C through
the PVC nipples with 40PSI grout pump using cement slurry mixed with expansive plasticizing
admixture @225gms per bag of cement
 Laying of angle fillets (50mm x 50mm) at the junction of slab & vertical walls prepared with cement sand
mortar 1:4 admixed with integral waterproofing compound @ 200 ml per 50 kg bag of cement.
 All concrete surfaces will then be primed with a solvent based Bitumen Primer.
 Unroll only the required length of the membrane and cut the pieces to the desired length and shape.
 Place the membrane pieces on the area to be covered and check whether the pieces match with the profile
of the marked substrate.
 Re-roll the membrane for about half the length without changing its orientation. Then slowly unroll the
membrane, peel off the release film and carefully place the membrane on the surface.
 Smoothen out any entrapped air by pressing from the center to the sides.
 The subsequent rolls are to be laid in such a fashion that there is a 75 mm side overlap on sides and
100mm end overlap.
 The applied membrane is then to be protected from damage by installing 8 mm thick HDPE dimple board
spot bonded on retaining wall before backfilling.

(c) PODIUM/LANDSCAPING DECKS (HARDSCAPE & LANDSCAPE)

The system includes base preparation of cleaning, brushing and removal of flacky materials, grouting the
porous area with cementitious grout, proper coving between slab and wall junctions and priming the
surface with two component solvent free epoxy primer @250g/sqm, followed by sprinkling liberal oven-
dried quartz sand over the primer while it is still wet, to provide key for subsequent waterproofing coating.
Providing and applying two component instant setting 100% solids spray applied hybrid polyurea (PU)
waterproofing coating having excellent tensile strength of 15MPa and elongation of >400% (as per
ASTM D 412), adhesion to concrete of 2MPa (as per ASTM D 4541), puncture resistance of 1000N (as
per ASTM 154) and static crack bridging of up to 2mm (as per ASTM C 836). The coating shall be
applied @2.2Kg/sqm to achieve a total DFT of 2 mm and shall be applied on the entire horizontal and
shall be terminated at 300mm above the FFL, including reinforcing the coating with 45gsm glass fibre
mesh at all corners and change in directions as per the manufacturer's recommendation. Providing &
laying 150 gsm geotextile layer over the Pu coating.
Horizontal Protection: Supplying and applying an avg of 75mm thick M20 fibrated grade concrete screed
including saw cutting (approx. 6mm W x 30mm D) at 3MX4M panels, making angle fillet of
50mmX50mm using M20 grade concrete at the corners and filling the groove with PU sealant.
Vertical protection: Supplying and applying 15mm thick polymeric waterproof plastering @ 0.2litre/bag
of cement with CM 1:4 for the vertical surface.
Landscape areas-Fixing of 10mm thick polypropylene geotextile laminated dimpled board, of
compressive strength not less than 400kN/m2
The waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10 years of complete
system guarantee against leakage

Technical properties of two component Hybrid Polyurea Coating

Elongation to break ASTM D412 400%
Tensile Strength ASTM D412 15 MPa
Solid Content ASTM D2369 100 %
Adhesion to concrete ASTM D4541 2 Mpa
Puncture Resistance ASTM C154 1000 N
Static Crack Bridging ASTM D 836 2 mm

METHOD OF APPLICATION
 Clean the surface free from dirt, laitance etc.
 Injection grouting (cementitious grouting) at all construction joints & weaker sections @ 1m C/C through
the PVC nipples using cement slurry mixed with expansive plasticizing admixture @225gms per bag of
cement.
18
131
  Apply Epoxy Primer on cleaned & leveled surface @ 250 grams/sq.mtr. The priming will enhance the
adhesion of the membrane to the substrate. Allow the primer to cure according its technical instruction.
 Spray applies two component hybrid polyurea coating on to the primed surface until the full area is
covered. The coating shall be applied @2.2Kg/sqm to achieve a total DFT of 2 mm and shall be applied
on the entire horizontal and shall be terminated at 300mm above the FFL
 Laying of geotextile membrane over the cured coating to protect it from any damages before protecting
the same by concrete screed.
 Horizontal protection: Supplying and laying slope making and protection with 75mm avg. thick of M20
grade fibrated screed including saw cutting (approx. 6mm W x 10mm D) at 3MX4M panels and filling
the grove with PU sealant. Curing as per standard practice.
 Vertical protection: Supplying and applying waterproof plastering with CM 1:4 of thickness 20 mm for
walls admixed with integral waterproofing compound @ 200ml/bag of cement
 For landscape areas: Fixing of 10mm thick polypropylene geotextile laminated dimpled board, of
compressive strength not less than 400kN/m2
 Drain board.

(d) SUNKEN PORTIONS/TOILETS/BALCONIES

Cleaning the internal surface areas thoroughly so that they are free of all contaminants like dirt and
laitance & to remove all the loose materials by various mechanical means. Removal of all surface
imperfections, protrusions, loose concrete & filling of cracks using SBR latex modified Mortar in the
ratio Cement: Sand (1:4) and 5% by weight of cement.
Applying two coats of 2 component polymer modified cementitious coating of tensile strength of 1.0
N/Sq.mm as per ASTM D 412, elongation of 120% as per ASTM D 412, crack bridging of 2mm as per
ASTM C836, Shore A hardness of 60 as per ASTM D2240 & resisting 5 bars hydrostatic pressure as per
DIN 1048 applied@ 2kg/sq.mtr all over the the entire horizontal and extended up to 300mm above the
FFL on the vertical surface as per manufacturer's recommendation. Finally sprinkling sand over the third
coat for better adhesion with plaster. The interval between each coat of coating application is 6-8 hrs.
Horizontal protection: Laying slope making and protection with 40mm avg. thick of M20 grade fibrated
screed Curing as per standard procedure
Vertical protection: Applying waterproof plastering with CM 1:4 of thickness 20mm for walls admixed
with integral waterproofing compound @ 200ml/bag of cement Sealing of Pipe cut outs/Bore Packing
Supplying & sealing the Sanitary pipe inserts, provided in the floor & walls with double sided bituminous
tape and supplying & grouting the gaps around the pipe inserts with non-shrink free flow grout.
The waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10 years of complete
system guarantee against leakage.

Technical properties of acrylic cementitious coating-

Property Test Standard Results
Tensile strength ASTM D412 1.0 N/Sq.mm
Elongation at break ASTM D412 120 % minimum
Crack bridging ASTM D 836 NO cracking upto 2mm
Adhesion strength ASTM D 4541 0.8 N/sq.mm Minimum
Hardness, Shore A ASTM D 2240 60

Water penetration (5 DIN1048 Pass

bar pressure)

METHOD OF APPLICATION
1. Clean the surface free of dirt, dust, laitance, etc. and inspect for cracks.
2. Removal of all surface Imperfections, protrusions, loose concrete & filling of cracks using SBR latex
Polymer Modified Mortar in the ratio Cement: Sand (1:4) and 5% by weight of cement.
3. Laying of angle fillets (50mm x 50mm) at the junction of slab & vertical walls prepared with cement sand
mortar 1:4 admixed with integral waterproofing compound @ 200 ml per 50 kg bag of cement.
19
132
 4. Supplying & sealing the Sanitary pipe inserts, provided in the floor & walls with double sided bituminous
tape and supplying & grouting the gaps around the pipe inserts with non-shrink free flow grout.
5. Whilst damp, but free of standing water, apply Acrylic cementitious coating to the clean and saturated
surface maintaining a coverage of 2kg/sq.mtr in two coats.
6. The coating shall be done on the entire horizontal area and shall be continued to vertical areas up to
300mm above FFL, followed by sprinkling of sand on the vertical surface.
7. Horizontal protection: Laying slope making and protection with 40mm avg. thick of M20 grade fibrated
screed Curing as per standard procedure.
8. Vertical protection: Applying waterproof plastering with CM 1:4 of thickness 20mm for walls admixed
with integral waterproofing compound @ 200ml/bag of cement.

(e) TERRACES / ROOF SLABS WITH INSULATION

Repairing cracks by cutting & making V groove in 25x25 mm, with polymer modified mortar, filling the
groove with CM (1:3) mixed with polymer @10% by weight of cement.
Providing and applying a base coat of two component instant setting 100% solids spray applied hybrid
polyurea waterproofing coating having excellent tensile strength of 15MPa and elongation of >400% (as
per ASTM D 412), adhesion to concrete of 2MPa (as per ASTM D 4541), puncture resistance of 1000N
(as per ASTM 154) and static crack bridging of up to 2mm (as per ASTM C 836 applied at 1.5 kg/Sqm
at the corners above the mother slab for a length of 150mm horizontally and 150mm vertically.
Spray applying an average 65 mm thick polyurethane foam(to achieve a U value of 0.33 W/m2 °k )with
a core density of 45-50 kg /m3, thermal conductivity of 0.023 W/m.k at 25°C mean temperature (as per
ASTM C518/91), tensile strength of >400kPa (as per ASTM D 1623), compressive strength with rise
of >300kPa (as per ASTM D-1621), closed cell content having apparent vol of 96-98% (as per ASTM D
2856) and fire resistance property conforming to Class B2 as per DIN 4102.
Over the entire polyurethane foam, supplying and applying two component instant setting 100% solids
spray applied hybrid polyurea waterproofing coating having excellent tensile strength of 15MPa and
elongation of >400% (as per ASTM D 412), adhesion to concrete of 2MPa (as per ASTM D 4541),
puncture resistance of 1000N (as per ASTM 154) and static crack bridging of up to 2mm (as per ASTM
C 836) applied @1.5 kg/Sqm.
Supplying & laying 150 gsm Geotextile (non-woven polyester) over the entire membrane maintaining
proper overlaps.
Applying avg of 75 mm thick M20 fibrated grade concrete screed including control joints of 3M X 4M
size, making angle fillet of 50mmX50mm using M20 grade concrete at the corners. Exposed filler boards
shall be cut by mechanical means and filling the groove with Polysulphide Sealant. The width of sealant
fill shall not exceed 10mm
Termination: Supplying and applying aluminum strip flashing with fasteners at the top and sealing the
joints with PS sealant. The waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10
years of system guarantee against leakages.

Technical Details of Two component spray applied Polyurethane Foam

Properties Value Test Method
3
Core Density (Kg/m ) 45 - 50 ASTM D-1622
Closed cell content 96-98% ASTM D 2856
Tensile Strength(KPa) 400 ASTM D 1623
Compressive Strength with rise (KPa) 300 ASTM D-1621
Initial Thermal Conductivity @ 25⁰C (W/m.k) 0.023 ASTM C - 518 / 91
Fire Resistance Class B2 DIN 4102

Technical properties of two component Hybrid Polyurea Coating

20
133
 Properties Value Test Method
Elongation to break 400% ASTM D412
Tensile Strength 15 MPa ASTM D412
Solid Content 100 % ASTM D2369
Adhesion to concrete 2 Mpa ASTM D4541
Puncture Resistance 1000 N ASTM C154
Static Crack Bridging 2 mm ASTM D 836

METHOD OF APPLICATION:

 The roof area shall be cleaned using a compressed air system, to ensure that the substrate is free from dust,
laitance, debris, etc.
 Laying of angle fillets (50mm x 50mm) at the junction of slab & vertical walls prepared with cement sand
mortar 1:4 admixed with integral waterproofing compound @ 200 ml per 50 kg bag of cement.
 Supplying and applying a base coat of two component hybrid polyurea waterproofing coating at the
corners above the mother slab. The coating shall be applied at 150mm horizontal and 150mm vertical.
 Sprinkling fine sand over the waterproofing coating as a bonding agent to the two-component spray
applied foam.
 Spray applying 65mm thick two component polyurethane foam having high density 45-50kg/cum, the
foam shall be sprayed on the entire horizontal surface and extended up to 40mm on the vertical parapet
wall
 Over the entire two component spray applied polyurethane foam, suppling and applying two component
hybrid polyurea based waterproofing coating applied @1.5 kg/sqm.
 Supplying and laying 150gsm geo textile over the entire membrane with proper overlaps.
 A filler board of 10mm thickness for construction joints shall be placed vertically to form a rectangular
bay not exceed 12m2
 Laying avg 75 mm thick M20 fibrated grade concrete screed including control joints of 3M X 4M size all
around on the roof, at the parapet wall junction. Making angle fillet of 50 mm X 50 mm shall be applied
with concrete screed
 Exposed filler boards shall be cut by mechanical means and the same shall be filled with two-part
elastomeric polysulphide sealant.
 Curing of the concrete screed & angle fillet shall be done as per regular concrete curing practices.
 Termination: Termination the system on the vertical surface of the parapet wall 300 mm above the screed
using aluminium flash striping with fasteners at the top and sealing the joints with two-part elastomeric
polysulphide sealant.

(f) TERRACES / ROOF SLABS WITHOUT INSULATION

The system includes base preparation of cleaning, brushing and removal of flacky materials, grouting the
porous area with cementitious grout, proper coving between slab and wall junctions and priming the
surface with two component solvent free epoxy primer @250g/sqm, followed by sprinkling liberal oven-
dried quartz sand over the primer while it is still wet, to provide key for subsequent waterproofing coating.
Providing and applying two component instant setting 100% solids spray applied hybrid polyurea
waterproofing coating having excellent tensile strength of 15MPa and elongation of >400% (as per
ASTM D 412), adhesion to concrete of 2MPa (as per ASTM D 4541), puncture resistance of 1000N (as
per ASTM 154) and static crack bridging of up to 2mm (as per ASTM C 836). The coating shall be
applied @1.6 Kg/sqm to achieve a total DFT of 1.5 mm and shall be applied on the entire horizontal and
shall be terminated at 300mm on the parapet wall, including reinforcing the coating with 45gsm glass
fibre mesh at all corners and change in directions as per the manufacturer's recommendation. Providing &
laying 150 gsm geotextile layer over the Pu coating.
Horizontal Protection: Supplying and applying an avg of 75mm thick M20 fibrated grade concrete screed
including saw cutting (approx. 6mm W x 30mm D) at 3MX4M panels, making angle fillet of
50mmX50mm using M20 grade concrete at the corners and filling the groove with PU sealant.
Vertical protection: Supplying and applying 15mm thick polymeric waterproof plastering @ 0.2litre/bag

21
134
 of cement with CM 1:4 for the vertical surface.
The waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10 years of complete
system guarantee against leakage

Technical properties of two component Hybrid Polyurea Coating

Elongation to break ASTM D412 400%
Tensile Strength ASTM D412 15 MPa
Solid Content ASTM D2369 100 %
Adhesion to concrete ASTM D4541 2 Mpa
Puncture Resistance ASTM C154 1000 N
Static Crack Bridging ASTM D 836 2 mm

METHOD OF APPLICATION
 Clean the surface free from dirt, laitance etc.
 Injection grouting (cementitious grouting) at all construction joints & weaker sections @ 1m C/C through
the PVC nipples using cement slurry mixed with expansive plasticizing admixture @225gms per bag of
cement.
 Apply Epoxy Primer on cleaned & leveled surface @ 250 grams/sq.mtr. The priming will enhance the
adhesion of the membrane to the substrate. Allow the primer to cure according its technical instruction.
 Spray applies two component hybrid polyurea coating on to the primed surface until the full area is
covered. The coating shall be applied @1.6Kg/sqm to achieve a total DFT of 1.5 mm and shall be applied
on the entire horizontal and shall be terminated at 300mm on the parapet wall.
 Laying of geotextile membrane over the cured coating to protect it from any damages before protecting
the same by concrete screed.
 Horizontal protection: Supplying and laying slope making and protection with 75mm avg. thick of M20
grade fibrated screed including saw cutting (approx. 6mm W x 10mm D) at 3MX4M panels and filling
the grove with PU sealant. Curing as per standard practice.

 Vertical protection: Supplying and applying waterproof plastering with CM 1:4 of thickness 20 mm for
walls admixed with integral waterproofing compound @ 200ml/bag of cement
 Termination: Termination the system on the vertical surface of the parapet wall 300 mm above the screed
using aluminium flash striping with fasteners at the top and sealing the joints with two-part elastomeric
oxysulphide sealant.

(g) WATER TANKS (OH&UG/STP)

Cleaning the internal surface areas thoroughly so that they are free of all contaminants like dirt and
laitance & to remove all the loose materials by various mechanical means. Removal of all surface
imperfections, protrusions, loose concrete & filling of cracks using SBR latex modified Mortar in the
ratio Cement: Sand (1:4) and 5% by weight of cement.
Providing & grouting at construction joints with cementitious grout into each nozzle (1 mtr c/c) at regular
intervals as per the requirements.
Applying 3 coats of 2 component polymer modified cementitious coating of tensile strength of 1.0
N/Sq.mm as per ASTM D 412, elongation of 120% as per ASTM D 412, crack bridging of 2mm as per
ASTM C836, Shore A hardness of 60 as per ASTM D2240 & resisting 5 bars hydrostatic pressure as per
DIN 1048 applied@ 3kg/sq.mtr all over the slab including the angular fillets and extendable over the
vertical walls, grouting the annular space between the pipe and concrete with hydro-swelling gasket in
paste form encapsulating with prepacked non-shrink grout. Finally sprinkling sand over the third coat for
better adhesion with plaster. The interval between each coat of coating application is 6-8 hrs. The
waterproofing system should be applied directly by the manufacturer with 10 years of system guarantee
against leakages.
Providing and applying 15-20 mm thick CM 1:4 for plastering admixed with integral waterproofing
compound admixed @ 0.2litre/bag of cement as per manufacturer's specifications including curing etc.
22
135
 Additional for potable water tanks-Over the plaster providing & applying two coats of antibacterial
antifungal food grade epoxy coating at a consumption of @250/Gms/sq.mtr as per CFTRI 21 CFR 175 -
300 of US - FDA, Water absorption nil as per ASTMC 870:90, adhesion strength of 2.5 N/mm2 as per
ASTM D4541:02 applied with an interval of 6-8 hrs between each coat over the cured plastered surface
as per manufacturer’s instruction.
Additional for STP tanks-Over the plaster providing & applying 2 coats of Coal Tar Epoxy at a
consumption of @500/Gms/sq.mtr with Bonding / adhesion of 1.2 to 1.4 N/mm2 as per ASTM D 4541,
Water resistance, immersion – 7 days passes as per ASTM D 870-09, Chemical resistance, immersion in
dilute acid alkali & salt solutions – 7 days -Passes as per ASTM 868 as per manufacturer's instruction

Technical properties of acrylic cementitious coating-

Property Test Standard Results
Tensile strength ASTM D412 1.0 N/Sq.mm
Elongation at break ASTM D412 120 % minimum
Crack bridging ASTM D 836 NO cracking upto 2mm

Adhesion strength ASTM D 4541 0.8 N/sq.mm Minimum

Hardness, Shore A ASTM D 2240 60

Water penetration (5 DIN1048 Pass

bar pressure)

Food grade epoxy coating for potable water tanks

Providing & applying two coats antibacterial antifungal food grade coating with an interval of 6-8 hrs
between each coat over the cured plastered surface as per manufacturer’s instruction

The Food grade epoxy coating shall have following typical properties:
Property Test Standard Results
Nature Two components
Mixing ratio, By weight (Base: 1:1:1
Hardener: Water)

Adhesion strength ASTM D 4541 2.5 N/sq.mm

Food grade certification CFTRI as per 21 CFR Passes
175 - 300 of
US - FDA

STP Tanks-Coal Tar Epoxy Coating

Providing & laying 2 component Coal Tar Epoxy in two coats at a consumption of 3-4 sq.mtr/Kg for 2 coats
@ 250-300-micron DFT as complete as per manufacturer's instructions.

Property Test Standard Results

Bonding / adhesion, N/MM2 ASTM : D 4541 1.2 - 1.4
Flexibility, Mandrel test ASTM : D 522 - 93 No cracking of film
Chemical resistance, immersion ASTM : C 868 Passes
in dilute acid alkali & salt
solutions – 7 days

METHOD OF APPLICATION
 Ensure a properly clean, sound & leveled substrate, as they should be free from oil, grease, dust & debris.
Ensure that the moisture content is less than 10%.
 Make surface smooth, even & free from local depressions with sand –cement mortar modified with SBR
23
136
 latex and cure it for minimum 3 days.
 The slurry to be grouted is prepared as per the mixing instructions with non-shrink compound for
cementitious grout. Carry out injection grouting either by gravity or with grouting pump using the mixed
material. Allow it to cure for at least 24 hrs.
 Providing and laying Gola of 50X50mm thickness all along the angular joints of wall and slab with
cement mortar of mix 1:4 admixed with waterproofing compound
 Clean the surface again thoroughly to make free from dirt, dust laitance’s etc. and saturate the cleaned
concrete surface with ample amount of water.
 Apply first coat of acrylic coating on all the surfaces as per instructions & cure it for 6-8 Hrs.
 Apply the second coat of Acrylic cementitious coating over the properly cured first coat and let the
complete treatment air cure for 7 days and so on for the third coat.
 Provide a protection layer over the waterproofing treatment with a 15-20mm sand cement plaster
admixed with integral waterproofing compound as per instructions & cure it for 7 days.
 Mix the components of food grade coating as per the instructions given & apply two coats on all the
plastered surfaces by brush with an interval of 6-8 hrs between each coat.

(h) Water Proofing Treatment (Pre-Construction) by Chemical Injection System Horizontal Surface
(Raft Slab)
Before the raft reinforcement is placed in position:
a) Laying PCC as per drawings and specifications.
b) Cement slurry (cement and approved water proofing compound) is spread on the PCC for proper
bonding with subsequent water proofing treatment.
c) Water Proofing Course of 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mixed with
approved water proofing compound is laid over the slurry. Stone aggregates 12mm down is
embedded at random.
d) After 24 hours, spreading cement slurry (cement and approved water proofing compound) on the 1st
layer of mortar.
e) Providing and laying 2nd layer of 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mixed
with approved water proofing compound. Stone aggregate 12mm down size is embedded at random.

After reinforcement of raft is placed in position:

a) Providing and fixing 25mm dia GI threaded grouting nozzles of adequate length at the specified
locations @ 1.50 metres c/c or as shown in the drawing all over the slab. The grouting nozzles are
tied with reinforcement in such a manner as not to choke its end during concrete operations. The top
of these nozzles protrudes above the raft concrete.
b) After minimum 7 days of concreting, cement grout of cement and approved water proofing
compound (non-shrinkage grouting compound) in proportion as specified is injected, through these
nozzles at the pressure of 2.5 to 3.0 Kg/Sq.cm.
c) After grouting, top of the nozzles is cut and the space is filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2
coarse sand) mixed with approved water proofing compound.
Retaining Wall
a) The external surface is prepared and approved cement slurry is applied.
b) Providing and laying 25mm thick cement mortar in 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mixed with approved
water proofing compound in two layers with chicken wire mesh 26 or 24-gauge 25mm size in between
the two layers.
c) The G.I. pipes are placed at 1.5m c/c in both directions, and, 0.75 m C/C along construction joints and
securely fastened to the reinforcement prior to shuttering and concreting or alternately by drilling holes
(25mm to 32mm dia) in the concrete upto a depth as shown in the drawing all over the wall surface @
1.50mt. C/C and as shown in the drawing. Treatment along all construction joints by providing nozzles,
as above, shall also be executed.
d) Fixing 25mm dia G.I. threaded nozzles in these holes with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand)
mixed with water proofing compound.
e) Injecting cement grout of cement and polymer-based water proofing compound (non-shrinkage grouting
compound) in proportion as specified in these nozzles at a pressure of 2.5 to 3.0 Kg/Sq.cm.
24
137
 f) After the grout the nozzles are cut and filled with cement mortar 1:2 mixed with polymer-based water
proofing compound in proportion as specified and finished smooth.

Note: The proportion of approved water proofing compound to be used in respect of ordinary cement shall be as
per manufacturer’s specifications.

Guarantee for water proofing:

Work to be get executed through an approved specialized agency & covered by 10 years guarantee by the
main contractor against leakage, seepage and dampness etc. for which necessary performance guarantee
for requisite indicated value of work shall be furnished by the contractor before completion.

Integral Cement Based Water Proofing Treatment for Roof /Sunken Floors of W.C`S etc.
a. The proprietary water proofing compound shall conform to I.S.2645 – 1975 in cement-based water
proofing treatment, stone aggregate shall be used instead of brick aggregate without any extra cost
wherever required by the Engineer in – charge.
b. The finished surface after water proofing treatment shall have required slope.
c. While treatment of sunken floors is done it shall be ensured that the ‘S’ or ‘P’ traps as the case may be
have been fixed / eased and rounded off properly the work shall be carried out as per relevant CPWD
specifications.
d. GURANTEE: The above water proofing, treatment shall be guaranteed for TEN YEARS against any
leakage etc. the contractor shall have to execute a bond, 10 % of cost of items executed for water
proofing shall be retained for 10 years as security (Refer GCC provisions).

(i) Water Proofing Treatment Integral Crystalline Waterproofing Materials

Integral Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture
i. Materials
Integral Crystalline Admix is one-part cementitious powder consisting of hydrophilic chemicals such as
Portland cement, very fine treated silica sand and various active, proprietary chemicals. These active
chemicals react with the moisture in fresh concrete with the by-products of cement hydration to cause a
catalytic reaction, which generates a non-soluble crystalline formation throughout the pores and capillary
tracts of the concrete. Thus, the concrete becomes permanently sealed against the penetration of water or
liquids from any direction. The concrete is also protected from deterioration due to harsh environmental
conditions.
ii. Technical Specification/Parameters
The integral crystalline waterproofing admixture shall confirm to the following requirements:
a. At the manufacturers recommended dosage,
i. Material must fulfil the requirements of American concrete institute guidelines ACI-212-3R-10, the
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic pressure of
72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V. Reduction of water
penetration should be 50 to 90%.
ii. The performance of the crystalline admixture must not be restricted by water/cement ratio of the concrete
mix. In other words, the crystalline admixture must perform at any water / cement ratio of the concrete
mix.
b. The product has no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998. The
maximum chloride content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
c. The integral crystalline admixture must be compatible with any other concrete admixture confirming to
ASTM D494 and IS 9103.
d. It will not be affected by wear abrasion of the treated concrete surface and crystalline treated concrete
shall not require protection layer.
e. The recommended crystalline admixture shall be non-toxic and shall confirm to NSF 61 USA.
Note - The manufacturer shall produce relevant test certificates as per relevant code as stated above.

iii. Recommended Uses: - In locations such as Foundations / Rafts, Sewage and Water Treatment Plants,
Parking Structures Basement Retaining Walls etc.

25
138
 iv. Direction for use
a. Dosage - 0.80% by weight of cement content per cubic meter of reinforced concrete.
v. Preparation of mixing
Mix integral crystalline admixture with water to form a very thin slurry (e.g., 40 lbs (18 kg) of powder
mixed with 6 gallons (22.7 ltr) of water). Pour the required amount of material into the drum of the ready-
mix truck and mix for at least 5 minutes to ensure even distribution of integral crystalline admixture
throughout the concrete.
vi. Application
Concrete treated with integral crystalline admixture should be placed and finished in accordance with
good concrete practices. ACI guidelines and recommendations should be observed.
vii. Precaution / Special Consideration
It is important to obtain a homogeneous mixture of crystalline admixture with the concrete. Therefore, do
not add dry crystalline admixture powder directly to wet concrete as this may cause clumping and
through dispersion will not occur.
When incorporating integral crystalline admixture, the temperature of the concrete mix should be above
40ºF (4ºC).
viii. Storage / Shelf life
Integral crystalline admixture must be stored dry at a minimum temperature of 45ºF (7ºC) and its shelf
life is one year when stored under proper conditions.

Integral Crystalline Slurry

i. Materials
Integral crystalline slurry is a surface-applied, integral crystalline waterproofing material, which
waterproofs and protects concrete in-depth. It consists of Portland cement, specially treated quartz sand
and a compound of active chemicals. Integral crystalline slurry needs only to be mixed with water prior to
application. When Integral crystalline slurry is applied to a concrete surface, the active chemicals react
with moisture and the by-products of cement hydration to cause a catalytic reaction which generates an
insoluble, crystalline structure. These crystals fill the pores and minor shrinkage cracks in the concrete to
prevent any further water ingress (even under pressure). However, Integral crystalline slurry will still
allow the passage of vapour through the structure (i.e. the concrete will be able to “breathe”). Even after
the concrete has cured, Integral crystalline slurry remains dormant in the concrete and will reactivate in
the presence of moisture to seal capillary tracts and hairline cracks. In addition to waterproofing the
structure, Integral crystalline slurry protects concrete against seawater, wastewater, aggressive ground
water and many other aggressive chemical solutions. Integral crystalline slurry is approved for use in
contact with potable water, and is therefore suitable for use in water storage tanks, reservoirs, water
treatment plants, etc. Integral crystalline slurry is not a decorative material.

ii. Technical Specification/Parameters

a. Material must fulfil the requirements of American concrete institute guidelines ACI-212-3R-10, the
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic pressure of
72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V. Reduction of water
penetration should be 50 to 90%.
b. Potable Water Compatibility: Nontoxic and suitable for use in potable water facilities – NSF Listed as per
ANSI 61 listing.
c. Confirm to EN 1504-3 (For structural repairs – R3, Compressive strength > 25 Mpa), supplied from an
approved manufacturing unit having CE approval conforming to EN 1504-3-R3.
d. The product has no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998. The
maximum chloride content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
Note - The manufacturer shall produce relevant test certificates as per relevant code as stated above.

iii. Recommended Uses: - In locations such as Foundations / Rafts, Sewage and Water Treatment Plants,
Parking Structures Basement Retaining Walls etc.

iv. Surface Preparation

26
139
 All concrete to be treated with Integral crystalline slurry must be clean and have an “open” capillary
surface. Remove laitance, dirt, grease, etc. by means of high-pressure water jetting, wet sandblasting or
wire brushing. Faulty concrete in the form of cracks, honeycombing, etc. must be chased out, treated with
Integral crystalline slurry and filled flush with crystalline mortar. Surfaces must be carefully rewatered
prior to the Integral crystalline slurry application. The concrete surface must be damp but with no wet
sheen on the surface.
v. Preparation of Material
Integral crystalline slurry is mechanically mixed with clean water to a creamy consistency or that
resembling thick oil. Mix only as much material as can be used within 20 minutes and stir mixture
frequently. If the mixture starts to set do not add more water, simply re-stir to restore workability.
vi. Mixing ratios
Application Vertical Surfaces Horizontal Surfaces
Brush 5 parts integral crystalline 3 parts integral crystalline
Application slurry to 2 parts water slurry to 1 part water
Spray 5 parts integral crystalline
Application slurry to 2.75-3.25 parts water

vii. Application
Crystalline slurry is prepared by mixing 1.00 kg of crystalline slurry with 400 ml of water and applying
the same from internal side with the help of synthetic fiber brush @0.70kg per sqm per coat in two coats
after cleaning the entire concrete surface thoroughly with high pressure water jet / wire brush or by
mechanical means to make it free from loose particles, dust and dirt etc. and making the surface saturated
with water before application of crystalline slurry. Second coat shall be applied within 4-6 hours of first
coat.
Apply integral crystalline slurry in two coats by masonry brush or appropriate power spray equipment.
The second coat is applied while the first coat is still “green”.
viii. Application Rates
For vertical surface - Two slurry coats of Integral crystalline slurry at 0.70 kg per sqm per coat for
horizontal surface – One slurry coat of Integral crystalline slurry at 1.10 kg per sqm.
ix. Post Treatment
The treated areas shall be kept damp for a period of five days and be protected against direct sun, wind
and frost, by covering with polyethylene sheeting, damp burlap or similar.
x. Precaution / Special Consideration
Do not apply Integral crystalline slurry at temperatures at or below freezing or to froze or freezing
surfaces. Integral crystalline slurry cannot be used as an additive to concrete or plasters. (Integral
crystalline admixture should be considered for these applications).
xi. Storage / Shelf Life
When properly stored in a dry place in unopened and undamaged original packaging its shelf life is 12
months.

Integral Crystalline Dry-Shake

i. Materials
Integral crystalline dry shake of hydrophilic in nature is a unique chemical treatment material for the
waterproofing and protection of concrete. Integral crystalline dry shake has been specially formulated for
dry-shake applications on horizontal concrete surfaces where greater impact and abrasion resistance is
required. Packaged in the form of a dry powder compound, Integral crystalline dry shake consists of
Portland cement, various active proprietary chemicals, and a synthetic aggregate hardener that has been
crushed and graded to particle sizes suitable for concrete floors. Integral crystalline dry shake becomes an
integral part of the concrete surface, thereby eliminating problems normally associated with coatings (e.g.
scaling, dusting, flaking and delamination). The active chemicals react with the moisture in the fresh
concrete causing a catalytic reaction, which generates a non-soluble crystalline formation within the pores
and capillary tracts of the concrete.

ii. Technical Specification/Parameters

27
140
 a. Material must fulfil the requirements of American concrete institute guidelines ACI-212-3R-10, the
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic pressure of
72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V. Reduction of water
penetration should be 50 to 90%.
b. Potable Water Compatibility: Nontoxic and suitable for use in potable water facilities – NSF Listed as per
ANSI 61 listing.
c. Confirm to EN 1504-3 (For structural repairs – R3, Compressive strength > 25 Mpa), supplied from an
approved manufacturing unit having CE approval conforming to EN 1504-3-R3.
d. The product has no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998. The
maximum chloride content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
iii. Recommended Uses: -
Raft / Foundation Slabs, Below-grade Structures Sewage and Water Treatment Plants Traffic Bearing
Surfaces Warehouse Floors Parking Structures etc.

iv. Directions for Application

a. Application Rates
Under normal conditions, the coverage rate for Integral crystalline dry shake is 0.60 kg per sqm
depending on the degree of abrasion resistance required.
b. Application Procedure
Integral crystalline dry shake is to be sprinkled @ 0.60 kg per sqm over the PCC blinding, after fixing the
reinforcement bars on the cured PCC so as to achieve positive side waterproofing below the raft concrete,
as per the manufacture’s specification.
c. Curing
Curing is important and shall begin as soon as final set has occurred but before surface starts to dry.
Conventional moist curing procedures such as water spray, wet burlap or plastic covers may be used.
Curing shall continue for at least 48 hours.
v. Precaution / Special Consideration
For the best results when applying dry shake materials, the air content of the concrete shall not exceed
3% (a high air content can make it difficult to achieve a proper application).
In hot, dry, or windy conditions, it is advisable to use an evaporation retardant on the fresh concrete
surface to prevent premature drying of the slab.
Chronic moving cracks or joints will require a suitable flexible sealant.
vi. Storage / Shelf Life
Integral crystalline dry shake must be stored dry at a minimum temperature of 45ºF (7ºC) and its shelf life
is one year when stored under proper conditions.

(j) Lift Pit Waterproofing

(i) Applying Waterproofing Treatment with Membrane Type Waterproofing method in box-type
fashion, to Lift Pit Base Slab and Wall using SBS polymer modified self-adhesive bituminous
membrane of approved makes of minimum 1.6mm thick based with UV resistant, ground
chemical resistant, high temperature resistance, flexible and elastic with high adhesive strength.
The membrane shall be include HDPE Laminate with 250% elasticity and must be self-
adhesive application with overlap of 100 mm wherever required. The Laminate provided shall be
able to withstand the traffic flow density; scope includes grouting the construction joints, cracks,
honeycombs, etc. The works shall be complete as per manufacturer specification and directed by
the Engineer.
(ii) Protective Coat to Water Proofing System: Applying cement sand (1:4) screed 20mm thick with
integral waterproofing compound as Protective Layer over the waterproofed surface as per
specification and as directed by the Engineer. Fixing of specified and approved Polystyrene
Board over the as Protective Layer over the waterproofed wall surface as per manufacturer
specification and as directed by the Engineer.

(k) Roof Finishes

28
141
(i) Solar Reflective Paint
Roofs provided with high reflective coatings remains cooler than those with low reflectance
surfaces and are known as cool roofs. Cool roofs can reduce the building heat gain and can save
the summer time air conditioning expenditures, with excellent crack bridging capabilities that
can accommodate movements due to thermal variations, these paints should have Solar reflective
Index of min. 99 as per ASTM E1980, elongation of minimum 100%, solid content minimum
55% & Adhesion strength/tensile strength of minimum 1 N/mm2.
(l) Expansion Joints (wherever applicable)
Providing and laying waterproofing of expansion joint, as per specifications herein with a
minimum guarantee period of 10 years: The first part consisting of providing and fixing the
polyethylene backer, then wire-brushing the internal sides of the concrete where the sealant is to
be applied. Also, wire-brushing is to be done on the top surface of the concrete up to 200mm
on either side of the expansion joint. The second part consists of providing and fixing the
polyethylene backer sheet into the expansion joint leaving specified depth from the top of the
slab. The third part consists of providing and applying Polyurethane primer coating onto the sides
of the expansion joint up to the specified depth from top of the slab. The fourth part consists of
providing and filling Polyurethane sealant (for width up to 25mm) or Polysulphide sealants (for
width up to 50mm) having elongation of minimum 400% into the slot up to the surface of the
slab. Joints greater than 25mm shall be sealed of expansion joints with 1mm thick flexible
polyolefin tape to be sandwiched between layers of epoxy. PU sealants shall not be used above
joints more than 25mm.
(m) External wall Protection cum waterproofing coating (Paint)
Providing and laying single component acrylic waterproofing cum ant carbonation protection
coating in external wall over concrete. Protection coating shall be high build, crack bridging with
thickness of 200 microns, UV stable, shall offer elongation of 150%.
First part consists of substrate preparation which includes cleaning the surface, removing all stages
of formwork, release agent, grease, efflorescence, laitance, algae or other contaminant that may
prevent proper adhesion. Remove organic materials by scraping, brushing or high- pressure water
cleaning and on some rough rendered or dashed surface, it is advantageous to use fairing mortar to
close the surface, thus preventing the possibility of pinholes occurring. Cracks wider than hairline
should be patched using butyl tape. Second part shall consist of priming the surface with acrylic
primer or curing membrane to be applied in plastered and concrete substrate. Third part shall consist
of application of 200 microns coating using nap roller or airless spray.
(n) Concrete Paint Sealer
The product should be a coloured glaze that is water-repellent, oil-repellent and stain-resistant. It
should be formulated with an acrylic resin and water-borne fluorinated acrylic copolymer with UV-
stable mineral pigments. It should allow the substrate to breathe up to 90%. The product should be
LEED certified with low VOC content.
Opacity and colours to be validated by the architect, according to the manufacturer's standard colour
chart, RAL reference or other colour charts.

5.6 Paint Works

The provision of the latest revisions of the following IS: Codes shall form a part of this specification.
IS: 63 Whiting for Paints Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for Enamels, for use over primers.
IS: 426 Specification for paste filler for colour coats.
IS: 428 Specification for Distemper, Oil Emulsion, and colour as required. IS: 710 Marine Plywood
IS: 1200 (Part XIII) Method of Measurement of Building and Civil Engg Works - White Washing,
colour washing, distempering and other finishes. IS: 1477 (Part 1) Code of practice for painting of
ferrous metals in buildings Pre-treatment IS: 1477 (Part 11) Code of practice for finishing of
ferrous metals in buildings. Painting IS: 2338 (Part 1) Code of practice for finishing of wood and
wood-based materials Operations and workmanship for finishing IS: 2338 (Part 11): Code of
practice for finishing of wood and wood-based materials IS: 2395 (Part 1): Code of practice for
painting concrete masonry and plaster surfaces. Operation and workmanship IS: 2395 (Part 11)
Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces IS: 159 Specification for
29
142
 ready mixed paint, brushing, acid resistant IS: 2524 (Part 1) Code of practice for painting of non-
ferrous metal in buildings Pre-treatment IS: 2524 (Part ll) Code of practice for painting of non-
ferrous metal in buildings Painting IS: 5410 Specification for cement paints, colour as required
Other IS Codes not specifically mentioned here but pertaining to painting form part of these
specifications. All paint work including materials, preparation, workmanship and application
procedures to follow CPWD specifications.

5.6.1 Plastic Emulsion Paint

The plastic emulsion Paint is not suitable for application on external, wood and iron surface and
surfaces which are liable to heavy condensation. These Paints are to be used on internal surfaces
except wooden and steel. Plastic Emulsion Paint as per IS 5411 of approved brand and
manufacture and of the required shade shall be used.
Painting on New Surface
i) The wall surface shall be prepared as specified in 13.23.3
ii) Application: The number of coats shall be as stipulated in the item. The Paint will be applied in
the usual manner with brush, spray or roller. The Paint dries by evaporation of the water content
and as soon as the water has evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat can be applied. The
time of drying varies from one hour on absorbent surfaces to 2 to 3 hours on nonabsorbent
surfaces. The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. Thinning
with water will be particularly required for the under coat which is applied on the absorbent
surface. The quantity of water to be added shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. The
surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary, more coats will be
applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance.
Precautions
(a) Old brushes if they are to be used with emulsion Paints, should be completely dried of turpentine or
oil Paints by washing in warm soap water. Brushes should be quickly washed in water immediately
after use and kept immersed inwater during break periods to prevent the Paint from hardening on the
brush.
(b) In the preparation of wall for plastic emulsion painting, no oil base putties shall be used in filling
cracks, holes etc.
(c) Splashes on floors etc. shall be cleaned out without delay as they will be difficult to remove after
hardening.
(d) Washing of surfaces treated with emulsion Paints shall not be done within 3 to 4 weeks of
application.
5.6.2 Epoxy Paint
Material
This product has got excellent adhesion properties and offers a balanced aesthetic and corrosion
protective surface. Epoxy offers good resistance to water and humidity. Epoxy coating are used
because of their outstanding chemical resistance, durability, low porosity and strong bond
strength and it provides dry tough and protective coatings. Epoxy coatings are created, by
chemical reaction using an epoxide resin and polymine hardener.
Painting new surface
Surface must be dried, cleaned & made free from oil, grease, dirt, dust & all other
contaminants that could interfere with adhesion of coating.
Application
The application of priming coat for relevant steel or cement surface shall be as per the
description of para no. 13.24. Epoxy paint is supplied in two parts i.e. (base and hardener). Stir
the base and hardener separately. Mix hardener gradually into the base under continuous stirring
as premixing ratio as specified by the manufacturers. The epoxy paint shall be consumed with
in the working pot life as specified by the manufacturers. Part mixing should be avoided. To
achieve optimum performance of the product, minimum 2-3 coats by brushing would be
required to get the desired dry film thickness (DFT) as specified by the manufacturer. Relative
humidity in the environment should preferably be below 85%.
Cleaning
All equipment’s/apparatus shall be cleaned immediately after use with thinner especially the
30
143
 hose pipes, gun, all spray equipment’s etc. All surplus material should be disposed of in
compliance with environmental pollution rules etc.
General Safety
Contact of the product with skin specially with eyes should be avoided. Use of face mask is
mandatory during whole process. Proper ventilation is required and all safety procedures and
precautions are to be adopted for executing epoxy painting process.

5.6.3 Enamel Paint

Synthetic Enamel Paint (conforming to IS 2933) of approved brand and manufacture and of the
required colour shall be used for the top coat and an undercoat of ordinary Paint of shade to
match the top coat as recommended by the same manufacturer as far the top coat shall be used.

Painting on New Surface – Surface preparation

Wooden Surface : The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with
sand paper and shall be well dusted. Knots, if any shall be covered with preparation of red lead
made by grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot. Appropriate
filler material conforming to IS 345 with same shade as Paint shall be used where specified. The
surface treated for knotting shall be dry before Paint is applied. After obtaining approval of
Engineer-in-Charge for wood work, the priming coat shall be applied before the wood work is
fixed in position. After the priming coat is applied, the holes and indentation on the surface
shall be stopped with glazier’s putty
or wood putty. Stopping shall not be done before the priming.
Iron & Steel Surface : All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing
with steel wire brushes. Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling
which becomes loose by rusting, shall be removed. All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped
away from the surface. If the surface is wet, it shall be dried before priming coat is undertaken

Plastered Surface : The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried completely.
Trial patches of primer shall be laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall
then be taken in hand. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations, shall be filled up with
plaster of paris and rubbed smooth.

Application : The number of coats including the undercoat shall be as stipulated in the item.
(a) Under Coat : One coat of the specified ordinary Paint of shade suited to the shade of the top
coat, shall be applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest
grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all
loose particles dusted off.
(b) Top Coat : Top coats of synthetic enamel Paint of desired shade shall be applied after the
undercoat is thoroughly dry. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found necessary to
ensure properly uniform glossy surface.

5.6.4 Exterior Grade Acrylic emulsion

Painting the plastered surfeces with 2 coats of Exterior Grade Acrylic emulsion paint of
approved quality and shade, using the required quantity of paint as specified by the
manufacturer to give an even shade including providing 1 coat of cement wash as primer and
watering the surface before applying and curing for the required period, including cost of all
materials labour, conveyance, taxes, royalties, scaffolding, watering, curing, sundries, tools and
plants etc., as per the direction of the Engineer-in-charge.(Painting to all surfaces shall be with
conformity to I.S.2395 (Part – I & Part – II))

5.6.5 Oil bound distemper

Painting the plastered surfaces with 2 coats oil bound distemper paint of approved quality and
shade, using the required quantity of paint as specified by the manufacturer to give an even
shade including providing 1 coat of cement based putty and watering the surface before
31
144
 applying and curing for the required period, including cost of all materials labour, conveyance,
taxes, royalties, scaffolding, watering, curing, sundries, tools and plants etc., as per the direction
of the Engineer-in-charge.(Painting to all surfaces shall be with conformity to I.S.2395 (Part – I
& Part – II))

5.7 Flooring & Cladding Work

5.7.1 Marble/ Granite Stone Flooring

Marble shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture with crystalline texture as far as
possible. It shall generally be uniform in colour and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering.
Stone
It shall be of any colour and size as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Granite shall be plain machine
cut and mirror polished. The stone shall be smooth and of even surface without holes or pits. The
physical properties of the Granite and marble shall be as mentioned in the section 8.3, table 8.2of the
specifications Vol 1, 2019 edition. The sampling and selection of granite or marble shall be as per
the section 8.4 ofspecifications.
Dressing of Slabs
Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the full
depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be fully in contact with it. The top
surface shall also be fine chisel dressed to remove all waviness. In case machine cut slabs are used,
fine chisel dressing of machine cut surface need not be done provided a straight edge laid anywhere
along the machine cut surfaces is in contact with every point on it. The sides and top surface of slabs
shall be machine rubbed or table rubbed with coarse sand before paving. All angles and edges of the
marble slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane.
The thickness of the slabs shall be 18, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description of the item.
Laying
Base concrete shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as given in the description of the item. The average
thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and the thickness at any place under
the slab shall be not less than 12 mm. Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of
each slab, roughly to the average thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean
before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with
the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar shall then be
corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry
of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The
edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with or without
admixture of pigment to match the shade of the marble slabs as given in the description of the item.
The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallettill
it is properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible.
Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on
the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of
seven days.
Fixing of Flooring may also be permitted with Cement Based High Polymer Modified Quick Set
Adhesive (Water Based). The quick set adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) shall be thoroughly
mixed with water and a paste of zero slump shall be prepared so that it can be used within 1.5 to 2
hours. It shall be spread over an area not more than one sqm at one time. Average thickness of
adhesive shall be 9 mm. The adhesive so spread shall be combed using suitable trowel. Stone shall
be pressed firmly in to the position with slight twisting action checking it simultaneously to ensure
good contact gently being tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly backed with adjoining stone.
The stone shall be fixed within 20 minutes of application of adhesive. The surplus adhesive from the
joints, surface of the stone shall be immediately cleaned.

The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-
in-Charge. Joint thickness shall not be more than 1 mm. The surface of the flooring shall be
frequently checked during laying with straight edge of above 2m long so as to attain a true surface
32
145
 with required slope.

Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster
skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without
waviness.
Polishing and Finishing
Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall then be removed by fine chiseling After the
granite work is cured, it shall be rubbed with carborundum stone of different grades no. 60, 120 and
320 in succession or with electrical rubbing machines rubbed with carborundum items 0to 6 nos.in
succession, so as to give a plane true and highly smooth surface. It shall then be cleaned with a
solution of oxalic acid, washed and finished clean

5.7.2 Stone In Risers Of Steps And Skirting

The selection of marble/ granite shall be as per the details given in preceding paragraphs. The
dressing of slabs shall be as specified in section above; however, the thickness of the granite shall be
18mm. the allowable tolerance shall be as per the specifications.
Preparation of Surface
The wall surface shall be cut uniformly to the requisite depth so that the skirting face shall have the
projection from the finished face of wall as shown in drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-
Charge.In no case the skirting should project by more than thickness of stone.

Laying
The risers of steps and skirting shall be in grey cement admixed with pigment to match the shade of
the stone, or cement based High polymer modified quick set adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) as
specified in the description of the item. The line of the slab should be at such a distance from the wall
that the average width of the gap shall be 12 mm and at no place the width shall be less than 10 mm.
The skirting or riser face shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall thus
be left to harden then the rear of the skirting or riser slab shall be packed with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement: 3 coarse sand) or other mix as specified in the description of the item.
The joints shall be as fine as possible but not more than 1 mm. The top line of skirting and risers
shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical, except where otherwise indicated.
The risers and skirting slab shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
Curing, Polishing and Finishing
It shall be as specified in preceding paragraphs as far as applicable, and polishing shall be done only
with hand. The face and top of skirting shall be polished.

5.7.3 Stone Cladding

Preparation for Stone Cladding Work
During the preparation for the stone cladding work the Contractor shall consider the building as a
whole while planning, detailing etc. and not treat any face or part thereof in isolation.
Matching Grains and Colour
All stone shall be sorted for colour and grains before laying. The matching of grains/colour shall be
carried out as approved by the Engineer. No variation of type of grain or colour shall be allowed in
any area.
Design and Pattern
All work shall be laid as per design, detail, pattern, colours, sizes and dimensions given on the
drawings. Any modifications and variations at site shall be reflected in adjustment in design as per
the approval of the Engineer. All junctions, rebates, nosing, corners shall have square, curved or
shaped mounting as desired and as shown on the drawings.
The contractor shall execute different mock ups as instructed by Architects/ EIC for finalization of
samples and patterns.
Service and Other Outlets
Before any work is to be taken up, the sizes and the pattern of stones shall be laid out, together with
the location of electrical, sanitary outlets and those of all other services and approval sought from
33
146
 the Engineer. Thereafter the stones shall be laid out on the floor and wall showing pattern of grain,
etc. and work shall only be carried out after obtaining approval of the Engineer.
Setting out
The Contractor shall set out the stone cladding work so as to achieve the following:
a. Establish a benchmark or datum at each floor level for setting out.
b. Establish a vertical center line in each plain area.
c. Establish the positions of movement joints.
d. Avoid or minimize unsightly cutting.
e. Obtain truly horizontal joint lines.
f. Where openings and other features occur, the work shall be done as per the detailed
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
a. Wet Cladding: Laying, Jointing and Grouting
The requirements given under Specifications shall be referred in conjunction with the requirements
given hereunder. The term laying shall be understood as toinclude bedding where applicable.
Preliminary
The Contractor shall undertake everything necessary to obtain a satisfactory bond between the
backgrounds, backings and finishing / cladding. Such work shall include but not be limited to the
following:
i. Withholding application until curing and drying shrinkage of the structural backgrounds are
achieved.
ii. Fungicidal wash as approved to remove any organic growth.
iii. Removal of any greasy deposits by scrubbing with water and approved detergent.
iv. Final brushing to remove laitance, efflorescence or loose material.
v. Wetting to reduce suction or to obtain uniformity of suction.
vi. On hard smooth surfaces (such as high-grade concrete) or other surfaces presenting an
inadequate key, an adhesive of approved make and brand shall be applied. (“Hack- Aid-Plant”
or “Polyalk EP” of Sunanda Specially Coatings Pvt Ltd. Or approved equivalent). The
adhesive shall be applied by spraying and a thin coat of rendering done while the adhesive is
still tacky. The provision of the bonding coat shall be deemed to be included in the rate for
stonework.
Laying
The stone cladding shall be conducted as follows:
i. All stones and all jointing surfaces shall be made perfectly clean and free of dirt, dust, grease
or other deleterious material.
ii. The stones shall be soaked in clean water for at least 30 minutes.
iii. The rendering shall be damped just sufficiently to prevent excessive water absorption from
stones.
iv. The stones upto thickness of 20mm shall only be cladded with mortar or adhesive, for
cladding having stone thickness greater then 20mm the methodology of dry cladding with
cramps shall be used.
v. The mortar for the dry cladding shall be reinforced with adhesives of approved make and
brand. The thickness of the mortar shall not be more than 12mm or as per the manufacturer’s
specification.
vi. The bedding surfaces of small units shall be well wetted, and the units stood on a full bed of
mortar and tapped home.
vii. For every large or heavy unit, a mortar bed shall be screeded level and full but kept back 20mm
from the face, before the stone is lowered into place. All joints shall be as completely filled as
possible.
viii. Only sufficient mortar / adhesive maximum 9mm thick shall be spread to bed each stone.
ix. It shall be ensured that there are no hard lumps in the mortar that could prevent even
x. bedding.
xi. Spacer dabs: Spacer dabs of appropriate mortar, or, for linings only, Plaster of Paris, can be
used to achieve resistance against inward movement of the stones and shall be of such
consistency and size that they will be in permanent contact with the back of the stone
cladding and the structure. It is essential that they do not bridge movement joints.
34
147
 xii. It shall be ensured that stones are flat and true by means of a straightedge. Adjustments, if
necessary, shall be made within 10 minutes of fixing.
Jointing
The stone shall be fixed with consistent joint width by correct use of spacer lugs so as to provide
hairline (maximum 1 mm thick) joints.
All joints shall be filled solid with 1:2 mortar (1 white cement with pigment: 2 sand) with matching
pigment of approved make and shade, except for projecting members of overhanging cornices,
which may be provided with hollow bedding were approved by the Engineer. Excess mortar shall be
cleaned off immediately so that no mortar is visible on the face of the stone cladding. The stone
cladding shall be properly cured for at least 7 days.
All stones shall be secured to the backing by means of stainless-steel cramps, pins, anchors,
fasteners and expansion bolts as shown on the “Good for Construction” drawings and approved shop
drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
All cramps, dowels etc. shall be fitted and grouted solid as the work proceeds. The fixings shall be
secured to concrete backings using expansion fasteners and bolts.
No stone shall bridge the expansion / separation gap provided in the structure.
Mortar
Mix Proportions
As specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Only one type of mortar shall be used for any one type of
work.
Measuring and Mixing Mortar
The materials shall be measured in separate gauge boxes. Mortar shall be mixed by mixing machines.
The materials shall be mixed sufficiently to obtain a uniform colour and consistency and to produce
consistent batches of mortar. Water shall be added to produce mortar of desiredworkability.

b. Dry Cladding: Laying, Jointing and Grouting

Preliminary
The stone slab shall be procured from an approved quarry and the lot shall be approved by
Architect/ EIC before contractor procures.
The contractor shall take utmost care while laying the granite tiles so as to match the grains and
natural patterns in the granite slab.
The stone shall be gang saw cut to the correct size and dimensions as specified in the Architectural
drawings. The stone shall be factory polished as per the specifications laid out in the clause Afterthe
marble work is cured, it shall be rubbed with carborundum stone of different grades no. 60, 120 and
320 in succession or with electrical rubbing machines rubbed with carborundum items 0 to 6 nos.in
succession, so as to give a plane true and highly smooth surface. It shall then be cleaned with a solution
of oxalic acid, washed and finished clean.
The tolerances in the sizes of the stone tiles or slabs shall be as per the Clause 8.2 of specifications.
Fixing
The cramps shall have inbuilt adjustment for vertical and horizontal alignment. The cramps used to
hold support and transfer the load of stone unit to the supporting structured steel shall be designed
by the manufacturer and approval of the same shall be obtained from the Engineer-in- Charge.
The cramps shall be spaced not more than 60 cm horizontally and vertically along the stone side for
insertion of pins / bolt attached with the steel cramps. Adequate cutting in stone shall be made with
precision instrument to hold the cramps pins at the joints.
Care shall be taken to match the grains of veneer work as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge. For
purpose of matching the grains, the marble slabs shall be selected judiciously having uniform pattern
of veins/streaks.
The tiles shall be placed on the floor to match the grains, veins/ steaks in the slab, any adjustment
needed for achieving the best results shall be then carried out by replacing or interchanging the
particular slabs. The same shall be approved by EIC before actual laying on site.
The stones shall be secured to the backing by means of stainless-steel cramps.
The steel cramps shall be fixed to the wall or RCC members with anchor fasteners as approved by
EIC.
In locations were backing of wall or RCC is unavailable, secured MS frame work shall be developed
35
148
 and cramps be anchored to the frame work with granite slabs.
Fixing of Frame-
The properly designed structural frame for withstanding the weight of stone slab are fixed/supported
on wall surface with the help of M.S. brackets/lugs of angle iron/flat etc. which is welded at each
junction of member of frame and also embedded in cement concrete block 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sands: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) of size 300 x 230 x 300 mm. The concrete
block can be made by cutting the hole of size as mentioned in brick wall and filling the hole with
cement concrete including provision of necessary centering/shuttering for holding of concrete. The
frame can also be supported on RCC surface with the help of approved expansion hold fastener by
drilling the holes in RCC surface. Steel cramps are either welded or bolted to the frame (by making
necessary holes in frame work) for holding of stone.
The MS frame work shall be duly designed considering the load of stone and other relevant forcesand
same shall be approved by the concerned authority and EIC. The anchor fasteners used to secure
frame work shall be of approved make and design. The MS sections used shall be square or
rectangular tubular sections of approved make and brand.
The MS frame work shall be treated with zinc chromate coating of sufficient layers as approved and
finished shade of paint as per the Architectural drawings or as instructed by EIC.
The stone tiles shall be laid with uniform joints as per the architectural drawings.
Jointing
a. The stone joints shall be grouted with epoxy/ silicone/ polysulphide grouts of approved
colour, make and brand (“Polyalk TF” of Sunanda Specialty Coatings Pvt. Ltd. Or BAL
ENDURA, approved equivalent) in the proportion as recommended by the manufacturer /
as instructed by the Engineer as per the Architectural drawings.
b. Grouting shall be done at any time after the stones are firmly fixed but before any dirt or
contamination can enter the joints.
c. Grouting materials shall be mixed to correct consistency and applied to as large an area as
can be worked before hardening commences.
d. The grout shall be worked well into the joints / gaps between the stone and the backing until
they are completely filled.
e. When the grout has set, the surplus material shall be removed and the joints tooled to
required profile. When the grout has hardened the stones shall be washed down with water
andfinally rubbed with a gunny cloth.
f. Before filling the joint with sealant, masking tape are required to be fixed on stones surface
on both edges of joints of the stones, so that sealant may not spoil the surface of the stone.
When all the joints are filled and sealant has dried, the masking tape may be removed.
Adjustable Stainless-Steel Cramps
The stainless-steel cramps used shall be of adjustable type and weight of the same shall not be less
than260 gms. The frame Necessary holes at suitable locations are to be done on steel frame work for
dry stone cladding to be fixed. Necessary recessed are required to be done in stone slab which is
required to be supported by clamps. The one end of steel clamp is fixed on frame with nut and bolt
and other end is inserted into recesses/hole for fixing the dry cladding stone on frame.
5.7.4 Granite Slab Counter & Window sills
Every marble stone shall be gang saw/machine cut to the required size and shape, chisel dressed
machine finished on all beds and joints, so as to be free from any waviness and to give truly vertical,
horizontal, radial or circular joints as required. The exposed faces and sides of stones forming joints
up to 6mm. from the face shall be fine tooled machine cut such that a straight edge laid along the
face of the stone is in contact with every point on it. All window sills, tread of steps, counters
vanities molding edges etc. shall be machine cut & polished to give high gloss mirror finish as per
direction of Engineer-in-Charge. These surfaces shall then be rubbed smooth. All visible angles and
edges shall be true, square and free from chipping. Beyond the depth of 6 mm from face, the joints
shall be dressed with a slight splay so that the thickness of joint increases, in an inverted V shape as
shown in Fig. below. The surfaces of the stones coming in contact with backing need not be chisel
dressed. A sample of dressed and rubbed stone shall be prepared for approval and it shall be kept on
worksite after being approved by the Engineer-in Charge.
Mortar
36
149
 The mortar used for jointing shall be as specified in the relevant item of the bill of quantities or as
directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Laying
All marble stones shall be wetted before placing in position. These shall then be floated on mortar
and bedded properly in position with wooden mallets without the use of chips or under pinning of
any sort.
The walls and pillars shall be carried up truely in plumb or battered as shown in the drawings. All
courses shall be laid truely horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truely vertical. In case of work
without backing of brick work or coursed rubble masonry, face stone shall be laid in headers and
stretchers alternatively unless otherwise directed.
The headers shall be arranged to come as nearly as possible in the middle of stretchers above and
below. Stone shall be laid in regular courses of not less than 15 cm in height and all courses shall be
of the same height unless otherwise specified.
For work facing with backing of brick work or coursed rubble masonry, face stone shall be laid in
alternate courses of header and stretchers unless otherwise directed. Face stone and bond stone
courses shall have break joint on the face of atleast half the height of the standard course and the
bond shall be carefully maintained throughout. All the connected masonry in a structure shall be
carried up nearly at one uniform level throughout but where breaks are unavoidable the joints shall
be made in good long steps so as to prevent cracks developing between new and old work.
When necessary, jib crane or other mechanical appliances shall be used to hoist the heavy pieces of
stones and place these in to correct positions, care being taken that the corners of the stone are not
damaged. Stone shall be covered with gunny bags, before putting chain or rope is passed over it, and
it shall be handled carefully. No piece which has been damaged shall be used in work. The matching
of grains shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Bond Stone
Bond or through stones running right through the thickness of walls, shall be provided in walls upto
60 cm thick and in case of wall above 60 cm thickness a set of two or more bond stones overlapping
each other by atleast 15 cm shall be provided in a line from face to back. At least one bond stone or a
set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.5 sqm of the wall surface. All bond stones shall be
marked suitably as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Joint
The depth of joints 6 mm from the face shall be uniform and as fine as possible but shall be not more
than 1.5 mm thick on the exposed face. Beyond the depth of 6 mm from face, the thickness of joints
shall increase in an inverted V shape so as to give good mortar bond between two stones. The
inverted portion of the joints shall be filled with bedding mortar and the face 6 mm portion with
pointing mortar.
Curing
The work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a period of atleast seven days.

Finishing
After the marble work is cured, it shall be rubbed with carborundum stone of different grades no. 60,
120 and 320 in succession or with electrical rubbing machines rubbed with carborundum items 0 to
6nos.in succession, so as to give a plane true and highly smooth surface. It shall then be cleaned with
asolution of oxalic acid, washed and finished clean.
Protection
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable coverings. The work shall also be suitably
protectedfrom damage during construction.
Scaffolding
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided where necessary. The
supports shall be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding
plank shall be fixed.
Tolerances
As per Table 8.1, 8.2 and 8.3 of CPWD Specifications Vol 1.

5.7.5 Anti-Skid Ceramic Tile Flooring

37
150
 The tiles shall be of approved make and shall conform to IS 15622 or equivalent. They shall be flat,
and true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections
detracting from their appearance. The tiles shall be tested as per IS 13630.
Classification and Characteristics of pressed ceramic tiles shall be as per IS 13712

Preparation of Surface and Laying

Base concrete on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for
the tile shall be with cement concrete screed. The average thickness screed shall be 20 mm or as
specified while the thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm.
Adhesive in thickness not less than 3mm and not greater than 5mm shall be spread on the tile
surface. Tiles shall be soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after
another, each tile gently being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level
with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the
required pattern.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge
rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall
shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.

Pointing and Finishing

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2
mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white
cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are
provided, the half the depth of joint shall be filled with polysulphide or as specified on top with
under filling with cement grout without the lugs remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet
for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not
sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet. Nothing extra shall be paid for the use of cut sawn
tiles in the work.

5.7.6 Anti Skid Vitrified Tile Flooring

Base concrete on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the
tile shall be with cement concrete screed. The average thickness screed shall be 20 mm or as specified
while the thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm.
Adhesive in thickness not less than 3mm and not greater than 5mm shall be spread on the tile surface.
Tiles shall be soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile
gently being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles.
The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge rubbed
smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter
not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.

The tiles shall conform to IS 15622, Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08 per cent Group BIa and the joint
thickness in flooring shall not be more than 1mm.
High polymer modified quick set tile adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) may be used and shall be
thoroughly mixed with water and a paste of zero slump shall be prepared so that it can be used within 1.5
to 2 hours. It shall be spread over an area not more than one sqm at one time. Average thickness of
adhesive shall be 3 mm. The adhesive so spread shall be combed using suitable trowel. Tiles shall be
pressed firmly in to the position with slight twisting action checking it simultaneously to ensure good
contact gently being tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly backed with adjoining tiles. The tiles
shall be fixed within 20 minutes of application of adhesive. The surplus adhesive from the joints, surface
of the tiles shall be immediately cleaned.
The surface of the flooring shall be frequently checked during laying with straight edge of above 2m long
so as to attain a true surface with required slope.
Where spacer lugs tiles are provided these shall be filled with grout with lugs remaining exposed. Where
full size tile cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and edges rubbed smooth to
ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in floor adjoining to wall shall enter not less than 10
38
151
 mm under plaster, skirting or dado.

Pointing and finishing:

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2 mm to
3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement added
with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are provided, the half the
depth of joint shall be filled with poly- sulphide or as specified on top with under filling with cement
grout without the lugs remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the
surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a
wooden mallet.

5.7.7 Slim Tile Flooring

The procedures to be followed shall be as described in preceding paragraphs shall be followed except
the tiles shall conform to IS 15622, Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08 per cent Group BIa and the
joint thickness in flooring shall not be more than 1mm.
Fixing of Tile Flooring with Cement Based High Polymer Modified Quick Set Adhesive (Water
Based) High polymer modified quick set tile adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) shall be thoroughly
mixed with water and a paste of zero slump shall be prepared so that it can be used within 1.5 to 2
hours. It shall be spread over an area not more than one sqm at one time. Average thickness of
adhesive shall be 3 mm. The adhesive so spread shall be combed using suitable trowel. Tiles shall be
pressed firmly in to the position with slight twisting action checking it simultaneously to ensure good
contact gently being tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly backed with adjoining tiles. The
tiles shall be fixed within 20 minutes of application of adhesive. The surplus adhesive from the
joints, surface of the tiles shall be immediately cleaned. The surface of the flooring shall be
frequently checked during laying with straight edge of above 2m long so as to attain a true surface
with required slope.
Where spacer lugs tiles are provided these shall be filled with grout with lugs remaining exposed.
Where full size tile cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and edges rubbed
smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in floor adjoining to wall shall enter
not less than 10mm under plaster, skirting or dado.
Finishing:
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2
mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white
cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are
provided, the half the depth of joint shall be filled with poly- sulphide or as specified on top with
under filling with cement grout without the lugs remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet
for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not
sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

5.7.8 Epoxy Flooring

Surface Preparation –
Concrete substrates must be sound and of sufficient compressive strength (minimum 20 MPa)
with a minimum tensile strength of 1.5 MPa. It should be abrasion resistance.
• A sound, clean and dry substrate is absolutely essential for successful coating application and ensuring
maximum bonding between the substrate and coating system
• The substrate must be clean, dry and free of all contaminants such as dirt, oil, grease, coatings and surface
treatments, etc. and have a moisture content less than 5% prior to application of the primer. Ensure that
the substrate does not suffer from rising moisture and potential osmosis problems
Construction Joint Treatment –
The construction joints will be opened in a V shaped grooves and will be filled by epoxy mortar after
epoxy primer application.

Hair Line Cracks –

Hair line cracks will be opened & will be filled by epoxy putty.
39
152
Epoxy primer–
Two components, high solid, epoxy resin-based floor primer
Colour Translucent
Appearance Glossy
Recommended thickness 0.2mm
Drying Time surface Dry 4 hours
Hard Dry 16 hours
Full Cure 7 days
Mixing Ratio Base : Hardner (by weight) 65:35
Induction time 10 minutes
Pot life 60 minutes
Overcoating interval Min. : 8 hours
Max. : 48 hours, provided surface is clean and
free from any contamination

Bond Strength (ASTM D 4541) : Not less than 2.5 MPa (Concrete Failure)

Epoxy floor Screed Coat –

Three components, epoxy based self levelling screed
Colour Beige
Appearance Matt
Recommended DFT / Coat 2 mm
Drying Time surface Dry : 4 hours
Hard Dry : 16 hours
Full Cure : 7 days
Mixing Ratio Base : Hardener : Aggregate (by weight) 24.47:12.20:63.33
Induction time 10 minutes
Pot life 30 minutes
Overcoating interval (Topcoat) Min. 8 hours
Max.: 48 hours, provided surface is clean and
free from any contamination

Epoxy Flooring
Three components, 1 mm self-levelling epoxy flooring
Colour Range
Gloss Glossy
Recommended thickess 1 mm
Drying Time Surface Dry : 4 hours
Hard Dry : 24 hours
Full Cure : 7 days
Mixing Ratio (By weight) Base : Hardener : Aggregates 27 : 12.5 : 60.5
Pot life 30 minutes
Compressive Strength (ASTM C 579) 41 MPa
Flexural Strength (ASTM C 580) 9.5 MPa
Tensile Strength (ASTM C 307) 7.5 MPa

5.7.9 Granite Cobble Flooring

Refer Document:
Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document
Source:
Stone shall be obtained from the approved quarries and approved by the Client's representative
prior to delivery.
Sampling:
To match approved material sample produced by contractor which should be approved by Engineer
40
153
 in Charge. Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and defects like
cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similar
defects that may adversely affect its strength and appearance Sizes of stone: the length of cobble
stones for stone masonry shall not exceed I 00X I 00 X 100mm Thickness of joints: The joint
thickness shall not exceed 30mm Exposed Aggregate Concrete Refer Document: Refer the Relevant
Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document.
Finish:
Surface should undergo steel floating process to get IPS (Indian Patent Stone Flooring) Finish using
steel trowel. Application of retardant and removal of retardant as per vendor and Engineer's
specification. Exposure of aggregate should be 5mm maximum
Supplier:
Concrete supply should be finalized and approved by Client's representative prior to commencement
of works. Concrete batching plant to provide batching details for records.
Concrete Type:
Concrete type and quality to Engineer's specification and to comply with relevant Indian standards
and regulations; reinforced as per structural consultant guidance.
M25 grade of concrete in 1: 1.5 :3 ratio or as specified as per standards.
Cement for concrete should be PPC depending on marine condition adjacent to site.
Thickness:
Slab thickness and galvanized reinforcement mesh sizes and specifications (as per relevant
Indian standards &structural consultant).
Slump:
Slump of concrete should be as recommended by the structural consultant.
Extent of Pour:
Slab length should not be larger than 4.5m in any direction.
Joints:
Expansion joints at 4.5m c/c; construction joints @2.25m c/c.
Aggregate for Concrete:
Contaminants: Limitations on contaminants: Free from absorbent particles which may cause 'pop
outs', and other particles such as coal and iron sulphide which may be unsightly or cause
unacceptable staining
Supply:
From a single source and maintained throughout the contract.
Colour: consistent.
Sizing:
Aggregates should be single sized aggregate, 10 - 12mm in diameter, coarse/ rounded edge.
Sample:
should be submitted and approved prior to placement.

5.7.10 Sandstone Flooring

Stone Slabs
The slabs shall be red or white as specified in the description of the item. The stone slabs shall be
hard, sound, durable and tough, free from cracks, decay and weathering. In case of red sand stone,
white patches or streaks shall not be allowed. However, scattered spots upto 10 mm diameter will be
permitted. Before starting the work, the contractor shall get samples of slabs approved by the
Engineer in-Charge.
The slabs shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness along planes parallel to the natural
bed of stone and should be of uniform size if required.
Dressing of Slabs
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and chisel dressed on all sides to a minimum
depth of 20 mm. The top and the joints shall be fine tooled so that straight edge laid along the face is
fully in contact with it. In case machine cut stones are used, chisel dressing and fine tooling of
machine cut surface need not be done provided a straight edge laid anywhere along the machine cut
surface is in contact with every point on it.
The thickness of the slabs after dressing shall be 40 mm or as specified in the description of itemwith
41
154
 a permissible tolerance of ± 2 mm.

Laying
Base concrete on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding
for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) or as given in the description
of the item. The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slabs shall be 20 mm and the
thickness at any place under the slabs shall not be less than 12 mm.
The slab shall be laid in the following manner:
Mortar of specified mix shall be spreaded under each slab. The slab shall be washed clean before
laying. It shall then be laid on top, pressed and larried, so that all hollows underneath get filled and
surplus mortar works up through the joints. The top shall be tapped with a wooden mallet and
brought to level and close to the adjoining slabs, with thickness of joint not exceeding 5 mm.
Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After laying each slab surplus mortar on the
surface of slabs shall becleaned off and joints finished flush.
In case pointing with other mortar mix is specified, the joint shall be left raked out uniformly and to a
depth of not less than 12 mm when the mortar is still green. The pointing shall be cured for a
minimum period of 7 days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels and slopes as
instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster,
skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster skirting and floor shall be finished neatly and
without waviness. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with wooden mallet.
Finishing
In case of chisel dressed stone flooring slight unevenness, if any existing between the edges of slabs
at joints shall then be removed by chiseling in a slant.

5.7.11 Local Natural Stone (Khondalite)

Finish
Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document.
Thickness:
Suggested minimum thicknesses for stone walking surfaces; Exterior Stone Pavers with Pedestrian
Traffic: 30mm
Design Criteria:
Granite: ASTM C615, Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone. Class of usage establishes
the abrasion resistance a stone requires to withstand the foot traffic requirements of the project. This
is determined according to the ASTM C241/ C 1353 test for abrasion resistance as measured by
abrasive hardness (Ha).
Physical Property Values:
Final design should always be based on specific property values of the stone to be used. These
values may be obtained from the Stone Supplier. When reliable physical property data is not available
from the supplier, re-testing of the stone should be considered.
Supplier:
Natural Stone supply should be finalized and approved by Client's representative prior to
commencement of works.
Laying Natural Stone/ Tile Paving:
Do not install in adverse weather conditions. Adequately protect foundations, bedding and
haunching against extreme temperatures and rapid drying by wind and sun, heavy rainfall.
(i) Sub base and bedding to be laid to Engineer's specification.
(ii) Bedding to be firm and properly compacted before proceeding with paving and it should meet
minimum Indian standards for compaction.
(iii) Cutting to be neat and accurate, without spalling to form neat junctions with edging and
adjoining finishes. Minimum cut as specified on Drawings. If minimum cut not possible use
oversized unit;
(iv) Levels and lines of finished surface should be smooth and even with falls to prevent ponding.
(v) When laying on the slope, lay paving units from the bottom of slope, upwards.
(vi) Paving should appear even and regular with even joint widths and free of mortar and sand
42
155
 stains.
(vii) Deviation in finish paving levels should be no more than ±2mm. Allowed deviation in height
of finished paving above features (gullies/drainage channels/kerbs) to be no more than ±3mm,
sudden irregularities are not permitted. Variation in levels between adjacent block/pavers sets
to be no more than ±2mm.
(viii) Paving to be kept clean at all times. All deleterious materials to be removed immediately.
(ix) Do not overload previously laid paving with stacks of materials. Avoid damage to unit
comers, surfaces etc.
(x) After laying do not allow for any pedestrian traffic for 24h, vehicular traffic for 28days.
Grouts:
Surface finish: Textured, not impervious.
Grout suitable for joints 3mm to 12mm wide. Soft, creamy, easily worked mortar with good
filling properties. Hardened grout to be weather resistant, unaffected by water and suitable for
external use in dry or wet conditions.
Colour: to match natural stone
Density of fresh mortar: 2. Kg/L Temperature resistance: up to 80 deg. C Brinell hardness after
7 days: 45 N/mm2
Tensile adhesion after water immersion: + 1N/mm2 Suitable for external use, including swimming
pools EPDM or SBR Flooring for Outdoor Gym / Children's Play Area:

5.7.12 Slim tile in skirting and Dado

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS: 15622. The tiles shall be of
earthenware covered by a glaze thoroughly matured and fitted to the body. The tiles shall be sound,
true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their utility The top
surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5 per
cent of the area in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be
free from glaze, however, any glaze if unavoidable shall be permissible on only upto 50 per cent of
the surface area of edges.
The tile shall be free from welts, chips, craze, specks, crawling or other imperfections detracting
from the appearance when viewed from a distance of one meter. The glaze shall be either glossy or
matt as specified. The glaze shall be white in colour except in the case of coloured tiles when
colours shall bespecified by the Engineer-in-Charge. There may be more than one colour on a tile.

Dimensions and Tolerances

Tile earthenware tiles shall be made square or rectangular in sizes as specified and shall be straight
or cushion edge type. Half tiles for use as full tiles shall have dimensions which shall be such as to
make the half tiles whenjointed together (with 1 mm joint) match with dimensions of full tiles. Tiles
may be manufactured in sizes other than those specified above. The dimensions of fittings associated
with the glazed tiles namely cove base, round edge tile, angles corner cups, ridge and legs, cornices
and capping beads shall be of the shape and dimensions as required and the thickness of fittings shall be
the same as the thickness of tiles given above.
Tile Specials
The specials consist of coves, internal and external angles, beads cornices and their corner pieces.
Coves beads and angles shall be of thickness not less than the thickness of the tiles with which they
are used. The size of coves, beads, angles refer to the greatest width of the special measured in a
straight line. The stipulated size of cornices is their height. The lengths of specials shall be 15 cm, 10
cm or other standard size available conforming to the size of tiles available.
In other respects the CPWD specifications 2019 described, in Clause 11.15 and 11.16 of
specifications withcorrection slips shall be applicable.
Preparation of Surface, Laying, Curing and Finishing shall be as specified in CPWD Specifications
2019 Clause 11.17 with correction as far as applicable. Minimum joint thickness shall be 3mm or as
recommended by manufacturer.

5.7.13 Recessed metal skirting

Supply of 100 mm "DMC" Aluminium (Grade 6063) Skirting with 15 micron anodising In Natural
43
156
 Finish. Thichness 1.30 to 1.50 mm. Designed to conceal screws. Seamless finish. Complete with
Rubber/ PVC Jointers and Gasket.

5.7.14 Kota stone flooring:

Kota Stone Slabs:
The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free from cracks,
decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be machine cut to the requisite thickness. They shall be of the
colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The slabs shall have the top
(exposed) face polished before being brought to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform
to the size required. Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Dressing:
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the full depth
so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides (edges)
shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and edges of the slabs
shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane.
The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 18, 20, 25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description
of the item.
Preparation of Surface and Laying
Base concrete on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the
slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as given in the description of the item.
The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and the thickness at any place
under the slab shall be not less than 12 mm.
The slabs shall be laid with the Mortar of specified mix to the average thickness of 20mm. The slab shall
be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to
level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar shall then be
corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry of
honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The edges
of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey cement.
The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent
slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the
slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of
the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Joint
thickness shall not be more than 1 mm.
Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster
skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without
waviness.
Polishing and Finishing
Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall then be removed by fine chiseling and finished with
cement slurry with pigments shall not be applied on the surface before each polishing. The day after the
tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with a wire brush or trowel to a depth of
5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey cement
mixed with pigment to match the shape of the topping of the wearing layer of the tiles. The floor shall
then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The surface shall thereafter be grounded evenly with
machine fitted with coarse grade grit block (No. 60). Water shall be used profusely during grinding. After
grinding the surface shall be thoroughly washed to remove all grinding mud, cleaned and mopped. It shall
then be covered with a thin coat of grey or white cement, mixed with pigment to match the colour of the
topping of the wearing surface in order to fill any pin hole that appear. The surface shall be again cured.
The second grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit block (No. 120).
The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks (No. 320) shall be carried out the
day after the second grinding described in the preceding para or before handing over the floor, as ordered
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
After the final polish, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 33 gm per square meter
sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a ‘namdah’ block (pad of woolen rags). The following day the
44
157
 floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth and finished clean.
If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced, properly jointed and polished. The
finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
The specifications for measurement, rate calculation and precautions to be taken shall be as laid out in the
specifications.
Kota Stone in risers of steps and skirting
Kota Stone Slabs and Dressing of Slabs shall be as specified above except that the thickness of slabs shall
be 18 mm. A tolerance of + 3% mm shall be allowed, unless otherwise specified in the description of the
item.
Preparation of Surface
Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average thickness
specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped
with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top
surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to
harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4
kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey cement with
admixture of pigment to match the shade of the slabs.
The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent
slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the
slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of
the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Joint
thickness shall not be more than 1 mm.
Due care shall be taken to match the grains of slabs which shall be selected judiciously having uniform
pattern of Veins/streaks or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The slabs shall be matched as shown in
drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall
shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and
floor shall be finished neatly and without waviness. Where necessary, the wall surface shall be cut
uniformly to the requisite depth so that the skirting face shall have the projection from the finished face of
wall as shown in drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. In no case the skirting should
project by more than thickness of stone.
Laying
The risers of steps and skirting shall be in grey cement admixed with pigment to match the shade of the
kota stone. The skirting or riser face shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall
thus be left to harden then the rear of the skirting or riser slab shall be packed with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement: 3 coarse sand) or other mix as specified in the description of the item.
Curing, polishing & Finishing
The day after the skirtings are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with a wire brush
or trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be
grouted with grey cement mixed with pigment to match the shape of the topping of the wearing layer of
the tiles. The same cement slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat with a
view to protect the surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.
The day after the flooring is laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with a wire brush or
trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted
with grey or white cement mixed with pigment to match the shade of stone.
The floor shall then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The grinding shall then be carried out
with machine fitted with fine grade grit block (No. 120).
The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks (No. 320) shall be carried out the
day after the second grinding described in the preceding para or before handing over the floor, as ordered
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The measurement and rates of the item shall be as per the specification laid out in the specifications.
5.7.15 Terrazzo Floor slabs

5.8 Ceiling Work

5.8.1 Suspended False Ceiling: Wooden Ceiling Finish With Veneer/Laminate
45
158
Material:
12 mm thick IS 710 Ply shall be used for wooden ceiling as per approved make and sample by
EIC/Architect.
4 mm thick veneer or shall be maximum 1.5mm thick laminate, shall be used for wooden ceiling as
per approved make and sample by Engineer in -Charge/Architect.
Fabrication and ply frame shall be used as per approved make list and confirming to relevant IS
codes and approved by EIC/Architect.
All type of material shall be used as per approved make list and confirming to relevant IS codes and
approved by Engineer in -Charge/Architect.
Workmanship:
Frame work shall be made by required fabrcation and ply with necessary accessoriescomplete. (RCC
slab to false ceiling 100 to 1000 mm) 12 mm thick IS 710 ply shall be used for covering. Finishing
shall be of 4 mm thick veneer or shall be maximum 1.5mm thick laminate. Work include cost of
making of all cutouts for light fixtures, gadgets, gizmo, pelmets, grooves, beads and also provide
support/template where ever required Work complete including all type of tools, tackles, scaffolding
etc. complete at any level and height. The whole work is to be completed as per design; sample
material & any other requirement shall be as per instruction of Engineer in - Charge/Architect.

5.8.2 Gypsum Wall partition

75.0mm thick Gypwall Classic partition consist of Metal framework having maximum reachable height
of 2500mm satisfying L/240 criterion at 200Pa, possessing fire rating of 30mins, tested in accordance to
BS-476 Part 20 & 22 & sound insulation (Rw) of 40dB, tested in accordance to ISO 10140-2/ASTM E90
& spectrum adaption term as per ISO 717-1, having U-value of 0.645W/m²K & Medium duty rating as
per BS 5234 part 2. Partition comprises of single layer, tapered edge Gypsum Board, certified GreenPro
by CII & strategic location of manufacturing plants results in lower carbon emissions. Partition includes
single layer of 12.5mm thick Gypsum board Plain ISI marked, conforming to IS 2095 Part 1:2011, having
flexural strength – {Longitudinal > 500N & transverse > 180N} on both side of framing. Metal frame
work, in compliance with BS EN 14195 & manufactured using CR1 Grade Steel as per IS 513, having
yield stress of 300MPa & tensile strength of 340MPa with surface finish of AZ150 as per IS 15961/AS
1397 & tested for 500hrs of salt spray test as per ASTM B117, includes 48x34x36x0.5mm C-Stud with
lip of 6.5mm, having moment of inertia 26627mm4 about major axis, positioned at 610mm c/c in
50x32x32x0.5mm Floor Channel & 50x32x32x0.5mm Ceiling Channel with flanges bend at 5° acute
angle. Floor & Ceiling Channel is anchored with Rawl plug Ø8x45mm having Pull Out strength of
6.8KN or Nail**, fixed at 600mm c/c in Center. 48x40x40x0.5mm Noggin Channel to be fitted at the
horizontal joints of board.
Boards to be Screw fixed with Drywall Screw of 25mm with 30nos per m2 at 300mm at center and
150mm at periphery. 25mm Glasswool of density 32kg/m3 shall be placed in Metal framework with the
help of holding Clip. Edges & joints to be finished with jointing tape conforming to ASTM C475 &
Paper tape. Periphery & cut-outs of the partition to be treated with suitable Acoustic Sealant. All the
performance test are carried out at NABL accredited/ government approved lab.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawing indicating anchorage system proposed along with supporting
details for approval of the Engineer before commencement of works on site.
Materials
i. Gypsum Board PL 12.5x1219x1829 mm
ii. Accessories :
a. GI-ANGLE BEED 2440
b. GLASS WOOL BRACKET
c. RAWL PLUG 8x45mm
d. SCREW 25mm 1000/Box
e. SCREW 25mm 1000/Box
f. GI-SHADOW LINE SECTION
iii. JC
a. PAPER TAPE 90M
46
159
 b. Jointing compound (25 Kg)
iv. Metal
a. GI-RIB H CUT STUD 0.5x48x3050
b. GI-CHANNEL F&C 0.50x50x3660
c. GI DEEP Fl & Ch 0.5x50x50x3660
d. GI Noggin Channel .5x48x40x695
v. 50mm GLASS WOOL OF DENSITY 20kg/m3
i. MOISTURE BARRIER (17.4Sqm/PC)
ii. ACOUSTIC SEALANT
iii. Baker Rod
Installation
The G.I. frame and board partitions shall be fixed as per nomenclature of the item and directions of
Engineer-in-Charge.
Jointing & Finishing
Joints of the boards are finished with specially formulated Jointing compound and fibre tape to provide
seamless finish. Board surface can be decorated with any type of paint, wall paper, wood veneer & hard
laminates. Services should be incorporated before commencement of board fixing.
Fitting and Fixtures
It is easy and simple to attach different fittings to wall panelling boards. Inclined nails can be fixed to the
boards itself for light materials. For heavier materials the fastening should be centered on internal stud
work or steel or wood frame behind the boards, fixed before boarding. Services should be incorporated
before commencement of board fixing.
Tolerance
Tolerance in dimensions shall be + 5 mm.

5.8.3 Grid Ceiling with Celotex Tiles:

Modular Grid Ceiling with 15mm Celotex Fine Fissured tiles
Providing and fixing tiled false ceiling of size 595x595 mm in true horizontal level suspended on inter
locking Gyproc Micro metal grid of hot dipped galvanized steel sections consisting of 3600mm long main
"T" runner size 14x32mm and 0.30mm thick, 1200mm long cross "T" of size 14x32mm and 0.30mm
thick, 600mmsecondary cross "T" of size 14x32mm and 0.30mm thick and PPGI wall angle of size
19x20mm and 0.4mm thick. Bottom exposed capping of width 14 mm of all T-sections shall be of
0.25mm thick PPGI . Wall angle is fixed along the perimeters of the ceiling to Walls, partitions or
columns etc. with raw plugs and wooden screws at 300mm centers. Main "T" runners are then suspended
from ceiling using GI slotted cleats of size 27 x 37 x 25 x1.6 mm fixed to ceiling with 12 mm dia and
38mm long dash fasteners, 4mm GI adjustable rods with galvanized butterfly level clips of size 85 x 30 x
0.8 mm spaced at max1200mm center to center long main T, and not more than 150mm from spliced
joints. The last hanger at the end of each main runner should not be greater than 600mm from the adjacent
wall. Then 1200mm long cross "T" is interlocked between the main "T" at 600mm center to center to
form a grid of 1200x600 mm and then secondary cross “T" of length 600mm is then interlocked at middle
of the 1200x600mm grid to form grids of 600x600mm. Cross Tees at the ends having length more than
600mm are to be supported independently. Finally White colored Celotex Fine Fissured SE/ NRE tiles of
size 595x595x15mm having NRC of 0.55, CAC 35, LR 0.84 and suitable for use in Relative humidity up
to 95% and temperature up to 40 deg C. are placed in this grid. including cost of all materials, labour
T&P etc. required for the work all complete as per specification and direction of the Engineer‐in‐Charge.

5.8.4 Mineral Fiber Acoustical Suspended Ceiling System

i. Providing & fixing of Armstrong Mineral Fiber Acoustical Suspended Ceiling System with Fine
Fissured (ANG TEGULAR) Edge Tiles with Armstrong 24mm Exposed GRID. The tiles should
have Humidity Resistance (RH) of 99%, NRC 0.6, Light Reflectance ≥85%, Thermal Conductivity k
= 0.052 - 0.057 w/m K, Colour White, Fire Performance UK Class 0 / Class 1 (BS 476 pt - 6 &7) in
module size of 600 x 600 x 16mm, suitable for Green Building application, with Recycled content of
31%. The tile shall be laid on Armstrong Prelude32 with 24 mm wide T - section flanges colour
white having rotary stitching on all T sections i.e., the Main Runner, 1200 mm & 600 mm Cross Tees
with a web height of 38mm and a load carrying capacity of 8.5 Kgs/M2 & minimum pull out strength
47
160
 of 100 Kgs. The T Sections have a Galvanizing of 90 grams per M2 and need to be installed with
Suspension system of Armstrong make. The Tile & Grid system used together should carry a 30-year
warranty.
INSTALLATION: To comprise main runner spaced at 1200mm centres securely fixed to the
structural soffit using Armstrong suspension system (specifications below) at 1200mm maximum
centre. The First/Last Armstrong suspension system at the end of each main runner should not be
greater than 450mm from the adjacent wall. Flush fitting 1200mm long cross tees to be interlocked
between main runners at 600mm centre to form 1200 x 600 mm module. Cut cross tees longer than
600mm require independent support. 600 x 600mm module to be formed by fitting 600mm long
flush fitting cross tees centrally between the 1200 mm cross tees. Perimeter trim to be Armstrong
wall angles of size 3000x19x19mm, secured to walls at 450 mm maximum centres.
Installation to be carried out by Armstrong Trained Installation team & Installation should be carried
out as per Armstrong recommended procedure.
ARMSTRONG SUSPENSION SYSTEM accessories manufactured and supplied by Armstrong
World Industries consisting of M6 Anchor Fasteners with Vertical Hangers made of Galvanized steel
of size 26 x 26 x 25 x 1.2mm with a Galvanized Thickness of 80gsm, A pre Straightened Hanger
wire of dia – 2.5 mm of 1.8 m length., thickness of 80gsm and a tensile strength of 344-413 MPa,
along with Adjustable hook clips of 0.8mm thick, galvanized spring steel for 2.68 mm with a
minimum pull strength of 110 kg. The adjustable clip also consists of a 3.5 mm aquiline wire to be
used with the main runner, including cost of all materials, labour T&P etc. required for the work all
complete as per specification and direction of the Engineer‐in‐Charge.

ii. Providing & Fixing of Armstrong Mineral Fibre Acoustical Suspended Ceiling System with Fine
Fissured (Bevelled Tegular) Edge Tiles With Armstrong SILHOUETTE 15mm Exposed GRID.
The tiles should have Humidity Resistance (RH) of 99%, NRC 0.6, Light Reflectance ≥85%, Thermal
Conductivity k = 0.052 - 0.057 w/m K, Colour White, Fire Performance UK Class 0 / Class 1 (BS
476 pt - 6 &7) in module size of 600 x 600 x 16mm , suitable for Green Building application, with
Recycled content of 31%. The tile shall be laid on Armstrong Silhouette profile grid system with
15mm white/black flanges incorporating a 6mm central reveal in white/black colour and with a web
height of 45mm and a load carrying capacity of minimum 15.68 Kgs/M2 & minimum pull out
strength of 100 Kgs. Silhouette, Main Runners & Cross Tees to have mitred ends & “birdsmouth”
notches to provide mitred cruciform junctions. The T Sections have a Galvanizing of 90 grams per
M2 and need to be installed with Suspension system of Armstrong make.The Tile & Grid system
used together should carry a 30 year warranty.
INSTALLATION: To comprise main runner spaced at 1200mm centres securely fixed to the
structural soffit using Armstrong suspension system (specifications below) at 1200mm maximum
centre. The First/Last Armstrong suspension system at the end of each main runner should not be
greater than 450mm from the adjacent wall. Flush fitting 1200mm long cross tees to be interlocked
between main runners at 600mm centre to form 1200 x 600 mm module. Cut cross tees longer than
600mm require independent support. 600 x 600mm module to be formed by fitting 600mm long
flush fitting cross tees centrally between the 1200 mm cross tees. Perimeter trim to be Armstrong
wall angles of size 3000x19x19mm, secured to walls at 450 mm maximum centres. Installation to be
carried out by Armstrong Trained Installation team & Installation should be carried out as per
Armstrong recommended procedure. ARMSTRONG SUSPENSION SYSTEM accessories
manufactured and supplied by Armstrong World Industries consisting of M6 Anchor Fasteners with
Vertical Hangers made of Galvanised steel of size 26 x 26 x 25 x 1.2mm with a Galvanised
Thickness of 80gsm, A pre Straightened Hanger wire of dia – 2.5 mm of 1.8 m length., thickness of
80gsm and a tensile strength of 344-413 MPa, along with Adjustable hook clips of 0.8mm thick,
galvanised spring steel for 2.68 mm with a minimum pull strength of 110 kg. The adjustable clip also
consists of a 3.5 mm aquiline wire to be used with the main runner. including cost of all materials,
labour T&P etc. required for the work all complete as per specification and direction of the
Engineer‐in‐Charge.

5.8.5 Baffle Ceiling

Material
48
161
 50x100 baffle ceiling (50mm Width & 100mm Height) system comprising of U shape panels. Baffle
panels shall be made out of 0.7-0.9 mm thick electro galvanized steel material in lengths of up to
4000mm and of approved colour.
Finishing
The Coil should be stove enamel paint on a continuous application for pre-treatment. The coils to go
through 4 stages of pre-treatment, three times oven baked through conversion coating, priming and
finish coat ensuring superior adhesion, high corrosion resistance and good colour stability. The coils
shall be painted on both sides after degreasing. Inside surface to have a primer of 5 microns and a
coat of natural colour of 5 microns, exposed surface to have a primer of 5 microns, binder of 5
microns and topcoat of approved colour of 15 microns.
Fixing
Baffle Ceiling panels shall be mounted on slotted galvanized grid profile of minimum 2mm
thickness in a module of 150mm. Baffle grid shall be suspended and supported by means of 6mm dia
threaded suspenders at a distance of 150mm from the edge and 200mm / 600mm c/c. Baffle fixing
brackets shall be used to keep the ceiling in correct place for the leveling purpose. Baffle panels shall
be coil coated in a desired specification. Baffle ceiling system shall be installed in compliances with
manufacturer’s technical installation brochure and manual.

5.8.6 Perforated metal linear plank ceiling

300mm wide Plain / Perforated panel + NWT - Providing & Fixing of 300mm wide perforated 2.0
mm diameter 5mm c/c pasted with NWT corrosion resistant Aluminum Magnesium Alloy metal
ceiling consisting of panel 300m wide x 30 mm deep x 0.7 mm thick with bevel edge having panel
length up to 6 mtrs. coil coated on a continuous paint line, Double baked and roll formed for higher
straight and good roll forming characteristics with 21% perforation in White finish color. The panel
ends are raised up to 29 mm . The panel about each other with a narrow V groove. Panel shall be
clipped to a backed enameled aluminum panel carrier of 41.5 mm wide x 62 mm deep x 0.95 mm
thick in standard length of 5 mtrs. made of double baked enameled aluminum magnesium alloy
AA5052 black with cut outs to hold panels module of 300 mm and at distance of 2.4 mtrs. the carrier
shall be suspended by means of GI suspension rod 4mm diameter and suspension clip at 1.3 mtr.
distance. The coils to go through 4 stages of pre-treatment, three times oven baked through
conversion coating, priming and finish coat ensuring superior adhesion, high corrosion resistance
and good colour stability. The coils to be painted on both sides after degreasing. Inside surface to
have a primer of 5 microns and a coat of natural colour of 5 microns, exposed surface to have a
primer of 5 microns, binder of 5 microns and topcoat of approved colour of 15 microns. If any MS
Sub structure is required, it shall be paid separately in the respective individual item.
Paint finish :
Aluminum panels shall be achromatized for maximum bond between metal and paint, enameled
twice under high temperature one side with full primer and Luxacote finish, the other side (Inner
side) with a primer coat and skin coat on a Continuous paint line. Mode of Measurement:
Measurements shall be wall to wall without deductions for lights, diffusers, columns etc.
Green-pro certification:
For LEED certification by Indian Green Building Council (IGBC) and ISO 9001: 2015 Quality
Management System Certification.
MATERIAL
300mm wide perforated 2.0 mm diameter 5mm c/c pasted with NWT corrosion resistant Aluminum
Magnesium Alloy metal ceiling consisting of panel 300m wide x 30 mm deep x 0.7 mm thick with
bevel edge having panel length up to 6 mtrs. coil coated on a continuous paint line, Double baked and
roll formed for higher straight and good roll forming characteristics with 21% perforation in wooden
finish color.
APPROVED SYSTEM
Providing & Fixing of 300mm wide perforated 2.0 mm diameter 5mm c/c pasted with NWT
corrosion resistant Aluminum Magnesium Alloy metal ceiling consisting of panel 300m wide x 30
mm deep x 0.7 mm thick with bevel edge having panel length up to 6 mtrs. coil coated on a continuous
paint line, Double baked and roll formed for higher straight and good roll forming characteristics with
21% perforation in white finish color. The panel ends are raised up to 29 mm. The panel about each
49
162
 other with a narrow V groove. Panel shall be clipped to a backed enameled aluminum panel carrier
of 41.5 mm wide x 62 mm deep x 0.95 mm thick in standard length of 5 mtrs. made of double baked
enameled aluminum magnesium alloy AA5052 black with cut outs to hold panels module of 300 mm
and at distance of 2.4 mtrs, the metal ceiling panel should be serviceability advantage by having
100% removable without tools.
ACCESS
All the metal ceiling panel should be serviceability advantage by having 100% removable without
tools.
LEVEL
All the panels should be fitted to ensure accurate positioning & level of the ceiling system as per the
site/architectural requirements.
GENERAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
The panel ends are raised up to 29 mm. The panel about each other with a narrow V groove. Panel
shall be clipped to a backed enameled aluminum panel carrier of 41.5 mm wide x 62 mm deep x
0.95 mm thick in standard length of 5 mtrs. made of double baked enameled aluminum magnesium
alloy AA5052 black with cut outs to hold panels module of 300 mm and at distance of 2.4 mtrs. the
carrier shall be suspended by means of GI suspension rod 4mm diameter and suspension clip at 1.3
mtr. distance.
FINISH
Aluminum panels shall be achromatized for maximum bond between metal and paint, enameled
twice under high temperature one side with full primer finish, the other side (Inner side) with a
primer coat and skin coat on a Continuous paint line. The coils to go through 4 stages of pre-
treatment, three times oven baked through conversion coating, priming and finish coat ensuring
superior adhesion, high corrosion resistance and good colour stability. The coils to be painted on
both sides after degreasing. Inside surface to have a primer of 5 microns and a coat of natural colour
of 5 microns, exposed surface to have a primer of 5 microns, binder of 5 microns and topcoat of
approved colour of 15 microns.
FIRE PERFORMANCE
A fire-resistant ceiling can be constructed utilizing steel panels and steel carriers. The 300C ceiling
has been tested on fire resistance in accordance to British standard, BS476:part 23: 1987: clause 5,
resulting in a fire resistance of 132, minutes and to the German DIN 4102, part 2 rating F30 AB.
PROVISIONS FOR LIGHT AND OTHER FITTINGS
The panels will be cut on site for the provision of light fixtures and other fittings as per the directions
of the Engineer In charge
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
All the metal ceiling elements and the corresponding substructure should be manufactured in
accordance with ceiling standards accessed by German DIN 4102.
GREEN BUILDING
For LEED certification by Indian Green Building Council (IGBC) and ISO 9001: 2015 Quality
Management System Certification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
 BSI ISO 9001:2015 for quality management system
 CII – Green Products and Services Council.
 German DIN 4102for ceiling standard
 BS476:part 23: 1987: clause 5.
ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
The 2mm perforated panels with NWT (Non-Woven Textile) with a plenum height of 400mm
enhances the acoustic performance up to 0.7NRC
WARRANTY CERTIFICATE
Manufacturer should submit the warranty certificate for the minimum 10 years.

5.9 Stainless Steel Railings

The work shall be carried out in areas as described in the finishes schedule. These specifications
are in addition to CPWD specifications

50
163
5.9.1 All rails and other tubular components shall be constructed using the following:
a. Stainless steel grade AISI, type 316; surface to be 320 grain/grit finish; tubes ½” (38mm)
outside diameter by 5/64” (2mm) wall thickness
b. Balustrade material: Stainless steel SHS, grade 316
c. Finish: Brush finish
d. Dimension: 40mm square to outer
e. Maximum spacing: 1500mm c/c
f. Specific notes: Interconnecting SS 25mm SHS between top rail and baluster, SS patch fittings 4
no for each glass panel, SS base plates, etc.

5.9.2 All posts and other components shall be constructed using the following:
Stainless steel grade AISI type 316, surface to be 320 grain/grit finish: posts to be 2” (50mm) By
½” flat bar finish and final design to be strictly in accordance with design guidelines. Stainless
steel grade AISI type 316, surface to be bead blasted for: component fittings including handrail
attachment support and post attachment components strictly in accordance with design guidelines.
Fastening bolts to be stainless steel.

5.9.3 Fasteners for railings

Anchors shall be fabricated from stainless steel with capability to sustain, without failure and
rusting, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E488.

5.9.4 Fabrication
Fabricate railing system for compliance with structural requirements of applicable code. Pre-
assemble railings prior to shipping to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for re-assembly and for coordination with shop drawings.

5.9.5 Installation
Installation shall be by done a qualified, authorized representative of the manufacturer.
Installation must be in accordance with standard or non-standard, yet applicable details
(instructions) included on installation/shop drawings provided by the manufacturer
Install components plumb and in-line, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects and
securely anchored to structure.
Provide anchors, plates, angles, etc., necessary for connecting railings to structure. Any and all
field welding shall be by a certified welder
Access for anchors that require through-bolting, either vertically or horizontally, to be made
available by the Contractor.

5.9.6 Erection tolerances

Maximum variation from plumb shall be 1/4". Maximum offset from true alignment for every 50-
foot of railing shall be 1/4", non- accumulative.

5.9.7 Protection after installation

General contractor must provide protective covering on handrails and guardrails if construction is
not yet finished in the area where the railings are installed.

5.9.8 Correction of deficiencies

All deficiencies in work and/or items not meeting specified requirements shall be corrected in
order to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to Employer.

STAINLESS STEEL RAILING

Fabricating, Supplying and fixing in position 1200mm high SS Staircase Handrail with Top hand rail of
50mm dia Hollow SS pipe of to be welded as railing connected to the verticals through 8mm connecter
plate with 2mm SS flat base plate below the hand rail. The Verticals shall be made of frame work of 2
Nos. 50X6 mm SS flat with 8mm spacer plate and rounded edges finish placed at 100mm c/c as balusters
51
164
 as per the detail architectural drawing. Mid rails shall be 3 Nos 20mm dia SS rods connecting the
verticals. Balusters should be fixed to the concrete slabs with 150mm x 100mm, 6mm SS plate anchored
with 4 Nos. of 10mm dia 75mm long Expansion bolts as per the detail drawings.

STAINLESS STEEL RAMP RAILING

Fabricating, Supplying and Fixing in position Stainless Steel Disabled ramp railing of 1000mm high with
Top hand rail of 50mm dia Hollow SS pipe of 16 gauge to be welded as railing to the verticals made of
50mm dia SS tubular sections as per the detail architectural drawing and 1 no 30 mm dia SS pipe as mid
rails placed as per the detail Architectural drawings. Verticals should be fixed to the concrete slabs with
200mm x 150mm, 6mm thick SS plate anchored with 4 Nos. of 10mm dia 75mm long Expansion bolts
with 70mm dia SS capping at the top as per the detail drawings.

STAINLESS STEEL SINGLE PIPE RAIL

Fabricating, Supplying and Fixing in position SS single pipe wall rail of 50mm dia hollow SS pipe of 16
gauge, fixed to 12mm dia SS rod bent to profile and welded to insert plates of 100X100X 6mm thick,
anchored in the wall with 4 nos. of 10mm dia, 75mm long expansion bolts, etc., complete, as per
architectural drawings.
5.10 UPVC Doors and Windows
UPVC/Vinyl known as Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride is a superior
material made from rigid, impact-resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with
hollow spaces inside to make them resistant to heat loss and condensation.
All uPVC Doors and Windows to be as per Section 9.28 of CPWD
Specification 2019 Vol 1.
5.10.1 Properties of UPVC Windows
(a) Thermal conductivity - The thermal conductivity of PVC is 0.14 kcal/m.hr °C

(b) Weather resistance / anti-ultraviolet - highly weather resistant quality and should have
high impact resistant formulation. It should withstand long exposure in extreme weather
change under scorching sun, storms, dryness, high humidity. No brittleness and quality
deterioration should occur in the windows.

(c) Sound proofing - UPVC Windows should be designed using multi-chambered profile
with tight seals. An average sound separation of 22-25 dB in single glazing and 30 dB in
double-glazing is to be achieved.

(d) Electricity insulation - UPVC windows should have high electrical insulation which
exceeds 1015 ohms-cm. It should be absolutely safe from electricalconductivity.

(e) Fire retardant - The windows should be flame retardant and shall not cause, support or
enhance the natural development of fire.

52
165
 (f) Water proof - UPVC Windows shall absorb water below 0.1%

(g) Corrosion resistance - UPVC windows should be highly resistive to the attacks of acids, alkalis, waste
gases, and salts.

(h) Environmental friendly - UPVC window systems should be environmentally friendly and they should be
fully recycled and reused for the production of PVC profiles.
(i) Other features
(i) All corners of the window system are to be welded, to form a single monotonous and rigid
structure.

(ii) Windows systems should be provided with multi-locking mechanism that locks at four places so
there won’t be any space for leakages.
(iii) Friction stays, locking systems, all hardware should be of the highest grade. All hardware to be
checked for their 20000 cycles of operation, ensure suitable warrantee on hardware.

(iv) All gaskets used in the system should be soft EPDM gaskets having longer life than any regular
rubber gaskets.
(v) Drainage mechanism is to be provided with all parts of the window system so that no water can
accumulate in the system. In addition to that drainage caps are also fitted over the drainage hole to
drain out water against wind direction in high rises.

(vi) Periphery sealing is to be done with the help of silicone sealant.

5.10.2 Type of Windows

(a) Sliding Windows

The sliding window is made up of two (or more) sashes that slide horizontally, to the
left or right, on tracks. The sliding window can be made wider and taller with the
addition of sashes. The sliders work on a 'ride over' mechanism.
Result: The track on which the sash slides is raised slightly above the ground,
preventing dust from settling in the track. The dust-free track ensures a far smoother
sliding motion when compared to conventional sliders.
(b) Casement Windows

The casement window opens inwards or outwards with the help of a sash that is fixed
on outer frame. The design can vary from fixed, side hung or top hung.
(c) Combination Windows

Combination window is an integration of two windows of the same type (like

casement- casement) or different types (casement-slider or fixed-slider).

5.10.3 Composition
Only CPE modified uPVC meeting the requirement of RAL RG 716/1 and DIN
7748/0803528 or equivalent shall be used. No reworked material is to be used in any
profile; whether used internally or externally.
5.10.4 Profile Marking
The main frame profile shall be permanently marked at approximately 1 meter intervals
with an identifying mark which enables the name of the profile systems supplier, date of
manufacture and extruder to be identified without extraction of the window.
5.10.5 Quality Control

166
53
 The extrusion process must be quality controlled and the appropriate standards relating to
impact strength, technical performance and consistency.
5.10.6 Profile Construction
The profile depth should be minimum of 58mm with a nominal wall thickness, internally
and externally of 2.8mm. The profile shall have a minimum of two sealed chambers for
transoms and mullions and 3 sealed chambers for frames and sashes.
5.10.7 Internal Profile Drainage
The internal drainage shall be isolated from chambers into which reinforcements can be
placed or through which frame fixing pass drainage shall be either through the base or
alternatively to the face, concealed by face drainage caps.
5.10.8 Pressure Equalization
Pressure equalization for glazing rebates and for frame rebates shall be carried out in
accordance with the recommendation of the profile Systems supplier to ensure efficient
drainage in adverse conditions.
5.10.9 Window Performance:
Windows must meet the requirements with respect to air permeability, water tightness,
wind resistance ,local extreme weather conditions and should be designed as per IS 875..
5.10.10 Strength and Safety of Moving Parts
The moving parts of the windows must have sufficient strength and robustness to
withstand accidental static and dynamic loads in use, without any permanent deflection or
breakage. The overall evaluation will be based on the experience from use and subject to
approval by the Engineer.
5.10.11 Glazing beads
Glazing beads shall be of the one foot snap in design and shall be extruded uPVC mitred at
the corners. All glazing beads shall be with a co-extruded gasket of a multi-fin design to
maintain security and weather performance. Gasket material shall be thermos-plastic
elastomer.
5.10.12 Glazing gaskets
All glazing gaskets and weather seals are to be extruded from non-migratory EPDM.
Glazing gaskets shall be of continuous length. Gasket may be subjected to random testing
and shall be obtained from the profile systems supplier.
5.10.13 Weather seals
Weather seals shall consist of a double sealing system. Seals on the sash and the frame
shall be of continuous length and for outward opening windows the seal on the sash shall
be joined to a 50mm length of pressure relief seal at the bottom of the opening whereas the
seal on the frame shall be joined on the top of opening.
Weather seals and pressure relief seals, which shall be obtained from the profile systems
supplier, shall be capable of removal without disturbing the glazing systems or removal of
the frame or sash.
5.10.14 Glazing
All glazing shall be internally beaded. Minimum glass thickness is to be 5mm thick and

167
54
 has to be selected considering the wind loads in the area and the location where the glass is
being used This has to be as per the Engineer Glass type has to be considered as per IGBC
Gold rating. The windows shall be constructed in such a manner that the glazing or
deglazing can take place without the removal of the sash or frame.
5.10.15 Welded joints
All corner joints shall be homogeneously fusion heat welded in accordance with the
instructions of the profile systems supplier. The resulting joints shall be finished by the
grooving/knifing method. Solvent welded joints shall not be allowed.
5.10.16 Reinforcement
All transoms and mullions shall be fully reinforced, irrespective of size with corrosion
resistant galvanized steel. All other profiles to be reinforced as per the specification of the
profile systems supplier which shall suit the proposed style application relative to exposure,
elevation and height above the ground level.
Reinforcing shall be secured by suitable screws in accordance with the instructions of the
profile systems supplier.
All galvanized steel reinforcing profiles shall comply with BS 2989 1982 Grade G 275N
or equivalent.
5.10.17 Mechanical Joints
The mechanical jointing of mullions and transoms shall be carried out in strict accordance
with the instructions/recommendations of the profile systems supplier using only approved
mechanical coupling components.
5.10.18 Hardware
All hardware shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant material and be approved by
the profile systems supplier.
All ferrous screws, nuts, bolts and other fastening or fixing, shall be of stainless grade.
Coating shall be either sherardized according to BS 4921 dichromate zinc plated and
recommended for use in the fabrication of uPVC windows.
Metal that are in contact with each other shall be compatible so as to prevent galvanic
corrosion of dissimilar metals by electrolytic action. All hardware should ideally be fixed
by attachments through the uPVC to the reinforcement; alternatively, it should be fixed in
purpose designed screw ports or at least two thickness of uPVC.
Hardware with provision for adjustment shall be accessible for adjusting after the window
has been installed. Hardware used to open and close the window shall be replaceable
without removing the outer frame from the structure.
(a) Friction hinges

Top hung and side hung opening out lights shall have two friction stays per light and
be of stainless-steel construction.
The size of the friction stay will depend on size, weight, hanging and exposure of the
relevant sashes. This will be determined from table provided by the hinge
manufacturer.
All side hung friction stays are to incorporate a riser block to allow the sash to be
supported in its closed position.
168
55
 (b) Butt hinges

Where external butt hinges are used they must be of the security pin type which does
not allow removal of the hinge pin from outside.
(c) Espagnolette handles

All espagnolette striking plates are to be purpose designed and secured to the outer
frame by approved screw fixing. The espagnolette mechanism shall be of multi
locking points depending on size.
All ironmongery where possible shall be screwed into frame reinforcing, or fixing
screws must penetrate a minimum of two wall thickness or an equivalent screw port,
to obtain sufficient purchase.
5.10.19 Fixing the Frame to the Building
The gap between the structural opening and the UPVC frame shall be between 5 to 10mm
all round, which should be filled by injectable Polyurethane (PU) foam after completion of
fixing for best frame and wall bonding and for sound and thermal insulation and finally
applying neutral cure low modules Silicon sealant to make joint water proof.
Fixing points shall be to all four sides of a frame, spaced 150mm to 250mm from corners
and not more than 600mm apart elsewhere. Fixing shall be by direct drilling 10mm hole
through UPVC frame to building wall. Each fixing shall penetrate into building structure by
no less than 40mm.and ultimate fixing with anti-corrosive plated anchor bolts through
these holes.
All heads of all fixing screws shall be covered with appropriate plastic cover caps.
5.10.20 Warranty
The contractor shall arrange a certificate of warranty against any manufacturing or
installation defect, valid for 5 years for rectification of the defect.

5.11 Aluminum work and Glazing

i. Scope of Work
The work shall include providing aluminum and glazing for the building for doors, windows, glazing’s,
skylights, semi-unitized structural curtain wall system, etc., and at any other locations and situations as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with the design, patterns, shapes, thickness, details,
all as shown in the Architectural drawings or as specified or as directed by the Engineer. The works
shall be carried out as per the specifications, standards and codes as given here in under, complete in all
respects to give the quality of finished work as desired by and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-
in-Charge.
The work shall be carried out by an experienced specialist Sub-Contractor who shall be appointed only
after prior approval of the Engineer.
ii. Materials
a. Aluminum
The details below shall be applicable for all aluminum windows and doors. Aluminum shall conform to
IS:733 designation HE9-WP or HV9-WP alloy. Aluminum shall be superior quality extruded sections
made by Indian Aluminum Co. or Hindustan Aluminum or Jindal or an approved equivalent
manufacturer, of a gauge suitable for the work.
b. Glass
169
56
 Applicable for all glazed aluminum windows.
Glass shall generally conform to the requirements of IS:952 or JIS:R3203 or equivalent standards. It
shall be clean cut without edge faults and free from defects. Glasses shall be tested for critical
parameters like flexural bending strength, fragmentation, bow and corrugation as per DIN: 1249 Part-
12with necessary Material test certificates from the manufacturer.
c. Reflective Coated Glass:
Reflective Coated glass shall meet the coating quality specifications of ASTM C 1376-03 "Standard
Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Float Glass". Minimum thickness shall
be 6mm or as specified in the drawing. U-value to be not more than 4.1 W/m2.K.
iii. Aluminum Finishes
i. Anodizing
All anodizing to be generally as per CPDW Specification 2019 clause 21.1.2. and IS:1868. No
anodizing thickness shall be less than 10 microns. All anodizing coatings to be tested as per IS:5523.
All anodizing for exterior applications to satisfy AAMA 611 - Class I requirement of 0.7mils (18.0
microns). All anodizing for interior applications to satisfy AAMA 611 - Class II requirement of 0.4mils
(10.0 microns). All anodizing to be Type-II Sulfuric Acid bath type.
ii. Powder coating
iii. PVDF coating
iv. Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be wool pile manufactured by Anand Reddiplex Limited or an approved
equivalent manufacturer. The profiles shall be as follows

Application Base Pile Height

Width
Sliding 6.7mm 7.0mm
Casement windows 6.0mm - 5.0mm
Swing doors 9.0mm 13.0mm
Gaskets shall be of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) of approved profile and manufacturer.
iv. Handling and Storing Materials
1.1 Aluminum Work Fabrication and Components
All self-finished work shall be wrapped, taped or protected in an approved manner with non-absorbent
coverings.
These shall be delivered to a programme to reduce or eliminate site storage. Coverings shall be
removed just sufficient to enable jointing and assembling and shall be replaced thereafter.
1.2 Glass
Glass shall be stored in dry, shaded and ventilated areas, on firm straight supports. Water collection
(condensation) between panes shall be prevented.
Mirrors shall be delivered wrapped and shall be kept wrapped until the time of fixing. Different types
ofmirrors/glasses shall be stacked separately with proper identification.
vi Workmanship
a) General
Aluminum work shall be undertaken in accordance with sound engineering practice and as follows:
Aluminum work shall be done as much as possible in the properly equipped workshop.
Site work shall be restricted to fixing and other operations that cannot be undertaken in the workshop.
Burrs, sharp edges and angles, coarse file marks, excess weld metal and similar imperfections shall be
removed. Work shall not be permitted to corrode or otherwise deteriorate between fabrication and final
treatment/fixing.
Aluminum -work shall be fixed in the works in a manner that prevents corrosion due to contact with
incompatible metals and other materials.
b) Bending and Joint Faces
Aluminum shall be shaped by bending with machine without weakening or damaging the same. Joint
faces shall be formed to fit accurately in full contact - A suitable joint coating shall be used for bolted
orscrewed connections.
c) Cutting Glass
All edge and surface treatment shaft be done at the glass works after cutting to size. Glass shall be cut
to produce clean square edges. Any work with Toughened Glass shall be undertaken by the glass

170
57
 manufacturer prior to the toughening process. The edge of multiple glazed units shall not be nipped.
vii Design
The glazing for windows, skylights and doors, shall be designed by the manufacturer as per IS: 1948
generally and to withstand wind loadings as given by IS: 875 and provide seismic isolation and
restraint for buildings located in Seismic Zone-IV as per IS: 1893. The vendor shall submit complete
design calculations for the design of the glazing - for the approval of contractor’s representative. The
vendor shall order materials only after the designs are approved by the Architect or Engineer in charge.
a. Performance
The performance of windows, doors, skylights shall be as given in BS:6375 5 Parts 1 and 2 for weather
tightness, operation and strength.
b. Tests
Material Test Certificates for performance shall be provided by the window manufacturer as per
following:
1. BS: 5368 Part 2 - Water Tightness Test Under Static Pressure
2. BS: 5368 Part 3 - Wind Resistance Test
c. Sub Frames
All aluminum work shall be fixed to mill finished aluminum tubular sub frames. The sub frames shall
be fixed to brick work/concrete work using grouting and expansion bolts as directed by the Engineer.
d. Mock-up and Samples
Before preparation of shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit samples of all proposed preformed
and extruded sections to be used. The Contractor shall also submit samples of colors of coating based
on the colors requested by the Engineer. Once preliminary approval is given and shop drawings are
approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit final samples of typical windows, complete in
all respects.
e. Sealants
Product name: DOW CORNING®732 Multi-Purpose Sealant Or Equivalent Color: Black, whit
Standards: MIL-A-46106 and FDA 177.2600.
Mechanical properties, cured 7 days in air at 25ºC (77ºF) and 50% relative humidity
S Property ASTM Valu
e

1 Specific gravity D1475 1.04

2 Durometer hardness, Shore D2240 25
A
3 Tensile strength D412 2.3
MPa
4 Elongation at break D412 540
%

Electrical properties, cured 7 days in air at 25ºC (77ºF) and 50% relative humidity
S Property ASTM Valu
e

1 Dielectric strength D149 21.6

kV/
mm
2 Dielectric constant at D150 2.8
100Hz/100kHz
3 Dissipation factor at D150 0.00
100Hz/100kHz 15
D150 1.5x
1015
Oh
171
58
 m.c
m

f. Isolation
Where aluminium comes into contact with masonry, brick work, plaster or dissimilar metals, it shall be
coated with an insulating coat of lacquer, paint or tape to ensure the elector chemical corrosion is
avoided. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for the approval by the Engineer-in-Charge before
related materials are ordered.
g. Protection
The Contractor shall protect the powder coated aluminum sections with clear or colored tape. The tape
shall not disfigure the finish. The Contractor shall protect installed work with suitable measures to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
h. Protection against Damage
i. Care shall be taken to avoid damage from any cause at all stages. Packing pieces used for protection
shall not discolour or otherwise permanently mark the works. Surface protection shall be afforded by
careful handling and the avoidance of the use of hooks, crowbars or other implements that are likely to
damage the stone, marble, granite, limestone, timber, doors, windows, metals, glass, etc. Oils, grease,
paint, cement slurry and liquid agents liable to cause staining shall not be used in close proximity to the
area in which the materials are stacked.
ii. Protection during Construction-Decorative surfaces shall be carefully protected during construction by
a temporary cover of adequate strength and durability.
iii. Protection of finished work - At all stages of the contract it is essential that all works are properly and
effectively protected.
iv. Particular attention shall be given to permanently exposed surfaces, especially arises and decorative
features. The protection may be by timber strips, hessian or polyethylene, but shall not be such as will
damage, mark, or otherwise disfigure the work.
v. Polyethylene heavy duty sheeting may be used as protection against rain. It may be necessary in certain
cases to avoid contact of water with the materials.
vi. Timber battens protecting sills or other areas shall be retained in position as long as possible.
vii. Suitable packing shall be used to ensure that scaffolding does not damage erected stone, marble,
granite or other finished works.
viii. Work on the upper stages of the super structure shall not be allowed to damage or disfigure the work in
the lower levels.
ix. Unless special precautions are taken for winter working, the use of mortar shall be avoided when the
thermometer reads 2 degree and falling and the joints shall be protected.
x. Any disfigurement, discoloration or imperfection whatsoever due to any reason shall not be accepted
and the Contractor shall either rectify the same or redo the work at no extra cost.
i. Tolerances
The size of aluminum work shall not vary by more than ± 1.5mm.
j. Cleaning and Completion
On completion of the first area of aluminum work and glazing and the quality of work accepted, the
same shall be cleaned of all dust and other deposits.
This area of aluminum work and glazing shall be retained as a sample of the finished work, wherein the
effects of weather, movement and other conditions shall be reviewed over a period not exceeding one
month and the effects if found leading to unsatisfactory work, shall be remedied by the Contractor,
until a satisfactory sample of finished work is accepted. All other work shall thereafter be completed to
the same standard and quality as approved.
k. Acceptance Criteria
i. Acceptance of work at intermediate stage
The work executed on any day shall be checked at the end of that day or the next day before
commencement of further work. Any work found to be of unacceptable quality shall be duly rectified
to acceptable standards.
ii. Final Acceptance of Work
Various stages of approval are required to be met by the Contractor. Regardless of the acceptance of
work at intermediate stages, the final acceptance shall only be accorded once the entire work is
complete in one area of the building; after all other works as per this Contract have also been duly
completed and accepted.

172
59
 The Contractor shall ensure that the stone work is so constructed that it prevents rain water from
penetrating into the building and the rainwater falling or running down its external surface does not
cause permanent or significant temporary deterioration in its performances. All units and Joints
between units shall be designed to prevent ingress of water by capillary.
The Contractor shall ensure that the risk of attack or infestation by micro-organisms, fungi, insects and
other vermin is minimal and also that there is no risk of ingress of vermin into the building
l. Ironmongery
For fixing ironmongery and friction hinges, if the wall thickness of the extruded aluminum section is
not adequate to take the threading of the screws, the Contractor shall provide additional thickness with
built-up sections, etc., as required.
All ironmongery including sliding gear for sliding glazing/windows and the friction hinges for side
hung projected windows shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply
Catalogues and samples for approval of the Engineer.

5.11.1 Frameless Glass Door

Material
This is a clear 12mm toughened safety glass frameless shutter having a consulate top and bottom
self closing mechanism with a pivot connecting to a discrete metal patch fitting at the top and bottom
corners to the door.
Application
The 12mm thick clear toughened safety glass frameless shutter is fixed with the help of corner patch
fittings. The corner patch fittings are simply a bolt through glass metal fitting requiring a corner cut out
and hole in the glass. These discrete corner patch fittings provide a sleek and clean frameless look. The
lock body patch fitting can also be installed where there is a necessity to provide locking arrangements
for frameless shutter. The maximum size of frameless doors shutters using corner patch fittings should
not exceed from 1000mm X 2400mm. Bigger size doors should not be fixed with these fittings. The
figure 21.18.1 shows the fixing of frameless door shutters with top and bottom corner patch fittings.
Installation
The frameless toughened glass door shutters of required thickness as specified in the item should be
installed with the help of 304 grade stainless steel patch fittings of approved brand and manufacturer.
These fittings should be complete in all respect with top and bottom pivots and double action hydraulic
floor spring types fixing arrangement. These fittings should be based on a modular system, consisting
of a base unit, functional inserts, and clip-on covers in a wide range of finishes. The fittings should be
suitable to support the weight of the complete glass door in such a way that the movement of the door is
smooth and free. The fittings should be got approved from the engineer-in-charge and all the fixings etc.
shall be done as per manufacturer specification and corresponding codes described in the description of
the fitting.
5.11.2 Aluminum Glass Partition
Supply and Fixing of Slim Glass partition of 10/12mm Toughened Glass including frame, Profiles at
Top & Bottom & at sides. The profile size to be 45x25MM to be fixed on to the floor/wall/ ceiling as
per the architect design. Junction profile to be used at all Glass to Glass vertical joints, 90 Deg L
Junction Profiles and T Junction profiles necessary as per design. In case of Glass overall panel Over
panel Profile to be used. In case of Open glass edges EndProfile to be used.
The profiles shall be suitable for Glass thickness of 10/12/13. 52mm.The Profile shall be matt natural
anodized, the Profile Manufacturer to supply all the necessary clips, seals and fixing accessories for the
system.
All Profiles to be with 2 mm Gauge thickness Excluding 50-60 Micron of Powder coating.
The works shall be carried out by utilization of profiles available with the manufacturer as per the
approved list of makes. The installation shall be carried out with an installer certified / recommended
by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for approval of Engineer-in-charge
before commencement of works on site.
Mode of measurement: -
The payment shall be made on the basis of the installed area and shall include the cost of all operations
as specified above. The quoted rates shall include cost of all material, all hard wares, fixtures, Glass,
frame work, anchorage, labour, workmanship, tools, plants, scaffolding, hardware etc. for working at
all heights and levels.

173
60
5.11.3 Lacquered Glass
The works shall comprise providing and fixing of 4 to 6 mm thick Lacquered glass of approved colour
as per Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Fixed over 12mm BWP marine ply or RCC wall or any
other structure with mounted on plain clip as per manufacturers recommendations or directed by the
Engineer.
12mm thick BWP Marine ply
The material specifications are as follows
1 Density 650 kg per cum
2 Moisture content 8-10%
3 Bonding – BWP grade resin
4 Static bending strength – MOE:- Parallel to face grain > 6000 N/mm²; perpendicular to face
grain >4500 N/mm²
MOR: Parallel to face grain > 50 N/mm²; perpendicular to face grain > 45 N/mm²
1. Guarantee – 7 years against borer and termite
2. Tolerance
a. Length - +/-6mm
b. Width - +/- 3mm
c. Thickness - +/-5%
3. Preservative treatment:- GLP with CPP, ACC treatment
Lacquer Glass
a. Compressive strength Should be 1000MPa
b. Tensile strength Should be 40 MPa
c. Glass shall be fixed with a revolutionized system and should be ecofriendly, light weight, ultra
strong, transparent polymer clips.
d. Horizontal load capacity should not less than 30kg/ 100mm
e. Vertical pullout load >200kg/100mm.
f. Dry film thickness – 35 to 50 microns
g. Pendulum hardness - ≥100
h. Cross Hatch – max. 2
i. Salt spray test - ≥240 hours
j. Glass thickness tolerance - +/- 0.3mm
k. Size tolerance - +/- 2mm

5.11.4 Revolving entrance door / double

ASSA ABLOY RD3 and RD4 revolving doors
Power supply: 230 V, 50 Hz, mains fuse max 10 A,100-120 V, 50/60Hz, mains fuse max 16 A
Power consumption: 200 W /30 W restingAnodizing, clear or bronze
Lighting LED 5 W: 30 W /60 W Internal height non-standard (2100 - 2600 mm) Fascia height non-
standard (200-1250 mm) Powder-coated finish (RAL colours) Stainless steel cladding
5.11.5 Entrance glass sliding doors
Automatic Sliding door operator, Make: ASSA ABLOY SL 500ST 4140 mm, design to meet
ANSI/BHSM 156.10 standards and based on the product category rules :IBU: PCR automatic doors,
automatic gates and revolving door system, PCR tested.
The CE marking for the product takes into account the proof of conformity with harmonizes norms:
EN 16005:2012/AC:2015: Power operated pedestrian door sets- safety in use- requirement and test
methods, EN 61000-6-2:2005: Electromagnetic compatibility, EN 61000-6-3, EN60335-1, EN ISO
1849, EN 16005, IEC 60335-1, IEC 60335-2-103, UL 325, DIN 18650Environmental product
declaration in accordance withISO 14025 and EN 15804. Tested for Durability of 1 Million Cycles, for
frameless glass door application, modular design including internal cover. and with 12 mm clear
toughened glass for 1/ 2 Nos sliding door panel, Operator to be mounted on MS-Box Section/Equalant.
Operator Finish should be Silver Anodized E6/C0, with operator dimensions Maximum (H x D) :
123x150 mm and of length as required to suit the opening size given below.
The track profile should be separate from the main profile for enabling reduction in vibration insulation
and easy maintenance. Microprocessor- controlled control unit, Self-learning. Maximum power
consumption of 250W.Power Supply100-240V AC/ -+ 10%/50/60 Hz. Auxiliary voltage of 24V DC,
min. 1000mA Minimum clear opening width COW 800MM (single) and 1000mm (bi-part) Maximum
clear opening width COW 3000mm. Minimum and maximum opening height 3000mm (higher on

174
61
 demand). Door weight single 240kg Door weight bi-parting door 2 x 200kg Opening and closing force
Friction related, adjustable from 30 to 190N Height x Depth150mm (H) x 123mm (D). Opening and
closing speed single 0.85m/sec (depends on perf. Level). Opening and closing speed, bi-part 0.85m/sec
(depends on perf. Level). Hold open time 0 to 60 sec. Ambient Temperature -20 °C to +50 °C.
Humidity max 85%. Class of protection(dust). IP 20 EPD Declaration available convenience mode
(battery-powered) 24V battery (optional). 3 different performance level (Standard, High &
Exceptional). Easy performance upgrade possibility (when the use of building change). Operation
"mode selector with service indication diode". Combination of dual mode selectors. Maximum distance
between mode selector and door system (500 metre). Interlock system, Synchronization, Partial close
function (auto airing), Auto width, Prolonging of hold open time, opening delay (adjustable delay to
ensure that the lock "unlock") open/close time-out (when close impulse is forgotten the door will close
by timeout it selves). Nurse function (adjustable opening width depending on the need).
5.11.6 Aluminum Louvre System
Aluminum louvered systems - are to be fully prefabricated assembled units completed with factory
finish and installed on to site fixed channel and brackets. Includes interface details such as fire seal,
flashing, sealants, extruded capping, insulations, brackets and any sub frame as required. All exposed
aluminum will be in white colour powder coated finish and the works shall be complete as directed by
the Engineer.

5.12 Woodwork and Joinery

The provision of the latest revisions of the following I.S. codes shall form a part of the
specifications IS 205 Specifications for non-ferrous metal butt hinges IS 287 Recommendation for
maximum permissible moisture content of timber used for different purposes. IS 303 Specification
for plywood for general purpose. IS 362 Specification for parliamentary hinges IS 419 Specification
for putty for the use on window frames IS 883 Code of practice for design of structural timber in
building. IS 1003 Specification for timber paneled and glazed shutters Part II - Window and
ventilator shutters. IS1200 Method of measurement of building and civil part XXI Engineering
works - wood work and joinery. IS:1341 Specification for steel butt hinges IS:1658 Specification
for fiber hard boards IS: 1761 Specification for transparent sheet glass for glazing and framing
purposes. IS: 3087 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density for structural timber in
building) Other I.S. codes not specifically mentioned here but pertaining to woodwork and joinery
form part of these specifications, along with CPWD specifications for all seasoning,
workmanship, fitting and finishing.
5.12.1 Plywood/ Flexible Plywood:
Plywood of 4/6/9/12/19mm thick layered flat pressed teak wood bonded using only phenol formaldehyde
synthetic resin confirming IS code 303. All plywood shall be of Boiling Waterproof type. All exposed
plywood edged shall have PVC lipping. When decorative plywood is used for panelling, the same shall be
of matching grains. All Plywood shall be treated for Termite, Borer proofing and painted with fire retardant
paint.
5.12.2 Particle/ Mdf/ Hdf Boards
Particle/ MDF/ HDF boards of 6 /9 /12 /18 /25 /32mm thick particle board of approved make confirming to
E1 – Emission Class as European Standards BS EN 13986 or as American Standards ANSI A208.2 – 1994
manufactured without using any formaldehyde resins or if not possible Phenol formaldehyde based resins
shall be used with edges to have PVC lipping.
5.12.3 Timber –Teak Wood
The Teak wood should be of best quality available First quality teak wood in India. It should be well
seasoned and free from gap, knots, wraps, cracks, and other defects. All woodwork shall be planed and
neatly, truly finished to the exact dimensions. All joints shall be neat and strong, truly finished to the exact
dimensions shown in the drawings. All joints shall be neat and strong, truly and accurately fitted and glued
before being fitted together. All screws used in woodwork shall be of steel nettle fold make.
5.12.4 Salwood
The salwood used shall be Gumsal. It should be well seasoned and free from gap, knots, wraps, cracks, and
other defects. All woodwork shall be planed and neatly truly finished to the exact dimensions. All joints
shall be neat and strong, truly finished to the exact dimensions shown in the drawing. All joints shall be neat
and strong and, truly and accurately fitted and glued before being fitted together. All screws used in the
woodwork shall be of steel nettle fold make. All salwood sections shall be treated for Termite / Borer
proofing.

175
62
 5.12.5 Veneer:
The veneer used shall be of 4.6mm thickness with minimum of 4mm thick BWP (Boiling Waterproof type)
plywood backing of approved make.

5.13 Timber Fire and Acoustic Doors

This specification establishes the materials, constructional and performance requirements for all Fire
Doors works used at any location.
5.13.1 General Requirements
The Fire Doors and Acoustic Fire Doors shall not collapse during the rated period of fire under
the specified fire conditions and shall provide safe access to the escape route. All the work shall
be carried out in a workman like manner to the entire satisfaction of the Employers
Representative. The work shall be guaranteed in quality of material and workmanship. Variations
in the specifications shall not be permitted unless they are agreed by the Employers Representative
in writing.
5.13.2 Codes and Specifications
All the specifications for building works shall conform to the latest Indian Standard Codes of
practice unless otherwise specified for local material.
Any reference to Indian Standard Code of practice shall mean the latest version of the relevant
standards issued, upto the date of receipt of tender documents.
The complete assembly of the doors i.e., frame, shutter, vision glass and hardware shall have fire rating as
required and shall confirm to:
1. IS 3614 Part II -1992. Fire Resistance test & performance criteria
2. BS:476, Part-6 & 7 Surface spread of flame test for FR Paint.
3. BS:476, Part-20 Method for determination of the fire resistance of elements of construction
(general principles).
4. BS:476, Part-22 Method for determination of the fire resistance of non-load bearing elements
of construction.
5. BS: 6206:1981 Specification for impact performance requirements for float safety glass and
safety plastics foruse in buildings.
6. EN:12600 Specification for impact performancerequirements for flat safety glass.
7. EN:1634 Part-1-1999 Fire resistance tests for Glazed doors & Partition and openable windows
8. EN:1364 Part-1-1999 Fire
resistance tests for non-load bearing elements.
In the absence of any specifications / relevant code of practice for any material or
workmanship, the National Code of practice shall be followed in consultation with the
Employers Representative.
5.13.3 Testing and Certification
The Fire Doors and Acoustic Fire Doors must be tested by National or international reputed and
approved test house. Along with all material tests, the complete system along with the framing
shall be tested in accordance with the criteria of BS 476: Part 22 1987/EN 1634/EN1363 along
with necessary hardware.
Prototype Test certificate for fire rating of doors from CBRI, Roorkee for earlier tested design
shall be attached along with manufacturers test certificate. Provisions/reinforcement for fixing all
fixtures shall be built in on the doors prior to the supply.
The Client holds the right to get the door tested for fire rating at the cost of the contractor/vendor.
In case the Engineer-in-charge desires to get the doors tested then one door including shutter,
frame and all fittings shall be selected at random out of the entire lot and shall be tested for two-
hour fire rating. The testing shall be got done from CBRI, Roorkee. The cost of material for
testing and transportation / packing & other incidental testing charges shall be borne by the
contractor. In case the door fails to meet the requirement, the entire lot shall be rejected.
5.13.4 Submissions Required Prior to Fabrication
Submit to the Employers Representative/Engineer before fabrication, complete system description
including the following information: Name of the manufacturers of products. Names address and
telephone numbers of local representatives for products. Types, model numbers and names of
products, and indication whether products are "off the shelf" or custom fabricated. Include
specific information on finishes - thickness, patented process name, process description and test
data. Detailed information on products to be manufactured specially for this project if required.

176
63
 Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and large- scale
details of specially fabricated products. Statement that the proposed system meets the regulatory
requirements, and all construction and warranty requirements specified; noting in detail any
exceptions.
5.13.5 Shop drawings
Provide Shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items. Layout
(sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly) Full size section of members. Methods of
assembly, type and location of exposed non-corrosive screws. Methods of installation, including
fixings, anchorage, caulking, flashings. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.
5.13.6 5.10.6 Samples:
The Contractor shall fabricate and install full size specimens of the Doors as called for by the
Engineer in Charge at the expense of Contractor.
5.13.7 5.10.7 Warranty:
The installation shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship/ materials, etc. for a minimum
period of TEN YEARS from date of completion. All faulty materials/workmanship shall be
replaced and restored to full operation at no cost to Owner within the guarantee period.
5.13.8 5.10.8 Fire Door Frame
Fixing of fire resistant 120min rated proprietary make timber door with Timber frame profile and
will be made out of 2nd class Teak Wood as approved by Engineer-in-charge of size & finish as
specified in the drawings.
Door frame of section as specified or as indicated in the drawings, with heat activated intumescent fire
seal strips of size 20 x 4 mm (for smoke sealing) provided in grooves on all three sides of the frame. The
frames shall have Provision for 4 nos. anchor bolt fasteners on each vertical jamb; 3 mm thick base
plate pre-punched cut outs to receive ironmongery.3 mm thick hinge back plate pre- drilled to
receive hinge screw. The frame shall be in three pieces bolted at top jamb to vertical jamb for direct
installation at site. The frame shall be fixed with 8 nos. 100 mm long, 10 mm dia metal dash
fasteners of approved brand and manufacture or as per direction of Engineer in charge. All cut
outs including hinge plates, strike plates have mortar guard cover. The frame shall be primed with
zinc phosphate staving primer and finished with fire retardant paint of approved colour.
5.13.9 Fire Door Shutter
The Fire Door shutters shall be52mm thick tested as per BS:476 Part- 20 & 22 & IS 3614 Part-2
for stability, integrity and thermal insulation. Recommended fire door shall have doors tested at
CBRI vide test report FR No. 0291 for maximum rating of 2hrs tested either with or without
vision panel. Individual Test certificates should be available for glass used in vision liters
confirming the required fire ratings.
The core insulation should be asbestos free comprising of two 12 mm thick Calcium Silicate
boards of Pantech type, 100% without Asbestos, having density not more than 900Kg/M3 and
thermal conductivity 0.14 W/m*K with non-combustibility as per BS 476 part 4-1970 and class-1
surface spread as per BS-476 Part-7-1971.
These boards sandwiching 20 mm thick fire resistance insulation filler shall be faced with 03 mm
thick commercial ply facing on both faces. The shutter is to be provided with heat activated
intumescent fire seal strip of size 20mm x 4 mm mounted in the grooves of 2nd class teak wood
Exposed lipping on all sides except bottom. Shutters shall not have any visible screws or fasteners
on either face. The door construction shall be proprietary fire retardant & heat insulating suitable
for Stability, Integrity and Insulation, type tested at CBRI Roorkee as per IS 3614 part II and BS
476 part 20. The shutter should be maximum 52 mm thick with commercial ply facing and
provided with: Laminate of approved brand and manufacturer 1mm thick or Primed with wood
primer and finished with synthetic enamel paint of approved shade or Premium quality thermos-
setting paint in specified shade and finish, minimum 35 microns dry film thickness or Premium
quality fire resistant hard wood veneer and semi-glossy finish melamine polish (min 35 microns
dry film thickness)
5.13.10 Vision Panel For Fire Doors
Vision panel to be of size as mentioned in detailed drawings - thickness to withstand 2 hours fire
rated clear wired borosilicate glass make: Pyran
5.13.11 Fittings and accessories
The door shall be complete with ironmongery such as Stainless-Steel Ball Bearing Hinges, SS D-
Pull Handle, SS Push Plate, Mortice lock with Escutcheon and pin cylinder, Heavy Duty Door

177
64
 Closer, etc. The double shutter door shall be additionally provided with Flush Bolts and Easy
Clean Floor Socket. Shutters are to be fabricated in factory with pre-punched cutouts and
reinforcements to receive ironmongery.
Shutters to have pre-drilled hinge plated with hinge guard covers, concealed lock box with fixing
brackets and pre-tapped holes. Shutter to have door closer reinforcement pads provided at
appropriate location.
5.13.12 Ironmongery
The sets shall be as indicated and to be used for the respective doors, and indicated in the joinery
drawings.
All locks shall be master keyed floor wise and grand mastered for the whole building. All
cylinder locks shall include strike plates. The Ironmongery shall consist of sets as defined in the
detailed drawings with the following typical items:
a. Fire rated panic exit device
UL listed fire rated single/double leaf panic exit devices tested in accordance with BS EN 1125: 1997 & BS
EN 179: 1997, EN 1670 (Corrosion Resistant), & BS 476 Part 22 (for fire rating) shall be provided at
locations as specified in drawings. The device shall be fixed with necessary hardware as recommended
by the manufacturer and shall have provision for Access controlled locking system.
b. Fire rated door closer
Fire rated door closer tested in accordance with BS:476 Part 22 (for fire rating) and BS EN 1154 shall be
provided wherever required. The door closer shall be fixed with necessary hardware asrecommended by
the manufacturer. A minimum one-year warrantee is required for the product.
c. Fire rated mortice lock
Supply and fixing of Fire Rated Mortice Cylindrical Lock with Lever handle 80mm tested to 100000
cycles of approved make along with the fire rated door for 2 hrs. fire rating from CBRI Roorkee as per
approved by Engineer in charge.
d. Tower bolt-
Supply and fixing of Stainless-Steel concealed Tower Bolt of 304 grade of approved make of size 10
mm dia rod approved make of size 10 mm dia rod and 250 mm long as per approved by Engineer in
charge.
e. Pull handle-
Supply and fixing of stainless steel 304 Grade D - Type pull handle of size 300mm long 22mm dia of
approved made as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge
f. Push Plates
Supply and fixing of stainless steel 304 Grade push plate of size 300mm x100mm of approved made as
per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
g. Door Coordinator-
Supply & fixing of door coordinator for Co- ordination of double leaf door of approved make as per
approved by Engineer in charge.
h. SS Ball Bearing Hinges-
Providing and Fixing SS Ball Bearing Hinges of size 102 x 76 x 3mm(4"X3"X3mm) complete with SS
Screws of approved make.
5.13.13 Sealants
Submit Manufacturer’s product specifications. Handling installation/curing instructions and
performance test data sheets for each elastomeric product proposed. Submit test report certificates
for elastomeric sealants on aged performance, including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion,
cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression test, modulus of
elasticity, water absorption, and resistance to ageing, weight loss, deterioration through exposure to
heat, ozone and ultraviolet light.

5.14 Timber Acoustic Fire Doors

Wooden doors have to guarantee acoustic performance, special attention should be paid in the all-
around door´s perimeter. In order to avoid weakening the sound insulation of walls, all the acoustic
doors, shall have an all-round rubber seal (acoustic kit) and when higher acoustic performance is
required, a helical door hinge to ensure the right seal in the bottom side.
5.14.1 Acoustic Fire Door Shutter
The acoustic fire door shutter shall be 77mm thick, Non-metallic Asbestos Free Acoustic cum
fire/smoke door of 120 minutes fire rating, conforming to BS: 476 part 22 IS: 3614 part - II,

178
65
 suitable to achieve minimum 32db, sound reducing properties suitable for fixing in wooden door
frame of suitable section as specified above. The doors can be single or double leaf as specified in
drawings or as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
The shutter comprising of 2 non -combustible boards sandwiching 41 mm thick fire resistant &
acoustic insulation filler. The shutter is to be faced with 6mm thick commercial ply veneering on
both faces and wooden lipping all around the shutter with heat activated intumescent fire seal strip
of size 20x4mm on all sides except bottom (for smoke sealing) both in frame & shutter.
The door shall have suitable arrangement for the provision for acoustic seals for sound reduction
properties. The shutter is to be fitted with the frame with the help of SS ball bearing hinges
including all types of acoustic seals.
The frame is to be fitted with Acoustic seals of approved make as per the details given below For
perimeter of frame as per IS 1212. For meeting point of double leaf as per IS 7061. Automatic
drop seal for the bottom of the shutters-IS 8010

5.15 Steel Fire Doors and Frames

5.15.1 Acoustic Performance
Doors have to guarantee acoustic performance, special attention should be paid in the all-around
door´s perimeter. In order to avoid weakening the sound insulation of walls, all the acoustic doors,
shall have an all-round rubber seal (acoustic kit) and when higher acoustic performance is
required, a helical door hinge to ensure the right seal in the bottom side. Steel fire doors & frames
& assemblies. Vision Panels, frame trim in doors.
5.15.2 Submittals
Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and
model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and
fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
5.15.3 Shop Drawings:
Show the following:
Elevations of each door design.
Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
Coordination of Doors with works of other Vendors & their requirements.
Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for
doors and frames.
5.15.4 Quality Assurance
Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with CBRI testing standards, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction (CBRI), for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing according to IS 3614 Part 2.
5.15.5 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
Shutters to be wrapped in protective 70-micron polyethene sheets & duly strapped. All frames &
shutters to be duly marked as per as per approved door schedule for easy identification at site.
The doors and frames shall be cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit
and job storage. Additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
frames shall be provided.
Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is
found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are
acceptable to Engineer in Charge. Damaged items that cannot be repaired shall be removed and
replaced as directed.
All knocked down frames shall be stacked flat & shutters vertically on minimum 4-inch- (100-
mm-) high wood blocking under cover in ventilated areas. Provide spaces between stacked doors
to permit air circulation.
5.15.6 Sequencing and Scheduling
Submit data and schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of schedule must

179
66
 precede fabrication of units that must be built into other work.
Products, Manufacturers, as per approved list
5.15.7 Materials
Steel Sheet, General: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in IS 277, are minimums
for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
Honeycombed Kraft paper core. Borosilicate clear toughened Glass.
Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer, suitable as a base for specified finish
paints such as Zinc Phosphate Stoving Primer (35 microns DFT)
Thermosetting Paint (35 microns DFT)
Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units suitable for type of wall construction, and
as follows.
Provide square profile stops with mitered corners for glazing. Use galvanized items for units built
into exterior walls.
Provide countersunk flat or small oval head fasteners where exposed to view.

5.16 Hollow Metal Fire Door (2 Hours Fire Rating) With Honey Comb Core
Fire door shall be 2 hour fire rated and door quality shall be approved by CBRI and tested
conformed to IS : 3614 Code or its Equivalent British Standard.
Unless otherwise specified, maximum size of door in this type:
Single shutter door :1200 mm x 2400mm Double shutter door:2000 mm x 2400 mm For doors
above 2200 mm height (Single Doors) and 2400 mm height (Double Door) the options shall be: A
man operation door of size above 2049 mm height shall be provided with a removable panel /
fixed panel on top.
The construction of above panel shall be designed similar to that of a shutter in case of flush panel
to match the exteriors.
5.16.1 Frame
a) Material - Frame to be manufactured from 1.60 mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel sheets complying with
latest IS 277 Code or its Equivalent British Standard.
b) Profile - Door frame profile to be double/ single rebated of dimensions & bending radius as per relevant
IS code, Manufacturers specifications & approved drawings.
c) Manufacture - Frame to be manufactured from 1.60 mm thick galvanized steel sheet to the specified
profiles and dimensions. Frames manufactured at factory shall be knock down form with butt joints for
bolted assembly at site.
d) Door frame preparations Frames to be provided with 3 mm thick back plates on all jambs withprovision
for anchor bolt fixing to wall openings. All frames to have reinforcement pads for fixing of door closer,
at appropriate location as per manufacturers recommendations.
e) Frames to have factory finish, pre-punched cut outs to receive specific hardware and ironmongery.
f) Frames to be provided with hinge plates 3 mm thick pre-drilled to receive hinges for screw mounted
fixing. All cut outs including hinge plates, strike plates to have mortar guard covers from inside to
prevent cement, dust ingress into cut outs at the time of grouting.
g) Frames to have rubber shutter silencer on strike jambs for single shutter frames and on the head jambs
for double shutter frames.
h) Finish - Door frames to be suitably cleaned with solvents and etch premiered for receiving primer and
top coats. Door frames to be premiered in zinc phosphate stoving primer (35 microns DFT). Door
frames to be finished in thermos setting Polyurethane Paint (35 microns DFT) of approved colour and
make as specified.
5.16.2 Fire door shutter
a) Material - Fire door shutter to be manufactured from 1.25 mm (18 gauge) galvanized sheets
conforming to latest IS : 277 Code of GPL Grade with Z 120 coating or its Equivalent British Standard.
b) Manufacture - Shutters to be press formed to 46 mm thick double skin hollow door with lock seam
joints at stile edges. Shutters to have no visible screws or fasteners on either face. Internal reinforcement to
be provided at top bottom and stile edges for desired fire rating.
c) Door Shutter Cores Shutters to be provided with honeycomb kraft paper core to be bonded to the inner
faces of the shutter.
d) Door shutter preparations Shutters to be factory prepared with pre-punched cutouts and reinforcements
to receive ironmongery as per final finish hardware schedule. The shutter should have an interlocking
arrangement at this stile edges for flat surface on either side.

180
67
e) Shutters to have pre-drilled hinge plates with hinge guard covers. Shutters with locks to have concealed
lock box with lock fixing brackets with pre-tapped holes.
f) For shutter with door closer reinforcement pads to be provided at appropriate location as per
manufacturers design.
g) All ironmongery preparation to have adequate reinforcement for flushes fixing at site. Vision panel for
Fire rated door
h) Vision panel to be provided with Borosilicate Clear Toughened Glass of the thickness 6 mm for upto two
hours fire rating. Glass to be fixed with clip on frames for square and rectangular vision panels and
with spin turned rings for circular vision panels and Glazing Tape with one side adhesive. Vision
Panels to be fixed with clip-on frames for square and rectangular Vision Panels with no visible screws.
Unless otherwise specified standard sizes are 200 mm x 300 mmand 360 mm diameter.
i) Finish - Shutters to be suitably cleaned with solvents and etch premiered for receiving primer and top
coats. Shutters to be premiered in zinc phosphate stoving primer (35 microns DFT). Shutters to be
finished in thermos setting Polyurethane paint (35 microns DFT) of approved colour and make as
specified.

5.16.3 Fabrication
a) General:
Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with relevant IS standards (IS 3614 & IS 277) and to be
rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels,
and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral
part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick (old 16 gauge), metallic-coated
steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.
Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from cold-rolled sheet steel.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction of the type specifiedthat produces a door
complying with CBRI tests.
Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not
more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom.
Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by IS 3614. Single Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square
edge, unless beveled edge is indicated. Tolerances: Comply with by IS 3614.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot
rolled steel sheet.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
5.16.4 Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies:
At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating
door and frame assemblies and tested according to IS 3614 on fully operable door assemblies.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg
F (2.33 W/sq. m x K) or better.
5.16.5 Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies:
Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type,
tested according to IS 3614.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
requirements as per good practice for door and frame preparation for hardware.
a) Door frame
preparation:
Frames to be provided with 3 mm thick back plates on all jambs with provision for anchor bolt fixing
to wall openings. All frames to have reinforcement pads for fixing of door closer, at appropriate
location as per manufacturer’s details.
Frames to have factory finish-pre-punched cut outs to receive specific hardware and ironmongery.
Frames to be provided with hinge plates 3 mm thick pre-drilled to receive hinges for screw mounted
fixing. All cut outs including hinge plates, strike plates to have mortar guard covers from inside to

181
68
 prevent cement, dust ingress into cut outs at the time of grouting.
Frames to have rubber shutter silencer on strike jambs for single shutter frames and on the head jambs
for double shutter frames.
b) Door shutter preparation:
Shutters to be factory prepared with pre-punched cutouts and reinforcements to receive ironmongery as
per final finish hardware schedule. The shutter should have an interlocking arrangement at this stile
edges for flat surface on either side.
Shutters to have pre-drilled hinge plates with hinge guard covers. Shutters with locks to have concealed
lock box with lock fixing brackets with pre-tapped holes.
For shutter with door closer reinforcement pads to be provided at appropriate location as per
manufacturer’s design.
All ironmongery preparation to have adequate reinforcement for flush fixing at site.
For shutter with door closer reinforcement pads to be provided at appropriate location as per
manufacturer’s design.
Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
Fabricate interior knockdown, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions.
For exterior applications and frames installed in masonry, fabricate frames with mitered or coped and
continuously welded corners, rabbets, stops, and seamless face joints. Provide welded frames with
temporary spreader bars.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the following:
5.16.6 Hinges:
Bottom Hinge: 255mm from door bottom to bottom of hinge. Top Hinge: 125mm from door top to top
of hinge.
Centre Hinge: Centre between top and bottom hinge.
Extra Hinge: 150mm from bottom of top hinge to top of extra hinge. Lock: 965mm from finished
floor to centre of lever or knob.
Push Bar: 1120mm from bottom of door to centre of bar.
Push Plate: 1120mm from bottom of door to centre of plate.
Pull Plate: 1065mm from bottom of door to centre of pull.
Exit Device: 1010mm from finished floor to centre of pad.
Deadlock Strike: 1120mm from floor, centered.
Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.8-mm steel sheet.
Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass,
louvers, and other panels in doors.
Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
Astragals: As required by applicable standards to provide fire ratings indicated.
5.16.7 Finishes
Shutters to be suitably cleaned with solvents and etch premiered for receiving primer and top coats.
Shutters to be premiered in zinc phosphate stoving primer (35 microns DFT).
Shutters to be finished in thermos setting Polyurethane paint (35 microns DFT) of approved colour and
make as specified.
5.16.8 Execution
a) Door frame fixing
The door frames should be assembled adjacent to the place of installation as the frames are not
designed for transporting in an assembled condition. After assembly it is to be ensured that all threaded
preparations are covered from the back of the frame using self-adhesive strip to prevent penetration of
mortar back-fill into screw threads. The head member of assembled frame shall be positioned against
jambs ensuring correct alignment and secured using M8 x 20 long plated bolts together with nuts
spring and flat washers. The assembled frame shall be kept in position within the opening by means of
bracing. In order to correctly position the frame against finished floor level or equalize on adjustable
floor anchors where specified, shim shall be used under jambs. The frame shall be checked for
squareness, alignment, twist etc. with carpenters’ bevel and plumb.
A tie rod shall be fixed to the frame during installation to ensure the correct dimensions between the
frame rebated and the same may be removed after installation.
Where a 2nd fix application is required a shim detail is suggested to take up gap between frame and

182
69
 existing opening.
Existing masonry wall openings Metal expansion shields Brace, position, level etc. Mark all positions
of fixings on wall.
Remove frame and drill wall to appropriate specified size. Fit rod anchor shells metal expansion bolts
into the wall. Fit jamb spacer bracket into back of frame profile. Reposition frame back into opening
and realign.
Lightly screw machine screws into shells, shim behind frame.
Slowly tighten screws continually checking plumb, square etc. Finally ensure frames are not deformed
as tightened.
After fixing the frame shall be grouted with cement mortar 1:3 or Plaster of Paris or Gypsum powder
as approved. Gap between frame and wall to be closed by cement pointing using cement mortar 1:3.
Back full the frame through holes provided and insert nylon plugs.
b) Door shutter fixing
Fix all the hardware to the door shutter like hinges, flush bolts, bolts, mortice locks, door closer, door
stoppers, handles etc. with the appropriate screws and bolts supplied.
The shutter is to be then fixed to the frame which is already installed. Align the shutter to match the
hardware to the cutouts in the frame. Tighten the hinge screws. iii Application of Fire / Smoke UL 10
C / UL 1784 (2001) classified seal (for smoke check if specifically required) iv. Astragals: As required
to provide fire ratings indicated.
5.16.9 Adjusting, Cleaning & Calibration
Cleanup: Remove excess weld splatter by grinding flush with adjacent surfaces, without grinding skips
or gouging parent metal. Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings for surface preparation, primer
and field applied finish coats.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer & apply final finish wherever required.
Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
Manufacturer/Distributor's Field Services: After installation is complete, provide the services verify
installation of hardware is complete and properly adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract
Documents and final approved submittals. Further adjust hardware as necessary during personnel.
Check closers to ensure proper operation.
Check latch set, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed and adjusted to ensure proper operation.
a. Verify levers are free from binding.
Ensure latch bolts and dead bolts are engaged into strike and hardware is functioning. Report findings,
in writing, outlining corrective actions and recommendations.
Final Adjustment: Whenever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to occupancy of
a space or area, as applicable, return to work during the week prior to occupancy, and make final check
and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to
restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate
for operation of heating, ventilating and cooling equipment.
For door closers, provide final adjustment of door closers to ensure that all doors close and latch
properly to prevent false door held alarms or intrusions and compliance with maximum opening
pressure.
Adjust closer to complete full closing cycle in less than 4 to 6 seconds without abrupt change of speed
between "sweep" and "latch" speeds.
Adjust "back-check" according to manufacturer's instructions.
Power Up and Test: Provide powered up testing of doors in the presence of the installer of electrified
hardware, as applicable, to ensure final adjustments to electrified components.
During final adjustment of hardware. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper adjustment and
maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes. This training shall be coordinated with training
conducted in accordance with Demonstration and Training.
5.17 Flush Door Shutters
Solid core flush door shutters shall be of 5 ply construction and approved make generally conforming to the
I.S. specification 2202-1991 (specification for wooden flush door shutter- solid core type). The finished
thickness of the shutter shall be as mentioned in the schedule of items.

183
70
 5.17.1 Face Veneers:
Commercial face veneers used in flush door shutter shall conform to the requirements laid down in I.S. 303
-1989 specifications for ply wood for general purposes (revised) interior grade.
Decorative face veneers used in flush door shutters shall be of grade - I and shall conform to the
requirements of decorative veneer specified for grade - I decorative ply wood in I.S. 1328 - 1982
specifications for veneered decorative ply wood interior grade. Thickness of veneers shall not exceed 1 mm.
5.17.2 ADHESIVES:
Phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin (liquid type adhesives) conforming to I.S. 848 specifications for synthetic
resins shall be used for bonding.
LIPPING :
The lipping shall be of best quality hard wood variety unless otherwise mentioned. In case teak wood
lipping is mentioned in the schedule of quantities, it shall conform the specification for best quality teak
wood. The internal lipping alround the shutter sides shall be one piece of size not less than 25 mm. wide and
depth equal to the thickness of core. In case of double leaf shutters, the meeting stiles shall have lipping of
not less than 35 mm. deep. Thickness of external lipping, wherever specified in the item, shall not be more
than 10mm and not less than 6mm.
WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH :
All the faces of the door shutter shall be at right angles. The shutter shall be free from twist and warp in its
plane. Both faces of the door shutters shall be sanded to a smooth even texture. The workmanship and finish
of the face panels shall be in conformity with those specified in I.S. 303 - 1989 specification for plywood for
general purpose (revised) for commercial type and I.S. 1659 - 1990 specification for block boards for
decorative type.
TESTS :
Tests shall be conducted as per mandatory test requirement, by the Department at contractors cost and
acceptance criteria shall be as per I.S. 2202. The flush door shutters manufactured shall be inspected for its
quality and workmanship and tested at the factory before dispatching. All facilities shall be extended for
such inspection and testing. The sampling and testing shall be as per the IS requirements and all costs
towards test including sample for destructive tests shall be borne by the contractor.
TOLERANCE :
Tolerance on nominal width and height shall be (+/-) 3 mm. Tolerance on nominal thickness shall be (+/-)
1.5mm. The thickness of the individual shutter shall be uniform throughout.
MISCELLANEOUS :
Wherever mentioned in the Schedule of quantities, vision panels, venetians, plastic laminates, push plates
etc. shall be provided in the flush doors.
The vision panels shall be of size mentioned in the drawing and shall be provided with teak wood lipping
alround the glass. The glass shall be 4 mm. thick or as specified of best quality (M/s. Triveni, I.A.G., Shree
Vallabh or equivalent approved), free from defects.
Teak wood venetians or louvers shall generally conform to relevant specifications of timber. Necessary
grooves and rebate in frames shall be provided as per drawing.
Formica or approved equivalent plastic laminate of required design, required shade and colour shall be
provided and fixed on flush door to the required size on any side of the shutter as shown in drawing. It shall
be fixed with Fevicol or any other approved adhesive. Fixing shall be done in such a way that there shall not
be any air gap, warpage or undulations on the surface. Finished surface of formica shall be cleaned with wax
polish. The shutters shall be painted on commercial facing side with two coats of synthetic/flat oil paint of
approved shade and make over an approved coat of primer. The decorative veneer side of the shutter shall
be wax or french polished with two or more coats so as to render a satisfactory surface. The flush doors shall
be single leaf or double leaf type as mentioned in the schedule of quantities. In case of double leaf shutters,
the meeting of the stiles shall be rebated 20 mm. and shall be either splayed or square type and the T.W.
lipping around the meeting shall not be less than 35 mm. deep. The meeting stiles shall be in single piece.
Sufficient care shall be taken to prevent any damage and loss of shape during handling transporting,
stacking, fixing etc. The door shutters shall be handled with utmost care to prevent any surface damage,
warping etc.
5.18 Fire Resistant Glazed Doors, Windows & Partitions
a. GENERAL
The Fire resistant Glazed Doors (hereinafter termed as FRGD), Fire resistant Glazed windows
(hereinafter termed as FRGW) and Fire Resistant Glazed Partition (hereinafter termed as FRGP) shall
not collapse during the rated period of fire under the specified fire conditions and shall provide safe

184
71
 access tothe escape route.
b. CODES & SPECIFICATIONS
All materials, items, hardware etc. shall be subjected to approval by Engineer-In-Charge.
Necessary documentation/ test certificates shall be furnished by the Contractor from the manufacturer
before supply of material for approval by Engineer-in-charge. Each Door/Window and Partition shall
be provided with a small metal identification plate in suitable location indicating Fire rating, name of
the Manufacturer, date of installation and details of approved test house. Each Glazing pane shall carry
a permanent stamp of the manufacturer. The complete assembly of the doors i.e. frame, shutter, vision
glass and hardware shall have fire rating as required and shall confirm to:
i. EN 1634-1 Fire resistance and smoke control tests for door and shutter assemblies, openable
windows and elements of building hardware - Part 1: Fire resistance test for door and shutter
assemblies and openable windows
ii. EN 1364-1 Fire resistance tests for non-load bearing elements – Part 1: Walls
iii. EN 410 Determination of luminous and solar characteristics of glazing.
iv. EN 12600 Glass in Buildings – Pendulum test – Impact test and classification for flat
c. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
The FRGD, FRGW & FRGP shall be supplemented with appropriate certification by fire test lab, for
applicable or higher dimension with complete description of the architectural components and
hardware for FRGD, FRGW and FRGP for which the approval is given. Along with the material tests,
the complete system along with the framing shall be tested in accordance with the criteria of EN1634-1
for door/window and EN1364-1 for partition. The installation of the fire rated system shall confirm to
requirement of test evidence. The choice of hardware and/or glazed accessories shall be as per test
evidence.
d. Fire Resistant Doors/Windows and Partitions
i. Frame for Fire Resistant Glazed Door / Windows Frame for Door/Window of 120 min fire rating shall
be made of section 50 x 60 mm on horizontal side & 35 x 60 mm on vertical sides having built in
rebate made out of 1.6 mm thick GI sheet (Zinc coating not less than 120gm/m²) suitable for mounting
120 min Fire Rated Glazed Door Shutters.
The frame shall be filled with Mineral wool Insulation having density min 96Kg/m³. The frame will
have a provision of G.I. Anchor fasteners 14 no’s ( 5 each on vertical style & 4 on horizontal style of
size M10 x 80 ) suitable for fixing in the opening along with Factory made Template for SS Ball
Bearing Hinges of Size 100x89x3mm for fixing of fire rated glazed shutter . The frame shall be
finished with a approved fire resistant primer or Powder coating of not less than 30 micron in desired
shade as per the directions of Engineer - in- charge. (Cost of SS ball bearing hinges is excluded).
ii. Frame for Fire Resistant Glazed Partitions
Frame for non load bearing fixed fire resistant glazed Partition for 120 min Fire Rating shall be made
out to a profile of dimension 60mm x 70 mm of 1.6 mm thick galvanized steel sheet as per test
evidence suitable for fixing fire rated glass for 120 min of both integrity & radiation control (EW120)
& minimum 15 min of insulation (EI15).The profile has to be fixed to the supporting construction by
means of anchor fasteners of size M10 x 80, every 150 mm from the edges and every 500 mm (approx.)
c/c. The frame shall be filled with mineral wool insulation of density min 96kg/m³. and finished with a
approved fire resistant primer or Powder coating of not less than 30 micron in desired shade as per the
directions of Engineer - in- charge.
iii. Shutter for Fire Resistant Doors/Windows
Glazed fire resistant door shutters 60 mm thick of 120 min Fire Rating shall be confirming to IS:3614
(Part II) or EN1634-1:1999, tested and certified as per laboratory approved by Engineer-in-charge,
with suitable mounting on door frame, consisting of vertical styles, top rail & side rail 60 mm x 60 mm
wide and bottom rail of 110 mm x 60 mm made out of 1.6mm thick G.I. sheet (zinc coating not less
than 120gm/m²) duly filled mineral wool insulation having density min 96 kg/m³ and fixing with
necessary stainless steel ball bearing hinges of size 100x89x3mm of approved make, including
applying a coat of approved fire resistant primer or powder coating not less than 30 micron etc. all
complete as per direction of Engineer-in-charge (paneling to be paid for separately).
iv. Fire Resistant Glass for Doors/Windows and Partitions
Glazing to be fixed in fire resistant doors/window shutters and fixed Partitions with G.I. beading made
out of 1.6 mm thick G.I. sheet (zinc coating not less than 120 gm/m²) of size 20 x 33 mm screwed with
M4 x 38 mm SS screws at distance 75 mm from the edges and 150 mm c/c , including applying a coat
of approved fire resistant primer/powder coating of not less than 30 micron on G.I. beading, & special

185
72
 ceramic tape of 5 x 20 mm size etc complete in all respect as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. The
glass should be clear, toughened, interlayered, non-wired fire resistant having 11 mm minimum
thickness of approved brand with 120 minutes of fire resistance both integrity & radiation control
(EW120) and minimum 15 min of insulation (EI15) and having a sound reduction of more than 35dB
and LT of 85%. Glass shall be compliant to class 2B2/1B1 category of Impact Resistance as per EN
12600. The glass should be manufactured in UL & TUV audited Facility and including UL-EU
Certification. The maximum glazing size cannot be more than 1100 mm x 2200 mm (w x h) or 2.42 sq
mts in total area. The test report for the complete system (Glazed Door or Partition) will be considered
valid only if it contains the stamp and signature of the authorized signatory from the glass
manufacturer. (Actual glass size is to be measured at site for payments).
The complete assembly shall satisfy the given criteria of fire resistance - stability, fire integrity,
radiation control and insulation as per above mentioned rating required.
v. Vision Panel for Fire Door
Specifications for glass for Vision panels for Fire Rated Door shall be as per para-C above. Minimum
size of glass to be used for vision panels shall not be less than 350 mm x 350 mm.
vi. Deliverables By The Contractor
Following documentation/ drawings shall be furnished along with the Doors/window/partition.
i. Prototype Test Certificate by national/international test house
ii. Shop drawings
iii. Specification/ Manufacturer’s literature, Test certificates and other documentation for materials
and items intended to be used.
iv. Certificate indicating that design and installation of Doors and hardware conforms to norm laid
down by approved national/international test house.
v. Test report to be attested by Fire rated glass manufacturer.
vi. The Fire rated glass applicator has to be approved by Fire rated Glass Manufacturer has to
Submit the approved applicator certificate.
5.18.1 GLAZED FIRE DOOR
Detail Specification: LIFT LOBBY & CORRIDOR
Supply and installation of tested fully glazed fire rated latched double / single leaf door system for
Lift Lobby and corridor with 120 minutes of integrity, radiation control (EW 120) with
symmetrical (Bi-Directional) fire protection. The frames shall be imported cold rolled steel
profiles as per EN standard EN 10327. The door frames are cold rolled from 1.5 mm steel sheet
to form a profile of min 50 mm x 50 mm on all sides. The door shutter would have the top rail,
side rail and bottom rail dimensions of min 50 mm x 50 mm. The overall door opening shall be as
per tested evidence and tested as per EN 1634-1/ISO 834-1/ ISO 3009 in an accredited
laboratory. The glass must be made in India 14 mm clear 120 min fire rated for Integrity,
Radiation control (EW 120) and partial insulation (EI 20) Non-Wired Toughened Interlayered
glass with a light transmission of 86 % and a sound reduction of 38 dB and manufactured in
UL & TUV audited Facility and including UL-EU Certification and compliant to class 1(B)1
category of Impact Resistance as per EN 12600. The glass shall be tested and certified for no
formation of bubbles or yellowing after 5000 hours of exposure to UV radiation by TUV
Rhineland as per EN 12543-4. The glass shall provide bi-directional (Symmetrical) fire
protection.
The shutter should be fixed to the frame using Weld-on hinges of VDS, Dorma, Gaze or
equivalent of dimensions 179mm X 20mm. The profiles shall have groves to incorporate Fire
Resistance gasket. The glass should be held in its place with the help of steel beading and Kera
fix 2000 ceramic tape with cross section of 4 x 15 mm as per the test evidence. Beading should be
clipped on to Stainless Steel self-tapping screws fixed at a distance of 70 mm from the edges and
150 mm c/c henceforth. The glass panes are to be supported on non-combustible 6mm Calcium
Silicate setting blocks. The door shutter should be fitted with two-point latch lock with top shoot
bolt system and door closer of Dorma (TS 73V, TS 83V, TS93V), Gaze (TS 2000NV) or
equivalent. The doors shall have Stainless Steel lever handle and 70 mm euro key cylinder in the
latches. The inactive leaf should be fixed to the frame using tower bolt at meeting edge at top or as
per the tested evidence. The doors shall be manufactured in a TUV audited facility. The maximum
glazing size shall be as per the test certification. The profile has to be fixed to the supporting
construction by means of M10 or bigger steel bolts at every 150 mm from the edges and every 500
mm (approx.) c/c.

186
73
5.19 Miscellaneous Work
1.0 Signages
a. Way finding Signs
Directory Signage Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of (A) Digitally printed vinyl (3M 1220
Series) on HP Latex Printer pasted reverse side on 6mm thick acrylic sheet (1) Hanging with SS Chain
(Approx. 2ft.) 2) Mounted on wall with 1in. SS Mirror Screw Design, Composition, Supply &
Installation of (B) 4 inches. thick box made from MS pipe & cladded with 3mm Router cut ACP sheet,
LED Modules of Samsung or Equivalent with appropriate power supply & ISI mark Electrical fitting.
Inside Graphics on 3mm thick acrylic sheet with digitally printed 3M vinyl on HP Latex Printer
b. Name Plate
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of (1) 3MM thick acrylic plate with digitally printed 3M
vinyl on HP Latex Printer pasted on reverse side and fixing with SS Mirer screw.
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of (2) 3MM thick acrylic plate with digitally printed 3M
vinyl on HP Latex Printer pasted on reverse side and fixing with 0.50 inch. SS studs.
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of (3) 5MM thick acrylic plate with digitally printed 3M
vinyl on HP Latex Printer pasted on reverse side and fixing with 1 inch. SS studs.
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of (4) Supply & Installation of 5MM thick acrylic plate
with digitally printed 3M vinyl on HP Latex Printe pasted on both side and fixing with "D" clamp on
wall.
c. Glow Sign Board
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of 4-inch-thick ACP Box, MS pipe structure fix inside with
3mm Acrylic sheet with digitally printed 3Mbacklit vinyl on HP Latex Printer, Display both side, LED
Modules of Samsung or Equivalent with appropriate power supply & ISI mark
d. Auto glow/Night Glow Signage
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of Digitally printed auto glow fil on HP Latex Printer with
gloss vinyl pasted on 3mm acrylic sheet and fixing with SS Mirer screw/Double sided tap.
e. Infrormatry Kiosk
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of Panel Type a-Si TFT-LCD , Panel, Panel Size 58 inch,
Resolution 3840(RGB)×2160 , UHD, Display mode Super MVA, Normally Black, Trans missive
[[Pane look copyright, copy is strictly prohibited] IPS Family: AAS, ADS, AHVA, FFS, IPS, New
Mode2, PLS, SFT, Vista rich VA Family: ASV, HVA, MVA, PVA, SVA, UV2A, VA], Surface Anti-
Glare (Haze 1%), Hard coating (3H) Brightness 400 cd/m2 (Typ.), Contrast Ratio 5000:1 (Typ.),
Display Colors 1.07B (8-bit + Hi-FRC), Response Time 6.5 (Typ.)(G to G), Viewing Angle
88/88/88/88 (Typ.)(CR≥20) (L/R/U/D), Frequency 120Hz [[Pane look copyright, copy is strictly
prohibited] 120Hz (60HZ Input) : Embedded MEMC Circuit 120Hz+120Hz : 120Hz Panel+120Hz
Backlight 240Hz (60HZ Input) : Embedded MEMC Circuit], Lamp Type WLED [8S6P: 8 Serial, 6
Parallel], Signal Interface V-by-One 16 lane, Input Voltage
12.0 V (Typ.), Accessories : Wheel
f. LED/ Non lit Signage
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of 10 mm Acrylic Laser cut Letter Pasting on 4 mm ACP
sheet box, acrylic laser cut letters Polyurethane Coating (PU Coated, or Vinyl Pasted) in colour
specified with Internally lit LED, sign to be fixed on wall as per approved by the Institute.
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of 10 mm Acrylic Laser cut Letters Pasting on 4 mm ACP
Router cut sheet, acrylic laser cut letters Polyurethane Coating (PU Coated) in colour specified to be
fixed with concealed stainless-steel bolts.
g. Stainless Steel 3D LETTERS:
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of building facade LOGO &"BUILDING NAME" for
building facade, signage letters of Stainless Steel 304 graded 18swg laser sheet cut fabricated letters for
text: as per requirement & design, with 25mm lipping in 22swg Stainless steel sheet 304, Polyurethane
Coating (PU Coated) in color specified, with concealed lighting behind the letters in White LED
Modules of Samsung / Philips make in 0.72 watts, with requisite Power supply of Mean well branded
with2 years warranty, along with
Breaker and Legrand / L&T timer, to be mounted on Syntax junction boxto be fixed near sign location;
Power should be provided near sign locations; all wiring has to be concealed and should not be visible,
all fixtures should be in Stainless Steel / aluminum, concealed behind the letters.
h. Totem Signage

187
74
 (1) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of structural steel frame made out of medium duty 50mm
square pipe section, red oxide primer with two coat of synthetic enamel painting, providing & fixing
3/4mm thick polycarbonate sheet with 40% translucency, with graphics on singleside digitally printed
on UV cured 3M media or 3M external grade vinyl; totems to be internally illuminated with LED
power module double side, high output 7100 k, numbers as per design, 140 degree, at the distance as
recommended by General Electric , model "ECLAT"or equivalent.
(2) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of structural steel frame made out of medium duty 50mm
square pipe section, red oxide primer with two coat of synthetic enamel painting, providing & fixing
3/4mm thick polycarbonate sheet with 40% translucency, with graphics on both side digitally printed
on UV cured 3M media or 3M external grade vinyl;totems to be internally illuminated with LED power
module double side, high output 7100 k, numbers as per design, 140 degree, at the distance as
recommended by General Electric , model "ECLAT"or equivalent.
i. External Direction Signage:
(1) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of single sided non-lit External Multi Directional Signage
structural steel frame made out of medium duty 50mm square pipe section, gusset plate 6mm thick and
two base plates of size 400X400X10mm, red oxide primer with two coat of synthetic enamel painting,
fixing of base plate to foundation through anchor bolt , providing & fixing ACP Sheet 3mm incladding,
3M (3630/3650 series) Vinyl of background with High Intensity Prismatic (HIP) reflective sheet, self-
adhesive graphics with 3M Scotch Cal and mounting with 3M approved tensioning system etc.
complete as per drawing and specification.

(2) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of double sided non-lit External Multi Directional Signage
with pole of 72x72x2.5mm, structural steel frame made out of medium duty, 50mm & 25mm square
pipe section and base plate 300X300X10mm, red oxide primer with two coat of smoke grey shade
epoxy painting, fixing of base plate to foundation through anchor bolt, providing & fixing ACP Sheet
3mm in cladding, 3M Vinyl of background with High Intensity Prismatic (HIP) reflective sheet, self-
adhesive graphics with 3M Scotch Cal and mounting with 3M double sided VHB Tape etc. complete as
per drawing and Specification.
j. Outdoor Informative Signage
(1) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of Digitally Printed High Intensity Prismatic (HIP)
reflective sheet Pasted on 3mm ACP cladded 1 Inch MS Pipe frame fixed on wall or hanging with SS
chain"
(2) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of Digitally Printed High Intensity Prismatic (HIP
reflective sheet Pasted both side on 3mm ACP cladded 1 Inch MS Pipe box fixed on wall or hanging
with SS chain".
(3) Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of Digitally Printed High Intensity Prismatic (HIP)
reflective sheet Pasted both side on 3mm ACP cladded 1 Inch MS Pipe box fixed on 10ft tall
50mmx50mmx2mm MS Pole duly painted with base plate of 250mmx250mmx8mm"
k. Building Signage
Design, Composition, Supply & Installation of structural steel frame made out of medium duty 50mm
square pipe section, red oxide primer with two coat of synthetic enamel painting, providing & fixing
3/4mm thick polycarbonate sheet with 40% translucency, with graphics on singleside digitally printed
on UV cured 3M media or 3M external grade vinyl; signage to be internally illuminated with LED
power module double side, high output 7100 k, numbers as per design, 140 degree, at the distance as
recommended by General Electric , model "ECLAT"or equivalent.
l. Glow sign Board (Outdoor)
(1) “Supply and installation of double sided back-lit Signage including providing & fixing structural steel
frame made out of medium duty 25mm square pipe section, red oxide primer with two coat of synthetic
enamel painting, providing & fixing 26-gauge powder coted MS Sheet top, bottom & sides,echo solvent
printing on 3M Lumina backlit flex, T5 Tube light 40W with all fittings and including electric cable &
conduit provision etc. complete as per drawing and specification."
(2) “Supply and installation of Single sided back-lit Signage including providing & fixing structural steel
frame made out of medium duty 25mm square pipe section, red oxide primer with two coat of synthetic
enamel painting, providing & fixing 26-gauge powder coted MS Sheet top, bottom & sides,echo solvent
printing on 3M Lumina backlit flex, T5 Tube light 40W with all fittings and including electric cable &
conduit provision etc. complete as per drawing and specification."
2.0 Turnstile (Painted Stainless Steel)

188
75
 Material: Stainless steel
Material thickness: Machine: 1.5mm / Cover: 3.0 mm
Size: 1600 mm×200 mm × 1020 mm
Corridor width: <930mm Turnstile length: <440mm
Turnstile material: Tempered glass / AcrylicType: Standard / Collision avoidance
Input voltage: AC220V Control board voltage: DC24V
Control signal: Relay signal input Indicator light: green light for passing, red light is forbidden Light
power: DC 12V±5％
Speed: 35 people per minute
Card reader position: Custom madeOpen & Closing time: Adjustable
Access solution: IC card / fingerprint / facial recognition / QR codeMax.power consumption: 50W
Water & dust resistant: IP54 Operating temperature: -15℃ ～ 60℃
Relative humidity: 90%, non-condensing
3.0 Acrylic solid surface 6mm thick
The works shall comprise of providing and fixing 6mm thick Acrylic solid surface in approved colour
and shade in wall cladding over Brick/ RCC Walls over approved 10/12mm thick cement particle
board fixed to aluminum sections. Acrylic solid surface should be Antibacterial, anti-fungal, BWR heat
resistant, insulative & stain resistant Physical properties of acrylic solid surface shall be as described in
this document
Cement particle board
Distinct particle or fraction of wood or other lignocellulosic material produced mechanically for use as
the aggregate for a particle board. This may be in the form of flake, granule, shaving splinter and sliver.
Cement particle board comprises of the following
i. The minimum density of Cement particle board should be 1250 kg per cum
ii. Moisture content not more than 12 percent of total weight
iii. The maximum water absorption not more than 13 percent of total weight in 2hours and 25
percent in24hours
iv. Modules of rapture under following conditions
a. dry condition – 9N/mm2 (minimum)
b. wet conditions – 5.5N/mm2 (Specimens are soaked in water at 27 +/- 2°C for a period of 24 h)
Workmanship
The acrylic solid surface 6mm thick in sizes as indicated in the drawings shall be pasted over 10/12mm
thick Cement particle board using approved adhesive as above. The entire system shall be fixed over
aluminum tubular section 1.5mm thick anchored to Wall/RCC surface with fasteners in panel of size
600 x 600mm in line and level or as approved by the Engineer
4.0 Acrylic solid surface (Corian Counter): -
The works shall comprise of providing and fixing 10mm thick Acrylic solid surface in approved colour
and shade over Polished Kota stone with PU Sealant as per approved by Engineer. Acrylic solid
surfaceshould be Antibacterial, anti-fungal, BWR heat resistant, insulative & stain resistant
Physical properties shall be as follows
a. Tensile Strength: [6000-6800 psi];ASTM D 638.
b. Tensile Modulus: [1.4 -1.5 x 106 psi]; ASTM D 638.
c. Tensile Elongation: 0.4 % minimum; ASTM D 638.
d. Flexural Strength: [10,000 - 10,400 psi]; ASTM D 790.
e. Flexural Modulus: [1.13 – 1.2 x 106 psi]; ASTM D 790.
f. Thermal Expansion Coefficient: 1.37 – 1.8 x 10-5 in./in.oF; ASTM D 696.
g. Hardness (Barcol Impressor): 56 - 60; ASTM D 2583.
h. Impact Resistance: [69 in.] drop with no fracture; NEMA
i. Izod Impact: 0.28 (ft-lb.)/in.; ASTM D 256, Method A.
j. Light Resistance - Xenon: No effect; NEMA LD-3, Method 3.3.
k. Stain Resistance: Pass; ANSI Z 124.3, modified.
l. Wear and Cleanability: Pass; ANSI Z 124.3.
m. Fungi Resistance: Pass; ASTM G 21.
n. Bacterial Resistance: Pass; ASTM G 22.
o. Boiling Water Resistance: No effect; NEMA LD-3, Method 3.5.
p. High Temperature Resistance: No effect; NEMA LD-3, Method 3.6.
q. Weatherability: Delta E less than 5; ASTM G 155.

189
76
 r. Moisture Absorption: Less than 0.25 percent; ASTM D 570,
s. Specific Gravity: [minimum 1.7 gram/cm3 ]; ASTM
t. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class I and Class A; ASTM E 84.

Joint Adhesive: Methacrylate-based adhesive for chemically bonding solid surfacing seams. Color
complementary to solid surfacing sheet material. The joint adhesive shall be used of the same
manufacturer as the Acrylic solid surface.
Siliconized Acrylic Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex sealant. For general applications to fill gaps between
Acrylic solid surface sheet and at terminating substrates. The sealant shall be used as per manufacturers
recommendations.
Execution
a. Substrates must be sound, flat, smooth, and free from dust or other surfaceContaminants.
b. Commencement of work will constitute acceptance of substrates and conditions to receive the
work.
c. Provide product in the largest pieces available.
d. Install solid surfacing components plumb, level, and true according to approved shop
e. drawings and manufacturer’s published installation instructions. Use woodworking and
specializedfabrication tools acceptable to manufacturer.
f. Fix the Kota stone over the vanity/ Counter and make a oval shape hole of size 662 x 567 x 160
mmas per the approved drawings
g. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
h. Rout radii and contours to template.
i. Form joint seams with specified seam adhesive. Seams to be inconspicuous in
j. completed work. Seams in locations shown on approved shop drawings and acceptable to
manufacturer. Promptly remove excess adhesive.
k. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports
l. Fill gaps between countertop and terminating substrates with specified silicone sealant.
m. Rout cutouts to manufacturer’s template.
n. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.
o. The entire surface shall be buffed and polished as per manufacturers recommendations to
provide a smooth and clean surface with minimum joint marks and free from scratches as
directed by the Engineer.
5.0 Steel Work Welded In Built-Up Sections For Hand Rail Using M.S. Tubular/ Erw Tubular Pipes
And G.I. Pipes
a. General specifications to be same as for steel work welded in built-up section. Hot finished welded
(HFW) Hot finished seamless (HFS) and electric resistance weldedtube shall conform to IS 1161.
i. G.I. pipes used for Hand rail to be conforming to IS 1239-Part I for medium grade. GI Pipes to
be screw ed and socketed type and required nominal bore .
ii. Galvanizing of GI pipes shall conform to IS 4736.
iii. All screwed tubes and socket of GI pipes shall have pipe threads conforming to therequirements
of IS 554.
iv. The fittings for GI pipes to be conforming to IS 1239 (Part-II).
6.0 Toilet Cubicle
Providing and fixing Toilet cubicals with the following specificationsThickness of Compact Laminate :
18 mm Color of HPL Boards: As approved by Engineer-in-charge Size of Cubicle : 1000mm (W) &
1550mm (D) x 2100mm (H) Door Size : 1995mm (H) x 610mm (W) Divider Size : 1995mm (H)
Overall Height Of Cubicle : 2100mm (Including boom Gap of 100mm) Accessories: Standard - Merino
Make Stainless Steel - 304 Grade accessories)
a) SS "U" Channel
b) SS "F" channel
c) SS Coat Hook
d) SS Privacy Thumb turn c/w Occupancy Indicator
e) SS Door Knob
f) SS Hinges with Cover
g) SS Shoe Box Leg 18mm - 316 Grade
h) Rubber Lining for Groove
i) S.S.Screws 304 G & P .V.C Wall Plugs

190
77
7.0 Toilet Cubicle : Laquered Glass

8.0 Zinc Cladding

9.0 Column guards

10.0 Furniture
All furniture shall be in accordance with the drawings and the sample piece as approved by Employer. The
contractor shall first prepare a sample piece and the same shall be got approved by the Employer. The
contractor will be expected to do all the modifications of the sample for which no claim will be entertained.

11.0 DRYWALL

Providing and fixing of 122mm thick Drywall system (tested for fire rating of 120 mins.) which
includes fixing of Floor & Ceiling channel (0.55 mm thick, 72mm wide & having two flanges of 30
mm each) to the RCC Floor and Ceiling Slab with 8mm Dia 40mm long Anchor Fasteners @ 600 mm
c/c respectively. The Wall Studs (0.55 mm thick, 70 mm wide having one flange of 34mm another of
36 mm) are placed at maximum distance of 610mm c/c in Floor and Ceiling channel. These
Sections/profiles are rolled with GI Steel (120 GSM & 230 MPa Yield Strength) conforming to IS 277.

Provide 99x9x2500x0.90 mm Fixing channel Behind Horizontal Board Joints.

Provide 50mm thick 48kg density stonewool Insulation in the cavity with the help of insulation hold
strap fixed horizontally with C studs with metal to metal screw at 150mm down from the soffit and
then 1200mm center to center till the floor level.

Then two layers of 12.5mm Fire resistant gypsum Plasterboard having density of >880 kg/cum
confirming to BS-1230 (Part-1): 1985, BS EN 520 and IS 2095 Part I, GreenPro certified by CII and
EPD verified is screw fixed on either side of metal system using Self tapping 3.5x25/38mm drywall
screws spaced at 150mm centres on all joints and 300mm centres in the field of plasterboards. Screw
fixing is done mechanically. The horizontal & vertical joints of the Gypsum Plasterboard on both sides
of the metal framework must be staggered to avoid through and through joints. All joints to be taped &
finished with 50mm wide Paper tape & All-Purpose Joint compound (Confirming to ASTM C475).At
the location of door frame in dry wall system, wooden member shall be fixed of required size as per
manufacturer's specification. Appropriate Cavity Toggles to be used for any unplanned loading in the
Drywall and to be installed in presence of approved manufacturers. The junction of the partition with
masonry & all penetration through the partition has to be treated with fire and acoustic sealant as per
approved makes. All perimeters and penetrations to be sealed with Fire & Acoustic sealant along with
baker rod as per manufacturer’s specifications. All the material should be used as per manufacturer's
specifications as per their fire resistant tested assemblies.

191
78
A5.200 : OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS - LANDSCAPE

192
79
 OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS LANDSCAPE

General Specifications For Hardscape Works

(a) All works and finishing will be in accordance with latest (Central Public Works Department)
CPWD specifications 2019 and all annexure and schedules are in variation to these specifications. All
deviations from CPWD Specifications are listed, and detailed technical specifications have been
provided for the same.
(b) These specifications are for work to be performed, items to be supplied and materials to be used in
the design and construction works as shown and defined in the drawings/finishes in the attached
annexures and herein to the satisfaction of the Employer/ Engineer in Charge
(c) If specifications for any item of work or material is not available either in the CPWD Specifications,
or in the Specifications herein, the relevant IS specifications or NBC shall be followed. If all of CPWD
Specifications and IS codes are unavailable, then International Standards shall apply, and in case non
-availability of those, prior approval of the Engineer will be taken before commencing work.
(d) The workmanship is to be of a high standard and quality. The contractor shall take all steps
necessary to address deficiencies, if any, identified by the Engineer, or his representative. Use
must be made of special craftsmen / tradesmen in all aspects of the work and allowance must be
made in the rates for the same. To ensure the same, the contractor shall implement a highly effective
and comprehensive QA/QC program as stated in general specification and shall adhere to the same.
(e) The materials to be provided by the contractor shall be in accordance with the samples already
approved by the Employer / Engineer and conform to the specification and approved list of items
from manufactures and suppliers. The contractor shall produce all invoices, vouchers or receipts for
any materials if called upon to do so by the Employer/ Engineer.
(f) After contract award, a sample of all landscaping materials under this specification is to be submitted
to the Employer/ Engineer for their approval before the contractor orders or delivers the material to
the site. Samples together with their packing are to be provided free of charge by the contractor and
should any materials be rejected they will be removed from the site at the contractor’s expense. All
samples will be retained by the Engineer for comparison with materials which will be delivered
at site. Also, the contractor will be required to submit specimen finishes colours, glass, etc., for
approval of the Engineer before proceeding with the works.
(g) All materials to be provided in subject contract shall be ISI marked. In cases where ISI marked
materials are not available or specified, materials superior or conforming to BIS standards and
approved by the Engineer shall be used. Materials for which manufacturers names have been
mentioned in contract, makes as approved from list of manufacturers mentioned in contract shall be
provided. The manufacturers having ISI marked material shall be preferred.
(h) Perform all work in conformance with all applicable local codes and ordinances, and comply with
best practice structural requirements, and relevant design codes and guidelines.
(i) The contractor is required to be familiar with the specifications and the requirements and shall maintain
uniform quality and consistency in workmanship throughout the execution of the work.
(j) The Employer has provided concept designs and specifications. The Contractor is required to
develop the concept design further, by employing qualified and competent architects, horticulturists
& engineers etc. for the full and thorough schematic design, detailed design and good for
construction drawings for implementation of the project.
(k) Prior to the start of any construction works on site, the contractor should make sure that the below
listed items have been executed.
(i) Site investigation for obtaining all the information on the nature of the site, weather,
environmental and soil conditions;
(ii) Site investigation shall include, but not be limited to:
 All existing features identified to be retained should be managed and handled in accordance
with the below listed procedures.
 Existing features include hard landscape structures as well as trees and other soft landscape
features and elements.
 No structural elements should be removed/ relocated without written permission of the
Engineer.
 All protected elements should be clearly identified and labelled; the Contractors site team
should be aware of all the items to be protected.
193
80
  Identify areas of limited access, incomplete work by others or any other issues which may
hamper the execution of the softscape works;
 Locate and identify all known land and water contaminants;
 Recommendations for further investigations
(l) Unless otherwise noted, protect all trees and any other vegetation within, or near the sites where
landscaping works are underway. Replace any vegetation damaged by the works with specimens of
equal or better quality, size and species;
(m) Notify the Engineer at least 3 days prior to all required field observations, inspections and approvals;
(n) Prior to the any works on site the contractor shall prepare and submit a Site Clearance Plan which will
include, amongst other items, a demolition plan & tree protection and removal plan.
(o) Submit samples of paving, fixtures, fittings and other specified landscape materials to Engineer. Obtain
Engineer approval and ensure compliance to the schedule of finishes prior to bulk procurement and
supply to site. For bidding purposes, the Contractor shall base his/her bid on the suppliers and materials
(with options) as listed in this specification. After award of contract award the contractor may propose
alterations or substitutions where these will result in a betterment or added benefit to the Employer.
Alteration or substitution of materials, fixtures or fittings without agreement and written approval from
the Engineer is not permitted.
(p) Prepare mock-ups for all specified or detailed paving types and layouts, kerbs, manhole covers, paving,
lighting, furniture, signage (to scale) for review by the Employer.
(q) All materials (hardscape, signage, furniture etc.) to be delivered on site in packaging that should not allow
for cracks, chippings or discolorations of the material. Ensure all surfaces including mounded
landforms are smooth and evenly transitioned between contours or spot levels as noted. Fall landform
and hard surfaces as shown on drawings; ensure no ponding occurs. Earthworks are to be inspected and
approved by the Engineer before planting or surface finishes are applied.
(r) The contractor shall design the landscape area with proper drainage for both hard and soft areas. The
contractor will verify the surface drainage of all planting areas and notify the Engineer of any
discrepancies, obstructions, or other conditions considered detrimental to proper execution of the work
and plant growth.
(s) Ensure that landscape drainage systems are free from silt, debris and obstructions, and are freely
running during, and upon completion, of the contractor's work.
(t) Install surface drainage components to ensure positive drainage falls to all inlets. Ensure all drainage
grates and support structures are suitable for vehicles and traffic loads. All grates and frames to be either
galvanized finish or stainless steel, unless noted otherwise.
(v) Prior to completion of landscape works, ensure satisfactory operation of all materials and fixtures,
including pavements, furniture, structures, lights, irrigation and drainage. Ensure all plants and turfs are
healthy and growing.
(w) Submit to the Employer, Operations Manuals, based on manufacturer’s recommendations describing
operating and maintenance procedures for materials and fixtures including irrigation, electrical works,
water features, paint systems, and gardens and lawns maintenance procedures.

Paving (Except Roadway Paving)

Scope
a) This section of the specification covers the general requirements for paving, except roadway paving, to
include concrete paving, tactile paving and allied works including all materials, labour, tools etc.
For all paving types refer to the Hardscape Schedule in Tender Design Document.
b) All items and works related to the section shall be compliant with CPWD & The Indian standards.
c) All sections of this document to be read in conjunction with the relevant drawings & schedules provided
as part of the landscape package.
Quality Assurance
a) All paving materials should be free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration or other defects deleterious
to strength, durability or appearance;
b) Paving material sizes, colour, finish, pattern, jointing, remarks and any other aesthetic
characteristics to follow the Hardscape Schedule & Landscape Details in Tender Design Document
unless otherwise specified. The Engineer o reserves right to reject the inaccurate products
Execution
a) All works shall be executed in accordance with CPWD specifications unless expressly described in this
document;
194
81
 b) Bedding to be firm and properly compacted. Rocking or subsidence should not occur or develop;
c) Saturated sand bedding to be removed and replaced, otherwise allow to dry and assess the stability before
proceeding with works;
d) Cutting to be neat and accurate, without spalling to form neat junctions w it edging and adjoining finishes.
minimum cut not possible use oversized unit;
e) Levels and lines of finished surface should be smooth and even with falls to prevent ponding;
f) When laying on the slope, lay paving units from the bottom of slope, upwards;
All hardscape types & finish materials should appear even and regular with even joint widths and free of
mortar and sand

Constraints
a) Deviation in finish paving levels should be no more than 5mm. Allowed deviation in height of
finished paving above features (gullies/drainage channels/kerbs) to be no more than3mm.
b) Sudden irregularities are not permitted. Variation in levels between adjacent block/pavers sets to be no
more than 2mm.
c) Paving should be clean and free from mortar droppings, oil and other materials likely to cause staining;

d) After laying of paving, brush in clean granular sand into all the joints and use vibrating plate compaction
machine to level the entire paved area;
a. Water down the paved area after compaction and repeat the process until all the joint voids are filled
with sand and properly compacted;
b. After laying do not allow for any pedestrian traffic for 24h, vehicular traffic for 28 days
Paving Typologies
Concrete Pavers
a) PCC base: Providing and laying Plain Cement concrete Grade MIO - Nominal Mix using 20mm size
metal.
b) Granular sub-base: Thickness and specifications as per structural consultant
c) Sand bed: 60mm thick; specifications as per structural consultant compacted to remain true to level.
d) Paving type: Pre-cast Interlocking Concrete pavers; Refer the Relevant Drawings, Schedule & list pf
approved makes & finishes.
e) Size, Shape, Colour & Finish: Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document.
f) Deviation:
a. Plan dimension deviation class: ± 2mm.
g) Diagonal deviation class: ± 2mm.
h) Thickness deviation class: ± 2mm.
i) Joints: Refer to the relevant Drawings & Schedule, but typically 5mm joint filled with self-binding
polymeric sand (as recommended by manufacturer).
j) Flush finish. All joints to align as shown in drawings in Tender Design Document.
k) Contractor to provide samples for approval.
Granite Cobble stone
a) Refer Document:
Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document
b) Source: Stone shall be obtained from the approved quarries and approved by the Client's representative
prior to delivery.
c) Sampling: To match approved material sample produced by contractor which should be approved by
Engineer in Charge.
d) Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and defects like cavities, cracks,
flaws, sand holes, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similar defects that
may adversely affect its strength and appearance Sizes of stone: the length of cobble stones for stone
masonry shall not exceed I 00X I 00 X 100m thickness of joints: The joint thickness shall not exceed
30mm
Exposed Aggregate Concrete Refer Document:
Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document.
e) Finish:
Surface should undergo steel floating process to get IPS (Indian Patent Stone Flooring) Finish
using steel trowel. Application of retardant and removal of retardant as per vendor and Engineer's
specification. Exposure of aggregate should be 5mm maximum

195
82
 f) Supplier:
Concrete supply should be finalized and approved by Client's representative prior to commencement of
works. Concrete batching plant to provide batching details for records.
g) Concrete Type:
Concrete type and quality to Engineer's specification and to comply with relevant Indian standards and
regulations; reinforced as per structural consultant guidance.
(i) M25 grade of concrete in 1: 1.5 :3 ratio or as specified as per standards.
(ii) Cement for concrete should be PPC depending on marine condition adjacent to site.
h) Thickness:
Slab thickness and galvanized reinforcement mesh sizes and specifications (as per relevant Indian
standards & structural consultant).
i) Slump:
Slump of concrete should be as recommended by the structural consultant.
j) Extent of Pour:
Slab length should not be larger than 4.5m in any direction.
k) Joints:
Expansion joints at 4.5m c/c; construction joints @2.25m c/c.
l) Aggregate for Concrete:
(i) Contaminants: Limitations on contaminants: Free from absorbent particles which may cause 'pop
outs', and other particles such as coal and iron sulphide which may be unsightly or cause
unacceptable staining
(ii) Supply: From a single source and maintained throughout the contract.
(iii) Colour: consistent.
(iv) Sizing: Aggregates should be single sized aggregate, 10 - 12mm in diameter, coarse/ rounded
edge.
(v) Sample: should be submitted and approved prior to placement.
Natural Stone
(a) Finish
Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document.
(b) Thickness:
Suggested minimum thicknesses for stone walking surfaces; Exterior Stone Pavers with Pedestrian
Traffic: 30mm
(c) Design Criteria:
Granite: ASTM C615, Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone. Class of usage
establishes the abrasion resistance a stone requires to withstand the foot traffic requirements of the
project. This is determined according to the ASTM C241/ C 1353 test for abrasion resistance as
measured by abrasive hardness (Ha).
(d) Physical Property Values:
Final design should always be based on specific property values of the stone to be used. These
values may be obtained from the Stone Supplier. When reliable physical property data is not
available from the supplier, re-testing of the stone should be considered.
(e) Supplier:
Natural Stone supply should be finalized and approved by Client's representative prior to
commencement of works.
(f) Laying Natural Stone/ Tile Paving:
i. Do not install in adverse weather conditions. Adequately protect foundations, bedding and
haunching against extreme temperatures and rapid drying by wind and sun, heavy rainfall.
ii. Sub base and bedding to be laid to Engineer's specification.
iii. Bedding to be firm and properly compacted before proceeding with paving and it should meet
minimum Indian standards for compaction Cutting to be neat and accurate, without spalling to
form neat junctions with edging and adjoining finishes. Minimum cut as specified on
Drawings. If minimum cut not possible use oversized unit; Levels and lines of finished surface
should be smooth and even with falls to prevent ponding.
iv. When laying on the slope, lay paving units from the bottom ofslope, upwards.
v. Paving should appear even and regular with even joint widths and free ofmortar and sand
stains.
vi. Deviation in finish paving levels should be no more than ±2mm. Allowed deviation in height

196
83
 of finished paving above features (gullies/drainage channels/kerbs) to be no more than ±3mm,
sudden irregularities are not permitted. Variation in levels between adjacent block/pavers sets
to be no more than ±2mm.
vii. Paving to be kept clean at all times. All deleterious materials to be removed immediately.
viii. Do not overload previously laid paving with stacks of materials. Avoid damage to unit
comers, surfaces etc.
ix. After laying do not allow for any pedestrian traffic for 24h, vehicular traffic for 28days.
Grouts:

Grout suitable for joints 3mm to 12mm wide. Soft, creamy, easily worked mortar with good filling
properties. Hardened grout to be weather resistant, unaffected by water and suitable for external use in
dry or wet conditions.

(i) Surface finish: Textured, not impervious.

(ii) Colour: to match natural stone
(iii) Density of fresh mortar: 2. Kg/L
(iv) Temperature resistance: up to 80 deg. C
(v) Brinell hardness after 7 days: 45 N/mm2
(vi) Tensile adhesion after water immersion: + 1N/mm2 Suitable for external use, including
swimming pools
(vii) EPDM or SBR Flooring for Outdoor Gym / Children's Play Area:

Supply and laying minimum 6 mm thick synthetic, decorative, flexible, antistatic, abrasion group floor
covering available in planks 17.2cm x 100cm with beveled edges. (wooden Look) made up of
transparent wear layer 0.7mm thick, a design film, a compact reinforced under layer compressed and
grained at high pressure etc. complete as directed.

EPDM flooring -spike & impact resistant

Supply and installation spike resistance rubber flooring for outdoor sports courts should be
environmentally friendly, non-toxic, Recycled, non-polluted, anti-slip and anti-fatigue Laid with
adhesive as per manufacturer's instruction over existing levelled surface.
(a) Material:
i Materials:
Virgin EPDM or SBR granules and accessory materials such as binders and solvents shall be as
produced and/or supplied by vendor or equal approved by the client. Refer to the relevant Drawings
and Schedule.

ii Granules:
Pure vulcanized EPDM rubber chips ranging in size from 0.5-1.5mm minimum dimension (as per
vendor and standards) to l-4mm maximum dimension (as per vendor and standards).

iii EPDM rubber shall be UV stable.

iv Size (width x length) & Colour:

Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender Design Document.

V Binder:
Resin (Chemical Family: Aromatic (as per vendor and standards) or Aliphatic (as per vendor and
standards) Isocyanate as specified by client);

(a) Binder shall be 100% urethane and contain no TD!. Accelerators may be used with aliphatic binders
when job site temperature requires it. (Aliphatic binders should be considered on indoor applications
where there is UV exposure or where light-colored rubber granules are used.)

Vi Primer:
Aromatic or Aliphatic resin thinned with solvent.
Execution:

197
84
 i. Slab thickness and galvanized reinforcement mesh sizes and specifications (as per relevant Indian
standards & structural consultant).
ii. Grading: Maintain a slope of minimum 2% for surface run-off and to make it water permeable surface,
iii. Thickness:
 First layer application should be determined by the current Sports Authority of India standards for
rubberized flooring for play areas. Thickness of the rubber safety surface can range from 30mm to
100mm (SBR rubber) meeting standards for safety surfacing.
 Second layer to be applied at a m1mmum thickness of 5-Smm, using E.P.D.M. rubber granules
ranging from 2.5mm to 3.5mm in size.
 Polyurethane binder shall be mixed throughout the entire thickness.
Bevel is installed at the perimeter of the installation running from the thickness of the surface down to
the base. The outside line of the bevel must be clear and follow the designed edge of the installation
Testing :-
The system should be tested to the following standard.
i. Hardness: as per standards, best practice International standards or relevant Indian codes of practice.
ii. Water Absorption: as per standards, best practice International standards or relevant Indian codes of
practice.
iii. Ultraviolet Resistance: as per standards, best practice International standards or relevant Indian codes of
practice.
iv. Fungal Resistance: as per standards, best practice International standards or relevant Indian codes of
practice.
v. Spread of Flame Resistance: as per standards, best practice International standards or relevant Indian
codes of practice.
vi. Accelerated: weathering no change after 2000 hours Sand Pit in Children play.
a. Supplier:
From Schedule provided or equivalent approved. Supplier to produce schedule of materials.
(i) Playing Sand comprised of washed and graded river sand >2mm.
(ii) Size (depth): Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule
(iii) Colour: Natural. To match samples approved
(iv) Thickness: Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule, deviation class: ± 2mm.
b. Geotextile sheet laid below sand.

Weight 75 gram./sq.mt

Grab Tensile ASTM-D-4632 68 kg

Grab Elongation ASTM-D-4632 20%

Mullen Burst ASTM-D-3786 300 psi

Puncture ASTM-D-4833 30 kg

UV Resistance ASTM-D-4355 70 % at 2500 hr

Permittivity ASTM-D-4491 0.05 sec

Flow Rate ASTM-D-4491 100 Its per min

c. Subbase:
Compacted Gravel bed (thickness and specifications as per structural consultant).
d. Drainage:
Install a manufactured GRP pit on a minimum 450mm dia, discharging to a legal point of discharge
such as existing drain or rain water harvesting pit. Alternatively construct a granular sump at the
centre of sandpit area with compacted earth, sloping to the centre point capturing surface run-off.

Kerbs & Edges

This section of the specification covers the general requirements for kerbs and edges (along roads,
planting beds, sand beds and any other material change interface) and allied works including all
198
85
 materials, labour, curing, tools etc. Road kerbs shall comply with the specifications outlined under
the Section Kerbs in the Road Specifications document.
General:
All the kerbs & edges are to follow the following specifications:
(a) Cast in situ / precast kerbs shall be closely monitored for quality of mix, labour and curing, all
Precast Kerb units to be delivered on site in packaging that should not allow for cracks, chippings
or discolorations of the material.
(b) Kerb sizes (in the case of precast), colour, finish, pattern, jointing, remarks and any other aesthetic
characteristics to follow the Tender design Document recommendations unless otherwise specified.
(c) Fixing of the kerb and any structural related details shall be as per the contractors detailed
design and specifications.
(d) Contractor shall reject any kerb units that do not comply with the above requirements. The Engineer
shall reserve the right to reject the inaccurate products.
Execution:
(a) All works shall be executed in accordance with relevant CPWD specifications unless specified.
(b) Cutting to be neat and accurate, without spalling. Form neat junctions with minimum cut. If
minimum cut is not possible then the contractors shall use oversized unit;
(c) Units to be positioned true and levelled along the top and front faces, in a mortar bed placed on
accurately cast foundations;
(d) The ends of units shall be buttered with bedding mortar as laying proceeds. Joints shall be
completely filled, tightly butted and surplus mortar removed immediately
(e) After bedding has set, secure units with a continuous haunching of concrete;
(f) Deviation in finish kerb levels should be no more than 5mm, horizontal and vertical alignment
should not exceed 3mm in 3m.

Thermoplastic Paint Markings

General:
Thermoplastic paints are to follow the following specifications:
a. Thermoplastic paint type and quality shall be as per CPWD specifications and approved by
the Engineer before installation, unless otherwise specified.
b. The Contractor shall submit samples of all thermoplastic paint markings in specified sizes, finish
and special features (if applicable) for approval by the Engineer prior to commencement
ofworks.
c. All thermoplastic paint surfaces should be smooth and continuous, free from cracks,
discolouration or other defects deleterious to strength, durability or appearance;
d. Thermoplastic paint markings sizes, colour, finish, pattern, remarks and any other aesthetic
characteristics shall follow landscape design criteria provided in Tender design Document.
e. The Contractor shall reject any products that do not comply with the above requirements. The
Engineer shall reserve right to reject the inaccurate products.
Execution:
a. All works shall be executed in accordance with relevant CPWD and The Indian standards unless
specified.
b. Do not install in adverse weather conditions. Provide adequate protect against extreme
temperatures and rapid drying by wind and sun, heavy rainfall, as well as against heavy rains
during monsoon season.
c. Installation shall be as per the manufacturer's specification; Markings should appear even and
regular and free of stains;
d. Sudden irregularities are not permitted/accepted

Water Bodies
Scope:
The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to complete the Contract in a satisfactory
manner. Unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools,
labour and incidentals necessary to complete the Work. The Work includes, but is not limited
to the following:
a. Fine Grading and other grading modification required in the installation of the Water Feature
Systems

199
86
 b. Water Feature stream edge walls and other shoreline treatments.
c. Water Feature hardened bottom and slope protection, including structural shell and aesthetic rock,
cobble and boulder treatments.
d. Water Feature Seepage Control Lining - Membrane System.
e. Recirculation Pumping Systems.
f. Equipment Vaults remote from main official/commercial structure, etc.
g. Water Supply Level Sensors, electrically actuated fill line valve, electrically actuated Lake Level
Control Valves.
h. Motor Control Centre Electrical Panels including electrical connections to the equipment.
i. Water Quality Treatment, including all water chemistry analysers, controllers and chemical
delivery system.
j. Water fall retaining walls.
k. For water features or swimming pools need to install lights with a minimum IP68 rating. This
will ensure your underwater lighting is low voltage, adequately waterproofed and also able to
withstand higher surrounding pressure. Miscellaneous items required for a complete operational
Water Feature system.
l. Water Feature fill up.
m. Maintenance of the Water Feature Systems during Operational Testing Phase
n. Operational Testing and Commissioning of the Water Feature System

General Specifications For Softscape Works

a. The Plans, Specifications and other contract documents shall govern the work. The Plans and
Specifications and other contract documents are intended to be complementary to describe and
provide for a complete project.
b) In submitting a proposal for this project, the bidder is required to visit the project and examine
the site of the work to fully understand the scope of work, the materials, labor and workmanship
required and the conditions under which they will be provided.
c) All special conditions set forth in the bidding documents shall be a part of these Specifications.
d) Before entering into a contract for execution of the work, the Contractor shall verify all quantities,
dimensions and shall, upon discovering any error or omission or discrepancies between the
Plans, Specifications and actual conditions, immediately call it to the attention of the Engineer
in Charge. No work shall be done where there is a discrepancy until approval has been given by
the Owner and the Water Feature Engineer.
e) Before excavating, the Contractor shall verify the location of cables conduits pipes, sewers
and other underground utilities and shall take proper precautions to avoid damage to such
utilities. Failure to follow this procedure places upon the Contractor the responsibility of making
any and all repairs for damages of any kind at his expense.
f) The Contractor shall provide necessary safeguards and exercise caution against damage to
existing site improvements. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from his
operations and shall repair or replace such damage at his own expense.
g) The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete Water Feature system as described in the
scope of work. All work shall be in strict accordance with Plans, Specifications and existing codes
and regulations.
Preservation of Trees General Notes
a) No existing trees should be cut/ pruned without written permission of Engineer or his representative.
b) All works shall be carried out in coordination with experienced horticulturalist;
c) All works related to existing trees shall be in accordance with relevant local norms and regulations;
Trees to be removed
a) Any existing trees identified to be removed or any dead trees shall be removed
b) Contractor shall cut and fell, as close to the ground as possible;
c) Trunks to be cut to convenient lengths;
d) Root stumps shall be removed to a minimum depth of 800mm below ground level;
e) Any debris or material that comes from the above works shall be utilized in accordance with waste
management plan.
f) All works shall follow health and safety procedures.
Trees to be retained
a) Trees to be retained shall be identified as to be retained.

200
87
 b) All retained trees should be clearly identified and information signs should be displayed on site in
prominent positions at each entrance;
c) All retained trees shall be marked by visible, durable tags, lettered to tree number or symbol (if
any) on the drawings.
d) Trees should be fenced off the works area if possible, in all cases tree trunk and roots should be
protected from site works;
e) Protected area should be in a shape of a circle around each tree with radius of half the tree's
height, measured from tree trunk.
f) Do not allow for soil compaction under the tree;
g) Do not store any materials or site equipment under or near the trees.
h) Do not allow for any vehicles to be parked near retained trees or to pass under the trees;
i) Prevent damage to tree bark; do not attach any items to trees.
j) Do not expose tree roots;
k) Do not fill against tree trunks, even temporarily;
l) Open excavation under tree canopy should be carried for as short period as possible. If exposing
roots is necessary, temporarily line with polyethylene sheet to reduce evaporation;
m) Use only hand methods to locate, expose, and cleanly remove the soil around roots on the line of
excavation. Root systems should be preserved intact.
n) When it is necessary to cut the roots bigger than 25mm diameter, make sure the cutting does not
disturb remaining root system. Cut should be smooth with no ragged edges. Cut surface should be
immediately treated with bituminous fungicidal sealant.
Detailed Softscape Specifications
a) The work shall in general conform to the Latest CPWD Specifications for works. Work under
this Contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and appliances
necessary and required. The Contractor is required to completely furnish all the plumbing
and other specialized services as described hereinafter and as specified in the schedule of
quantities for Horticulture works.
b) Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work shall include the following:
Earthwork & Grading for Landscaping Works
The section refers to excavation, grading and filling of soil across the sites as part of the works to
be performed at the DB-04 site. The following requirements shall be followed:
a. Position of individual plants and outlines of all planting areas shall be staked and set out before
start of excavation works.
b. Excavate for trees, palms, shrubs, ground covers and turf areas to the required size and
depths in accordance with CPWD specifications and Tender design Document.
c. Qualified surveyor should be engaged to prepare the above works
d. Notify Employer's representative if unexpected rock, hardpan or obstructions detrimental to trees
or shrubs are encountered in excavations.
e. Hardpan layer: drill 150-mm diameter holes, 600 mm apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth
of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
f. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to a<l jacent properties and walkways;
g. The softscape contractor must test all planters/planting pits for its drainage capability by
filling the planters/planting pits with water. Conditions permitted the retention of water in the
planters/planter pits for an excessive period of time must be brought to the attention of the
Contractor for resolution. The Contractor may notify the Engineer if proper drainage cannot be
achieved. The notice must include the proposal and its cost of rectifying the drainage problem.
The softscape contractor must ensure that the drainage problem is rectified before proceeding
with the planting works.
h. Pits and trenches: excavate square or circular pits for trees and palms, and circular pits for large
shrubs, with side slopes vertical. Where impractical to do so due to non-cohesive nature of the
soil, they shall be so excavated as to provide not less than the specified plan size at the bottom of
the excavation. Trim base leaving central area slightly raised to support root ball and assist in
drainage. Break base to 100mm depth. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during
excavation.
i. Fill excavations with water and allow percolating away before positioning trees and shrubs.
j. Pest control treatment to be done as required in pits before planting, with approval of

201
88
 Employer's representative.
k. The minimum size of tree and shrub pits and planting beds shall be as follows:
i. Trees/ palms: 1.5m x 1.5m x l .Om;
ii. Feature shrubs: 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.6m;
iii. Shrub beds: 0.6m depth x desired area
iv. Ground cover beds: 0.3m depth x desired area
v. Turf areas: 0.3m depth x desired area
l. Unless otherwise specified, finishing grade for planting areas shall be:
i. Planting bed - 50mm below hard finish level
ii. Lawn area - 25mm below hard finish level
iii. Raised planters - 100mm below adjoining hard finish lev Adjoining soil areas – merge Before
planting, restore planting beds if eroded, or otherwise disturbed, after finished grading.
Treatment of pits/ beds
a. Pre-planting weed control
i. The softscape contractor will remove all visible weeds before any soil placement.
ii. Herbicides and weedicides are not allowed.
b. Anti-termite treatment
i. Any of the following chemicals (conforming to relevant Indian standards) in water emulsion
shall be applied by pressure pumps, uniformly over the area treated:
Chemical Relevant Indian
Standard Concentration
by weight (%)
Chlorpyriphos IS: 8944 1.0
20 ec -1978
Lindane 20 ec IS: 632- 1.0
1978

ii. The method of application and the stages it will be applied shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval and this shall conform to relevant IS and environmental codes and regulations.
iii. All works related to application of the chemicals shall strictly follow health and safety
procedures;
iv. No work shall be carried out under unsuitable weather conditions, these include:
 Rain or when the soil is wet due to rain or sub-soil water;
 Strong winds;
 Heat waves.
 need to number the bullets vice bullets
v. Chemicals shall be brought to the site of work in sealed original containers. The materials
shall be brought in adequate quantity to suffice for the work. The material shall be kept in
cool and locked stores. The empties shall not be removed from the work site till the relevant
item of work has been completed and permission granted by the Engineer.
vi. Chemicals available in concentrated forms with concentration indicated on the sealed
containers shall only be used. Chemicals shall be diluted with water in the desired quantity
before use, using graduated containers to achieve the desired percentage of concentration.
vii. Hand operated pressure pump with graduated containers shall be used to ensure uniform
spraying and to facilitate proper penetration of the chemical. Continuous check shall be
kept to ensure that the specified quantity of chemicals is used for the required area during
the operation.
The treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by chance, treated soil
barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and completeness
of the barrier system
Workers shall adhere to strict guidelines/policy for safety protection and Personal Protective
Equipment) PPE Planting Soil Mixes
Planting soil mixes shall be used wherever new plants or transporting of existing plants will occur:
a. Planting soil mix shall be fertile, friable soil. It shall be free draining, non-toxic and capable of
sustaining healthy plant growth.
b. Planting soil mix shall be reasonably free from calcium carbonate, subsoil, refuse, roots, heavy
clay, clods, noxious weed seeds, phytotoxic materials, coarse sand, rocks, sticks, brush, litter and

202
89
 other deleterious substances. It shall have a PH not lower than six or greater than eight.
c. The softscape contractor shall submit a sample to be approved by the Engineer or his
representative prior to commencement of work. This approved sample shall be used as reference
for the whole project.
d. Any other organic matter and additives to balance the PH value of the soil mix will not be more
than 15% of the total soil mix.
Soil Mix A
For use for tree pits, low shrubs and planting areas, comprise the following components in
proportions by volume, which shall be mechanically cultivated to the correct proportions, prior to
installation or backfilling:
(a) Good quality, loamy topsoil 50%
(b) Coco peat 20%
(c) River sand (no salty materials) 20%
(d) Organic compost 10%
(e) Npk 15-15-15 chemical fertilizer 5 kg/0m'
(As per approval by Employer's Representative)
Soil Mix B
For use in raised planters/planting areas over slab, comprise the following components in
proportions by volume, which shall be mechanically cultivated to the correct proportions, prior to
installation or backfilling:
(a) Good quality, loamy topsoil 50%
(b) Coco peat 10%
(c) River sand (no salty materials) 10%
(d) Organic compost 10%
(e) Lightweight aggregate 20%
5 kg/Om'
(f) Npk 15-15-15 chemical fertilizer
(As per approval by Engineer in Charge)
Soil Mix C
For use as potting compost in containerized ·planters the following components in proportions
by volume, which shall be mechanically cultivated to the correct proportions, prior to installation
or backfilling:
( Good quality, loamy 40%
( topsoil
River sand (no salty 30%
( materials)
Charcoal 20%
( Organic compost 20%
A. Planting specifications
a. Prior to installation of large specimens including trees, palms and shrubs locate all
underground utilities, drainage or irrigation pipes. No utilities/services to be laid within 2m depth
of the tree planting zone.
b. Centre line of trees / palms shall not be less than 0. 75m from the kerb edge, manholes or
drainage channels, or within 1.5m of building structures and walls. Do not install plants within
0.5m of hydrant valves or Water Supply/ Drainage (WSD) valves, or within of hydrant outlets.
c. Ensure the overall appearance, size and form of individual plants of the same species is
identical, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in Charge. Individual plants within a
grouping must not vary in size by more than 5%.
d. Refer to tree planting details for dimensions, treatment, and back-filling requirements. Ensure the
soil level of the tree root ball is equal to adjacent soil levels after installation and back-filling,
allowing for settlement.
e. Remove all stone, concrete, trash and building debris from tree pits and gardens prior to planting.
f. Install the plants vertically in the centre of the hole. Backfill under plants and to sides with topsoil
203
90
 including any fertilizer if required. Install the plants so the top of the root ball matches adjacent
soil levels.
g. If any pruning is required for the overall health of the plants, maintain the natural form of the
plants.
h. If tree bracing, and/ or guying and anchoring are specified, submit shop drawings of the
proposed system for approval prior to installation. Systems must achieve minimum compliance
with relevant design codes and structural requirements. Provide engineer's certification of
compliance if required.
i. Perform all necessary horticultural tests on soils prior to and after planting to accommodate the
various growth habits of specified plants. Analyze the test results and follow the
recommendations given to ensure that the soils support plants in a healthy growing condition.
j. Refer to developed landscape plans for soil mix types, depths and placement. Install garden soil
mix in layers not greater than 150mm deep, lightly watering each layer to promote settlement.
Unless scheduled otherwise on the drawings, apply a minimum 150 mm thick layer of fertilized
friable top-quality soil mix to all garden areas for turf area unless specified otherwise on the
drawings, first apply a 100 mm thick layer of fertilizer friable top-quality soil mix and then apply a
50 mm thick layer offline sand.
k. Unless specified or detailed otherwise, install plants in massed garden areas in a staggered or
triangle format. Install climbing plants and vines against supporting structures such as the
adjacent wall, net or wires.
l. The spacing and setting out of plants must satisfy the intent of the design outlined in the Tender
design Document and growth habit of the species and must be verified by the Engineer before
installation.
m. All plant material; trees, shrubs and groundcovers shall be reviewed, selected and approved
by the Engineer or his Representative prior to installation.
n. Excavate tree pits a minimum of300mm wider and 300mm deeper than the tree root ball. Refer
to the Tender design Document, Typical Softscape Details. Break up the soil below the tree pit a
further 300mm deep. Excavate square shape holes with vertical sides. Water the hole to moisten
the soil prior to planting. For all other plants, excavate holes a minimum of 150mm wider and
100mm deeper than the plant root ball. Break up the soil in the hole a further 200mm deep.
Excavate square shape holes with vertical sides. Water the holes prior to planting and allow water
to soak away. Notify Employer's Representative if water does not soak away within 24 hours.
o. Remove all debris including stones, concrete, and trash from planting holes prior to planting.
p. Install approved erosion control matting to all garden areas, which are l :3 gradient or steeper.
Seek Engineer's approval of the material before installation. The garden establishment/
maintenance period commences at practical completion of the landscape works and continues
for a period according to the contract General Specifications. Throughout the garden
establishment period, carry out maintenance work including: watering, mowing, weeding, rubbish
removal, fertilizing, pest and disease control, re- turfing, staking, replanting, pruning, hedge
clipping, mulch replacement, and ensure plants and turf are in healthy growing conditions.
Maintenance of land scaping work
Maintenance of Trees
a) Apart from the essential watering of the plants as per the maintenance manual, Nurture the trees
with organic solid manures and liquid manures, spray bioinsecticides, parasites, predators to protect
the trees from pest and disease. Amend the soil on regular basis with proper soil amendments to
keep the pH level between 7 - 7.5
b) During maintenance period the plants should be maintained by regular watering, weeding,
replacing dead plants, applying pesticides, Use of plant physical protection measures etc. so as to
grow them vigorously.
c) Newly planted trees should be maintained by:
(i) Watering every alternate days @ 20 litres /watering cycle
(ii) Applying FYM @ 10kg/ tree/ annum
(iii) Trimming, pruning as & when required under guidance of the site-in-charge etc.
(iv) The Trees should have proper staking so as the tree should stand erect till the Tree settles with
no possibility of bending due to Wind or Rain
Maintenance of Shrubs
a) The plants/shrubs should be maintained by regular watering, weeding, replacing dead plants,

204
91
 applying pesticides etc. so as to grow them vigorously.
b) Maintenance work includes timely pruning, weeding and cutting of ground cover plants, hedges,
edges, plants planted in the areas mentioned above. Application of fertilizers, manure, etc to the
lawn, plant and spraying pesticide etc. as and when required.
c) Seasonal flower beds must be replaced as and when required (approximately thrice in a year).
Plant species can be changed w.r.t. season only.
d) Removal of wild grass normally found growing in rainy season by cutting and/or uprooting
so as to keep the areas free of grass.
Maintenance of Lawn
a) For 12 (Twelve) month maintenance period the Lawns should be maintained by regular watering,
weeding, replacing dead Spots, applying pesticides etc. so as to grow them vigorously.
b) The Lawn should be regularly mowed and maintained as good green carpet.
Irrigation
All other streets shall have manual irrigation.
a. Irrigation system designer must be qualified and experienced in projects of this type; equipment
must be supplied by approved manufacturers; and installation must be by carried out by
qualified and experienced specialist irrigation contractors.
b. Coordinate water supply with engineers including confirmation of location of point of
connections, control valves, sensors and other necessary infrastructure. Locate all equipment,
controllers and valves in discreet locations, to the approval of the engineer. All equipment to be
vandal-resistant and all control boxes or covers lockable.
c. Designing the system to achieve even water d1.stn"but1. on to gardens and/or lawn areas with
nominal overspray and water wastage, and to be operational at ti1 confirmed by the
d. Employer. The system must supply water at the 2.5-3.5Kg/cm2 and required frequency to
ensure optimum growing conditions for the gardens and/or lawns, including allowance for zones
of different species water requirements. Provide design and shop drawings for written approval
by Engineer in Charge prior to installation.
e. Design the system layout and sizing of all lateral pipe lines, associated sleeves, and remote-
control valves as necessary to operate all heads and / or tubes with vertical sides.
f. Drip irrigation is recommended for at least 75% of landscape planting areas to reduce
evaporation. Install tubing on- grade, in equally spaced lines according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
g. Soil moisture sensors integrated with irrigation system.
h. 75% of turf area must have sprinkler irrigation system to reduce water loses. Turf and each type
of bedding area must be segregated into independent zones based on watering needs
i. Design the placement of sprinkler heads at spacing not more than the radius of coverage in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and approval of engineer.
j. Install all pipework a minimum of 300mm below ground level, or in accordance with local
authorities' regulations and codes.
k. Following installation, thoroughly test all equipment and operation of the system, in conjunction
with Employer's representative. Provide As-built drawings and operations / maintenance manuals
for the system.
l. Contractor is responsible for replacement of dead or dying plants for the full Defect Liability
Period (OLP).
m. HDPE PN 10 to be used for irrigation networks

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SITE FURNITURE, SIGNAGES & LIGHTING

General Specifications
This section of the specification covers the general requirements for all works including all
materials, labour, curing, formwork, tools etc.
All site furniture, signage & lighting are to follow the following specifications:
a. Design details and materials as outlined in the Tender Design Document.
b. Material quality and details to Engineer's specification and to comply with SP 72(2010):
National Lighting Code 2010 [ETD 24: Illumination Engineering and Luminaries];
c. Prior to execution the contractor shall submit shop drawings for the Engineer's approval. Approval
period for the Engineer shall be limited to 21 days. Shop drawings to include material detail
specifications, fixing details and any other relevant information;

205
92
 d. After contract award, the Contractor shall submit samples of all material types in specified
colours, finishes and with any special features (if applicable) for approval of the Engineer prior to
commencement of works.
e. All items should be free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration or other defects deleterious to
strength, durability or appearance;
f. Sizes, colour, finish, pattern, jointing, remarks and any other aesthetic characteristics to allow
the submitted Tender Design Document and the approved shop.
g. installation on site and any structural related details should be included/ addressed in the
Contractor's final specifications. This shall also be included in the shop drawings for the
Engineer's approval;
h. The Contractor shall reject any units/material that does not comply with the above requirements.
The Engineer reserves the right to reject the inaccurate products or any products that do not meet
approved specifications Site Furniture, Exterior Signage and Lighting Typologies This section of
the specification covers the general requirements for all works including all materials, labour,
curing, formwork, tools etc. This will include but not be limited to:
a. Site Furniture
i. Seating
ii. Rubbish-bins
iii. Bollards
iv. Tree Guards
v. Tree Grates
vi. Railing & Fencing for sports' courts
vii. Pergolas
b. Children Play Equipment's
i. Swings
ii. Slides
iii. Play Panel
iv. See-saw
v. Spring Rider
vi. Merry Go round
c. Outdoor Gym Equipment's
i. Palm Wheel
ii. Multi Twister
iii. 3-Level Chin Up
iv. Push Up & Dip Station
v. Double Sit & pull
vi. Triple Waist Twister
vii. Double Mini Ski
d. Signage
i. Gateway marker
ii. Directional signage
iii. Pedestrian directional signage
iv. Information panel
v. Building marker
vi. Pathway marker
e. Lighting
i. Street Lighting
ii. Pedestrian lighting
iii. Parking lot lighting
iv. Signage lighting
v. Ambient lighting
DETAILED SITE FURNITURE, SIGNAGE AND LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS
The furnishings of urban outdoor spaces should be designed with the needs of the disabled,
children, and the elderly in mind, and also to enable triangulation - i.e. they should be linked
together to stimulate social encounters and encourage people to talk to strangers.
a. Safety and Security:
Furniture items designed for outdoor spaces must be constructed of safe materials and designed to

206
93
 prevent injury, without sharp edges or exposed fasteners. They are usually either attached to the
ground with anchor bolts or embedded in the ground. Generally, the technique used for
mounting should be decided on in advance, so the furniture can be made accordingly.
b. Materials:
Furniture selection and design should take into account weather effects such as sunlight, expansion
and contraction, wind stress, moisture, and in some cases, salt spray.
Street Furniture Typologies Seating
a. Seating facilities, such as benches, should be integrated within the outdoor spaces of the campus
wherever people wait, meet, or socialize; in public spaces.
b. The best locations for benches are places where there is heavy pedestrian use: retail shopping
corridors, transit stops, plazas, spaces outside cultural institutions etc.
c. In high-activity areas there should be access to seating every 50m; there should also be rest
facilities at regular intervals of 100-200m, with the needs of the disabled kept in mind.
d. Benches should be set up near other amenities such as bus shelters, shops, waste receptacles,
plazas etc., and arranged where there is protection from the wind, rain and to allow a choice of
sitting in the sun or shade.
e. They should be separated from the walking path by a space of300-600mm, and with the seats level
and having a maximum lengthwise slope of 4%.
Rubbish Bins
a. Rubbish Bins should be highly visible and accessible in order t & h minimize littering. They
should be located where they are most likely to be used, in crowded areas like busy intersections,
close to crosswalks, beside take-out food shops or vendors, at bus stops, in plazas, outside building
entrances such as offices, shopping stores and near other items of street furniture like benches,
seats, shelters.
b. Rubbish Bins should be situated far enough away from seating areas to minimize the unpleasant
effects of trash odors and insects on users and their fronts should be set back at least 300mm from
walkways.
c. Rubbish Bins are usually spaced at 50m intervals, unless there is an increased need in a particular
area.
d. It should also be taken into consideration that waste receptacles will also be used at night in parks
and squares; for this reason, they are most appropriately placed along lit-up pedestrian walkways
or other lighted areas.
e. For form, colour, type and materiality, Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender
Design Document.
f. The materials used for waste receptacles should be durable and resistant to vandalism, fire, rust,
and stains
Bollards
Concrete Bollards provide an effective method of segregating a landscape for pedestrian and
vehicular access. These are supremely versatile and are used across a wide diversity of schemes
such as for deterrence, segregation, demarcation and perimeter protection to any building or open
area.
a. Bollards shall be used at all Pedestrian crossings along the Main Access Road across all
Character Zones, to control traffic movements and separate vehicular from pedestrian traffic.
b. Bollards need to be aligned and have a consistent setback of 450mm from the kerb line
c. Overall Dimensions: 900 mm Height X.200 mm Dia.
d. Spacing of bollards needs to accommodate people using wheelchairs;
e. Bollards shall be of precast concrete using M-30 grade of concrete by vibro-compaction
technique to ensure durability, high tensile strength and robustness.
f. Need to be durable against weather (strong winds and heavy rains characteristic of the area)
vandalism and deterioration.
Tree Guards
Tree guard is designed as a protective guard for newly planted trees. Constructed in two halves
for easy operations. The tree guard is easily installed after the tree is planted and may be removed
or left in place as the tree matures.
a. For form, colour, type and materiality, Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule in Tender
Design Document.
b. Consider attachment of guards to the grate or below ground when trees are located within areas

207
94
 accessible by vehicle.
c. Shall be visible but not too intrusive.
d. Tree guard shall be of fabricated mild steel-galvanized and powder coated to ensure low
maintenance
e. All fixings shall be corrosion resistant. Be durable against weathering and deterioration
f. overall height shall be 1.2 meters; 300mm from ground level shall be coloured as per the
character zone
g. Minimum clear width of 600mm shall be maintained, preferably internally square
h. Tree Grates
A tree grate is installed at the same level with the pavement around a tree that allows the soil
underneath to stay uncompacted and the pedestrians to walk near the tree without stepping on the
soil.
Tree grates create a protective barrier, providing uncompacted soil and development space for
tree roots. They also serve as a decorative element along ceremonial streets, matching a street's
design style and personality.
a) Tree grates must be provided in areas of space constraint only when a tree pit cannot be
provided such as in footpaths/ walkways of width less than 3 meters.
b) Tree grates shall be placed around trees in high pedestrian volume locations.
c) For form, colour and materiality, Refer the Relevant Drawings & Schedule and the Tender design
Document.
d) Each Tree Surround consists of4 Nos panels of750mm Length X 750mm width X 40mm
Thickness
e) Suitably reinforced for long use and to prevent damage during transportation & handling.
1. A choice of standard colours and unlimited custom colours will match any natural stone
finish or interlock pavers in the surrounding.
f) All fixings shall be corrosion resistant;
g) Be durable against weathering and deterioration.
h) Ensure grate is removable for maintenance.
Fencing / gates
a) Service area fencing ranges in height from 2.4 to 5m overall is supported by steel posts, with a
lower rebound section up to 1.2m high and the remainder of the fence being of different
specification. Rebound fencing is preferable to rebound boards because it provides better
visibility for viewing and security purposes, plus it is usually quieter when struck by balls.
b) Posts and panels are galvanized to protect against corrosion and have a tough, low-maintenance
polyester powder coat applied to provide an attractive aesthetic finish. This coating is available
in a choice of standard colors, or custom colors can be applied to a special order. If football is to
be played, goal recesses can be incorporated within the fence.
c) Two types offending are used for sports grounds, namely welded
(i) Wire mesh:
Welded wire mesh normally lasts longer, is more robust and present a higher quality appearance -
though it is slightly more expensive
(ii) Chain link:
Rolled mesh systems such as chain link are likely to need periodic re-tensioning and repairs, so
the total cost of ownership will be greater. Given the advantages offered by welded mesh, it is
now unusual to find chain link specified for sports ground fencing.
d) If the sports ground is adjacent to a road, then it might be appropriate to increase the height of
the fence, add netting above the fence panels, or create a net-covered roof to enclose the playing
area.
e) Gates:
As with the fencing, sports ground gates are designed with external frameworks and hinges, and
low-profile clamping bars and fasteners to reduce the risk of injury to players who come into
contact with the gate during play. In addition, gaps between the gate and the surrounding
framework are kept to a minimum. Gates should open outwards and provide a level of security
that is at least as good as that of the adjacent fencing
Children Play Equipment's
General
a) All play equipment's should follow the international standards of safety and guidelines.

208
95
 b) The design and placement of play equipment's must consider such matters as their safe distance
and must confide to the location of the drawings issued.
c) Location of equipment shall comply with all safety regulations as outlined in the National
building Code (NBC); the 'fall' zone should have protective surfacing (EPDM as further detailed
in Material Schedule & Landscape Details of the Tender Design Document).
d) Colorful & attractive play equipment's in HDPE or High-Density Polyethylene is a thermoplastic
sheet.
e) Technical specification of each of the play equipment's must be provided by the vendor. The
details provided by vendor must include the fall height, finish grade, installation details,
underground utilities, product data and equipment identification details.
f) Prepare and submit foundation drawings, engineering calculations, shop drawings to
dimensioned layouts and product data.
Outdoor Gym Equipment's
General
An outdoor gym allows people to work out in the open with ample fresh air as compared to indoor
gyms. All the Outdoor Fitness Equipment's shall be complied with the specified standards as per
the indicative designs/ layouts defined herein in the Tender design Document.
Vendor proposal must include 'Supplying & Installation' of Outdoor Gym Equipment's. Safety is of
the utmost importance to everyone. The Outdoor Fitness Equipment's should be confirming to the
required standard for safety and quality as per DIN I ASTM / CPSC/ES/ BIS
Material
Galvanized Steel Pipe, cleaned by sand-blasting, then coated with phosphate solution, and
finished with electro-static powder coating or other similar available material meeting the
required standard.
Anti-rust
Shot blast/grit blasting of equipment to clean the rust. Electrostatic powder coating technique: To
process the pipe surface. Columns. The mild steel pipe, column footing plate screw with a pull-
burst, the surface rust, acid degreasing, cleaning, phosphate rust after a special process, throwing
sand, imported plastic powder with a double surface household-level spraying layer,
electrostatic spray, high- temperature plastic 200-degree baking powder, smooth surface, UV
resistant or as specified by the manufacturer's specification.
Seats & plastics
LLDPE /HOPE/ metal with any protection/ composite material with any protection infiltration
of anti-ultraviolet, anti-static decolorization element passing, strength, smooth surface, security
assurances, weather resistance etc.
Fasteners
Stainless steel screws to be used, and at the contact point with the columns- rubber pads to be
used, screw top cover with a plastic cap, to enhance its security
Installation
Shop drawing for the location of equipment's shall be submitted by the Vendor to ascertain the
safe circulation area required for installation of each equipment as per International standards.
In order to ensure correct installation elevation, the preferred method of installation is surface
mount, with posts bolts bolted to concrete. in-ground installation. Extra care must be taken to
ensure that the equipment is securely installed
Signages
Signage plays an essential role by facilitating access to, and navigation within the site.
General
a) Signage should be clearly visible. Directional signs should be visible from a distance of at least
20m.
b) The design and placement of signs for pedestrian use must consider such matters as their visibility,
the size and proportions of the writing.
c) Prepare and submit color/finish samples, engineering and calculations, shop drawings to
dimensioned layouts and product data.
d) For fabrication of exposed metal work, use only materials which are smooth and free of
surface blemishes including pitting, roughness, seam marks, roller marks, and trade names. Do
not use materials which have stains and discolorations.
For exposed items of work which include plain flat surfaces in width of more than 50 times the

209
96
 metal thickness, provide sheet stock from mill which has been stretcher leveled to highest standard
of flatness commercially available
Material
a) Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability
properties of Alloy 5005-H32.
b) Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability
properties of Alloy 6063-TS.
Aluminum Panel Fabrication
Fabricate sign panels as detailed, minimum .080 thickness unless noted otherwise, with comers
neatly formed, edges smooth and free of sharp or another injurious surface. Exterior edges are to
appear seamless and have continuous welds. Grind welds smooth and fill prior to priming and
finish painting. Sand exposed surfaces smooth and chemically treat with alcidine to seal
aluminum. Shop prime surface per paint manufacturer's recommendation. Apply manufacturer's
recommended thickness of polyurethane enamel.
Drainage and weep holes shall be included as required to prevent condensation buildup Dissimilar
Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with concrete, mortar, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of asphalt
varnish or a coat of zinc molybdate primer to prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
Painting
Surfaces of miscellaneous metal work, except nonferrous metal, corrosion resisting steel, and
zinc coated work, shall be gi v e n one coat of zinc molybdate primer, or an approved rust resisting
treatment and metallic primer in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. Do not paint
surfaces of items to be embedded in concrete. Upon completion of work, thoroughly recoat all
damaged surfaces.
Welding
a) Correct type to minimize permanent distortions of flat surfaces. Welding flux, oxides, and
discoloration shall be removed by pickling or grinding, so that these areas match finish on
adjacent areas. Any damage caused by fabrication must be repaired by grinding, polishing, or
buffing.
b) All welds to be ground smooth as possible Fasteners
c) Miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components shall be of aluminum / stainless
steel/ zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A-164.
d) Exposed fasteners to be painted to match surrounding surfaces. Adhesives Adhesives shall be of
non-staining and non-yellowing quality. Visible joints shall be free from air bubbles and other
defects. Anchors and Inserts:
 Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts as required for corrosion
resistance.
Finishes
a) Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
b) Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
c) Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable.
Applied Lettering and Graphics
Technical Specifications for signages must be provided by the Vendor. For design strategy refer
the relevant drawings & schedule in Tender Design Document.
Installation
a) Signs shall be installed as per the design guidelines given in the Tender Design Document.
b) Anchorage: Anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated shall include slotted inserts,
expansion shields, and power- driven fasteners .}Vhen approved for concrete; machine carriage
bolts for steel.
c) Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for

210
97
 mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings
securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
Dimensional characters
a) Cutout/Routed/Waterjet-cut Characters: Provide characters with square-cut, smooth, eased edges.
Rounded corners are to be squared to match graphic samples shown in Tender Design document.
b) Mounting: Mounting techniques varies based on the signage. Reference the signage drawings to
mounting details. The mounting techniques incorporated are flush, with concealed noncorroding
studs for substrates encountered.

PART-II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR: IRRIGATION SYSTEM FOR

HORTICULTURE & ARBORI CULTURE

Description of work:-.

1. Area to be irrigated

Scope of Work: Refer Drawing.

Services to be provided: Refer Scope of Works given under Special Condition

of Contract.

2. Specific requirement:-

This may be noted that all the road network has already been constructed. The following points
and considerations shall be taken in view while planning, design & implementation of irrigation
system:

(i) To lay pipelines for supplying Water to sprinkler & dripping, no road crossing
& cuttings shall be allowed without approval from MWCJ. The branch
pipeline to supply water to dripping & sprinkler shall therefore be limited to
each road junction to junction.
(ii) The minimum residual pressure available in grey water distribution networks
any that at any time is anticipated to the above 1.5 to 2.0 kg/cm2 . The length
& diameter of branch pipe to feed sprinkler & dripper shall therefore be
designed keeping in view the above residual pressure at the tapping point.
(iii) Though the distribution network & pumping system have been designed to
supply water for 8 hours a day to cater grey water demand of all the users,
inclusive of horticulture demand.
The
irrigation system may however be
designed considering availability of grey water in distribution networkbeyond 8 hrs/day
exclusive ly for irrigation to attain a higher residual pressure in the network, the layout plan of
the distribution network & details of the pumping set installed in the pump hour are enclosed
herewith for information & guidelines of the tenderer.

211
98
Considering availability of residual pressure of 2 kg/cm2 in the network, Module of branch
pipe line for sprinkler/ dripper for road junction distance of 250 m, 500 m &1000 m based on the
following criteria are also attached herewith for information of the tenderer.

Flow requirement emitting devices

Pop up Sprinkler – flow 0.7m 3 /hr at radius of 2 to 4 m.

Drip line - flow 0.007m 3 /meter

Precipitation rate during summer.

For lawn area - 6.5mm /day

For shrub area - 4.0 mm/ day

The Tenderer may however indicate their own design criteria for the above & suggest the
modular length & diameter of branch line considering the residual pressure as indicated above.

Material Specification:-

The material, appliances & equipment recommended for irrigation system along with the brief
specification are described herewith. The tenderees are however at liberty to suggest their
alternative material & specification thereof.

Pipes: -Pipes shall be -PVC, class 3 (6kg/cm2 ) , Socket & spigot joints with elastrometric
sealing ring or solvent cement jointing confirm to BIS 4985.

Drip Pipes: This shall be of low densely poly ethylene & installed with dripper as- per the
manufacturing specification.

Filter: -Filler to be installed near tapping point shall be off hydro cyclone type with the all
requisite accessories to handle required flow on as per the manufacturer design.

212
99
Control Valve: -This shall be off ball type or FRP with PVC ball &installed in prefabricated PVC
or FRP valve box of suitable size.

Pop up Sprinkler:- This shall be PGP make TURO (USA) make in from manufacture of repute.
This shall be installed on ½ or 3/4 riser pipe with swing joint of height of 300 to 450 cm. The
Sprinkler nozzle shall be of standard type.

Serving saddle:- At the tapping point & fixture location service saddle of required size shall be
provided. This shall be of PVC manufacturer.

Flush Valve:- This shall be provided at terminal end of branch line to flush the pipe occasionally.
This shall be gate valve type made of PVC.

Fittings & accessories:- All Other fittings& accessories required to install & operate the system
satisfactorily as per manufacturer specifications & requirement shall be included & provided by
the tenderer along with specification details.

Execution of work:-

The work shall be executed to the specification as per standard practice or manufacturer
instruction if indicated any thereof to the entire satisfaction of Engineer in charge.

Pipe line where laid underground shall be provided a minimum depth of 600 mm below average
ground level.

Drip pipeline in the shrub area shall be provided over ground generally straight except around
tree where it shall be U looped.

Control valve in prefabricated boxes shall be provided at lapping points.

Joints of PVC Pipe with LLDPE drip line shall be executed as per the manufacturer’s standard
practice.

Wherever the crossing of road is unavailable, the same shall be carried out by thrust bearing etc
to the prior approval of Engineer in charge.

213
100
Testing & Commissioning:-

The contractor after execution of the total system shall test the system for required
test pressure & check that there is no leakage through joints & fillings. After
successful

testing or commissioning of the system the contractor shall operate and maintain the
whole system for a period of 24 months. Thereafter he shall handover all
manufactures guarantee in original along with performance guarantee for a period of
24 months from the date of handling over of the system after successful operation of
the system.

Automation of irrigation system):-

The irrigation system described above based on manual operation, where in this total
area of the complex as divided into a number of segments. Water supplied to feed this
various segments is controlled manually such a way that optimal residual pressure is
maintained as required to maintain proper water distribution to each segments.

Thus objective of the automatic controlled can be achieved by installing PLC System
for operation of pumping system &control valve in such a way this each segments can
be supplied water in a sequence to optimize the maximum no. of segments irrigated at
a line. The tenderer are therefore advised to suggest the automatic control system
along with the options/equipments required to be installed over & above the manual
operations

NOTE: Contractors shall take approval of all material before commencement of work
at site.

214
101
5A300: OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL STRUCTURES & STEEL STRUCTURE

215
102
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS CIVIL STRUCTURES

5.14.1. Earthwork in excavation and filling - General

5.14.1.1. Scope
This specification covers the general requirements for Excavation and Filling Works
to be carried out at the site.
5.14.1.2. General Requirements
Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site prior to submitting his Bid and
made all necessary inspection and investigations and to have decided for himself the
means of access and working space, the nature of the ground and subsoil, if any, level
of water table, extent of rock demolitions, alterations, support of neighboring
properties, etc.
5.14.1.3. Related Work
The Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment, materials and any incidentals
necessary to complete all aspects of work included in the drawings and specifications.
a) Clearing, grubbing and removing all vegetation from the site.
b) Earthwork in excavation including disposal of the excavated material and necessary
dressing to make surface ready to receive binding.
c) Stacking of excavated earth within the site to make use of it for backfilling.
d) Filling and back filling and compaction of fills.
e) Removal and disposal of surplus material.
f) Stone soling to roads and paving and necessary shoring to protect sliding of earth.
g) Dewatering works till the number of slabs as instructed by the Structural Engineer are
constructed.
h) Any temporary Cast-In-Situ Concrete works

5.14.1.4. Codes and Standards:

The following standards shall be followed:
S. No Code Description
1 IS: 3764-1996 Excavation Work Code of Safety
2 IS: 1498-1970 Classification and identification of soils for
general engineering purposes
3 IS: 1200-2002 Part 1 Methods of Measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering Works – Earthwork
4 SP27 Handbook of method of measurement of building
works
5 British Standard 1377 Methods of test for Soils for Civil Engineering
Purposes
6 British Standard 5930 Code of Practice for Site Investigations
7 Local Building Regulations and Statutory Regulations

5.14.1.5. Definitions
a) Clear: The removal of trees, scrub and artificial obstructions including fences,
concrete slabs, kerb and channel, remains of old buildings and the like.
b) Grub: The removal of tree stumps and roots.
c) Topsoil: Topsoil is all surface soils which have sufficient humus to support plant
growth without resort to artificial fertilization.
d) Cut : A general term for ‘in place’ material removed by digging from the ground.
The term ‘excavation’ or derivatives thereof may be used interchangeably.
e) Fill: A general term for material spread and compacted over the ground to make up
finished levels or levels to sub- grade. The term ‘Embankment’ or derivatives thereof
may be used interchangeably.
216
103
 f) Sub-Grade: The finished, trimmed and prepared surface of the earth works after
thereof may be used interchangeably.
g) Sub-Base: A selected filling layer spread and compacted over the sub-grade to make
up levels to the underside of the base course or floor slab.
h) Base course: A selected filling layer spread and compacted to levels immediately
below road wearing course.
i) Spoil: Excess cut material remaining at the end of filling operations.
j) Bulk Earthworks: Earthwork excavation using earthmoving equipment or filling and
compacting, building platforms, road formations, parking areas, reservoir,
embankments, drainage canals or any other formation where the unimpeded use of
large earthmoving equipment is possible. This is distinct from backfill of trenches,
foundations or other earthworks immediately adjacent to completed or partially
completed structures.
5.14.1.6. Site Preparation
A) Site Inspection Preamble
Any Site details or site information included in the Contract documents or
Drawings are provided for the Contractor’s guidance only. The information provided
may not be a complete or accurate description of conditions existing below the
surface of the ground. The correctness of the information is not guaranteed, and the
Contractor shall be responsible to make its own interpretation of sub-surface
conditions.
B) Site Quality Control
The Contractor shall provide in his quality assurance programme information to
show that a system will be used to ensure that all works carried out under this section
(including any done by sub - contractor) will comply with all the requirements of this
section.
C) Antiquities
Any ancient carvings, relics, coins or other curiosities discovered during the
excavation or other work shall remain the property of the CLIENT and shall be
handed over to the CLIENT as required under the General Conditions of Contract.
D) Setting Out and Clearing of The Site - Rates to Include.
The Contractor shall check that the levels and lines in the field are in accordance
with those shown on the survey drawings or site development drawings. The
Contractor shall report to the Engineer in Charge in writing all discrepancies with
respect to the survey drawings or site development drawings prior to the
commencement of work. The checking of any line or level by the Engineer in Charge
shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities The Contractor shall
set out the centre line of the building or other involved works after clearing the site and
get the same approved from Engineer in Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to install substantial reference benchmarks and maintain them as long as
required by the Engineer in Charge.
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for proper setting out, alignment,
elevation and dimension of each and all parts of the work by using Total Station.
E) Benchmarks And Setting Out
The Contractor shall engage a qualified surveyor or authorized third party to
establish permanent benchmarks in suitable locations around the site. These
benchmarks shall enable the Contractor to set out the location of all buildings, paths,
roads, utility lines, storm water drains and all other portions of the Contract work.
If an error in setting out causes some portion of the work to be constructed in the wrong
location, or to the wrong dimensions, the Contractor shall make good the incorrect
work at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge the Contractor
shall be liable for any consequential loss experienced by the Owner.
All permanent benchmarks and setting out markers shall be constructed as permanent
pillars so as to ensure no disturbance or shifting happens.
F) Excavation Classification

217
104
 Excavation Classification Based on Type of Soil and Site Location. Excavations
at the project site shall be broadly classified into two types based on type of soil
as follows:
a) Excavation in Hard Rock
b) Excavation in Soft Soil / All kinds of soil
Excavations at the project site shall be broadly classified into the following types
based on its location at site:
a) Excavate foundation from existing ground level to the formation levels shown in
drawing.
b) Excavation to pit working level.
c) Earthworks outside property line.
d) Excavation, compaction and backfill to plinth and service trenches.
G) Classification of Soil / Rocks:
a) All kinds of Soils: (Poclainable strata) Material such as sand, gravel, loam, clay,
mud, black cotton, murrum, shingle, river or nullah bed boulders, disintegrated rock,
soling of roads, paths, hardcore, macadam surface of any description (water bound,
routed tarmac etc.) lime concrete mud concrete or any combination of these. This
class of material will yield to the application of picks, shovels, or any other manual
digging implements.
b) Ordinary Rock (Poclainable strata): Material such as limestone, sandstone, laterite,
hard conglomerate. This is any material that will not yield to manual implements but is
capable of being excavated by conventional earthmoving plant applicable to the
site and the distances that material has to be moved. The use of a pusher unit or small
crawler tractor with ripper to facilitate excavation shall be considered as part of
conventional plant.
c) Hard Rock (Unpoclainable strata): (Blasting prohibited): Hard rock in
Unpoclainable strata the excavation has to be carried out by Chiselling, mechanical
means, and all also breaking by use of approved Chemical such as Accusin or
approved non explosive blasting chemicals and trimming to required level for
foundation, trenches, rafts, plinths, levelling area etc. Wedging or any other method
agreed to by the Engineer in Charge. Contractor may resort to Controlled blasting
only after getting written permission from competent authorities. For any damage
caused by such blasting shall only be borne by the Contractor.
H) Classification of Soils:
Classification of excavated soil / material will be in accordance with the Section
302.1 of MoRTH or IS:1200 (Part I): 1992 as the case may be. Excavation in all types
of soil comprising any of the following:
 Vegetable or Organic soil, turf, sand, silt, loam, clay, mud, peat, black cotton soil, soft
shale or loose murrum.
 Any mixture of soils in above, Mud concrete below ground level.
 Generally, any material which yields to the ordinary application of excavation
equipment.
 Stiff heavy clay, hard shale, or compacted murrum requiring close application of
excavation equipment.
 Soft rock
 Gravel and cobble stone usually rounded, having maximum dimension in one
direction of 300mm.
I) Excavation in Hard Rock
Rock which is in solid beds, which can only be removed either by controlled
blasting or by wedging or chiseling or by using chemical compound, approved make
and application as per Manufacturer's Specification, shall be treated as hard rock. A
boulder or detached rock, measuring one cubic meter or more, shall also be treated
as hard rock, if the same cannot be removed, without blasting, wedging or chiseling.
Where hard is met with, and blasting operations are considered necessary, the
Contractor shall intimate about the same to the Engineer in Charge. The Contractor

218
105
 shall obtain license from district / public authorities, for carrying out blasting work,
as well as for obtaining and storing explosives, as per 'explosive rules 1940' or as
amended.
Blasting operations shall be carried out, under supervision of a responsible licensed
operator of the contractor during certain specified hours, preferably during lunch
break, as approved in writing by the Engineer in Charge. The operator shall be
conversant with the rules of blasting. The operator should have the valid blasting
license.
Proper precautions for safety of persons shall be taken. Red flags shall be prominently
displayed around the area to be blasted, and all people on work, except those, who
light the fuses, shall be withdrawn, to a safe distance of not less than 300 meters, from
the blast. Blasting shall not be done, within 100 meters of an existing masonry, or
any other kind of structure, unless special precautions are taken by heavy blanketing
etc. on the special approval of Engineer in Charge.
Where blasting is not practicable or prohibited, excavation shall be done, by
wedging or chiseling or by using chemical compound approved make and application
as per specification, and it shall be restricted to the quantity required to enable
the necessary foundation etc to be put in. In case, the dimension of trenches exceeds
those shown in drawings, the excess quantity shall not be paid for.
J) Excavation in Soft / Ordinary Rock
In ordinary rock, excavation shall be carried out by crowbars, pick axes or
pneumatic drills. Blasting operations shall generally not be adopted for excavation
works in this type of rock.
Where blasting operations are not prohibited, and it is practicable to resort to
blasting for excavation in ordinary rock, the Contractor may do so with the
permission of the Engineer in Charge at no extra cost.
K) Excavation And Preparation for Concreting:
Excavation shall include removal of all materials of whatever nature at all depths and
whether wet or dry necessary for the construction foundation and substructure
(including mass excavation for underground reservoir where applicable) exactly in
accordance with lines, levels grades and curves shown in the drawing or as directed
by the Engineer in Charge. The bottom of excavation shall be levelled both
longitudinally and transversely or sloped as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
Softening of the bottom of excavation will not be allowed. If softening occurs due to
weather or any other source, the Contractor shall remove the affected area and
replace as specified and directed by the Engineer.
Excavation shall be to the exact length, width and depth shown or figures in the
drawing, or as directed by the Engineer in Charge. If excavated to greater length,
width or depth than shown Or required the extra work occasioned thereby, shall be
done at contractor’s expenses. Extra depth shall be brought up by plain cement
concrete filling 1:4:8 proportion, and extra length and width filled in by rammed
earth or murrum or if the Engineer in Charge thinks it necessary for stability of the
work by 1:4:8. Foundations or trenches shall be kept, free of water, while masonry or
concrete works are in progress. The lowermost 150mm layer thickness of soil / strata
shall be removed with caution so as not to damage the founding strata
The Contractor shall report to the Engineer in Charge when the excavations are ready
to receive concrete. No concrete shall be placed in foundations until the Contractor has
obtained Engineer in Charge approval in case,
Excavated pit should have adequate clearance from the face of concrete at all faces to
have adequate working space.
M) Stacking Of Excavated Materials:
All materials excavated will remain the property of the Engineer in Charge
S o t h e useful materials and stacking them on site as directed but with a safe distance
from the edge of excavation to avoid collapse/ shielding of excavated area. Materials
suitable and useful for back filling, plinth filling or levelling of the plot or other use

219
106
 shall be stacked in convenient place but not in such a way as to obstruct free movement
of men, animals and vehicles or encroach on the area required for constructional
purposes.
N) Disposal / Carting of Surplus Earth - Rates to Include:
Top layer of hard soil free from vegetation, spoils, rocks, boulders for a quantity of
approximately 15% of the total excavated earth quantity shall be stocked at locations as
directed by the Engineer in Charge for re-use up to a distance of 300m from the
periphery of the buildings. The remaining excavated earth, except for the hard rock
excavated, shall be disposed - off including lifting out, transportation to locations
approved by local bodies, Government agencies or as directed by the Engineer in
Charge, as the case may be. The Contractor is responsible for finding suitable
dumping yard approved by the local authorities at any distance and for the removal
of all sub grade obstructions, whether indicated or not,
The Contractor shall indemnify the CLIENT against dumping in unauthorized areas
and areas not allowed by the authorities.
O) Dewatering:
The bailing or pumping out water which may accumulate in the excavation during
the progress of work either from seepage, rain water or any other cause or for diverting
surface flow, if any is to be done by bunds or other means. Pumping out water shall be
done in such approved manner such as well point system as to preclude the possibility
of any damage to the foundation trench, concrete or masonry or any adjacent structure
inside or outside the wall front. When water is met in foundation trenches or in tank
excavation, pumping out water shall be from auxiliary pit of adequate size dug
slightly outside the building excavations. The depth of auxiliary pit shall be more than
the working foundation trenches / levels. The auxiliary pit shall be refilled with
approved excavated materials after the dewatering is over.
The Contractor shall adopt an appropriate method of dewatering work and shall
submit its proposal for carrying out the dewatering work for the approval of the
Engineer in Charge. The water shall be pumped continuously to keep the water level
at a minimum of 60cm below the lowest point of excavation level. The operation
shall be continued until the entire excavation has been completed so as to ensure the
excavation is always dry.
 Adequate number of pumps shall be deployed to ensure a continuous dewatering
process.
 Power / Fuel required for the operation of pumps etc shall be provided and paid for by
the Contractor.
 A log needs to be maintained if required.
 Necessary grading, trenching and temporary sumps shall be made around
excavations as required to prevent water runoff into excavation and to ensure proper
protection to slopes from erosion.
 The excavation shall be kept free from water: During inspection and measurement.
 From start to completion of concreting till they come above existing ground.
 Dewatering may have to be continued till a suitable number of levels as instructed by
the Structural Engineer are constructed to balance the possible uplift water pressure.
 Till the Engineer in Charge consider that the concrete is sufficiently set. Till the
underground reservoir is tested for water tightness.
 Contractor shall ensure the bailing out of water continuously using number of pumps
after make shift arrangement.
P) Shoring And Strutting
The Contractor shall uphold the faces of excavation work to retain the earth, if
required, at locations where considered necessary. Shoring and strutting shall be
erected depending on nature of soil and the work. The arrangement of shoring and
strutting including sizes and spacing of member used shall be approved by the
Engineer in Charge. All such necessary work, including but not limited to making /
preserving / maintaining adequate slopes, necessary precautions, etc for ensuring

220
107
 safety of workmen below natural ground level shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible to protect the bottom of excavation
from weather.
Q) Protection
The excavated area shall be surrounded by strong barricaded safety barriers made
of Steel barricade posts 75mm 100mm (3 4 inches) diameter and cross planks/
runners shall be erected to a height of 1.2m all around the excavation with reflective
tapes and necessary lighting at night all as shown on drawings. The barricade is such
that no person can enter the area even by crawling below the same. The Contractor
shall take all necessary measures for the safety of the excavation, persons working,
tools and plants working in and near the excavation pits, property and people in the
vicinity. Protection and maintenance of all benchmarks axis points and other similar
reference points if disturbed and/ or damaged, to be replaced by the Contractor at no
extra cost to the Developer. The Contractor shall survey the project site for any buried
utilities or obstacles for excavation. Location of existing utility lines; if shown on the
drawings, is only approximate and only for interpretation. The Contractor shall be
responsible of the protection of all buried utilities (known or unknown prior to
excavation) during the duration of the Contract without causing any damage,
dislocation, injury and/ or interruption to these utility services. If so, the same shall be
replaced/ restored to their original status at the Contractor
All the temporary roads, constructions etc shall be made and maintained according
to the provisions of this Contract and as per the instructions of the Engineer in
Charge upon the completion of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove after
getting the approval from the Engineer in Charge all such temporary roads,
structures, etc. and restore the area in its original condition without any extra cost.
R) Earthwork Fills
a) Methodology for Depositing Fills
1) General filling
 Selected filling material as per BOQ from a selected quarry after the approval of
Engineer in Charge shall be used.
 Suitability of filling material from the excavated soil for filling or back filling shall be
as decided by the Engineer in Charge.
 Deposit in horizontal layers not exceeding 300 mm thick before compaction.
 Where material is dry, wet each layer to its optimum moisture content for compaction
purposes.
 Where material is wet, delay compaction and placement of additional fill until
optimum moisture content is attained.
2) Structural filling:
 Deposit in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm thick before compaction.
 Each layer shall be uniformly moist and at the optimum moisture content for
compaction purposes.
3) Crushed stone:
 Deposit in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm thick.
 Deposit material so that it is free from lenses, pockets, streaks and other
imperfections. Consolidate using hand tamping, vibratory tampers or other approved
methods.
4) Structural Fill:
a. Tests shall be executed by an independent testing agency.
b. In executing tests comply with the following IS Standards:
(i) Sampling
(ii) Sample preparation
(iii)Sieve analysis
(iv)Liquid limits
(v) Plastic limit and plasticity index
(vi)Moisture content

221
108
 (vii)Moisture density relationship
(viii) Sand equivalent
(ix)Specific gravity
(x) Sand core density
(xi) Rubber balloon density
c. Classification
 Carry out moisture density tests on representative samples prior to placing. Carry out
gradation of materials prior to placing as the work proceeds.
 Carry out site density tests of materials as the work proceeds and as follows:
5) Frequency of tests
i. Structural Fills:
a. One test for each 500 Cum. placed.
b. One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement conditions.
ii General Fill:
a. One test for each 3000 Cum. placed.
b. One test required whenever there is a change of gradation or placement conditions.
c. Execute site density tests for compaction at a minimum depth of 100 mm below
compacted surface.
d. Execute a full compaction test or a one-point compaction test in conjunction with each
site density determination.
e. Execute a gradation test with each site density test and whenever there is an apparent
change in material being placed.
f. Execute the following site density tests and laboratory moisture density tests to
evaluate compaction achieved:
g. One test for every 200-400 cum of backfill in trenches or surrounding structures.
h. One test for every full shift of compaction operation on mass earthwork.
iii Filling Material for Foundation and Back Filling.
 Contractor shall consider the following filling materials as required in the Bill of
quantities.
 Excavated material from within the site meeting the fill material standards Approved
Earth Brought from outside
 Approved quality river sand brought from outside Approved quality murrum brought
from out side
 Approved quality manufactured sand / ROBO Sand/ Rock sand brought from outside.
The procedure for filling shall be applicable for all the above filling materials as
detailed in this specification. All the filling material shall comply with the relevant
IS Codes and standards referred herein for all practical purposes. All the filling
material so decided to use it to this site as per the BOQ shall be got approved by the
Engineer in charge. Source of filling material shall be intimated by the Contractor to
the client and after approval of the source the frequency of visit to such sources shall
be as decided by the Engineer in charge.
iv Material Specifications for Fill and Water
a) General and Structural Fill:
 To conform to gradation of well graded soil.
 To be free from plastic fines and weakly elemental lumps of sand.
 To be homogeneous and at the optimum moisture content for compaction purposes
when placed.
b) Crushed stone:
To consist of either:
 Durable crushed rock comprising angular fragments obtained by breaking and
crushing solid or shattered natural rock, or
 Durable crushed gravel stone obtained by artificial crushing of gravel, boulders, or
fieldstone.
 Rubble soling 20 cm in height consisting of random granite stone/ available laterite
stone including filling in voids with durable crushed rock comprising angular

222
109
 fragments and consolidating with mechanical ramming.
c) Water
Water used for compacting fill or for washing crushed stone shall be clean and free
from oil, grease, organic matter, suspended sediments and other deleterious
substances.
d) Adjacent excavations:
Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle of 60 Deg. from the
horizontal from the nearest formation level of another higher excavation, the lower
excavation, all work within it and backfilling thereto shall be completed before the
higher excavation is done.
e) Excavated formations:
 In made up ground, excavate foundations down to a natural bearing formation of
undisturbed subsoil, unless otherwise instructed.
 Obtain instructions if a natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil: Is obtained
at a lesser depth than shown on the Drawings
 Is not obtained at the depth shown on the drawings.
 If after inspection formation becomes unsuitable for any reason, excavate further and
Backfill with approved material all at the Contractor’s expenses.
f) Treatment of Formations
 Treatment of formations generally includes:
 Trim excavations to required profiles and levels. Remove all loose material.
g) Excess excavation:
 Backfill any excavations taken deeper than required with shall be filled with mass
concrete.
 Where such excess excavation is carried out without approval, necessary extra
backfilling shall be at the contractor's expense.
h) Proof Rolling under Fill Embankments
After removal of topsoil, the existing natural ground that will be under fill
embankments shall be scarified to a depth of not less than 150mm and compacted so
that the criteria called for on the specification are met.
i) Compaction Requirement
The required compaction of fills which are deemed to be part of bulk earthworks
shall be achieved by a minimum number of passes of compaction plant. This plant,
unless the Engineer in Charge specifically allows in writing, shall include the
following types:
a. For primary compaction and may include either or both types.
b. Of the following listed types for the final compaction of the surface.
Vibratory roller of either double or single vibrating drum of not more than 3.2 tones
mass per meter of roll width having a vibration frequency of not less than 37 Hz.
Vibrating roller not exceeding the above weight limit but of frequency less than 37 Hz
are approved providing the nominal amplitude does not exceed that shown relative to
the weight in tones per meter roll width in figure1 any other vibrating roller
specifically approved by the Project manager. Vibrating rollers of less than 1 ton per
meter of roll width shall not be used to compact any layer of fill of more than 175mm
of un-compacted thickness.
Three-wheel steel-tired rollers having rear rolls each at least 0.50m wide and having
not less than 4.5 Tones per meter of roll width.
 Pneumatic tired roller having a minimum weight when operating of not less than
seven tones, spread over at least three pneumatic tired wheels.
For filling in inaccessible places or against structures, hand tamping or small
vibratory compaction equipment may be used with the approval of the Engineer in
Charge.
Care must be taken during compaction to ensure that no gaps are formed between
adjacent layers.
Fill material shall be compacted to attain the densities as called for in the

223
110
specifications.
As filling proceeds, test to verify the compaction being achieved shall be conducted.
Tests shall be done at a minimum frequency no less than one test per 150 cum. of fill
volume. Testing locations shall be distributed evenly throughout the fill volume
and each layer area. The locations shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in
Charge and copies of the results of all tests shall be submitted to them whether
successful or not.
In the event that tests do not verify the minimum compaction requirements, the
whole of the area for which the test is representative shall be reworked and retested,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charge.
Where the Engineer in Charge is of the opinion that a specific area within an
embankment cannot compact to the specified density, he shall order alternative
improvement works.
The following references shall be used to confirm compliance:
Sampling BS 5930 (or as updated), IS 2720
Field Dry Density: BS 1377: 1975 Clause 4.4 Test 15 (or as updated)
“Determination of the dry density of soil on the site – Sand replacement test”
Standard Maximum BS 1377: 1975 Clause 4.1 Test 12 (or as updated)
Dry Density : Determination of dry density/moisture content relationship”
using 2kg rammer.
Moisture Content: BS 1377: 1975 Clause 2.1 Test 1 (or as updated) Determination
of the moisture content Standard
 Remove all suitable and excess material from areas to be filled.
 Surface of ground with a gradient exceeding 1 in 5, which is to receive filling
must have horizontal benches cut to match the depths of compacted layers of
filling.
 Do not place fill until the formation has been inspected by the Engineer in
Charge. Give the Engineer in Charge at least 24 hours ‘notice’ of when
formations will be ready for inspection.
Compact filling after grading and levelling surfaces. Compact filling in layers,
adding any necessary extra fill and water, to attain the minimum dry densities as
tabulated in the table appended at the end of this Section.
Backfilling and compaction shall be undertaken under full-time presence of the
Contractor’s, Supervisor, and each layer shall be got checked by the Engineer in
Charge. Further layers are not to be placed without the approval of the Engineer in
Charge.
Compact filling using vibratory plate, roller or other approved (mechanical)
equipment, making the required number of passes with the equipment to obtain
specified densities. Each trip of equipment shall overlap the previous trip by 500mm.
If selected earth kept aside is not sufficient for the back filling, the Contractor, with its
own cost, shall bring in good quality earth, murrum etc. from borrow pits, either
approved at the site and/ or elsewhere by the Engineer in Charge. The cost of
developing and reinstating the same after use as per the directions of the Engineer in
Charge and/or local laws prevailing for such borrow pits, loading, transporting and re-
handling of earth/ murrum etc. deemed to have been included in its rates by the
Contractor.
The Contractor at its own cost rectify and / or restore the damage (s) occurred due to
improper backfill and compaction done by it.
If any settlement occurs due to improper backfill and compaction and/ or cracks
developing in the sub-structure/ super structure works due to the same, the
Contractor shall make good its damages/ defects at no extra cost to the Developer.
The contractor at its own cost protect by bracing the basement walls till the proper
back filling and compaction are completed with the satisfaction of the Engineer in
Charge and complying with the conditions of the Contract and Technical
Specifications. The Contractor shall also undertake and execute the patching of the

224
111
 basement wall after removal of such bracing at no extra cost.
All the back filling and compaction works shall be of acceptable standard to both of the
Engineer in Charge and the Structural Engineer.
The Contractor shall include in its rates the cost of removal of debris/ rubbish etc.
from the bottom of the basement wall prior to back filling.
Table for compaction requirements:
Fill Materials Min. Passes Min. Energy* Min. Compaction
General Fill 3 4550 Kg 95%
Structural Fill:
Confined spaces 4 1150 Kg 95%
Open spaces 3 4450 Kg 95%
Crushed stone:
Confined spaces 4 1150 Kg -
Open spaces 3 4450 Kg -
Catch 3 4450 Kg 95%
Notes:
 Forces applied for compaction shall be dynamic or impact loads.
 Specified percentages of compaction shall be related to the maximum dry density at
the optimum moisture content as established by and verified on site by.
 Correct field density to account for stone material larger than 19 mm in accordance
with suggested methods.
Concrete General Scope
This section gives the technical requirements for all structural concrete in building
and civil Construction Management works except where otherwise modified or
amended within the Contract. All general requirements are given in this specification
covering, but not limited to; definitions; Contractor’s responsibilities; site conditions;
site safety; construction program; quality control; materials; testing; site
transportation and accommodation; temporary works; maintenance and as-built
drawings.
Building Regulations and Authoritative Standards and Codes of Practice
A. Where the structural concrete is to be used in any building works, the concrete
shall comply with the requirements of the latest version of Indian Standards (IS),
except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. A complete set
of all these documents shall generally be available at site with the Contractor.
B. List of certain important Indian Standards and Codes applicable to this work is
given below. However, the applicable standards and codes shall be as per, but
not limited to the list given below:
Sr No Code Description
1 IS: 383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete
2 IS: 432 Specification for mild steel, medium tensile steel bars and
hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.
3 IS: 455 Portland slag cement
4 IS: 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced Concrete
5 IS: 457 Code of practice for general construction of plain &
reinforced concrete for dams & other massive structures
6 IS: 460 Specification for test sieves (Part I, II & III)
1.Wire cloth test sieve
2.Perforated plate test sieve
3.Method of examination of test sieves

225
112
7 IS: 515 Specification for natural and manufactured aggregates from
natural sources for concrete
8 IS: 516 Method of test for strength of concrete
9 IS: 650 Standard sand for testing of cement
10 IS: 875 Design loads for building structure
(Part I, II, III)
11 IS: 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete
12 IS: 1200 Methods of measurement of building and Civil / Architect /
Engineering Works
13 IS: 1322 Specification for bitumen felt for water proofing and damp
proofing
14 IS: 1489 Portland-Pozzolana cement Fly Ash based and Calcined
Clay Based
15 IS: 1566 Hard drawn steel wire fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
16 IS: 1786 Specification for cold-worked steel high Strength deformed
bars for concrete reinforcement
17 IS: 1791 Batch type concrete mixers

18 IS: 1834 Hot applied sealing compound for joint in concrete

19 IS: 1838 Preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements
and structures
20 IS: 1893 Earthquake resistant design
21 IS: 2062 Steel for general structural purposes
22 IS: 2074 Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide

23 IS: 2204 Code of Practice for Construction of Reinforced Concrete

Shell Roof
24 IS: 2210 Criteria for the design of reinforced concrete shell
structures and folded plates
25 IS: 2386 Methods of test of aggregates for concrete
26 IS: 2430 Methods of sampling of aggregates for concrete
27 IS: 2438 Roller pan mixer
28 IS: 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
29 IS: 2505 Concrete Vibrators Immersion Types
30 IS: 2506 General requirements for screed board concrete vibrators
31 IS: 2514 Concrete vibrating tables
32 IS: 2571 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring
33 IS: 2645 Specification for Integral cement water proofing compound

34 IS: 2722 Portable swing weigh batchers for concrete (Single and
double bucket type)
35 IS: 3025 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for
water and waste water
226
113
36 IS: 3067 Code of practice for general design details and preparatory
works for damp proofing and water proofing of buildings
37 IS: 3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of
liquids
38 IS: 3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in
buildings
39 IS: 3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for
consolidating concrete
40 IS: 3812 Specification for fly ash use as Pozzolana and admixtures
41 IS: 3025 Methods of Sampling and test (Physical and Chemical for
water)
42 IS: 4031 Methods for physical tests for hydraulic concrete
43 IS: 4082 Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction
materials at site
44 IS: 4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and
construction of building
45 IS: 4656 Form vibrators for concrete
46 IS: 4671 Expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purposes
47 IS: 4925 Batching and mixing plant
48 IS: 4926 Specification for ready mixed concrete
49 IS: 4995 Criteria for design of reinforced concrete bins for storage of
granular and powdery materials
50 IS: 4998 Criteria for design of reinforced concrete chimneys
51 IS: 5256 Code of practice for sealing

52 IS: 5816 Method of test for splitting tensile strength of concrete

cylinders
53 IS: 6452 Specification for high alumina cement for structural use
54 IS: 64 61 Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete
55 IS: 6494 Code of practice for water proofing and underground water
reservoirs and swimming pools
56 IS: 6509 Code of practice for installation of joints in concrete
pavements
57 IS: 6909 Specification for super sulphated Cement.
58 IS: 7293 Safety code for working with Construction machinery
59 IS: 7861 Code of practice for extreme weather concreting.
1. Recommended practice for hot weather concreting.
2. Recommended practice for cold weather concreting

60 IS: 8041 Specification for rapid hardening Portland cement (first

revision)
61 IS: 8042 Specification for white Portland cement (first revision)
62 IS: 8043 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement (first
revision)
63 IS: 8112 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement
64 IS: 9012 Recommended practice for shortsheeting

227
114
 65 IS: 9013 Method of making, curing and determining compressive
strength of accelerated cured concrete test specimens
66 IS: 9103 Admixtures for concrete
67 IS: 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design
68 IS: 11384 Code of practice for composite construction in structural
steel and concrete
69 IS: 12118 Two-part polysulphide-based sealant
70 IS: 1220 Code of practice for provision of water Stops at transverse
contraction joints in masonry and concrete dams
71 IS: 12269 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement.
72 IS: 12600 Low heats Portland cement
73 SP: 23 Handbook of concrete mixes
74 SP: 24 Explanatory Hand book on Indian Standard code for plain
and reinforced concrete (IS:456-1978)
75 SP: 27 Handbook of method of measurement of building works

C. The Contractor must understand thoroughly any such requirements stated by the
foregoing Codes and Regulations before tendering. He shall also construct the
work in strict accordance with this Specification, working drawings and written
instructions issued by the Engineer in charge.
D. If the Contractor wishes to substitute any of the codes mentioned above with
other authoritative standards or codes, he shall submit details of these
authoritative standards / codes along with two complete copies to the Engineer in
Charge for approval. Approval for such substitution shall be at the discretion of
the Engineer in Charge and will not be given unless the Engineer in Charge
considers the proposed standard or code of practice will give a quality of
finished work equal to or better than the specified standard.
E. The Engineer in Charge reserves the right to check the work constructed by the
Contractor, and his setting out at such times as he may deem fit. There is
however no obligation on his part to make such checks and any omission by him
to observe errors shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities in these
respects.
Preliminary Information from Contractor
The Contractor shall submit the following information on his proposals for the
approval of the Engineer in Charge before work is commenced:
a. Source of supply of all aggregates / concrete / bricks / solid & hollow blocks
b. Source of supply of cement
c. Source of supply of water
d. Grading curves for coarse and fine aggregate
e. Certificate of soundness of cement
f. Results of tests for organic and inorganic impurities of aggregates and water
g. Results of tests drying shrinkage of aggregates
h. Source of supply of reinforcing steel
i. Test Certificates for reinforcing steel
j. Types of water bars
k. Types of joint fillers and sealant
l. Positions of all construction joints
m. Types of formworks
Bar bending Schedules
Reinforcement bar bending schedules shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer in Charge on this project as and when directed.
Use of Concrete
No concrete of any particular mix proportions shall be incorporated into the Works
228
115
 until all the requirements of this specification have been met in respect of those mix
proportions and have been approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Approvals
A minimum of 14 working days before construction commences the Contractor shall
supply to the Engineer in Charge for his approval details of his proposed layouts of
concrete plant and on-site workshop, details of form work systems and construction
devices, eg. Cranes, chutes, scaffolding, which he proposes to use for structural
concrete. The information is to be sufficiently detailed to enable the Engineer in
Charge to approve or otherwise.
Where the Contractor proposed to use climbing tower cranes or any type of plant
which places any load on the reinforced concrete structure, he must furnish full
details of such plant to the Engineer in Charge for approval a minimum 14 days before
the work is commenced. If approved by the Engineer in Charge, the structure will
be strengthened to carry such loads and the Contractor shall be responsible for any
resulting additional design and construction costs or time incurred. Loads from such
plant or equipment shall only be imposed on such completed story of the structure
where the loaded concrete has already attained the minimum specified 28 days
compressive strength.
The Contractor should note that further approvals for works, as indicated in the
Technical Specifications, are required before construction starts. The Contractor is
wholly responsible for obtaining these approvals and no claim for delays or
additional payments will be entertained due to the Contractors failure to obtain such
approvals in adequate time.
Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review etc. whatsoever by the
Engineer in Charge, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and
obligation regarding adequacy, correctness, completeness, safety, strength, quality,
workmanship etc.
Contractors Responsibility and Defects
The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, plant, equipment,
scaffolding, all materials etc. required for complete execution of the work in
accordance with the drawings and as described herein and / or as directed by the
Engineer in Charge.
The fact that the Contractor has used materials, etc. to the approval of the Engineer in
Charge shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities of producing a
concrete of the required minimum strength, workability, shrinkage characteristics etc.
for the purpose to which it is put.
Any defects due to materials and workmanship not being in accordance with this
specification shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge by
the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer in Charge any damage to the permanent structure which may be caused by
his plant.
If the Contractor desires to leave any permanently embedded supports for his
shuttering, etc. in the concrete, he must furnish in writing exact details of his
proposals and approval must be obtained from the Engineer in Charge.
Source of Supply
The Contractor shall not alter the source of supply of any material from that initially
approved by the Engineer in Charge without the prior written permission of the
Engineer in Charge.
Supervision
The Contractor shall employ competent personnel whose first duty will be the
supervision of all stages of mixing, placing and site testing of all concrete and for
the supervising of the preparation of cubes for testing.
Safety and Site Conditions
The Contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of work, the stipulations contained in

229
116
 the Indian Standard Safety Code and the provisions of the safety code and the
provision of the safety rules as specified in the General Conditions of the Contract for
ensuring safety of men and materials.
Quality Control
Reference shall be made to the accompanying General Specification for Quality
Control Requirements
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in Charge, within 14 days of award, a
Quality Manual in accordance with ISO 9001. The Quality Manual shall outline the
Quality Control measures that the Contractor shall put in place to carry out the
Works and shall include the Quality Control of the Sub-contractors. The Quality
Manual shall include a Project Quality Plan. The Quality Manual shall be reviewed by
the Engineer in Charge and, upon acceptance, shall be implemented by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in Charge, within 14 days of award, a
list of the Quality Control Personnel proposed for the Works and shall outline roles
and responsibilities. Staff listed shall include the Project Manager, Quality Control
Superintendent and Project Foreman. If for some reason, a person so listed is unable
to fulfil their role in this Works, then the Contractor shall find an equivalently
qualified person to fill that vacancy. Details of the proposed replacement shall be
submitted to the Engineer in Charge before.
The Contractor shall establish, document and maintain an inspection and testing system
capable of producing objective evidence that the Works conform to the Specification,
whether carried out by the Contractor or his sub-contractors, or procured from
vendors. A summary of this system shall be included in the Quality Manual.
Materials Cement
Type of Cement
The cement used shall be any of the following with prior approval of the Engineer in
Charge.

 High strength ordinary Portland cement (Grade 43) conforming to IS: 8112.
 Portland Pozzolana cements conforming IS: 1489. Portland slag cements
conforming to IS: 455.
 Portland slag cements confirming to IS:455.
 Unless otherwise specified ordinary Portland cement of 43 grade conforming to
IS 8112-2005 shall be used for all non-standard concrete works.
Ordinary Portland cement (53 Grade) conforming to IS: 12269 shall be used for
important concrete works and grades M30 and above.
White or coloured Portland cement shall comply with physical requirements of IS
8112 and pigments shall be inorganic oxide pigments, either natural or synthetic in
origin complying with the requirements of BS: 1014 Pigments whether added just
before mixing or by the cement manufacturer shall only be incorporated in the
proportions approved.
Super sulphate and high alumina cement shall not be used in any part of the
works unless specified.
For non-structural concrete work OPC 43 shall be used and for concrete work and
design mix of grade M15 and above OPC 53 shall be used. All non-structural
working contactor can go for PPC
Certification and Testing of Cement
The contractor shall obtain a manufacturer’s certificate of test in accordance with the
appropriate standard for each consignment of cement delivered to the site and shall
immediately forward these certificates to the Engineer in Charge for his retention.
Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s certificate the Engineer in Charge may require that
any cement delivered to the site, or elsewhere for use in the works, shall be
sampled and tested as per IS specifications. Any batch of cement so tested which
fails to comply with this specification will be rejected. The cost of any such testing

230
117
 shall be borne by the Contractor. Cement older than 3 months is not to be used for
any works on site.
Delivery and Storage of Cement
Cement of different types and manufacture shall not be mixed one with another.
Cement shall be transported to site in covered vehicles adequately protected against
water. All cement shall be delivered to the Site or elsewhere for use in the Works in
the original sealed bags of the manufacturer or in approved bulk containers.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate
quantity of cement and all cement shall at all times be protected from deterioration.
Cement, unless delivered in bulk, shall be stored and neatly stacked in piles not
exceeding 10 bags high in weather proof closed sheds well away from walls, the
floor of which shall be with raised wooden plank flooring to prevent deterioration
by dampness or intrusion of foreign matter, Storage under tarpaulins shall not be
permitted. Cement delivered in bulk shall be stored in a weather proof silo.
Each consignment of cement shall be clearly identified, stored separately with
clear identifiable stack number and used in chronological order of receipt i.e. the
first received being first used.
Daily record of cement received and consumed shall be maintained by the
Contractor in an approved form and a copy submitted to the Engineer in Charge once
a week.
Inspection of Cement
Any cement which, upon inspection, is considered by the Engineer in Charge to
have deteriorated in any way will be rejected.
Any type and grade of cement more than 3 months old shall invariably be tested
to ascertain that it satisfies the acceptability requirements.
All cement rejected for any cause shall be removed from the project site immediately.
Bulk cement shall be used only if the Engineer in Charge approval in writing has
been obtained. Bulk cement shall conform in all respects to the relevant clauses
above. Automatic weighing equipment shall be used for weighing the cement to be
added to each batch.
Cement for use in all concrete floor slabs and beams shall be obtained from a
single source to maintain uniformity of colour.
Fly ash
If any grade of concrete requires fly ash to be added for the items covered in BOQ
the following procedure shall be followed and shall be complied in conjunction with
the Structural consultant’s approval and to comply with latest codal requirements.
The weight of fly ash shall be restricted to maximum 35% to total weight of
cementitious material as per IS 3812-Part 1. However, if PPC cement is to be used
then use of Fly ash shall be avoided.
a. Fly ash used for cement concrete shall be conforming to IS 3812 Part 1.
Physical and Chemical requirements of fly ash shall confirm to IS. Moisture
content of fly ash shall be as specified by the Engineer in charge. Testing of fly
ash shall be carried out according to IS 1727.
b. Fly ash shall be stored in such a way to permit easy access for inspection and
identification of each consignment. Manufacturer or supplier of fly ash has to
furnish certificate for standard of fly ash. The consignment shall also be
marked with the Standard Mark.
c. Fly Ash shall be obtained only from authorized dealers.
Aggregates for Concrete
Type of Aggregates
Aggregates mean both coarse and fine inert materials used in the preparation of
concrete. Aggregates shall consist of natural sands, crushed stone and gravel from a
source known to produce satisfactory aggregate for concrete complying with IS: 383
and shall be chemically inert, clean, hard, strong, durable against weathering of
limited porosity and free from such quantities of deleterious materials as may cause

231
118
 corrosion of reinforcement or may impair the strength and / or durability of the
concrete. Additionally, the flakiness index when determined by the sieve method
described in IS 2386 shall not exceed 35 for any size of concrete aggregate. Total
percentage of all deleterious materials, including coal, lignite, clay lumps, and
materials finer than 75 microns, soft fragments and shale but excluding mica shall
not exceed 5%. However, for crushed fine aggregate, total percentage of coal and
lignite and clay lumps shall be limited to 2%. Aggregates shall not contain water
soluble Sulphur trioxide in excess of 0.1%. The chloride ion content of the fine and
coarse aggregate shall not exceed 0.06% and 0.02% respectively by mass of dry
aggregate. If either aggregate exceeds these limits the material may still be
considered acceptable by the Engineer in Charge provided that the total chloride ion
concentration derived from the aggregates is not greater than 0.35% by mass of the
cement in the mix. All aggregates shall comply with IS: 2386 and IS: 383 in respect of
impurities and additionally with the following
a. Absorption 6% Maximum by weight for ordinary construction 2 % Maximum
for waterproof construction
b. 1% maximum equivalent anhydrous calcium percentage by weight cement
c. 8% maximum by weight
d. 10% maximum by weight

The drying shrinkage of the aggregates measured in accordance with IS: 2386 shall
not exceed
a. 0.06% for general purpose concrete
b. 0.04% for pre-cast concrete, concrete for special purposes and water proof
concrete.
For reinforced concrete work, aggregates conforming to IS: 383 & IS: 2386
having a maximum size of 20 mm shall be used. For certain reinforced concrete
works, aggregates having a maximum size other than 20 mm size shall also be used
as called for in the drawings. However, for lean concrete provided as mud mat below
structural concrete, maximum size upto 40 mm shall be used.
Aggregates (coarse or fine) with a specific gravity below 2.6 shall not be used
without special permission of the Engineer in Charge. Sand and crushed rock shall be
prepared for use by such screening or washing, or both, as necessary to remove all
objectionable foreign matter at Contractor’s COSL Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate
shall mean aggregate which pass through IS Sieve 4.75 mm (3/16 B.S.) test sieve to
IS: 2430, leaving a residue not more than 5% and shall conform to IS: 383. It shall be
sand from a natural source approved by the Engineer in Charge. Machine- made sand
will be acceptable provided the constituent (rock/gravel) is sound, hard, and dense
and is acceptable to the Engineer in Charge. Sand containing any trace of salt
shall be rejected. The fine aggregate for concrete shall be graded within limits as
specified in Table 1 of IS: 383 - 1970 and the fineness modules shall range between
2.60 to 3.20. The machine- made sand may be used for concrete works as per
acceptable standards. All other civil works river sand will be used. Manufactured
sand only conforming to ZONE 2 will be permitted.
Artificial / Crushed Sand
Considering the recent deficiency in availability of river sand, another alternative
is manufactured sand or crushed sand. The long-term substitute for river sand is
manufactured sand or crushed sand from V.S.I. Crushers. The manufactured sand
must have cubical particles or spherical particles which can be generated only from
V.S.I. Crushers by Cleavage crushing. Due to cleavage breaking of the particle the
surface is smoother. Sand manufactured from any other process/ machine cannot
have cubical shape. Fine aggregates manufactured by Compression crushing (Jaw
crusher, Cone crusher, roll crusher, Hammer mill) are flaky and more angular in
shape. The surface texture is very rough. Therefore, such fine aggregate is not
suitable for concreting and other construction work. The Plasticity of concrete

232
119
 reduces and results in honey combing. So, the process of manufacturing should be
such that it should give Cubical particles. Flaky particles increase voids over cubical
or spherical particles about 5 to 6 percent more and reduce the strength of concrete.
Vertical shaft Impactor principle is used for crushing bigger particles, for shaping the
crushed metal (giving better shape of the particle) and for crushing fines aggregates
below 4.75 mm. It is best machine for making sand from stone. Sand manufactured
by Vertical Shaft Impactor is of cubical shape. Such sand can be used for all types of
construction work, Concreting, plastering etc. and is better substitute to river sand.
From the above following are the requisites of sand:
 All the sand particles should have higher crushing strength. The surface texture of
the particles should be smooth.
 The edges of the particles should be grounded.
 The ratio of fines below 600 microns in sand should not be less than 30%. There
should not be any organic impurities
 Silt in sand should not be more than two percent.
 Total limit of 5 % in crushed stone sand the permissible limit of fines below 150
microns may be up to 20 %. This does not affect the 5 % permissible limit.
Coarse Aggregate:
Coarse aggregate shall mean aggregate of which not less than 95% by weight is
retained on a 4.75mm mesh IS test sieve to IS: 2430 and shall conform to Table 2 of
IS : 383 1970 It shall be obtained from crushed granite, trap, basalt or similar
approved stones from approved quarry. Coarse aggregate shall be chemically inert
when mixed with cement and shall be angular in shape and free from soft friable thin
porous laminated or flaky pieces. It shall be free from dust and other foreign matter.
Unless otherwise specifically stated, for all RCC works the size of coarse aggregate
shall be 20 mm and downsize.
Between the limits specified for coarse and fine aggregates the grading shall be such
as to produce dense concrete of a consistency, which will work into position without
segregation, and without the use of excess water content.
Aggregates for waterproof concrete shall be non-porous, not subject to internal
movement, change in volume, shape or structure and suitable in every respect for use
in water proof concrete. Lightweight aggregate shall be 5mm exfoliated vermiculite or
similar material approved by the Engineer in Charge
Approval of Aggregate
A minimum of 14 working days before the commencement of any concrete work,
the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer in Charge for approval, details of his
proposed source of supply of aggregates giving the aggregate group classification
and typical physical properties as required by IS: 383.
The Engineer in Charge shall be given advance notice of any alteration in the source
of supply of aggregate.
Certification of Aggregates
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer in Charge with a certificate for his
retention at such regular intervals as the Engineer in Charge may prescribe from
time to time showing that all aggregates have been re-tested since the date of the last
such certificate and showing that they continue to comply with the requirements of
this specification.
Samples of aggregates of different sizes or types shall be sent to an approved
laboratory for testing prior to the commencement of any concrete works. The cost of
such testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Notwithstanding any certificate of
compliance, the Engineer in Charge may at any time require that any aggregate
delivered to the site, or elsewhere for use in the works be sampled and tested. Any
aggregate so tested which fails to comply with this specification will be rejected.
Delivery and Storage of Aggregates. No deliveries in bulk shall be commenced until
the Contractor has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge that
the samples comply with this specification.

233
120
 The samples approved by the Engineer in Charge shall be representative of the
grading and general quality of the aggregate delivered during the course of the work.
Graded aggregate as recommended / shown in Table 2 in the document, only shall be
used for all R.C.C. Works.
Any aggregate, which in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, has become
contaminated or does not conform to the foregoing requirements may be rejected by
the Engineer in Charge.
Each size of aggregate shall be stored on separate platform or stockpile and such
platform or stockpile shall be sufficiently removed from each other. In order to
prevent materials at edge of the piles from getting intermixed with each other, bund
walls shall be constructed.
Testing of Aggregates
Tests shall be carried out on samples obtained from the delivered aggregates taken at
intervals required by the Engineer in Charge in accordance with IS: 2386. Tests
shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer in Charge and to the expense of
the Contractor. Should a sample fail to comply with any of the tests the Engineer in
Charge may, at his discretion, either reject the batch from which the sample was
taken, order it to be washed and / or screened, or permit it to be used with
variations in the proportions or the concrete mixes specified. Any batch of aggregate
rejected by the Engineer in Charge shall be removed from site forthwith.
Grading Aggregate
Aggregates will be subjected to sieve analysis to IS: 2386, and the limits of
acceptance are as shown in Table 1 and 2. The Engineer in Charge may require
further analysis to be made if there is any alteration in the type of aggregate. The cost
of any such analysis is to be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor is to provide a set of IS sieves and weighing equipment with
accuracy to 0.5% of the mass of test sample and carry out sieve analysis to IS: 2386
on site as required by the Engineer in Charge at the expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall carry out sieve analysis for coarse and fine aggregates at the
minimum of one per week at each stockpile. At the start of the contract, sieve
analysis should be taken twice per week at each stockpile until the consistency of
grading is evident and agreed by the Engineer in Charge.
Table 1
IS Sieve Designation Percentage Passing
Grading Grading Grading Grading
Zone I Zone II Zone III Zone IV
10 mm 100 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90 - 100 90-100 90-100 95-100
2.36 mm 60 - 95 75 -100 85 -100 95 -100
1.18 mm 30 - 70 55 -90 75 -100 90 -100

IS Sieve Percentage Passing

600 Micron 15 - 34 35 - 59 60 - 79 80 -100
300 Micron 5 - 20 8 - 30 12 - 40 15 -50
150 Micron 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10

234
121
Table 2
IS Sieve A B
Designati % Passing by Weight for single sized % Passing by Weight of
on ungraded aggregate of nominal size graded aggregate of nominal
size
63 40 20 16 12.5 10 40 20 16 12.5
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

80 mm 100 - - - - - 100 - - -
63 mm 85- 100 - - - - - - - -
100
40 mm 0 - 30 85 - 100 - - - 95 - 100 - -
100 100
20 mm 05 0-20 85 - 100 - - 30- 95- 100 100
100 70 100
16 mm - - - 85- 100 - - - 90- -
100 100
12.5 mm - - - - 85- 100 - - - 90-
100 100
10 mm 0-5 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 85 - 10- 25- 30- 40-
100 35 55 70 85
4.75 mm - - 0-5 0-5 0-10 0-20 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10
2.36 mm - - - - - 0-5 - - - -

Water and Ice for Concrete

Water for use in mixing and curing concrete shall be clean, fresh and free from
injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, sugar, organic materials or other
substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Potable water is generally
considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. The maximum permissible values of
impurities shall be as given in clause no. 5.4 of IS: 456 - 2000. Water storage tanks
shall be covered to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge to prevent contamination.
In case of doubt regarding development of strength, the suitability of water for
making concrete shall be ascertained by the compressive strength and initial setting
time tests specified in IS:456.
The Engineer in Charge may require that any water be sampled and tested at the
expense of the Contractor by the method given in IS: 3025. Water failing the criteria
given in the appendix to IS: 3025 will be rejected.
The Contractor shall produce test results of water proposed to be used on the job
for approval by the Engineer in Charge before using for concrete works.
Water for use in mixing with cement shall neither be hotter than 25oC nor colder than
5oC at the time of mixing
Wherever temperature-controlled concrete is specified, the Contractor may establish
an ice making plant of required capacity at site.
Measures for Controlling Alkali Aggregate Reaction
Measures to control the occurrence of alkali-aggregate reaction (AAR) in concrete
shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge for approval. In the absence of
alternative proposals, such control shall be achieved by limiting the reactive
alkali content of the concrete as described in clauses 2.5.2 to 2.5.4 below unless in
the opinion of the Engineer in Charge the concrete element will not be subjected to
moisture ingress throughout its design life.
The reactive alkali of concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide per cubic
metre of concrete shall not exceed 3.0 kg.
The equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O) content of the concrete shall be determined in

235
122
 accordance with the following steps:
The equivalent Na2O shall be calculated by the expression: Equivalent Na2O = A + B
+ C Where;
A. is the sum of the acid-soluble alkalis (expressed as equivalent Na2O) of cement,
admixture and water
B. is equal to 1/6 the total alkalis of pulverized fuel ash (PFA) (expressed as equivalent
Na2O) and
C. is equal to 0.76 times the chloride ion (Cl) of the aggregate

The acid-soluble alkali content of the cement shall be determined in accordance with
IS: 4032 and shall be taken as the average of the latest 25 daily determination of
equivalent sodium oxide plus twice the standard deviation of the results.
The acid soluble alkali content of admixtures shall be determined in accordance with
IS: 4032.
The acid-soluble alkali content of water shall be determined in accordance with
American Public health Association (APHA) 17 ed. 1989) Sections 3500-K and 3500-
Na.
The total alkali content of the PFA shall be determined in accordance with IS: 4032
and shall be taken as the average of 25 weekly determination plus twice the
standard deviation of the results.
The equivalent sodium oxide content of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be
calculated from the quantity of chloride ion present measured in accordance with IS:
2386. The calculation indicating the amount of the reactive alkali in the concrete mix
should be submitted by the concrete supplier to the Engineer in Charge.
Admixtures
No admixtures of cements containing additive shall be used in concrete unless
specified or approved by the Engineer in Charge. Such approval will not be given
unless in the Engineer in Charge’s opinion specific benefit to the density or quality of
the concrete will result. Additives so approved shall be used strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendation and written instructions. Admixtures should
not have detrimental effect on reinforcement.
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer in Charge for use
of additives if they differ from those specified by the Engineer in Charge, and their
use is proposed by the Contractor but not specified by the Engineer in Charge.
The Contractor shall submit the following details of any admixtures or cement
containing additives for approval before using:
Brand name and manufacturer’s literature.
Proposed dosage as per manufacturers specification and detrimental effects, if any,
of under dosage and/or over dosage.
Method of adding to the concrete mix and Details of the Chloride content
The chloride ion content of admixtures for concrete containing embedded metal or
for concrete containing sulphate resisting Portland cement shall not exceed 2% by
mass of admixture or 0.03% by mass of the cementitious content, whichever is the
less.
Calcium chloride as accelerating admixture is not permitted to be used.
Where the use of admixtures is specified or approved, they shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 9103 and shall be of proven make and from a reputed
manufacturer.
The Contractor shall produce latest test results carried out at approved Government
Test Houses for the approval of the Engineer in Charge, before use.
Approved admixtures shall be stored in watertight weatherproof containers clearly
marked to show the contents.
The pouring of concrete at various heights shall be at 0.00m to 4.50m, 4.50m to
7.00m and 7.00m to 12.50m.
Steel bar Reinforcement
236
123
 Refer separate specification given elsewhere.
Joint Fillers and Sealants
Joint fillers shall be pre-formed and of a proprietary brand in accordance with the
drawings or similar approved by the Engineer in Charge and shall be placed in
accordance manufacturer’s recommendation and written instructions with the Joint
sealants shall be as described in the drawings, or similar approved by the Engineer in
Charge and shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation and written instructions.
Poured joint sealing compound shall be a hot poured rubber bitumen compound
complying with the requirements of IS: 1580 or BS: 2499 unless otherwise specified.
Water Stops
Water Swelling Bars made up of flexible polymer composites shall be used at
construction joints of retaining walls and water retaining structures and wherever
specified with proper overlaps at joints of approved makes as per Engineer in-Charge
approval. Water stops shall be either metallic like copper or non-metallic like PVC.
Water stops shall be pre-formed and of a proprietary brand in accordance with the
drawings, or similar approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Water stops shall be used at all construction joints in Water Tanks or other
structures designated as Watertight Structures.
Curing Compounds
Concrete curing compound for structures shall be a liquid resin or wax-resin base
membrane curing compound of an approved proprietary brand. It shall have a
minimum curing efficiency of 75% and shall contain a fugitive dye.
Aluminized curing compound shall, when applied at the rate of approximately 0.25
litres / m2 by a mechanical sprayer with low pressure fine spray, become stable and
impervious to evaporation of water from the concrete surface within 60 minutes after
application.
The curing compound shall contain sufficient flake aluminum in finely divided
dispersion to produce a complete coverage of the sprayed surface with a metallic
finish. The curing compound shall not react chemically with the concrete to be cured
and shall not crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks after application.
Concrete curing compound for carriage ways shall be a non-pigmented liquid resin or
wax- resin base membrane curing compound of a proprietary brand. It shall achieve a
96% efficiency index and shall be available both with and without a fugitive dye.
The Contractor shall supply test certificates, prepared by an approved testing
laboratory, to show that the compound will provide the required curing efficiency.
Curing compounds shall not be detrimental to the applied finish and surface
treatments specified on the drawings.
Damp-proof Membranes
Damp-proof Membranes (DPM) generally for use below non-suspended ground floor
slabs shall be 1200-gauge (0.3mm) polythene sheet complying with Packaging and
Industrial Film Association Standard 6/83 and shall be laid and jointed in strict
accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.
Concrete - Workmanship
Steel Reinforcement
Refer separate specification given elsewhere.
Form work and False work (Should also be read with Special Form work in the relevant
section)-
Type of Form work
 Form work shall include all temporary or permanent forming for the concrete,
together with all temporary construction required for its support.
 False work shall include any temporary structure used to support a permanent
structure during its erection and until it becomes self-supporting.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, stability, supply, fixing,
alignment and safe removal of all form work, false work and supports in accordance

237
124
with IS: 14687, IS: 4990 and BS: 5975. Strutting shall be so arranged that it can be
removed without undue shock to the concrete. The Contractor shall submit the
design of false work and form work to the Engineer in Charge for approval before
construction. In the case of folded plates and shell roofs the Contractor should take
approval for the pattern of centering and shuttering along with program for de-
shuttering.
The Contractor shall construct form work and false work to support safely the worst
combined effects of all loads as given below so that the final concrete structure is
within the limits of acceptable dimensional tolerances and without causing bulging or
deflection:
a. Total weight of form work, reinforcement and wet concrete
b. Construction loads, including dynamic effects of placing, compacting and
construction traffic and
c. Wind loads

All form work shall be watertight and so constructed that there shall be no loss of
material from the concrete. After the concrete has hardened and the form work has
been removed, the concrete shall be in the position and of the shape, dimensions, and
surface finish described in this specification or on the drawings.
The form work shall so design and positioned that can be removed without damage
to concrete. In the case of beams, slabs or like members the form work shall be so
arranged that the sides or edges may be removed without disturbance to the soffit or
propping system.
Form work shall compose of steel, best quality wood or non-absorbent type
plywood. Timber shall be free from significant knots and shall be of medium grain
as far as possible and hard woods shall be used as caps and wedges under or over
posts. Timber shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes, worm holes, warps or
other surface defects and shall have smooth finish.
Staging, unless specified otherwise, shall generally be of mild steel tubes, steel beams
and channels etc.
Plywood shall be used in exposed surfaces (fair faced finish specified) as shown on
drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge where especially fair faced finish
is required. Such surfaces shall be formed using approved brand of heavy quality
water resistant plywood to produce a perfectly levelled, uniform and smooth surface.
Form work for Architectural shapes for columns, ring beams, circular or spherical
walls, shell roofs or bottoms in the case of water reservoirs or any other structure
shall be made from approved plywood or steel plates and frames.

Form work composed of steel and or approved good quality (seasoned) wood may be
used in places where ordinary surface finish in required, plywood shuttering can also
be used by the Contractor.

The staging shall be true and rigid and thoroughly braced in both directions as
well as cross braced, strutted and propped such that it will not deform unduly
under weight of concrete and other loads due to men, equipment, etc. Vertical
member or props should not be supported on an un-propped lower suspended floor
or beam unless it is ensured by the Contractor that the lower floor or beam can
safely carry the loads. No propping shall take place until the Engineer-in Charge.

To achieve the desired rigidity, ample studs, braces, bolts, spacer blocks, wires,
lamps, ties, straps, shores, etc. shall be used to hold the form in proper position
without undue distortion.

Temporary openings for cleaning, inspection and for pouring concrete shall be
provided at the base of vertical forms and at other places, where these are necessary

238
125
 and as may be directed by the Engineer in Charge. The temporary openings shall be
so formed that they can be conveniently closed rigidly when required and must not
leave any mark on the concrete.

Provision shall be made for traffic on form work not to bear directly on reinforcing
steel.
The mould used for manufacturing precast components normally consist of two parts,
(a) bottom mould and (b) side moulds. The bottom mould can be made out of
timber, masonry, concrete, steel FRP, plastic or any other material acceptable to
the Engineer in Charge. The side moulds similarly can be of timber, steel FRP,
or plastic. When using masonry or concrete moulds, the top surface shall be
finished to the required accuracy and made smooth.
In case of masonry moulds, the use of chicken mesh or fibre reinforcements in the top
surfaces will help in making the mould last longer for higher efficiency.
In the case of cored units can be created either by an extrusion process, by inflated
tubes, Mild steel tubes, timber, cardboard / hard paper or any other materials.
Pre-cambering of Form work
In general, and unless otherwise shown or specified in the contract, all form work
for beams and slabs shall be set with an upward camber at mid span of 2 mm per 1.0m
of span for all spans in excess of 5.0 m. Cantilevers shall be set with an upward
camber at end of span of 4mm per 1.0m. Pre-camber of 40 mm at mid span of flat slab
shall be provided. Contractor has to evaluate the need for any additional camber as per
his means and method of construction and present the same to the Structural Engineer
for review.
Joints in Form work
All joints in form work shall be either horizontal or vertical, end form work being
square across the mass of concrete. The design of the form work shall permit it to
be struck and removed without injury to the concrete. The joints shall be sufficiently
tight to prevent any leakage of mortar.
The Contractor shall use grout checks at all horizontal construction joints and shall
adopt such other approved expedients, e.g. foam rubber sealing strips, polyester crack
filler in joints, or taping of joints, as may be necessary to obtain satisfactory results at
joints in form work.
Internal Metal Ties for Form work
Where internal metal ties are permitted, their removable parts shall be extracted
without damage to the concrete and the remaining holes shall be carefully pressure
grouted using epoxy grout. No permanently embedded metal part shall have less
cover than that indicated for adjacent steel reinforcement.
Internal metal ties in fair faced concrete work shall be arranged in an approved
neat, regular, consistent pattern throughout the work.
Details of internal metal ties shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge for
approval well in advance prior to their use in the works.
The CLIENT/ may at his discretion allow the Contractor to use tie-bolts running
through the concrete and the Contractor shall decide the location and size of such tie
-bolts in consultation with the Engineer in Charge. Holes left in the concrete by these
tie-bolts shall be filled as specified by the Engineer in Charge at no extra cost. No
through tie will be permitted in all liquid / earth retaining walls / slabs, basement
walls etc.
Holes in Form Work
When holes are to be provided in formwork for pipes, weep holes and the like, shall
be neatly trimmed to accommodate the pipe and caulked with an approved material
to form a grout-tight joint.
Sloping Form Work
When concrete is to be deposited to a steeper slope than 15o from the horizontal top
forms shall be used to enable the concrete to be properly compacted.

239
126
Cast in Pipes / Sleeves / GI Puddle Flanges
Where required in external walls, retaining walls and like structural elements, cast in
pipes and sleeves shall be fixed securely in place and shall be provided with GI
puddle flanges and hydrophilic caulking compounds as specified on the drawings
The Contractor shall fix pipe sleeves and inserts or box out to form holes and chases
to specified size and incorrect positions before placing concrete. Hardened concrete
shall not be cut to provide holes or chases without prior approval. Where reinforcement
passes through form work, the form work shall be designed and constructed to
maintain the reinforcement in it correct position and to minimize leakage of concrete
or grout.
Approval of Form Work
For each concrete pour requiring form work propping, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer in Charge, well in advance prior to commencement of form work and
propping, details and / or calculations of all proposed form work and props, along
with a detailed programme the work. Such approval, if given, shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety or adequacy of such form work for
its purposes.
Classification of Form work with respect to its intended usage
Contractor shall note that the system of form work for its intended usage proposed in
the BOQ shall be adhered to. For all the form work systems covered in BOQ such as
TABLA, MIVAN, DOKA etc. Contractor shall submit the detailed methodology
based on the manufactures recommendations for structural and all other type of
loading conditions, including submission of shop drawings and its approval for
which the formwork system shall be designed, to the Engineer in Charge. Formwork
system demo and site visits for such system display, mock-ups and the corrective
measures suggestions on such systems by the Engineer in Charge shall be
implemented and adhered to.
Surface Treatment for Form Work
The inside surface of forms, except for permanent form work, or unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer in Charge, shall be coated with an approved material to
prevent adhesion of the concrete.
Surface retarders or release agents shall not be used without prior approval. Release
agents shall not be used where surface treatments require bonding adhesives to be
applied. Mould oils or release agents shall be of a type, which shall have no adverse
effect to concrete and, on any finishes, to be applied to the concrete or on the
appearance of fair faced concrete. Release agents shall be applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall not come into contact with
reinforcement or pre-stressing tendons. Different release agents shall not be used in
formwork to concrete, which shall be visible in the finished works.
Care should be taken that moulds oils or release agents do not accumulate at the
bottom of form work. If the form work is not used within 24 hours, a further coat of
moulds oil or release agent shall be applied before casting the concrete.
Cleaning of Form Work
 All rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings and sawdust shall be removed from
the interior of all form work immediately before concrete is placed. In the
case of deep sections an opening shall be left at the base to enable such
cleaning to be adequately completed.
 The Contractor shall provide compressed air jet and / or a water jet free from any
oil or other contamination for the cleaning of form work.
Inspection of Form work
Concreting shall not commence until the Engineer in Charge has had an opportunity
to inspect the form work and any enclosed reinforcement and given his approval to
commence concreting. The erection, casing and striking of the form work shall be
done under the personal supervision of a competent foreman.
Stripping of Form Work

240
127
 Form work shall be stripped with the approval of the Engineer in Charge at such a
time and in such a manner without disturbing, damaging or overloading the finished
concrete work or the structure.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in Charge before removal of any form work.
The time minimum periods between completion of any concreting and removal of
forms as given below:
In normal circumstances forms shall not be released until the concrete has achieved a
strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected as the time
of removal of form work in accordance to clause no. 11.3 of IS:456-2000.
Table 3
Minimum Period
Type of Formwork Before striking form
work
a) Vertical formwork to columns, walls, beams 16 24 h
b) Soffit formwork to slabs (props to be refixed
immediately after removal of formwork) 3 days
c) Soffit formwork to beams (props to be refixed
immediately after removal of formwork) 7 days
d) Props to slabs:
1) Spanning upto 4.5 m 7 days
2) Spanning over 4.5 m 14 days

e) Props to beams and arches:

1) Spanning up to 6.0 m 14 days
2) Spanning over 6.0 m 21 days

For other cements and lower temperature, the stripping time recommended above may
be suitably modified in consultation with the Structural Engineer.
Adverse weather conditions or different cement may cause the above periods to be
increased. In case, the Contractor wish to reduce these striking times, he must
satisfy the Engineer in Charge that the strength of the concrete at such time and the
structural system is adequate to withstand the dead and imposed loads applied to it.
Before reducing the striking times, the Engineer in Charge agreement shall be
obtained in writing.
In case of special structures, such as shells, folded plates, etc., the sequence of removal
of forms shall be as per drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
In case of cantilever slabs, the removal of forms shall begin from the outer edge
and proceed towards the support, whereas in the case of slabs supported on
two/four sides, the removal of forms shall begin from centre to supports. Form work
to cantilevers shall be removed only with the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
Formwork props shall be positioned between permanent supports such that the
members are supported at maximum 3m centre-centre in both directions.
When, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, the striking of formwork should be
detrimental to or may prejudice the safety of the structure, the formwork shall be left
in. The Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition and re-concreting of any
damaged or defective work howsoever caused at his own expense. The use of
epoxy for bonding fresh concrete shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer in
Charge at no extra cost.
If the props are to be left in place whilst the soffit forms to slabs and beams are to
be removed, the props shall be so designed as to remain in position throughout
the striking process without having to be temporarily removed. The use of props
designed so that a few can be taken away at a time and replaced immediately shall
be subject to the Engineer in Charger approval.
No construction loads shall be supported from any un-shored portion of the

241
128
 structure under construction. The number of floors requiring propping shall be as
instructed by the Engineer in Charge according to the design loads of such floors.
Aluminum Formwork (ALF) Requirements
a) The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork are the responsibility of
the Contractor. Formwork shall be designed in accordance with IS 14687 and IS
456. The broad scope of work shall comprise the following:
 Formwork designing by the Turney Contractor design team/firm; Ordering and
procurement of the same;
 Fabrication of shuttering panels, if necessary;
 Erection of Aluminum formwork etc. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
It shall be designed for the anticipated loads, lateral pressures, and stresses. It should
also be capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from placement and vibration
of concrete.
The Aluminum Formwork (ALF) system, if adopted, shall be of proven technology
and of a renowned proprietary firm. The system should be able to form all of the critical
concrete elements to produce a monolithic shear wall structure including, but not
limited to; walls, floor slabs, columns, beams, stairs, window hoods, balconies and
various decorative features accordance with the Contractor’s design team/firm’s
design in exact.
The contractor shall allow sufficient time in his approved programme/schedule for
procurement of the Aluminum formwork system (placing order, manufacture and
shipment). The Contractor shall submit the details of the formwork system selected
for procurement, including shop drawings (sizes, dimensions, numbers, floor plan
configuration assigned, etc.) including manufacturer, location of manufacturer,
delivery schedules, and other pertinent data to the Engineer for review a minimum of
4 weeks prior to placing the order.
The basic element of Aluminum formwork is the panel which is a framework of
extruded Aluminum sections, welded to an Aluminum sheet. This shall produce
lightweight panel with a proper stiffness to weight ratio, yielding minimal
deflections under concrete loading. Panels shall be manufactured in standard sizes
with non- standard elements produced to the required size and shape to suit the
project requirements. The panels shall be made from a high strength Aluminum
alloy with the face or contact surface of the panel, from 4 mm thick plate, which is
welded to a framework of specially designed extruded sections to form a robust
component.

The Use of Aluminum Formwork (ALF) shall comply with the following
requirements
a. Source of supply of all aggregates / concrete / bricks / solid & hollow blocks
b. All ALF formwork shall be new and designed and manufactured specifically for
Turnkey project requirements.
c. Given that ALF formwork has an expected design life, the contractor shall
monitor the iterations (number of repetitions) of the formwork used, and the
Contractor shall maintain a log and history of the same.
d. If or when a piece or element of formwork is found to be damaged, producing
unacceptable quality finishes or otherwise unacceptable, it shall be replaced and
taken out of service immediately.
e. The formwork design shall be carried out by professional design team/firm to
provide a complete service embracing all aspects of architectural, structural and
building services design.
f. The formwork shall be designed and constructed to the shapes, lines and
dimensions shown on the Contractor’s final drawings, Design of formwork shall
take account of safety and surface finish. The formwork shall be manufactured
out of Aluminum (as per the manufacturers specifications), sufficiently rigid and
tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the fresh concrete.

242
129
 g. The formwork shall be designed to make full use of the structural efficiencies
and operational advantages gained from this method of concrete structure
construction.
h. Formwork shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-weight,
reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight, concrete pressure, construction and
wind loads together with dynamic effect caused by placing, vibrating and
compaction of the concrete.
i. Forms shall be designed and constructed to maintain rigidity throughout the
placing, ramming, vibration and setting of the concrete to the required shape,
position and level and specified class of finish within the allowable tolerances.
j. All joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout. Due regard shall
be taken to the type of mix when considering the design pressure on the
formwork. The formwork shall be pre-cambered by an amount equal to the
expected maximum deflection.
k. ALF elements shall be kept neat and clean and free from build-up of concrete.
Erection of ALF Formwork. The formwork consists of High strength special
Aluminum alloy components. All components are fitted together and erected
using simple pin and wedge system.
The panels shall be held in position by a simple pin & wedge that pass-through
holes in the outside rib of each panel. The panels shall fit precisely, securely and
require no bracing. Walls shall be held together with high strength wall ties, while
decks are supported by beams and props.
Trial erection of the formwork shall be carried out in factory conditions by the
manufacturer to ensure that all components are correctly manufactured, and no
components are missed, and they are numbered and packed in such a way to make
site erection very easy. The Contactor will notify the Engineer a minimum of 3 weeks
prior to the trial erection so that the Engineer and/or Employer may view and inspect
the formwork. The costs associated with the Engineer’s and/or Employer’s travel and
inspection of the formwork shall be borne by the Contractor. With Aluminum
formwork, a high quality of finished formed surface can be achieved using
Aluminum panels eliminating the plastering. Direct application of skim coating of
putty shall offer a perfect finish to The External and Internal Walls.
Stripping of Formwork
Forms shall not be struck off until the concrete has reached strength at least twice the
stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of formwork.
The time schedule or period after which the formwork can be removed shall be as
indicated by the Tenkey structural consultant.
Immediately after stripping the formwork, all concrete elements shall be inspected
carefully. Any defective areas in the concrete surface shall be rectified or made good
expeditiously before the concrete has properly cured.
Precautions to be Taken While De-Shuttering
a. The formwork shall be capable of being dismantled and removed from the cast
concrete without shock, disturbance or damage.
b. CPF Liner
A Controlled Permeability Formwork (CPF) liner shall be used on the inside faces of
the formwork for all water retaining structures (tanks) to produce a denser concrete
with a surface that is free of blowholes and other surface blemishes.
The CPF liner shall have a British Board of Agreement (BBA) certificate or other
similar independent third-party certification from an approved authority.
The CPF liner shall have the following characteristics:
a. Material: non-woven polypropylene, needle punched and thermally bonded
Weight: 250 g/m2
b. Thickness at 2kPa:
1.2mm Pore size: < 30 microns
Air permeability at 800 kPa: 100- 500 l/m2/sec Tear strength (ASTM

243
130
 D1117): Min: 125 N
Release agents shall not be used with the liner and any residual release agent remaining
on forms from previous use shall be removed.
The CPF liner shall be installed either by mechanical tensioning or gluing and shall be
used in accordance with manufacturer’s technical guidelines.
One CPF Liner on the formwork shall be used only 3 times. In other words,
repeatability of the liner shall be only 3 times. Care should be taken, when re-using
formwork that its surface shall be smooth and clean and that it shall be free from
warping or other deformations. The Liner, after being used 3 times, shall be
disposed of as per manufacture’s guidelines and prevailing Environmental laws.
Reuse of Forms
The Contractor shall obtain permission for reusing of forms. Before reuse, all forms
shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, all nails and adhering substances removed,
holes and leaks satisfactorily plugged, joints examined and wherever necessary
repaired and inside surfaces treated as specified herein before.
Form work materials shall be cleaned after use and maintained in good condition.
Any timber which has shrunk, warped or split and any forms which are damaged to
such an extent as to weaken the form or to affect the quality or appearance of the
concrete shall be replaced or repaired. If the strength and composition of the form
work has so far deteriorated due to repeated uses that in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge it will no longer adequately perform its function, then it shall
not be used again and is to be removed from site.
Nominal Cover to Reinforcement Nominal Cover
Nominal cover is the design depth of concrete cover to all steel reinforcement,
including links. It is the dimension used in design and indicated in the drawings. It
shall be not less than the diameter of the largest bar at that particular face.
Nominal cover to meet durability requirement.
Minimum values for the nominal cover of normal-weight aggregate concrete
which should be provided to all reinforcement, including links depending on the
condition of exposure described given in Table 16 of IS 456 2000
Table 4
Table 16 of IS 456 2000 Nominal Cover to Meet Durability Requirements.

Exposure Nominal Concrete Cover in mm

not less than
Mild 20
Mode rate 30
Severe 45
Very Severe 50
Extreme 75
Cover to Reinforcement for specific structural elements shall be as mentioned in the
Structural GFC Drawings
Formed Finishes for Concrete General
Where a sawn form work finish is specified or in all cases where no alternative
finish is specified, the surface of the concrete shall be no worse than that obtained by
the use of properly designed moulds of close jointed swan boards. Small surface
blemishes caused by entrapped air will be permitted but the surface should be free of
voids, honey combing or other defects.
Should any concrete in the works, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, fail to
match the standard sample in surface finish then the Engineer in Charge may for this
sole reason order the removal of all such substandard concrete which shall be replaced
with acceptable concrete

244
131
Samples of Finishes
For all specified finishes apart from sawn form work the Contractor shall provide a
sample panel at least 2.4m x 1.2m in vertical surface area including a typical
horizontal and vertical joint in the form work and the construction techniques that the
Contractor proposes for the actual works. The sample when approved shall form the
standard for the entire works. All unsuccessful samples shall be removed from the
site.
Fair Faced Finish (F1)
Where fair faced finish (F1) is specified the irregularities of the finish shall be no
greater than those obtained from the use of wrought thickness square edged boards.
The boards shall be arranged in a uniform patter as specified or approved.
The concrete surface shall be smooth, free from fins, lipping’s, board marks or other
irregularities and shall be even with sharp true arises. Only very minor blemishes
or voids shall occur and there shall be no staining and no dis-coloration. The finish
is intended to be left as struck and the only treatment generally permitted is light
manual abrasion with a carborundum stone to remove minor marks. Patching of any
description will not normally be permitted.
Isolated blow holes not exceeding 10mm diameter will be permitted, but otherwise
surface is to be free from voids, honey combing or other large defects. Small defects
shall be made good and blow holes filled with mortar specially mixed to match the
colour and texture of the concrete.
Abrupt irregularities shall not exceed 2mm.
Rough Board Finish (F0)
Where rough board finish (F0) is specified, it shall be produced using form work or
form work linings of approved rough textured seasoned wood boards with moisture
content of between 10% and 20%. These boards to be of varying textures and to be
arranged to give uniform overall effect. Boards shall be assembled to prevent
penetration or loss of grout between them. Gaps greater than 5mm shall be filled.
Form work shall be soaked with water before erecting and shall be kept damp until
concrete is placed. Cover spacers and bolts shall be positioned to the satisfaction of
the Engineer in Charge.
The number of uses of form work linings will be limited to their ability to provide the
required finish.
The finish shall be left as struck. Any blemishes shall not be made good until
inspected by the Engineer in Charge. After inspection minor voids and irregularities
on surfaces shall be filled with a matching mortar to the Engineer-in-Charge’s
approval, using a sponge rubber faced float. Discoloration will not be permitted.
Worked Surface Finish
The surface of concrete after casting shall be generally be finished level or to falls as
specified with one of the following surface finishes as indicated on the drawings.
Type U1: The concrete shall be uniformly levelled and screeded to produce a plain surface.
No further work shall be carried out to the surface unless it is to be used as a first
stage for a type U2 or U3 finish.
Type U2 : After the concrete has stiffened sufficiently, the type U1 finish shall be floated by
hand or machine sufficiently just to produce a uniform surface free from screed
marks.
Type U3 : When the surface moisture has disappeared and the concrete stiffened
sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, a Type U1 finish
shall be steel trowelled under firm pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform
surface free from trowel marks.
The following methods may also be specified in conjunction with the above to provide
specific qualities of finish.
Wood float to give an even textured surface Steel trowel or power float to give a
smooth un-textured surface Scratch with a stiff brush to give a slightly roughened
even texture Tamp with the edge of a board to give an even texture of parallel ribs

245
132
 other finishes as specified and executed in an approved manner.
The Contractor shall not wet the concrete surface to assist working and shall not add
cement to produce the specified finish without the prior approval of the Engineer in
Charge.
Construction, Contraction and Expansion Joints
In large pours, it is practically not possible to carry on concreting continuously.
Hence construction joints shall be provided. Location of construction joint shall be
submitted by the contractor for approval of the Engineer in Charge (all joints shall be
applied with Nit bond EP or approved equivalent make). Such joints shall be kept to
a minimum. The joints shall be at places where shear force is nil or minimum and
these shall be straight and at right angles to the direction of the main reinforcement.
Stop ends provided shall be with necessary slots for reinforcement bars to pass
freely without bending or any other obstruction. Also, a trapezoidal fillet nailed on
stop board shall be provided to form a regular keyed joint. Joints shall be straight and
truly vertical or horizontal.
Before commencement of concrete, adjacent concrete stopper and surfaces shall be
chipped and roughened to expose aggregate, then wire brushed and cleaned. The
concrete surface shall be sprayed with water for 24 hours before casting and kept wet
until casting.
True horizontal joints shall also be provided with a keyed joint by inserting
planed greased timber.
Prepared joint shall be treated as above prior to the start of fresh concreting.
For vertical joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface just before
concreting. For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar
about 10 to 15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the
cement and sand in the concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry shall be freshly
mixed and applied just before concreting.
Clear gap shall be maintained between all structural elements as mentioned in drawing
at all floors.
Filler material or sheet overlaps above EJ shall be filled with flexible material as per
specifications with min. compressible & elongation values mentioned in drawing.
These fillers or overlaps shall be designed to allow movements as mentioned in
drawings.
All services like pipes, ducts, hangings etc. shall be designed to allow movements as
specified above.
Waterproofing on EJ shall be coordinated by contractor with vendors & share details
to design for review before execution.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the position and detail of construction joints
not specified in the Contract subject to the Indicative acceptable spacing given in
Table 3 (below). Such joints shall be arranged so as to minimize the possibility of
the occurrence of shrinkage cracks.
All soffits of slabs, retaining wall inner surfaces need not be plastered for which all
exposed joints shall be rendered with grey & white cement and quarry dust mixed
in the proportion of 1:1:1 with the use of gunny bags.
Table 5 - Indicative Acceptable Spacing of Construction Joints
Element Maximum Minimum
Area (m2) Dimension (m)

Waterproof concrete walls 25 5

Waterproof concrete slabs 100 10
Slabs with major restraint at both ends 100 13
Slabs with major restraint at one end only 250 20

246
133
 Slabs with little restraint in any direction 500 30
Walls (other than above) 40 10
 Vertical construction joints shall be properly made to form a vertical grout tight
joint. Where reinforcement passes through the face of the joint the stopping off board
shall be drilled so that the bars pass through, or the board shall be made in
sections with half round indentations in the joint faces for each bar.
 Where the contractor’s proposed construction joints result in alterations to
reinforcements he shall provide full revised details for the Engineer in Charge
approval a minimum 14 working days prior to commencement of the works.
 The Contractor shall furnish the upper surface of lifts of concrete walls and columns
horizontal and clean the form work of adhering concrete before the next lift is placed.
 At all construction joints, both horizontal and vertical, the surface of the previously
placed concrete shall be suitably treated to remove laitance and to expose the
coarse aggregate thus forming an irregular surface key for adjacent concrete. This
work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge by the
following or other approved methods (in either case the surface shall thoroughly
washed and cleaned after roughening).
 After the initial set has taken place but before final set (a minimum period of 4 hours
after casting) the coarse aggregate shall be exposed by the use of water jet and
stiff brushing or an air-and-water jet.
 After final set has taken place (a minimum period of 4 hours after casting) the
laitance shall be removed and coarse aggregate shall be exposed by bush
hammering taking care not to loosen the aggregate in the face of the concrete matrix.
 The Contractor shall ensure the surface of the construction joint is coated with
approved polymer bonding agent prior to concreting afresh immediately.
 At least 72 hours shall be left between completion of concreting one bay and the start
of concreting any adjacent bay.
 Panels of walls and slabs shall be cast in such a sequence as to minimize and control
the effect of shrinkage at construction joints.
 Form work to construction joints shall be rigid and shall accommodate projecting
reinforcement without bending or displacement.
 Where kickers are cast at base of walls and columns, these shall be cast monolithically
with the base slab.
 if placing of concrete has to be unexpectedly stopped, the Contractor shall form
construction joints as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
 Contraction joints and Expansion joints shall be formed as detailed were shown on the
Drawings.
 Concrete shall not be placed on both sides of Contraction or Expansion joint at the
same time.
 Water stops shall be provided at all construction joints in water retaining structures.
The details of all such joints shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Concrete Mixes
General
Reference shall be made to concrete mixes as Nominal mix concrete or Designed
Mix concrete. Nominal mix concrete is denoted by proportions of cement, fine
aggregate and coarse aggregate such as 1:5:10, 1:4:8, 1:3:6 or 1:2:4. The proportion
referred to is by weight (mass). Designed mix concrete is denoted by grade such as
M-20, M-25, M-30, M-35 etc. where M refers to mix and the number to the
characteristic strength of concrete in N/mm2 to be established by 28 days of 15 cm
works cube tests. The particular mix to be used shall be as described in the Contract
or on the Drawings.
 The characteristic strength of Designed Mix concrete with any type of cement shall be
the 28 days cube strength below which not more than 5% of the test results are
247
134
 expected to fall.
 The quality and strength of concrete shall be determined by test on samples taken on
Site from the member during concreting and tested at an approved Laboratory as
directed by the Engineer in Charge.
 The maximum size of aggregate for structural work shall generally be 20 mm. For
thin sections and where reinforcement is congested, 10 mm aggregate may be
approved or required. For large sections where the reinforcement is widely spaced
and for mass concrete, 40 mm aggregate may be approved.
 The free water / cement ratio will generally be chosen to suit strength and workability
requirements but may be limited by the considerations of durability given in Table 6
(below).
 The cement content not including fly ash and blast furnace slag in excess of 450
kg/m3 should not be used unless special consideration has been given in design to
the increased risk of cracking due to drying shrinkage in thin sections, or to
early thermal cracking and to the increased risk of damage due to alkali silica
reactions.
TABLE- 6
Table 5 of IS 456 2000 Minimum Cement Content, Maximum Water- Cement Ratio
and minimum Grade of Concrete for Different Exposures with Normal Weight
Aggregate of 20mm and Nominal Maximum size
S. Exposur Plain Concrete Reinforced Concrete
N e Minimu Maximu Minimu Minimu Minimu Maximu
o m m Free m Grade m m m Free
Cement water of Cement Cement water
Content Cement concrete Content Content Cement
Kg/m3 Ratio Kg/m3 Kg/m3 Ratio
1 Mild 220 0.60 - 300 0.55 M20
2 Moder ate 240 0.60 M 15 300 0.50 M25
3 Severe 250 0.50 M 20 320 0.45 M 30
4 Very 260 0.45 M 20 340 0.45 M 35
Severe
5 Extreme 280 0.40 M 25 360 0.40 M 40
Notes: Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective of the grades of cement and it
is inclusive of additions mentioned in 5.2.(IS 456 latest version ).The additions such
as fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slab may be taken into account in the
concrete composition with respect to cement content and water cement ratio if the
suitability is established and as long as the maximum amounts taken into account do
not exceed the limit of Pozzolana and slag specified in IS 1489 (part-1) and IS 455
respectively.
Higher Minimum Cement Content as mentioned in the above chart and the BOQ,
higher of the two for each case will prevail.
Nominal Mix Concrete
Nominal mix concrete shall normally be used only for plain cement concrete works
and less important reinforced concrete works were shown on drawings or
specifically allowed by the Engineer in Charge. Such concrete shall not require
preparation of trial mixes and all such concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical
mixer. Proportions for nominal mix concrete shall be according to Table-9 of IS:
456-2000. In addition, standard proportion by volume shall be used wherever
specified.
In proportioning concrete, the cement shall be measured by weight (mass). The
quantities of fine and coarse aggregates may be determined by volume (for
corresponding weight) but preferably by weight. If fine aggregates are moist, the
amount of surface water shall be determined. Also, an allowance shall be made
for bulking in case of volume batching, in accordance with IS:2386 (Part-III). The
weight of aggregate shall be measured when the aggregates are dry. Due allowance
248
135
 shall be made for the water content of moist aggregates. All the above data shall be
maintained properly, to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
Table-7

Table 9 of IS 456 2000 Proportions for Nominal Mix Concrete

Grad e of Total Quantity of Dry Proportion of fine Quantity of
Concrete aggregate by Mass per 50 aggregate to coarse water per 50
kg of cement, to be taken aggregate (by mass) kg of cement,
as the cum of the max1
Individual masses of fine
and coarse
M5 800 Generally, 1:2 but 60
M 7.5 625 subject to an upper 45
limit of 1:1 ½ and
M 10 480 alower limit of 1:2 34
M 15 330 1/2 32
M 20 250 30
Design Mix Concrete
Design mix shall be in accordance with IS: 456, IS: 10262 and SP: 23. The
Contractor shall design the mix and submit for the approval of the Engineer in
Charge. No concreting works shall be commenced without the approval of the
design mix of concrete. The Contractor is responsible for the design of the concrete
mix. Grades of concrete lower than M- 15 shall not be used in reinforced concrete.
Mixes for each class of Designed Mix concrete specified or shown on the Drawings
shall be designed by the Contractor to achieve the specified minimum cube strength
combined with high density and adequate workability for the purpose. In order to
allow for unavoidable variation, the design strength shall exceed the specified
characteristic strength by twice the expected standard deviation. In the absence of
previous information, the value of standard deviation given in the following Table 8
may be assumed (conforming to Table 8 of IS 456 2000). Assumed values of
standard deviation shall only be used until sufficient data are available to determine
the standard deviation. Prior approval of the Engineer in Charge shall, however, be
obtained in the event of use of higher grade of design mix concrete not covered
herein.
Table - 8

Grade of Concrete Assumed Standard Deviation

(N/mm2)
M10 3.5
M15 3.5
M20 4.0
M25 4.0
M30 5.0
M35 5.0
M40 5.0
M45 5.0
M50 5.0
M60 5.0

Classes of Design Mix concrete will be referred to by the minimum 28 days Works
cube strength and by the maximum size of aggregate. Classes of concrete shall meet
the criteria. The maximum water / cement ratio is herein defined as the ratio of the
weight of the free water to the weight of the cement. The free water is that quantity of

249
136
 water available to combine with the cement. Any water required to be absorbed by
aggregate is excluded. To keep the water-cement ratio to the designed value,
allowance shall be made for the moisture contents in both fine and coarse aggregates
and determination of the same in accordance with IS:2386 shall be made as
frequently as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
Details of any proposed mix design shall be forwarded to the Engineer in Charge for
his approval in principle well in advance before that class of concrete is required to be
used on the works. The details shall include at least the following information:
a. Source, nature and grading of coarse and fine aggregates
b. Source of cement
c. Nominal maximum size of aggregate
d. Cement content
e. Aggregate / cement ratio
f. Water / cement ratio
g. Design density
h. Design slump or compacting factor
i. Design strength
j. Proposed admixtures
k. Nominal grading details (tabular & graphical) of the combined aggregate
together with details of the proportions in which the fine and coarse aggregates
are combined.
l. Type of plant to be used and location if ready-mixed off site. The cement content
of concrete shall be not less than the appropriate amount given in Table 5 of IS
456 2000. For water retaining structures, the minimum cement content shall be
320 kg/m3. Minimum cement contents, from durability consideration, or
different exposures and sulphate attack shall be as given in Table-4 of IS:456
2000. In case, higher value is obtained from trial mix from strength
consideration, same shall be considered.
 Where a Designed mix is to be used, the Contractor shall carry out trial mixes to
determine the suitability of the proposed mix proportions for production of
concrete of the required quality, workability and computability for the location
specified. The Contractor shall prepare trial mixes on receipt of the Engineer in
Charge provisional approval of the mix design and complete well before
commencement of concreting. Failure on the part of the Contractor to do so and
the consequent delay in the completion of the works will not entitle him for
any compensation whatsoever, either financially or by way of extension of time.
 The proportions, once decided for different grades of concrete, shall be adhered to,
during all concreting operations as long as the quality of the materials does not
change.
Each batch of concrete shall be sampled and the following prepared.
a. six 150 mm cubes three for test at 7 days, and three for test at 28 days
b. three slump tests (for design slump greater than 25 mm) or
c. Three compacting factor tests (for design slump less than 25mm).
d. Variations in the proportions and sources of materials or in the type, size and
grading of aggregates for approved mixes shall not be made without the consent of
the Engineer in Charge.

Mixing and Transporting Concrete:

 All materials for concrete shall be measured as per approved design mix by weight in
approved weight batching equipment of adequate capacity. Such equipment shall be
checked at weekly intervals at the Contractor’s expense and shall be accurate to
within 2%. Certificates of accuracy shall be submitted immediately to the Engineer in
Charge.
 In case of space constraints, the Contractor shall arrange for procurement of Ready-
Mix concrete of approved Design mix and from approved brand or plant of RMC

250
137
 with necessary written consent from Engineer in Charge.
 Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The mixer should comply with IS:
1791 and IS: 12119. The mixers shall be fitted with water measuring (metering)
devices. The mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the
materials and the mass in uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation
after unloading from the mixer, the concrete should be remixed. In case of an RMC,
the Contractor shall ensure that the travel time for transportation of concrete from
source to site shall be limited to a maximum time of 30 minutes. The Contractor shall
ensure that the concrete is discharged on the site within 30 minutes after arrival. Also,
care should be taken for limiting the usage of retarders. In case of site mixed concrete,
no retarders shall be added.
 A water / cement ratio shall be maintained to produce concrete of adequate
workability. The workability of fresh concrete shall be at the discretion of the
Contractor but subject to approval by the Engineer in Charge and shall be the
minimum consistent with producing a dense, well compacted mass. Due regard shall
be paid to the size and shape of the section together with any congestion of
reinforcement. A guide to the degree of workability required for various types of
work is shown in Table 10 (below).
 The slump for concrete as determined by slump tests as per IS: 1199 shall not exceed
the maximum slumps indicated in Table 9 below for each type of construction using
high frequency vibration unless otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer in
Charge. The Contractor shall not place concrete having a slump outside the limits
specified without the approval of the Engineer in Charge. At least one slump test
shall be made for every compressive strength test carried out. More frequent tests
shall be made if there is a distinct change in job conditions, or if required by the
Engineer in Charge

Table 9

Nature of Work Slump in mm

Concrete ability Type of Construction
Min. Max.
Conventional Medium 50 100 All RCC works

Pumpable High 100 150 All RCC works.

 All materials shall be thoroughly mixed dry before water is added and the mixing of
each batch shall continue for a period of not less than two minutes after the water is
added or such longer period as recommended by the manufacturer of the mixer. The
mixture shall be of uniform colour and distribution on discharge and the entire
contents of the mixer shall be discharged without segregation before recharging.
The volume of mixed material shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer.
 Prior to the first mix each day being agitated in the mixer a rich cement / sand mix
shall be used to coat the inside of the drum, the surplus material being emptied away
and not used in the works. Each time if the work stops for more than 30 minutes, the
mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned and when the next mixing commences the first
batch shall have 10% additional cement.
 Volume batching of materials and hand mixing of concrete will be allowed only at the
discretion of the Engineer in Charge. Where approved, hand mixing of concrete shall
be done on a clean close boarded platform. The materials shall be turned over not less
than three times dry, water shall then be sprayed on through a hose and the materials
again turned over not less than three times in a set condition and worked together until
a mixture of uniform consistency is obtained.
 For hand mixed or volume batched concrete the specified quantities of cement shall

251
138
 be increased by 10 per cent and not more than 0.5 cubic metre shall be mixed at one
time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment in respect of any
extra cost of hand mixing by reason of the additional cement or otherwise. However,
the extra cement shall be considered for reconciliation purposes.
Workability of Concrete
The concrete mix proportions chosen should be such that the concrete is of
adequate workability for the placing conditions and can properly be compacted with
the means available. Suggested ranges of workability of concrete measured in
accordance with IS 1199 are given below.

Placing Conditions Degree of Slump(mm)

Workability
Blinding Very low a) Refer IS
1199
Mass Concrete Lightly reinforced sections in Low 25-75
labs, beams, walls, columns, floors, Hand placed
pavements, Canal lining, Strip footings.
Heavily reinforced sections in slabs, beams, walls, Medium 50-100
columns,
Slip form work, pumped concrete Medium 75-100
Trench fill-In-situ piling High 100-150
Termite concrete Very High b) Refer IS:
9103

The moisture content of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked by the
Contractor at frequent intervals and the amount of water added to the mix shall be
adjusted to maintain the design workability. For the determination of moisture
content in the aggregates IS: 2386 shall be referred to.

 Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer directly into the works or onto a clean,
level, watertight platform or into a clean watertight container. It shall be transported
as rapidly as practicable in a manner which ensures that it is of the correct quality
and consistency at the point of deposition. Normally, not more than 30 minutes
shall laps between mixing and consolidation in position. All platforms and
containers shall be cleaned of the old concrete before the fresh concrete is discharged
onto them.
 Conveying equipment for concrete shall be mortar tight, well maintained and
thoroughly cleaned before commencement of concrete mixing. Concrete shall be
transported by transit mixers.
 Concrete shall not be dropped from a height, thrown or otherwise treated so that
segregation, un-desirable finishes, or defective structural quality results. The
maximum drop shall be 2.1m unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in Charge.
No extra water shall be added to the concrete mix after it has left the batching plant.
The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect concrete in transit from the
effects of the weather.
 Pumping of concrete, which will require a special Design Mix, will only be
permitted with the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The Engineer in Charge shall
also review the entire scheme for which comprehensive details shall be furnished by
the Contractor.
 Pumping operation whenever commenced shall proceed continuously so as to prevent
"cold" joints between placed sec The delivery line of the pump shall be of 100 mm
diameter or greater and the pump shall be capable of pumping concrete containing a

252
139
 20 mm nom. Size aggregate.
 The pump shall have a receiving hopper and pumping chamber capable of
displacing at least 15 cu. Metres of concrete per hour against a horizontal delivery
head of at least 90 metres and/or a vertical delivery head of 20 metres.
 Pumping lines shall be of approved metallic type laid to avoid bends. The Joints in
pumping lines shall be sealed tight to prevent leakages.
 Pulsating lines shall be isolated from the structure and shall be supported from the
deck on stands.
 The feet of such stands shall be placed on timbers or similar material to prevent
movement of the line and stand scuffing the deck. Timbers shall not be embedded in
finished work. Stands shall be kept clear of reinforcement.
 All equipment, pump chamber, hoppers, lines and rubber hoses shall be kept clean at
all times. Any build-up in the lines of material from previous operations shall be
cleaned out preparatory to pumping.
 In the event of a breakdown in the equipment causing delay not exceeding twenty
minutes, during which time concrete cannot be placed, the following procedures
shall be carried out with the approval of the Engineer in Charge at site the concrete
already in place shall have the "wet edges" maintained by depositing small quantities
of hand mixed concrete placed by hand against the "wet edge" and vibrated into the
mass.
 Where atmospheric temperature exceeds 30 degrees C, the receiving hopper and
lines shall be cleaned out and the concrete contained therein discarded and
immediately removed from the site.
 The concrete shall be discarded if initial setting of the concrete has begun in the
hopper or discharge lines.
 All lines shall be cleaned free of concrete prior to resumption of pumping after each
breakdown Concrete in the lines shall be pumped at approximately eight (8) minute
intervals to ensure the concrete in the line is live, whenever delivery of concrete to
the pump is delayed. This pumping interval shall be reduced to five (5) minutes
during extra hot weather conditions.
 Delivery lines were exposed to hot sun, shall be protected by covering with bags, wet
Hessian or other approved means.
Should the concreting be stopped due to mechanical malfunction, accident, or other
similar cause then the Contractor shall inform the Engineer in Charge immediately so
that necessary measures and precautions can be taken. The cost of any additional
work caused by these stoppages shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
No concreting shall be commenced until the form work and reinforcement and all
other preparations for the pour have been inspected by the Engineer in Charge who
shall be given a minimum 24 hours’ notice.

Placing and Compacting Concrete

 The pouring of concrete at various heights shall be at 0.00m to 4.50m, 4.50m to 7.00m
and 7.00m to 12.50m.
 Concrete shall be transported and placed by an approved method which ensures that
there shall be no contamination, segregation or loss of the constituent materials.
 If concrete is placed by pumping, the consistency shall be the minimum necessary
for such conveyance of concrete. Before commencement of regular pumping, the
pipeline shall be lubricated by cement mortar (1:2), and once pumping commences,
stoppages shall be avoided.
 All areas where concrete is to be placed shall be clean and rendered free from
standing water immediately before the placing of concrete, except for concrete placed
under water.
 Concrete shall not be placed in foundations on soft areas or where there is standing
water or debris. Such soft areas shall be removed and filled with 1:4:8/1:3:6

253
140
 nominal mix concrete, as directed by the Engineer in Charge
 For rock surfaces, it shall be ensured that the rock is not unsound. On sloping rock
faces, rough steps or benches shall be formed and concrete shall not be placed on a
sloping rock surface. Prior to pouring concrete, the rock surface shall be cleaned with
a high-pressure water and air jet and kept wet for three hours. Also, before placing
concrete, water shall be removed from depressions, the rock surface shall be dried
and a 10 mm thick cement sand mortar (1:6) layer shall be placed and worked
into all crevices, cracks, depression, etc. Pouring of foundation concrete on rock
surfaces where required, shall be done with rebar rock anchoring for the calculated
depth as per the standard drawings to meet the structural requirement and fixing the
rebar with approved grouting compound.
 Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the structure until approval has been given,
and if concreting is not started within 24 hours of that approval being given,
approval shall be obtained again. Approval by the Engineer in Charge of any of the
materials and / or work as required herein shall not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce finished concrete in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
 Concreting shall proceed continuously between predetermined construction joints
and shall rise uniformly in the form work at a rate of not less than 2m per hour.
Concrete shall not be placed directly against a vertical form face but shall be caused
to flow to this surface during the compaction process. Unless the Engineer in Charge
agrees otherwise, fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situ concrete which
has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless the in-situ concrete has been
kept damp with a layer of wet hessian and protected from the weather.
 When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours or in the opinion of the Engineer
in Charge the concrete has stiffened to such an extent that it no longer responds to the
action of an internal vibrator, no further fresh concrete shall be placed against it for a
further 20 hours and a construction joint shall be formed.
 Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from
the mixer unless it is carried in continuously operating purpose made agitators
when the applicable time shall be within 2 hours of the introduction of water to the
mix and within 30 minutes of discharge from the agitator. Concrete, which in the
opinion of the Engineer in Charge no longer sufficiently workable, shall be rejected.
 All concrete shall be vibrated unless otherwise specified. Experienced operatives
using immersion type vibrators to the Engineer in Charge satisfaction shall carry out
the vibration.
 Internal vibrators shall operate at not less than 10000 cycles per minute and
external vibrators not less than 3000 cycles per minutes. Vibrating tables operating
at a minimum of 5000 oscillations per minute may be used for pre-cast elements
subject to approval. Do not use external clamp-on type vibrators without prior
approval.
Placing of concrete shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 600 mm deep and in
sequence from one end of the form to the other.
 Placing of concrete shall be carried out in lifts not exceeding 3m in height. This
restriction may be reduced to 2 m or less when casting thin or congested sections
at the discretion of the Engineer in Charge. If directed, concreting of congested
sections shall be done with self-level concrete without extra cost. Also, shutter
vibrator shall be used to ensure uniform and honeycomb free concrete placement.
For a single pour of above 3 M, column shuttering with suitably placed window
openings shall be adopted for placement of concrete without separation of aggregate
due to high level pour.
 Concrete in foundations and other underground work shall be protected from
contamination by falling earth or rock during and after placing
 Sufficient vibrators shall be provided to correspond with the rate of placing of
concrete. The vibration shall be continuous throughout the placing of the concrete.
254
141
 Standby vibrators shall be on Site during all concrete placing.
 Vibration shall not be allowed to disturb any recently placed concrete that has begun
set. Any water accumulating on the surface of newly placed concrete shall be
removed by approved means and no further concrete shall be placed thereon until such
water is removed.
 Concrete shall be placed and compacted in such a way as to avoid disturbance to the
form work and reinforcement. Where sections of the Works are carried out in
lifts, the reinforcement projecting above the lift being cast shall be supported to
prevent movement of the bars during the casting and setting of concrete.
 Vibration shall not be used as a means of distributing concrete into position, and
concrete shall not be vibrated between 4 and 24 hours after placing.
 Any concrete, which in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge shows signs of initial
setting before or during placing, shall not be used and it shall be removed at the
Contractor’s expense.
 The Contractor shall take special precautions when concreting in hot weather. Any
form work made of concrete, metal or other material of high thermal capacity shall be
cooled with water before concrete is placed against it. Curing of concrete shall
commence immediately after compaction. Protection from direct radiation shall be
in place within 30 minutes after final surface tamping
 Suitable means shall be provided to ensure that the temperature of the concrete on
placing does not exceed 30 deg. C. Concrete shall not be placed around
reinforcement or against surfaces, which are at temperatures above 30 deg. C. All
surfaces shall be thoroughly dampened immediately prior to placing fresh concrete to
prevent excessive absorption of water by the form work.
 Special care shall be taken in accordance with IS: 456 while laying concrete under
extreme weather.
 Under water concrete shall be placed in accordance with the recommendations given in
BS 8004 or corresponding IS Code.
 While concreting, on opinion of the Engineer in charge, if it feels that the concreting
and compaction found very difficult / inconvenience due to closer reinforcement,
adequate vibrating system is to be followed, especially with shutter vibrator in order to
achieve the required level of compaction in concreting all at contractor’s own cost
and risk.

Testing of Concrete
Sampling
For all structural concrete the following representative samples shall be taken for
each concreting day and shall be used and tested by an accredited laboratory.
a. 150 mm concrete test cubes
b. Two slump tests
c. Two compacting factor tests

 The rate of sampling fresh concrete shall be at least that specified in Table 10 IS:
456 and at least one sample shall be taken from each grade of concrete produced on
any one day.
 A technically competent person shall supervise the sampling of fresh concrete and the
making of concrete test cubes.
 Additional test cubes of concretes shall be taken and placed near the area of
concreting of slabs. These cubes shall be made to experience the same conditions of
curing and environmental exposure as the slab they were cast with. These cubes shall
be tested along with the laboratory samples to correlate with the strength of concrete
obtained at site.

255
142
Table 10
Table 11 of IS 456 2000 Reaffirmed in 2021
Characteristic Compressive Strength Compliance Requirement
Specified Mean of the Group of 4Non- Individual
Grade overlapping consecutive Test Test results
results in N/mm 2 in N/mm 2
> f ck + 0.825 x established
standard deviation (rounded off to
M 15 nearest 0.5 2N/mm 2) > f ck - 3
or N/mm 2
f ck + 3 N/mm2 whichever is greater
> f ck + 0.825 x established
standard deviation (rounded off to
M nearest 0.5 N/mm 2) > f ck - 3
20 or or N/mm 2
above
f ck + 3 N/mm2 whichever is greater

The names and qualifications of the supervisory personnel representing the Engineer
in Charge and the Contractor respectively shall be entered into an inspection
logbook. All inspections shall be clearly recorded with date, time and location of
inspections, structure members references, names or personnel present and details of
site activities. The logbook shall be provided by the Contractor and kept on site by
the Engineer in Charge.
The supervisory personnel shall mark and sign on the concrete test cubes a unique
reference number and sufficient to allow the testing laboratory to identify clearly the
date and time of casting and the position in which the batch of concrete (from which
the cube was made) was placed.
Concrete Test Cubes
o Make six cubes from a single sample taken from a batch of concrete selected at
random. Taken the sample at the point of discharge from the mixer, or elsewhere as
directed by the Engineer in Charge. On completion of curing one set of three cubes
is tested for 7 days strength and the remaining tested for 28 days strength. The
average of the three results shall be taken as the test result.
o The strength requirement shall be as per clause no 15.4 & 16.1 of IS: 456 2000.
o Acceptance criteria shall be based on test results on 28 days strength only subject to
clause 16.1 of IS: 456 2000.
o The variation between the lowest and highest shall not be more than 15% of the mean
of the three.
o In addition to the water tank curing method specified in IS-516, cubes may be cured
on Site or in the laboratory in approved mist rooms. Where mist rooms are used, they
shall comply with ASTM C511-75 except that the temperature shall be maintained at
270C + 30C.
o If concrete represented by test cubes in any concreting day fails to meet the
standard of acceptance specified in accordance with the IS codes, the Engineer in
Charge may order the taking of core samples from finished concrete work in same
at the contractor’s expense. The locations of these cores to be taken shall be decided
by concreting day for test the Engineer in Charge These cores shall be treated as in

256
143
 3.8.3 below.

Concrete Test Cores: (Non-destructive testing on concrete will be carried out at the
discretion of the Engineer in Charge based on the cube test results and review of
concrete executed).
Concrete core samples, from the finished concrete work, shall be taken in the
locations directed by the Engineer in Charge.
The diameter of the concrete cores should be 150 mm for 40 mm aggregate concrete,
100 mm for 20 mm (or smaller) aggregate concrete and must not be less than 75
mm. The length of the test sample cut from the concrete core shall be at least 95%
of the diameter.
All coring shall be completed within 7 working days of the date the instruction is
given by the Engineer in Charge
All cores shall be drilled and tested by an accredited laboratory.
Cored holes shall be made good to the approval of the Engineer in Charge with
cement mortar or concrete of similar strength to that of the parent concrete.
Results of the cores for the same concreting day will be examined individually.
In assessing the results of compressive tests on cores the concrete represented by the
core shall be deemed not to comply with the specification if the strength of the core
when adjusted for length / diameter ratio and converted to estimated cube strength as
follows:
a. The average result of the cores is less than 85% of the specified grade strength or
b. An individual result is less than 75% of the specified grade strength Concrete cores
should not show evidence of segregation of constituent materials There should be no
honeycombing in the cores and the extent of the voids in the cores should not more
than “few” Cores shall not be tested for strength at ages less than 28 days and no
adjustment shall be made to the measured strength in respect of the age of the core
when tested.

Testing and Test Record

 The concrete cubes tested at 7 days are intended to be indicative only and the
target works strengths at 7 days are not mandatory. It should be noted however that it
is unlikely that cubes failing the 7 days target will subsequently pass the 28 days
cube strength.
 The concrete cubes tested at 28 days shall be taken to represent the concrete placed in
the works. The standard of acceptance for cube strength tests shall be calculated from
the maximum load sustained by the cube at failure.
 The appropriate compressive strength compliance requirement as given in Table 11 of
IS: 456 2000 shall be considered to be satisfied if the test results comply with the
acceptance criteria.

Workability
 The standard of acceptance for the slump test during the production of concrete shall
be the design slump + 10 mm.
 The standard of acceptance for the compacting factor test during the production of
concrete shall be the design compacting factor (as specified in Table 10) + 0.03.

Testing
 The standard of acceptance of any preliminary tests will be similar to the standard
for normal works cubes, cores, slump or compacting factor, except that the
minimum cube strengths required shall be those given under minimum Preliminary
Cube Strength at 28 days in Table 2 of IS: 456 -2000.
 The Engineer in Charge, during the progress of the work, have the power to order
tests, other than cube tests, including slump tests as far as practicable due to local
conditions.

257
144
  If the strength requirement is not satisfied the Engineer in Charge may order such
further testing, including chemical analysis of samples of hardened concrete in the
structure, as he considers necessary.
 Any concrete which fails to meet the above standards of acceptance shall he be
either further tested or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer in Charge The costs
of any such tests or of the removal of rejected concrete and its replacement and
associated costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
If the strengths required are not attained or maintained throughout the contract, the
Engineer in Charge may instruct the Contractor to take any one of the following steps
or a combination thereof as the Engineer in Charge considers appropriate.:-
a. Adjust the mix proportion and carry out further trial mixes until a new mix
proportion satisfying the requirements of the foregoing test is obtained and
approved.
b. Improve the standard of quality control
c. Carryout, at the contractor’s expense, other tests as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
d. Replace any site concrete condemned as a result of failing to comply with the
standards of acceptance specified and meet all costs arising from such replacement.
Submit for approval the method statement for replacing the condemned concrete
before the replacement is carried out. In certain cases, the Engineer in Charge
may require the method statement to be prepared and the remedial work to be
supervised by a qualified Engineer in Charge.

Curing and Protecting Concrete

 All freshly placed concrete surfaces shall be protected from damages by workmen
equipment or any other cause.
 Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means from harmful effects of
weather including rain, sun and wind. Concrete placed below ground level, shall be
protected from falling earth, during and after placing. Concrete placed in ground
containing any deleterious substances, shall be kept free from contact with such
ground or with water draining from such ground, during placing of concrete and for a
period of at least three days or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer in Charge
 Steps, as approved by the Engineer in Charge shall be taken to protect immature
concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, vibration, abrasion, mixing with
earth or other deleterious materials, etc. that may impair the strength and durability
of the concrete.
 Immediately after compaction and for 7 days thereafter concrete shall be prevented
from drying out too rapidly and protected against harmful effects of weather
including rain, rapid temperature changes, and wind. This period may be extended,
at the discretion of the Engineer in Charge, up to 14 days. The methods of protection
used shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The method of
curing used shall prevent loss of moisture from the concrete.
 During the curing period horizontal surfaces shall be protected by one or more of the
following or other approved means.
a. Covering with damp hessian canvas sacks or similar absorbent materials kept
constantly damp and wholly covering the exposed concrete surface.
b. Covering with impermeable materials raised approximately 50 mm over the surface so
as to prevent loss of moisture.
c. an approved sprayed membrane curing compound
d. Flooding with water (potable water free from sediments of any kinds shall be used).
During the curing period other surfaces shall be provided by the following or other
approved means:
a. Form work in close contact with the concrete
b. covering as in 3.9.5 above All concrete faces or edges, particularly those, which
are exposed without rendering in the final structure, shall be adequately

258
145
 protected from damage and discoloration at all times. Concrete structures shall
not be loaded until the concrete is at least 21 days in the case of cantilevers. With
the prior approval of the Engineer in Charge the structure may be loaded after this
time but in no case will loading greater than the final design loading be permitted.

Cleaning and Finishing of Concrete

 All concrete surfaces shall have an even and clean finish free from honeycombs, air
bubbles, fins or other blemishes unmarred, reasonable smooth. The formwork joint
marks on concrete work exposed to view shall be rubbed with carborundum stone
and defects patched up with paste of cement sand mortar (1:1) and cured. The finish
shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. Concrete surfaces to be
subsequently plastered or where brick work is to be built against them, shall be
adequately hacked as soon as the form is stripped off so that proper bond can
develop.
 Immediately after removal of forms, the concrete shall be inspected, and defective
areas as pointed out by the Engineer in Charge shall be removed partially or
entirely as directed. Holes, left by form bolts, etc. shall be filled-up and made good
with cement sand mortar of approved mix. All superficial defects such as
honeycombing, rough patches, etc. shall be similarly made good. If the defective
area is at a vulnerable location, e.g. at the ends of beams & columns etc. then it may
be necessary to cut out the member completely or in part and reconstruct as directed
by the Engineer in Charge If epoxies have to be used, the same shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer in Charge Poured concrete affected by faulty form
work shall be removed totally and replaced. If so directed, the Contractor shall
have to resort to grouting / shotcreting.
 A smooth finish shall be obtained with the use of forms having smooth and even
surfaces and edges. Panels and form linings shall be of uniform size and be as large
as practicable and installed with closed joints. Upon removal of forms, the joint
marks shall be smoothened off and all blemishes, projections etc. removed leaving
the surfaces reasonably smooth and unmarred.
 Where integral cement concrete finish is called for, the surface shall be compacted
and then floated and treated with a straight edge and any high and low spots
eliminated. The work shall be carried out as per IS: 2571.

Tolerances
All other cast in place concrete work shall be dimensionally accurate to within the
tolerances given in Table 11 (below), unless closer tolerances are further specified or
shown on the drawings
Closer tolerances will generally be specified for:
a. Pre-cast concrete
b. Measuring flume contours
c. Filter bed and drying bed floors
d. Machinery bases

259
146
 Table 11
Item Tolerance
1 Variations from the plumb
In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers,
1a) walls and arises
In 3m 5 mm
In any story or 6 m maximum 10 mm
In 12 m or more 20 mm
For exposed corner columns, control-joint
1b) grooves and other conspicuous lines
In any story or 6 m maximum 5 mm
In 12 m or more 10 mm
2. Variation from the level, or from the
grades indicated on the drawings **
At any point (from true elevation) but not more than 5 mm
+ 10 mm variation between two points
within 6m in a horizontal
plane.

3. Variation of the linear building lines

from established position in plan and
related position of columns, walls and
partitions.
In any bay or 6 m maximum 10 mm
IN 12 m or more 25 mm
No tolerance that would result in encroachment on adjoining properties is permissible
4. Variation in the sizes and locations of
sleeves, floor openings and wall openings 5 mm
5. Cross sections of columns and beams,
thickness of walls, slabs and other parts of
the building
Upto 0.5 m +5/-3mm
Over 0.5 m +/-5 mm
6. Footings
6a. Variation in dimensions in plan +25mm#/
- 10mm
6b. Misplacement or eccentricity 2% of the footing width in the
direction of misplacement but
nor more than +25 mm#
6c. Reduction in thickness 50 mm of specified thickness
7. Variation in steps
7a. IN a flight of stairs
Rise 3 mm
Tread 5 mm
7b. In consecutive steps
Rise 2 mm
Tread 3 mm

260
147
** Variation in floor level are to be measured before removal of supporting shores #
Applies to concrete only, not to reinforcing bars or dowels
Except otherwise shown on drawings, these are maximum allowable tolerances.

Miscellaneous
Holes, chases, indentations and the like shall be provided where indicated on the
drawings.
All such shall be formed in the concrete and not cut after the concrete has hardened.
Should the Contractor or any subcontractor require additional case-in items, holes or
the like these requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge for his
approval a minimum of 14 working days prior to concreting.
Pipes, conduits, fixing bolts and other such cast-in items shall be provided where
indicated on the drawings.

Concrete (Non-Structural)
Lightweight aggregate concrete shall be proportioned, mixed and placed as required
by the Engineer in Charge. Unless otherwise shown, the mixes shall be one of the
following, the type to be directed by the Engineer in Charge.
a. Breeze Concrete : 1 Part cement to 6 Parts of coke breeze aggregate by volume
b. Polystyrene aggregate concrete
i. 1:2:4 mix (913 kg.m3): 45 kg. Cement and 0.056m3 sand to 2.25 kg. Expanded
polystyrene particles.
ii. 1:3:6 mix (800 kg.m3): 45 kg. Cement and 0.084m3 sand to 3.06 kg. Expanded
polystyrene particles.
iii. 1:1:4 mix (640 kg.m3): 45 kg. Cement and 0.028m3 sand to 2.155 kg. Expanded
polystyrene particles.
c. Vermiculite aggregate concrete 1 Part cement to 6 Part vermiculite by volume
Lightweight “air entrained” concrete to be proportioned and mixed according to the
manufacture’s instruction and placed as required by the Engineer-in-charge.

Cantilevered Canopies
Construction joints for cantilevered canopy slabs must not be located along the
external edge of the supporting beams or walls. Cantilevered canopy slabs shall be
cast monolithically with supporting beams and walls.
Adequate bar spacers shall be provided to maintain the position and alignment of the
steel bar reinforcement.
Effective water proofing should be provided on the top of the canopy slab.
Upon the completion of the canopy structure, the Contractor shall submit a report
including the following to the Engineer in Charge for his approval and / or retention:
a. An as-built plan showing
i. Locations and dimensions of members
ii. Direction and gradient of falls
iii. Location of drainage outlets / down pipes
iv. The thickness of screeding and finishes
v. Locations and details of any construction joints for the canopy Structure
vi. Grades of concrete and steel
vii. Diameter and spacing of steel reinforcement in the canopy slab
viii.Date on which the concrete was cast
ix. Concrete cover to steel reinforcement at critical positions of the canopy slab as
measured by cover meter and
b. Record photographs showing clearly and in detail.
i. Conditions and arrangement of the fabricated steel reinforcement in the canopy
slab and all the supporting members prior to concreting and
ii. Condition of the canopy slab and the supporting members after concreting but
before laying of the finishes and water proofing materials.
261
148
 A statement confirming that the Contractor has inspected and supervised the
construction of the canopy structure and that it has been constructed in accordance with
the approved plans.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

General Related Works

Concrete Formwork Cast in-situ Concrete

Applicable Standards
Sr No Code Description

1 IS: 432 Specification for Mild steel and medium tensile bars and
hard drawn steel wire.
2 IS: 1139 Specification for hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel
and high yield strength steel deformed bars for concrete
reinforcement.
3 IS: 1566 Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric for
concrete reinforcement
4 IS: 1785 Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for
prestressed concrete.
5 IS: 1786 Specification for cold twisted steel high strength deformed
bars for concrete reinforcement.
6 IS: 2080 Specification for high tensile steel bars used in prestressed
concrete
7 IS: 2751 Code of practice for welding of mild steel structures are
folded
plates
8 IS: 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for
concrete reinforcement

Steel Grades

Reinforcements for concrete may be from any of the “grades” of steel indicated below
conforming to the relevant Indian Standards and their latest amendments mentioned
against each:

Grade Description Conforming to

Fe 250 Mild Steel IS: 432 (Part I)
Fe 490 Hard drawn steel wire IS: 432 (Part II)
Fe 415 High strength deformed/ ribbed steel IS: 1786

Fe 500 High strength deformed / ribbed steel IS: 1786

Fe 550 High strength deformed / ribbed steel IS: 1786

262
149
Reinforcing steel may be any of the following types:
Type IV Thermo-Mechanically Treated Ribbon bars (TMT)
Thermo-Mechanically Treated Ribbed Corrosion Resistant
Type V Bars- Copper Bearing (TMT-CR)
Type IV - TMT 500D is preferred option for this project. Use of 550MPa reinforcement shall be
subject to approval from CLIENT/ Engineer in Charge and the Structural Engineer for
compliance with the technical and design requirements.
BIS Certification
 Material received at the Site shall have BIS Certification mark. Such bundle or coil
containing the bars shall be suitably marked with BIS Certification mark. Bars shall also be
marked to identify categories. This shall be done as per IS: 1387.
 In case bars are without BIS Certification mark, the manufacturer shall give a certificate stating
the process of manufacture, chemical composition and mechanical properties. Each certificate
shall indicate the number or identification mark of the cart to which it applies, corresponding to
the number or identification mark to be found on the material.
 All reinforcements shall be free from loose mill scale, excessive rust, loose rust, pitting, oil,
grease, paint, mud or any other foreign deleterious material present on the surface. Cleaning
should be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
 Each batch of steel brought to the Site shall be tested prior to use. Cost of all tests shall be borne by
the Contractor.
 Material acceptable as per IS Specifications will be allowed into the Project. All rejected material
shall be removed from the Site by the Contractor within 30 days of its rejection. If the same is not
done, the CLIENT/ Engineer in Charge can get work done by 3rd Party at the Contractors risk
and cost shall impose a penalty of Rs.500/- (Rupees five hundred only per metric ton per day.
This will be without any appeal and shall not be subjected to arbitration.
Storage
 Reinforcement bars received at the Site shall be stored on hard, concreted platform and clear of
the ground to a minimum of 500 mm with the use of concrete blocks or any other means.
Reinforcements shall be kept covered by tarpaulins or plastic to avoid excessive corrosion or any
other contamination. It is advised to follow storage methods as described in IS: 4082.
 Reinforcement steel shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid distortion and to prevent
deterioration and corrosion. Prior to assembly of reinforcement no account any oily substance shall
be used for removing the rust.
Quality Assurance
a. Supervisory staff shall have qualification and experience in the above field.
b. Welders qualified and having approved certificates for welding shall be employed.
Handling
a. Bend / rebend test requirements shall conform to the following and shall be based on 1800 bends
of full-size bars around pins.
Bar diameter (mm) Pin diameter for test bend 10, 12,16
3.5 x bar dia.
20, 22, 25 5.0 x bar dia.
28, 30, 32 7.0 x bar dia.
b. Spacers of same dia. shall be used with any of the following: Wire Precast concrete Moulded
plastic Spacer material shall be of durable quality and shall not lead to corrosion of reinforcement
or spilling of concrete. Precast concrete spacers shall be of the same mix as that of surrounding
concrete.
c. Tying wire shall be of 18 G black annealed mild steel wire or other approved type double fold to tie
the reinforcements.
d. Cover blocks shall be non-corrosive material such as plastic, but not wooden or broken bricks or
stone. Specially made concrete blocks shall be used. Such cover blocks shall be cast from concrete
and not from cement mortar; strength of these blocks shall be equal to the concrete in use. Binding
wire for fixing reinforcement shall be either no.16 gauge soft galvanized annealed iron wire, or
no.18 gauge stainless steel wires.
Unit Weights:
Unit weights per meter shall be as follows:

263
150
 6 mm 0.22 kg/ rm
7mm 0.39 kg/ rm
10 mm 0.62 kg/ rm
12 mm 0.89 kg/ rm
14 mm 1.21 kg/ rm
16 mm 1.58 kg/ rm
18 mm 2.00 kg/ rm
20 mm 2.47 kg/ rm
22 mm 2.98 kg/ rm
25 mm 3.85 kg/ rm
28 mm 4.83 kg/ rm
32 mm 6.31 kg/ rm
36 mm 7.99 kg/ rm
40 mm 9.86 kg/ rm
EXECUTION
Cutting and Bending
a. Flame cut and hot bending is absolutely forbidden.
b. Cut and bend reinforcement to approved shop drawings and details shall be used.
c. Bars to be cold bend, either mechanically or by hand, but to correct radius using proper tools,
machine and platform and confirming to IS: 2502 latest code.
d. Do not rebend without approval. In case of re bending, care shall be taken that the rating of bend
is not less than 4 x bar dia. at construction joints for plain steel bars and 6 x bar dia. for high
strength bars.
e. Reinforcement projecting from concrete shall not be bent without approval.
Bar bending schedule to be submitted for approval of the Structural Consultant to the CLIENT/
Engineer in Charge prior to commencement of any cutting, bending and binding of steel at site.
f. Cracked end of bars shall not be used on this Project.
g. Bars should be inspected for visible defects such as cracks, brittleness, excessive rust, loose mills
scale, etc.
Welding
a. Do not weld reinforcement unless authorized by the Structural Consultant / CLIENT/ Engineer in
Charge and recommended by the manufacturers.
b. Site welding shall be done with suitable safeguards and techniques.
c. Welding, if approved, may be used for the following and shall be carried out by an approved
welder: Lapping reinforcement in position Fixing reinforcement to other steel members.
d. The length of run deposited in a single pass shall not exceed 5 x bar diameters. If a longer welded
length is required divide into sections with the space between runs not less than 5 x bar diameters.
e. Welded joints: Shall not be made at bends in reinforcement.
Stagger joints in parallel bars of principal reinforcement unless otherwise approved.
The distance between staggered joints shall not be less than the end anchorage length joints.
Mechanical Splicing
a. To comply with IS: 456-2000, IS: 16700-2017, ACI 318 and ACI 439-3R
b. Use as indicated in structural drawings.
c. Structural Consultant has to approve mechanical splices before using it at site.
Inspection
a. Ensure that the reinforcement placing is checked by Engineer in Charge.
b. Ensure that the Formwork to receive the reinforcement is clean and free from debris.
c. Cracked end of bars to be cut out.
Anchoring
 Anchoring of bars and stirrups shall be provided exactly as detailed in the structural drawings
or as directed by Structural Consultant.
 In case of reinforcement steel in tension, deformed bars may be used without end anchorage
provided the development length requirement is satisfied. Hooks shall normally be provided for
plain bars in tension. Development length of the bars shall be determined as per relevant clauses
of IS: 456 - 2000.
 The anchorage length of straight bar in compression shall be equal to the Development length of
the bars in compression as specified in relevant clause of IS: 456 - 2000.

264
151
Lapping of Bars
o Laps shall be strictly as per the structural drawing or as directed by the Engineer in Charge
/Structural Consultant. For general guidance the following principles shall be followed as given in
IS: 456 - 2000 As far as possible bars of the maximum length available shall be used.

o Laps shown on drawings or otherwise specified by the Structural Consultant will be based on the
Contractor using bars of maximum length.
o In case Contractor wishes to use bars of shorter length, laps shall be provided at the Contractor’s
expense in the manner and locations approved by the structural consultant.
o No additional cost shall be paid for the lapping & the rate should be inclusive of the cost of
lapping.
o Splices shall be provided as far as possible away from the sections of maximum stress and be
staggered.
o Not more than half of the bars shall be spliced at a section If more than half of the bars shall be
spliced at a section, special case shall be ensured such as increasing length of lap or closer spacing
of stirrups around the length of splice.
o Lap splice shall not be used for bars having diameter larger than 36 mm. For larger diameters
bars it may be welded. Lap length including anchorage value of hooks in flexural tension shall
be La (as defined in Article 25.2.1 of IS: 456-2000) or 30 times the diameter of the bar whichever is
greater and for direct tension 2La or 30 times the diameter of the bar whichever is greater. The
straight length of lap shall not be less than 15D or 20 cm, whereas D is the diameter of the bar.
o Lap length in compression shall be equal to the development length in compression calculated as
described in relevant clause of IS: 456-2000 or as specified in the structural drawing but not less
than 24 times the diameter of the bar.
o Overlapping bars shall not touch each other and these shall be kept apart with concrete between
them by 25mm or 1.25 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, whichever is greater.
o When above is not possible, the overlapping bars shall be bound together at intervals not
exceedingly twice the diameter of such bars with two strands of annealed binding wire of 0.90mm
to 1.6mm diameter twisted together tightly.
o As and when necessary welded laps shall be proved as specified by the Structural Consultant.
Securing Reinforcement
a. Adequately secure with tying wire or approved steel clips.
b. Bend the tying wires well back clear of forms.
Concrete Cover
a. Shall be in accordance with ISI: 456-2000 and as per the instructions in structural drawings.
b. Footings, retaining walls and Similar members in contact with earth but not cast
against earth - 50 mm
Slabs - 20 mm Walls, ribs - 20 mm
Beams:
For main bars - Min.25 mm or dia. of the bar For stirrups - 15 mm
Columns - 40 mm Columns less than 20 cms -25 mm Water tanks:
In contact with water - 40 mm In contact with air -20 mm
Walls in contact with water / Earth - 40mm
Spacers Chairs and Other Supports
a. Provide necessary supports to maintain reinforcement in its correct position.
b. Provide spacer bars of same diameter as longitudinal bars but not less than 25mm diameter
between two layers at 1.5 mm centers except where bundled bars are detailed. Spacers, Chairs
and other supports are not separately measured and paid for.
Precautionary Measures
a. Do not insert bars into placed concrete.
b. Do not damage forms and form linings, if any when fixing reinforcement.
Adjustment and Cleaning
a. Check reinforcement prior to and during placing concrete with particular attention to the top
reinforcement in Cantilever sections.
b. Ensure that reinforcement is clean and free from corrosive pitting, loose rust, loose mill scale,
oil and other substances, which may adversely affect reinforcement concrete or the bond
between the two.

265
152
 c. Protect the projecting reinforcement from weather where the rust staining of exposed concrete
surfaces may occur.

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

This specification covers the fabrication and transportation to site and erection on prepared foundations and
structural steel work consisting of beams, columns, vertical trusses, bracings, shear connections etc.
Fabrication, erection and approval of steel structures shall be in compliance with:
- These General Specifications and IS : 800 - 1984
- Drawings and supplementary drawings to be supplied to the contractors during execution of the work.
Providing shop primer coat for steel structures. Grouting of holding-down bolt pockets and below base
plates where required.
In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned here and the Indian Standards, those expressed in this
specification shall govern.
Scope
The fabrication and erection of the steel work consists of accomplishing of all jobs here-in enumerated
including providing all labour, tools and plant all materials and consumables such as welding electrodes,
bolts and nuts, oxygen and acetylene gases, oils for cleaning etc. of approved quality as per relevant IS.
The work shall be executed according to the drawings, specifications, relevant codes etc. in an expeditious
and workman like manner, as detailed in the specifications and the relevant Indian Standard Codes and
Standard Practice and to the complete satisfaction of the Project Manager.

Fabrication Drawings
The contractor shall prepare all fabrication and erection drawings on the basis of design drawings supplied
to him and submit the same in triplicate to the Project Manager for review, Project Manager shall review
and comment, if any, on the same. Such review, if any, by the Project Manager, does not relieve the
contractor of any of his required guarantee’s responsibilities. The contractor shall however be responsible
to fabricate the structural’s strictly conforming to specifications and reviewed drawings.

Fabrication drawings shall include the following:

- Member sizes and details
- Types and dimensions of welds and bolts
- Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding
- Details of shop and field joints included in assemblies.

Bill of material
- Quality of structural steels, welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers etc. to be used.
- Erection assemblies, identifying all transportable parts and sub-assemblies, associated with special
erection instructions, if required.
- Calculations where asked for, for approval.

o Connections, splices etc. other details not specifically detailed in design drawings shall be suitably given on
fabrication drawings considering normal detailing practices and developing full member strengths. Where
asked for calculations for the merit shall also be submitted for approval.
o Any alternate design or change in section is allowed when approved in writing by the Project Manager.
o However, if any variation in the scheme is found necessary later, the contractor will be supplied with
revised drawings. The contractor shall incorporate these changes in his drawings at no extra cost and
resubmit for review.
o Project Manager review shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility for the correctness of
dimensions, adequacy of details and connections. One copy will be returned reviewed with or without
comments to the contractor for necessary action. In the former case further three copies of amended
drawings shall be submitted by the contractor for final review.
o The contractor shall supply three prints each of the final reviewed drawings to the Project Manager within a
week since final review, at no extra cost for reference and records.
o The Project Manager will verify the correct interpretation of their requirements.
o If any modification is made in the design drawing during the course of execution of the job, revised design
drawings will be issued to the contractor. Further changes arising out of these shall be incorporated by the
contractor in the fabrication drawings already prepared at no extra cost and the revised fabrication drawings

266
153
 shall be duly got reviewed as per the above Clauses.

Materials
Rolled Sections
The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures :
Structural steel will generally be of standard quality conforming to IS: 226. Whenever welded construction
is specified plates of more than 20 mm thickness will generally conform to IS: 2062.
Welding Materials
Welding electrodes shall conform to IS: 814.
Approval of welding procedures shall be as per IS: 823.
Bolts, Nuts & Washers
o Bolts and nuts shall be as per IS: 1367 and tested as per IS:1608. It shall have a minimum tensile strength
of 44 Kg/mm2 and minimum elongation of 23% on a gauge length of 5.65 (A- Original cross-sectional area
of the gauge length). Washers shall be as per IS: 2016.
o All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of equivalent or higher grade or
alternate materials will be considered only in very special cases subject to the approval of the Project
Manager in writing.
Receipt & Storing of Materials
o Steel materials supplied by the contractor must be marked for identification and each lot should be
accompanied by manufacturer's quality certificate, conforming chemical analysis and mechanical
characteristics.
o All steel parts furnished by supplier shall be checked, sorted out, straightened, and arranged by grades and
qualities in stores.
o Structural with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations etc. shall be rejected if the defects
exceed the allowable tolerances specified in relevant standards or as directed by the Project Manager.
o Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots inside a dry and enclosed room,
in compliance with IS: 816 - 1969 and as per instructions given by the Project Manager. Electrodes shall
be perfectly dry and drawn from an electrode even, if required.
o Checking of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be made conforming to relevant
standards.
o Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer's test certificate.
o The contractor may use alternative materials as compared to design specification only with the written
approval of the Project Manager.

Material Tests
o The contractor shall be required to produce manufacturer's quality certificates for the materials supplied by the
contractor. Notwithstanding the manufacturer's certificates, the Project Manager may ask for testing of
materials in approved test houses. The test results shall satisfy the requirements of the relevant Indian
Standards.
o Whenever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when material quality differs from standard
specifications the contractor shall conduct all appropriate tests as directed by the Project Manager at no extra
cost.
o Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test results do not tally with relevant
standard specifications, shall not be used.
Fabrication
o Fabrication shall be in accordance with IS: 800 Section V in addition to the following :
o Fabrication shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings adhering strictly to work points and work lines
on the same. The connections shall be welded or bolted as per design drawings. Work shall also include
fabricating built up sections.
o Any defective material used shall be replaced by the contractor at his own expense, care being taken to prevent
any damage to the structure during removal.
o All the fabricated and delivered items shall be suitably packed to be protected from any damage during
transportation and handling. Any damage caused at any time shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
cost.
o Any faulty fabrication pointed out at any stage of work shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost.

Preparation of Materials

267
154
o Prior to release for fabrication, all rolled sections warped beyond allowable limit shall be pressed or rolled
straight and freed from twists, taking care that an uniform pressure is applied.
o Minor warping, corrugations etc. in rolled sections shall be rectified by cold working.
o The sections shall be straightened by hot working where the Project Manager so direct and shall cooled slowly
after straightening.
o Warped members like plates and flats may be used as such only if wave like deformation does not exceed
L/1000 but limited to 10 mm (L-Length).
o Surface of members that are to be jointed by lap or fillet welding or bolting shall be even so that there is no
gap between overlapping surfaces.

Marking
Marking of members shall be made on horizontal pads, of an appropriate racks or supports in order to
ensure horizontal and straight placement of such members.
Marking accuracy shall be atleast + 1 mm.

Cutting
o Members shall be cut mechanically (by saw or shear or by oxyacetylene flame).
o All sharp, rough, or broken edges, and all edges of joints which are subjected to tensile or oscillating stresses,
shall be ground.
o No electric metal arc cutting shall be allowed.
o All edges cut by oxyacetylene process shall be cleaned of impurities prior to assembly.

Cutting tolerances shall be as follows:

a) For members connected at both ends + 1 mm.
b) Elsewhere + 3 mm.

The edge preparation for welding of members more than 12 mm thick shall be done by flame cutting and
grinding. Cut faces shall not have cracks or be rough.
Edge preparation shall be as per IS : 823 - 1964.

Drilling
Bolts holes shall be drilled.
Drilling shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings.
No enlarging of holes filling, by man drolling or oxyacetylene flame shall be allowed.

Allowed variations for holes (out-of-roundness, eccentricity, plumb-line deviation) shall be as per IS:800.
- Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same axis shall be + 1 mm.
- Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not differ by more than 1 mm.

o Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming the holes to the next upper diameter, provided that
spacing of new hole centres and distance of hole centres to the edges of members are not less than
allowed and that the increase of hole diameter does not impair the structural strength. Hole reaming shall
be allowed if the number of faulty holes does not exceed 15% of the total number of holes for one joint.
o Preparation of Members for Welding
o Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to ensure correct positioning
of members (angles, axes nodes etc.)
o Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities and fissures due to faulty cutting shall be chipped or
ground or filled over the length of the affected area, deep enough to remove faults completely.
o Edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to facilitate a good joint.
o Generally, no special edge preparation shall be required for members under 8 mm thick.
o Edge preparation (beveling) denotes cutting of the same so as to result in V, X K or U seam shapes as per
IS: 823.
o The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding edges. Under no circumstances shall
wet, greasy, rust or dirt covered parts be assembled. Joints shall be kept free from any foreign matter
likely to get in to the gaps between members to be welded.
o Before assembly the edges to be welded as well as adjacent areas extending for atleast 20 mm shall be
cleaned (until metallic polish is achieved).

268
155
 o When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding shrinkage and distortions, as the
drawing dimensions cover finished dimensions of the structure.
o The elements shall be got checked and approved by the Project Manager or their authorized representative
before assembly.
o The permissible tolerances for assembly of members preparatory to welding shall be as per IS: 823-1964.
o After the assemble has been checked, temporary tack welding in position shall be done by electric
welding, keeping in view finished dimensions of the structure.
o Welding procedures
o Welding shall be carried out only by fully trained and experienced welders as tested and approved by the
Project Manager. Any test carried out either by the Project Manager of their representative or the
inspectors shall constitute a right by them for such tests and the cost involved thereon shall be borne by
the contractor himself.
o Qualification tests for welders as well as tests for approval of electrodes will be carried out as per IS: 823.
The nature of test for performance qualification of welders shall be commensurate with the quality of
welding required on this job as judged by the Project Manager.
o The steel structures shall be automatically, semi-automatically or manually welded.
o Welding shall begin only after the checks mentioned.
o The welder shall mark with his identification mark on each element welded by him.
o When welding is carried out in open air, steps shall be taken to protect the face of welding against wind or
rain. The electrodes, wire and parts being welded shall be dry.
o Before beginning the welding operation, each joint shall be checked to ensure that the parts to be welded
are clean and root gaps provided as per IS: 823.
o For continuing the welding of seems discontinued due to some reason, the end of the discontinued seem
shall be melted in order to obtain a good continuity. Before resuming the welding operation, the groove
as well as the adjacent parts shall be well cleaned for a length of approx. 50 mm.
o For single butt welds (in V, 1/2 V or U) and double butt welds (in K, double U etc.) the rewelding of the
root is mandatory but only the metal deposit on the root has been cleaned by back gouging or chipping.
o The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The contractor shall not be allowed to cool the welds
quickly by any other method.
o For multi-layer welding, before welding the following layer, the formerly welded layer shall be cleaned
metal bright by light chipping and wire brushing. Backing strips shall not be allowed.

The order and method of welding shall be so that -

- No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts.
- Due margin is provided to compensate for contraction due to welding in order to avoid any high
permanent stresses.
The defects in welds must be rectified according to IS: 823 and as per instruction of Project Manager.

Weld Inspection
The weld seams shall satisfy the following :
- shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions.
- shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and fusion, under-cuts, rough
surfaces, burns, blow holes and porosity etc. beyond permissible limits.
o During the welding operation and approval of finished elements, inspections and tests shall be made as
shown in annexure-B.
o The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS: 823.
o Preparation of Members for Bolting
o The members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and fixtures to sustain the assemblies without
deformation and bending.
o Before assembly, all sharp edges, shavings, rust dirt, etc. shall be removed.
o Before assembly, the contacting surfaces of the members shall be cleaned and given a coat of primer as per
IS: 2074.
o The members which are bolt assembled shall be set according to drawings and temporarily fastened with
erection bolts (minimum 4 pieces) to check the coaxiality of the holes.
o The members shall be finally bolted after the deviations have been corrected, after which there shall not be
gaps.
o Before assembly, the members shall be checked and got approved by the Project Manager.

269
156
o The difference in thickness of the sections that are butt assembled shall not be more than 3% or maximum
0.8 mm whichever is less. If the difference is larger, it shall be corrected by grinding or filling.
o Reaming of holes to final diameter or cleaning of these shall be done only after the parts have been check
assembled.
o As each hole is finished to final dimensions (reamed if necessary) it shall be set and bolted up. Erection
bolts shall not be removed before other bolts are set.
Bolting up
Final bolting of the members shall be done after the defects have been rectified and approval of joints
obtained.
The bolts shall be tightened starting from the centre of joint towards the edge.
Plaining of Ends
Planning of ends of members like column ends shall be done by grinding when so specified in the design.
Planning of butt welded members shall be done after these have been assembled, the spare edges shall be
removed with grinding machines or files.
The following tolerances shall be permitted on member that have been planed.
- On the length of the member having both ends planed, maximum + 2 mm with respect to design.
- Level differences of planed surfaces, maximum 0.3 mm.
- Deviation between planed surface and member's axis maximum 1/1500.
Holes for Field Joints
o Holes for field joints shall be drilled in the shop to final diameters and tested in the shop, with trial
assemblies.
o When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes for field joints may be drilled in
shop and reamed on site after erection, on approval by the Project Manager.
o For bolted steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory.
o The tolerance for spacing of holes shall be + 1 mm.
o Tolerances
o All tolerances regarding dimensions, geometrical shapes and sections of steel structures, shall be as per
Annexure B, if not specified in the drawing.
o Marking for Identification
o All elements and members prior to dispatch for erection shall be shop marked.
o The members shall be visibly marked with a weather proof light coloured paint. The size and thickness of
the numbers shall be chosen as to facilitate the identification of members.
o For the small members that are delivered in bundles or crates, the required marking shall be done on small
metal tags securely tied to the bundle, while the crates shall be marked directly.
o Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members for one and the same assembly; in the same bundle or
crate, general utility members such as bolts, quests etc. may be packed.
o All bill of materials showing weight, quality and dimension of contents shall be placed in the crates.
o The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location, preferably at one end of the
member so that these may be easily checked during storage and erection.
o All members shall be marked in the shop before inspection and acceptance.
o When the member is being painted, the marking area shall not be painted but bordered with white paint.
o The marking and job symbol shall be registered in all shop delivery documents (transportation, for erection
etc.)
Shop Test Pre-assembly
o For steel structures that have the same type of welding the shop test pre-assembly shall be performed on
one out of every 10 members minimum.
o For bolted steel structures, shop test pre-assembly is mandatory for all elements as well as for the entire
structure in conformity with Clause 5.12.
Shop Inspection and Approval
General
o The Project Manager or their representative shall have free access at all responsible times to the
contractor’s fabrication shop and shall be afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the
fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with drawings and specifications.
o Technical approval of the steel structure in the shop by the Project Manager is mandatory.
o The contractor shall not limit the number and kinds of tests, final as well as intermediate once, or extra tests
required by the Project Manager.
o The contractor shall furnish necessary tools, gauges, instruments etc. and technical non-technical personnel

270
157
 for shop tests by the Project Manager, free of cost.
o Shop Acceptance
o The Project Manager shall inspect and approve at the following stages :

The following approvals may given in shop :

- Intermediate approvals of work that cannot be inspected later.
- Partial approvals
- Final approvals

Intermediate approval of work shall be given when a part of the work is preformed later :
- Cannot be inspected later
- Inspection would be difficult to perform and results would not be satisfactory.

Partial approval in the shop is given on members and assemblies of steel structures before the primer coat
is applied and includes :
- Approval of materials
- Approval of field joints
- Approval of parts with planed surfaces
- Test erection
- Approval of members
- Approval of markings
- Inspections and approvals of special features, like Rollers, loading platform mechanism etc.
During the partial approval, intermediate approvals as well as all former approvals, shall be taken in to
consideration.
Final approval in the Shop
The final approval refers to all elements and assemblies of the steel structures, with shop primer coat, ready
for delivery from shop to be loaded for transportation, or stored.
The final approval comprises of :
- Partial approvals
- Approval of shop primer coat
- Approval of mode of loading and transport
- Approval of storage (for materials stored)

Painting and Delivery

Preparation of parts for shop painting
Painting shall consist of providing one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer to steel members before
dispatch from shop.
Primer coat shall not be applied unless :
- Surface have been wire brushed, cleaned of dust, oil, rust etc.
- Erection gaps between members, spots that cannot be painted or where moisture or other aggressive
agents may penetrate, have been filled with an approved type of oil and putty.
- The surface to be painted are completely dry.
- The parts where water of aggressive agents may collect (during transportation, storage, erection
and operation) are filled with putty and provided with holes for drainage of water.
- Members and parts have been inspected and accepted
- Welds have been accepted.
The following are not to be painted or protected by any other product:
- Surface which are in the vicinity of joints to be welded at site.
- Surfaces bearing markings
- Other surfaces indicated in the design.
The following shall be given a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant lubricant only.
- Planed surfaces
- Holes for links
o The surfaces that are to be embedded or in contact with the concrete shall be given a cost of cement wash.
o The surfaces which are in contact with the ground, gravel or brick work and subject to moisture, shall be
given bituminous coat.
o The other surfaces shall be given a primer coating.

271
158
 o Special attention shall be given to locations not easily accessible, where water can collect and which after
assembly and erection cannot be inspected, painted and maintained. Holes shall be provided for water
drainage and in accessible box type sections shall be hermetically sealed by welds.
o If specified elsewhere, in the schedule of quantities, the contractor shall paint further coats of red-oxide
after erection and placing in position of the steel structures.
o Packing, transportation, delivery After final shop acceptance and marking, the item shall be packed and
loaded for transportation.
o Packing must be adequate to protect item against warping during loading and unloading.
o Proper lifting devices shall be used for loading, in order to protect items against warping.
o Slender projecting parts shall be braced with additional steel bars, before loading, for protection against
warping during transportation.
o Loading and transportation shall be done in compliance with transportation rules.
o If certain parts cannot be transported in the lengths stipulated in the design, the position and type of
additional splice joints shall be approved by the Project Manager.
o Items must be carefully loaded on platforms of transportation means to prevent warping, bending or
falling during transportation.
o The small parts such as fish-plates, quests etc. shall be securely tied with wire to their respective parts.
o Bolts, nuts and washers shall be packed and transported in crates.
The parts shall be delivered in the order stipulated by the Project Manager and shall be accompanied by
document showing:
- Quality and quantity of structure or members
- Position of member in the structure
- Particulars of structure
- Identification number job symbol.
Field Erection
o The erection work shall be permitted only after the foundation or other structure over which the steel
work will be erected is approved and is ready for erection.
o The contractor shall satisfy himself about the levels, alignment etc. for the foundations well in advance,
before starting the erection. Minor chipping etc. shall be carried out by the contractor on his expense.
o Any faulty erection done by the contractor shall be made good at his own cost.
o Approval by the Project Manager or their representatives at any stage of work does not relieve the
contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.
o Storage and preparation of parts prior to erection
o The storage place for steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved by the Project Manager
before the steel structures start arriving from the shop.
o A platform shall be provided by the Contractor near the erection site for preliminary erection work.
The contractor shall make the following verifications upon receipt of material at site.
- for quality certificates regarding materials and workmanship according to these general
specifications and drawings.
- Whether parts received are complete without defects due to transportation, loading and unloading
and defects, if any, are well within the admissible limit.
For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area.
o Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items during unloading.
o The parts shall be unloaded, stored and stored so as to be easily identified.
o The parts shall be stored according to construction symbol and markings so that these may be taken out in
order or erection.
o The parts shall be at least 150 mm clear from ground on wooden or steel blocks for protection against
direct contact with ground and to permit drainage of water.
o If rectification of members like straightening etc. are required, these shall be done in a special place allotted
which shall be adequately equipped.
o The parts shall be clean when delivered for erection.
o Erection & Tolerances
o Erection in general shall be carried out as required and approved by the Project Manager.
o Positioning and levelling of the structure, alignment and plumbing of the stanchion and fixing every
member of the structure shall be in accordance with the relevant drawings and to the complete satisfaction
of the Project Manager.
The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before during and after erection.

272
159
 - damage during transportation
- accuracy of alignment of structures
- erection according to drawings and specifications
- progress and workmanship.
In case there be any deviations regarding positions of foundations or anchor bolts, which would lead to
erection deviations, the Project Manager shall be informed immediately. Minor rectifications in
foundations, orientation of bolts holes etc. shall be carried out as part of the work, at no extra cost.
The various parts of the steel structure shall be so erected so to ensure stability against inherent weight,
wind and erection stresses.
The structure shall be anchored and final erection joints completed after plan and elevation positions of the
structural members have been verified with corresponding drawings and approved by the Project Manager.
The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire surface of the bolt heads and nuts shall rest on the
member. For parts with sloping surfaces tapered washers shall be used.
Final acceptance and handing over the structure
At acceptance, the contractor shall submit the following documents :
- Shop and erection drawings - either in tracings or reproducible.
- 4 copies of each of the following :
- shop acceptance documents
- quality certificate for structurals, plates, etc. (electrodes, welding wire, bolts, nuts, washers etc.)
- List of certified welders who worked on erection of structures.
- acceptance and intermediate control procedure of erection operations.

Approval by the Project Manager at any stage of work does not relieve the contractor of any of his required
guarantees of the contract.

Grouting of Pockets
o Grouting of pockets and under base plates will be done only after the steel work has been levelled and
plumbed and the bases of stranchions are supported by steel shims. The space below the base plate and
pockets shall be thoroughly cleaned.
o The mortar used for grouting shall not be leaner than 1:2 (1 cement : 2 sand) (grade 300 in case of concrete)
and shall be mixed to the minimum consistency required. It shall be poured under suitable head and
tamped until the space has been completely filled.
o Tolerances allowed in the erection of plant building without cranes
o The maximum tolerances for line and level of the steel work shall be + 3.00 mm on any part of the structure.
The structure shall not be out of plumb more than 3.5 mm on each 10 M. section of height and not more
than 7.0 mm per 30 M. section.
o These tolerances shall apply to all parts of the structure unless the drawings issued for erection purposes state otherwise.

273
160
Technical Specification for Tuned Mass Dampers
The Tuned Mass Dampers shall be capable of delivering mechanical damping in such a way that the
apparent damping level of the building structure in the most critical modes, usually the primary
modes i.e mode 1 and mode 2 are supplemented by a certain percentage (relative-to-critical). The
usually critical, primary modes are shown below:

Mode: 1

Mode: 2

The final mass, tuning range etc along with the exact location shall only be decided after detail
engineering of the TMD, however, it is estimated that the total Mass of the TMD shall be in the
range of 400-500 Tons. For the ease of application the TMDs can be split into two units and
installed as indicated below.

Plan showing tentative location of the two units of TMDs on the Terrace Floor - Staircase

274
161
headroom

Elevation showing tentative location of the one unit of TMD on the Terrace Floor - Staircase
headroom

275
162
Performance Criteria

The TMDs shall be designed as per the analysis based on the wind tunnel
reports and other available data. The final tuning i.e setting up the final
frequency of the TMD shall be done only after in-situ measurements of
the natural frequency and the critical damping of the structure after
construction of the building structure is completed.

The peak accelerations shall be within the comfort criteria, threshold as

defined by various codesand standards as presented below

Threshold comfort criteria w.r.t peak accelerations

276
163
 Qualifying Criteria
The following qualifying criteria must be must for the manufacturer/supplier of the Tuned
MassDamper:

1. Tuned Mass Damper supplier shall have credible experience in the field of
vibration mitigation and must have a global experience of more than 50
years with a minimum of 25 years of experience in India.
2. Supplier must have its own factory/plant in India and the manufacturing of
the Tuned Mass Damper must not be outsourced to a third party in India or
anywhere else.
3. Supplier must take up the complete Tuned Mass Damper job (engineering
of the TMD, manufacturing, supply, commissioning and post
commissioning measurement) by itself and not outsource any part of it.
4. Supplier shall provide annual inspection for 5 years post installation.
5. Supplier must have executed a minimum of one Tuned Mass Damper
project of more than orequal to 400 Tons that must be in service for more
than 5 Years in India.
6. Supplier must have executed more than one Tuned Mass Damper project
of more than orequal to 50 Tons that must be in service for more than 7
Years in India.
7. Supplier must have international repute of executing more than or equal to
5 projectsworldwide that must be in service for more than 10 Years
anywhere in the world.

Block Work General

Description of Work
This section shall cover all masonry work required. Unless otherwise
shown, mentioned or directed all masonry work shall be of solid concrete
block, AAC block, Fly Ash Block and all walls shall extend to full height
upto the bottom of the structural member above.
Quality Assurance
Physical properties of solid concrete blocks shall generally conform to
relevant IS: 2185 Part 1 & IS: 2185 Part 2 for AAC will Confirm IS:2185
-part III 1984 for Fly Ash Block Will Confirm IS 12894:2002
Submittals
Product Data:
Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s product data to show compliance
with the technical specification.
Certificates:
Contractor shall submit test certificates of crushing strength, water
absorption, drying shrinkage etc. of concrete masonry blocks as specified
in IS: 2185 Part 1
Samples:
Submit for verification purposes, samples of block units and obtain
approval before placing order with suppliers.
Products
Blocks shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2185 and as indicated
below.
Block
277
164
Blocks shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2185 and as indicated
below.
Blocks shall be generally hard, sound, square, clean and sharp with well-
defined arises.
 B
locks shall be of grade “C” as per Table 2 of IS 2185 (Part 1)
Minimum average compressive strength of units: 5N/mm2.
Minimum compressive strength of individual units: 4N/mm2. Minimum
density of blocks: 1800kg/m3.
 D
imensions :
Thickness - 100, 150, 200, 250 & 300 mm as shown in the drawing
Length -400, 500 or 600 mm
Height -200 mm
Tolerance: The variation in the length of the units shall not be more than ±
5 mm and variation in height and width of units, not more than ± 3 mm.
Cement
Ordinary Portland cement of grade 43 complying to IS: 8112 shall be used
unless otherwise specified. or PPC complying to IS1484 Part 1
Sand
Sand for masonry mortars shall have the quality and particle size grading
conforming to IS: 2116 latest edition. The grading of sand for use in
mortar for unreinforced and reinforced blockwork shall be within the
specified limits for respective works. The fineness modules of sand for
mortar in unreinforced block work shall be between 2.9 and 2.3 and the
same for reinforced block work shall be between 2.9 and 2.1 and whose
grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or deficiency of
course or fine particles may be processed to comply with the standard by
screening and or blending. Any deviation may be allowed at the
discretion of Engineer. Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from
dirt clay, organic matter or other impurities. Percentage of clay and all
other deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by weight of sand.
when tested per IS: 2386 Part 1 and 2.
Water
Water conforming to IS: 456 and as approved by the Engineer shall be
used.
Admixtures
Additives or admixtures conforming to IS: 9103, IS: 3812 and IS: 2645
may be added to the cement or concrete mix conforming to the IS
specifications, meeting approval of the Engineer. Admixtures shall be
chloride free and melamine polymer based, if approved. Other additives
or admixtures not being governed by Indian Standards shall be tested and
checked that the same are not detrimental to durability. However, any
addition shall only be after the approval of the Engineer.
Ancillary Materials
Construction sealant.
Lintels: Provide RCC lintels over all doors and wall openings in block
work. Size of the lintel shall be as per structural drawing.
Sleeper beams & mullions: Any block wall of height more than 2.5m
shall be provided with R.C.C. sleeper beams (Beams to be constructed
over block work) at lintel level. If the wall height is more, sleeper beams
should be placed at every 2.5m. It shall be also provided with R.C.C.
mullion at every 3.0m length. Size of the sleeper beams and mullions shall
be as per structural drawing.
Execution Joints
The joints, both horizontal and vertical, shall be 10 mm thick. The
278
165
exposed joint shall be raked to form an effective 'key' with the plaster and
unexposed joint shall be stuck smooth
Mortar Mix
The mortar mix for laying shall be one-part cement to four parts of sand
(1:4), unless otherwise specified.
Horizontal (Bedding) Joints
Mortar shall be spread over the entire top surface of the block including
front and rear faces as well as the webs to a uniform layer of 10mm
thickness. Joints shall not be bigger than 10mm and shall be raked 10 mm.
deep while mortar is green. Raking back shall be carried out at an angle
nor steeper than 45 degrees in case all the block work is not raised
together.
Vertical (Cross) Joints
 F
or vertical joints, the mortar shall be applied on the vertical edges of the
front and rear shells of the blocks. The mortar may be applied either to the
unit already placed on the wall or to the next unit to be laid alongside of it.
However, it will be more convenient to apply mortar on the edges of the
succeeding unit when it is standing vertically and then placing it
horizontally well pressed against the previously laid unit. In any case,
whatever the method used for applying mortar, care shall be taken to
produce well compacted vertical joints.
 I
n the case of two cell blocks, there may be a slight depression on their
vertical sides, which shall also be filled up with mortar to secure greater
lateral rigidity.
 M
ortar shall not be spread so much ahead of the actual laying of the units,
so that it tends to stiffen and loose its plasticity, thereby resulting in poor
bond.
 W
hen the mortar has stiffened slightly, it shall be firmly compacted with a
jointing tool. The mortar shall be pressed against the unit with a jointing
tool after the mortar has stiffened to affect intimate contact between the
mortar and the masonry unit and obtain a weather tight joint.
 I
f necessary, mortar may be added, particularly to the vertical joints, to
ensure that they are well filled.
 M
ortar joints shall be moistened with a fine water spray for about 7 days or
alternatively masonry shall be covered with polyethylene sheets to retain
the moisture as approved by the Engineer.
Laying of Blocks
 F
or horizontal joints, all concrete blocks shall be laid with the thicker part
of shell face up for easy handling and laying.
 P
ieces of hollow blocks shall in no case be used anywhere. Machine cut
pieces of solid blocks, free of any cracking and chipping, may be used
where they are absolutely necessary subject to prior approval of the
Engineer.
 A
ll block walls abutting concrete columns or walls shall be bonded to the
same with approved 6 mm dia 250 mm long galvanized M.S. dowels or
approved G.I. butterfly ties left from the concrete columns while casting,

279
166
at every alternate course of block.
 T
he first course of concrete masonry shall be laid with great care, making
sure that it is properly aligned, levelled and plumbed. This will assist the
mason in laying succeeding courses to obtain a straight and truly vertical
wall.
 B
efore laying the first course the alignment of the wall shall be marked on
the foundation footings. For this purpose, the blocks for this course shall
first be laid dry that is without mortar over the footing, along a string
tightly stretched between properly located corners of the wall in order to
determine the correct position of the blocks including those of the cross
walls joining it and also adjust their spacing. When the blocks shall be
removed, a full mortar bed shall be spread on the footing and these blocks
shall be laid back in place truly level and plumb. Concrete block work shall
be laid in English bond. Concrete Block shall not be wetted like brick
masonry prior to use. In drier climatic seasons, top and sides of blocks may
be slightly moistened to avoid absorption of water from mortar.
Bounding column surface(s) and beam bottom shall be prepared
properly by hacking to avoid debonding. The string shall then be
stretched tightly along the faces of the two corner blocks and the faces
of the intermediate ones adjusted to coincide with the line. Thereafter
each block shall be removed and re-laid over a bed of mortar. After every
three or four blocks have been laid, their correct alignment, level and
verticality shall be carefully checked. The units shall not be realigned
tapped or in any way moved after initial placement as movement shall
break the bond between units and mortar, after which the mortar will not
re adhere well to the masonry units.
 T
he construction of walls may be started either at the corners or started
from one end proceeding in the other direction. If the corners of the wall
are built first, they shall be built four or five courses higher than the
center of the wall. As each course is laid at the corner, it shall be checked
with a level or straight edge to make certain that the faces of the blocks are
all in the same plane. Each course, in building the corners, shall be
stepped back by a half block and the horizontal spacing of the block shall
be checked by placing a mason's level diagonally across the corners of the
block.
 W
hen filling in the wall between the corners, a mason's line shall be
stretched from corner to corner for each course and the top outside edge
of each block shall be laid to this line. The manner of handling or
gripping the block shall be such as to position the block properly with
minimum.
 A
s each block is laid, excess mortar extruding from the joints shall be cut
off with the trowel and thrown back on the mortarboard and to be
reworked into the fresh mortar. If the work is progressing rapidly, the
extruded mortar cut from the joints may be applied to the vertical face
shells of the block just laid. Should there be any delay long enough for the
mortar to stiffen on the block, the mortar shall be removed to the
mortarboard and reworked. Dead mortar that has been picked up from the
scaffold or from the floor shall not be used.
 B
lock work shall be constructed only up to a few centimeters below

280
167
the structural members above leaving a gap between the block and the
structural member. The last layer of block masonry shall be laid by
provisioning a groove of 15mm x 12 mm on the external side, which
should be filed up with epoxy-based mortar and Metal before
plastering or other finishing work is taken up.
 I
n the case of cavity walls, both thicknesses shall be carried up together and
in no case shall one thickness be carried up more than two courses in
advance of the other.
 B
lock work to be done up to lintel level first and further work will
proceed only after fixing / laying of cable / duct / pipes etc. No claim in
this regard is acceptable.
Closure Block
When installing the closure block, all edges of the opening and
vertical edges of the closure block shall be buttered with mortar. The
closure block shall be carefully lowered into place. If any of the mortar
falls out leaving an open joint, the closure block shall be removed, fresh
mortar applied, and the operation repeated. Closure unit locations shall
be staggered throughout the length of wall.
Precautionary Measures
 T
he following measures shall be taken to prevent formation of cracks.
 W
hile curing, the block masonry shall be lightly sprinkled with water and
not made excessively wet.
 E
xpansion joints shall be provided in walls exceeding 30 m in length.
 U
nless otherwise specified 8 mm dia bar shall be provided in the bed joints
in block work, one course above and one course below windows and
above doors in order to distribute the shrinkage / temperature stresses
occurring at the corners of openings, more uniformly throughout the
walls and cost of such steel shall be covered in the rates of relevant
items.
 I
n framed structures, erection of partition and panel walls shall be delayed
taking care of deformations due to structural loads.
 P
artition wall should be suitably reinforced in lower courses to strengthen
against excessive deflections of floor slabs and should be separated from
the ceiling by a layer of resilient material. Joint shall be carried out in
plaster or any other finish.
 1
00 mm wall shall be reinforced in alternate courses with two 8 mm dia
longitudinal steel bars to strengthen against excessive deflections of floor
slabs and such cost shall be covered in the rates of the item. Joint shall be
filled with cement sand mortar (1:3).
Height of masonry construction
Block wall is to be constructed upto a maximum height of 1400mm in one
lift.
Bearing Walls
When two bearing walls meet or intersect and the courses are to be laid
up at the same time, a true masonry bond between at least 50 percent of
the units at the intersection shall be ensured. Single reinforcement bar of

281
168
8 mm dia shall be provided at every such location within the hollow & as
such cost shall be covered in the rates of relevant items.
Hollows at the intersection of two walls are to be filled and compacted
with M-20 grade concrete. However, concrete pour shall be stopped 25
mm below the top surface of the top course to provide the key for the
next pour.
Rendering and Other Finishes
Rendering shall not be applied to the walls when they are wet or during
monsoon. The walls must be finished only after they are fully dried.
Where plastering is required, all joints of block work shall be fully raked
to a depth of at least 10 mm while carrying out the block work.

Brick Work

i) The bricks shal

ii) The building br

the Project Manager for approval before full quantity is ordered. All supply of
brick to conform to the sample approved. No brick after 24 hours immersion in
water shall absorb water more than 15% of its own weight.

iii) The cement and

cement used in mortar shall be thoroughly machine mixed. No mortar that has
started to set shall be used in the work.

iv) Every brick sha

All joints in brick work are to be well filled with mortar.

v) The brick work

facing upwards.

vi) All joints in bri

vii) The brick work

viii) The brick work

ix) All uneven, irregular and bad brick work poor in workmanship shall be
demolished if deemed necessary by the Project Manager and rebuilt by the
contractor at the contractors' expenses. If necessary the contractor will have to
provide wooden plug, etc. for his own work and for which there will be no
special payment on that account. The work will have to be executed at any
height and lift and will not form the criterion for any extra amount.

x) Should any efflorescence be observed in brick work, it should be washed

down by clean water and brick surface treated with such chemicals as are
deemed necessary by the Project Manager without any extra charge and at the
contractors' own expenses, till efflorescence subsides. Should the efflorescence
persist, the brick work shall be demolished if deemed necessary by the Project
Manager and the work rebuilt with new bricks including making good all the
work disturbed without any extra charge.

xi) Half brick masonry: All brick work under 115 mm thick shall be
reinforced with one no. 16 gauge 25mm wide MS flat in every fourth coarse.
The said flat shall be cast in or securely fixed to adjoining concrete walls or
columns by screw with fastener. No extra for the cost of MS flat will be paid.

282
169
xii) Wall under structural members- Allowance shall be made for
leaving, temporarily open courses immediately below all structural
members built into the walls. The open courses shall be left to permit full
deflection of structural members. The open courses shall then be made
good and pointed up after the structural members have been fully loaded
and before the completion of the work.

Plaster Work
General
Description of Work
The work covered under these specifications consists of supplying all
materials and rendering all types of plaster/pointing finishes strictly in
accordance with these specifications, applicable drawings etc.
Quality Assurance
Cement, sand and water required for the work shall, conform to
specifications laid down herein before under section 'Cement concrete
(plain and reinforced)', except that sand for plastering shall be
conforming to IS: 1542.
Submittals
Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions
for each material including products and other data as may be required to
show compliance with these specifications.
Certificates:
Contractor shall submit test certificates for each material as may be
required as per relevant IS codes.
Samples:
Prepare and install sample plastering panel of not less than 2.0 m2 area to
demonstrate the specified plastering.
PRODUCTS
Cement
Ordinary Portland cement of grade 43 complying to IS: 8112 shall be used
unless otherwise specified. Or PPC conforming to IS: 1489.
Sand
Sand for plaster work shall have the quality and particle size grading
conforming to IS: 1542 latest edition. Sand shall be hard, durable, clean
and free from dirt clay, organic matter or other impurities. Percentage of
clay and all other deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by weight
of sand when tested per IS: 2386 Part 1 and 2.
Water
Water conforming to IS: 456 and as approved by the Engineer shall be
used.
Admixtures
Additives or admixtures conforming to IS: 9103, IS 3812 and IS2645,
may be added to the cement or concrete mix conforming to the IS
specifications, meeting approval of the Engineer. Admixtures shall be
chloride free and melamine polymer based, if approved. Other additives
or admixtures not being governed by Indian Standards shall be tested and
checked that the same are not detrimental to durability. However, any
addition shall only be after the approval of the Engineer.
Chicken Wire Mesh
All junctions of Masonry wall with R.C. structure e.g. column, beam,
lintel etc. which are to be plastered, shall be reinforced by fixing strips
of approved 22 SWG G.I. chicken wire mesh 250 mm wide with an
overlapping of 100 mm centrally over the length of junction. G.I. chicken
wire mesh of required width shall also be fixed over chasing for conduits,
283
170
pipes, etc. on masonry walls before plastering is commenced.
Cement Based Wall Putty
Overall internal plaster and ceiling plaster white cement-based wall putty
shall be applied unless otherwise specified.
EXECUTION
General
Thickness
 The cement plaster shall be 12 mm, 15 mm or 20 mm thick as
specified in the item.
 Where the thickness required as per description of the item is 20 mm
the average thickness of the plaster shall not be less than 20 mm whether
the wall treated is of brick or stone. In the case of brick work, the
minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall be not less than
15 mm while in case of stone work the minimum thickness over the
bushings shall be not less than 12 mm.
 The surface to be plastered shall be raked out properly, dust and
loose mortar shall be brushed out. The concrete surface shall be hacked
before plastering if not already done. The surface shall be thoroughly
wetted before commencement of plastering. Scaffolding required for
facility of working shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost.
This may be double or single according to the requirement and shall be
approved by the Engineer. Stage scaffolding shall be erected when ceiling
plastering is done. The contractor shall be responsible for accidents, if any,
take place. The contractor shall co-operate with the other agencies also.
Whenever electrical contractor / agency has to fix up switch boxes in
walls, necessary 'Thiyyas', 'Tapanish' or ‘Dhadas' shall be arranged to be
given in advance of actual plastering process at these locations so that
the boxes are fixed properly in line with finished plaster surface. All
finishing in and around these boxes as also around the conduit boxes in
ceiling shall be done by plastering contractor without any extra cost. The
decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be final and binding on the
contractor.
 All junctions of Masonry wall with R.C. structure e.g. column, beam,
etc. which are to be plastered, shall be reinforced by fixing strips of
approved 22 SWG G.I. Chicken wire mesh 250 mm wide with an
overlapping of 100 mm centrally over the length of junction. G.I.
Chicken wire mesh of required width shall also be fixed over chasing for
conduits, pipes, etc. on masonry walls before plastering is commenced.
The mesh shall be nailed rigidly to the masonry with G.I. nails of suitable
type at approx. 400 mm centers. The finished mesh shall be straight, rigid
and laid without sagging. The contractor shall take into account the cost of
G.I. chicken wire mesh while quoting for plastering work.
 If the surface which is to be plastered either internally or externally
is out of plumb and not in line and level and if the plastering to be done
is more than specified thickness to bring the plastered surface to perfect
line and levels, in such specific cases, chicken wire mesh is to be
provided by the contractor at his own cost and the plaster should be done
to required line and level with no extra cost whatsoever. Raking out of
joints is expected to be carried out along with masonry but it should be
checked thoroughly to receive good key. Dust and loose mortar shall be
brushed out. Efflorescence if any shall be removed by brushing and
scrapping. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water,
cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced. Walls should be
sufficiently damp prior to plastering. Water from plastering mortar must
not be absorbed by masonry under any condition. Thickness of one coat
should not be more than 15mm and less than 8 mm for single coat
284
171
finished plaster.
 In case of concrete surface if a chemical retarder has been applied to
the form work, the surface shall be roughened by wire brushing and all
the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off and care shall be taken
that none of the retarders is left on the surface.
 No plastering work shall be started before all conduits, pipes,
fittings and fixtures clamps, hooks, doors and window frames etc. are
embedded, grouted and cured and all defects removed to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Special approval shall be taken from the Engineer before
commencing each plastering work. No cutting of finished plaster shall be
allowed under any circumstance. No portion shall be left out initially to be
patched up later on.
 The finished plastered surface shall be free from cracks, fissures,
crevices, hair cracks, blistering, local swelling and flaking. The finished
surface shall be true to line, level, plumb & plain and durable. The
adhesion of the mortar with the background surface is of prime
importance as this affects durability of plaster. Preparation of surface
which has to take plastering is of great importance. Before starting the
plastering work the surface should be got approved by the Engineer. In
order to avoid the formation of deep and side cracks and for dispersion
of cracks at the junctions between concrete surfaces and brick masonry
work as also between junction of windows/door frames and brick/block
masonry works, the cautionary measures should be carried out over
which the plastering work as required by the Engineer.
 The minute gap between window/doorframes with sills and jambs
should be filled up/caulked by epoxy putty/silicon
sealants/polysulphide sealant by approved methods as
instructed/approved by Engineer.
 The grooves shall be of required dimensions. The same shall be
made to turn wherever necessary. The finish inside shall be of the same
finish as that of the plaster. The lines of the grooves shall be well defined
and rounded. The grooves are to be provided in plastering in internal and
external surfaces as shown or directed. The rates for plaster shall include the
making of grooves.
 When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left,
cut clean to line both horizontally and vertically. When recommencing
the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be scrapped cleaned and
wetted with cement slurry before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas,
to enable the two to properly join together. Plastering work shall be
closed at the end of the day on the body of wall and not nearer than 15
cm to any corners or arises. It shall not be closed on the body of the
features such as plasters, bands and cornices, nor at the corners of arises.
Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops and
copings as these invariably lead to leakages. The plastering and finishing
shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar.
No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later
on. The plastering and finishing shall be completed within half an hour of
adding water to the dry mortar.
Mix Proportions
 The mortar for plastering shall be of proportion as specified in the
item schedule. The mixes specified in the schedule are volumetric.
Volumetric mixing shall be based on dry volumes of each ingredient.
 The mortar of the specified mix using the type of sand described in
the item shall be used. It shall be as specified in Subhead 3.0. For
external work and under coat work, the fine aggregate shall conform to

285
172
grading IV. For finishing coat work the fine aggregate conforming to
grading zone V shall be used.
Mixing
Cement and fine aggregates shall be mixed dry in the required
proportions to obtain a uniform colour. Water shall then be added to
get the required consistency for the plaster. Mixing shall be done
mechanically. However, manual mixing will be allowed at the discretion
of the Engineer. Manual mixing, where adopted shall be carried out on
a clean watertight platform. After water is added during mixing, the mix
shall be held back and forth for 10 to 15 minutes. In machine mixing, the
mixer shall run at least five minutes after placing all the ingredients in the
drum. Only so much quantity of mortar which can be used within half
an hour after the addition of water shall be prepared at a time. Any
mortar for plaster which is set or partially set shall be rejected and shall be
removed forthwith from the site.
Internal Plaster
 The proportions of sand and cement shall be as specified in CPWD
Specifications for wall and ceiling and shall cover all irregularities,
undulations, depressions due to chasing etc. in the surface to be plastered.
The mortar shall be applied slightly more than specified, thick and
pressed and levelled with wooden ruler or straight edge to finished
thickness. Straight, edges shall be freely used to ensure a perfectly even
surface. The finished surface shall be true and even and present uniform
texture throughout and all joining marks shall be eliminated. All
corners, edges and angles shall be made perfectly to line, plane and plumb.
All exposed angles and junctions of walls, doors, windows, beams, slabs
etc. shall be carefully finished so as to furnish a neat and even surface.
 Plastering items amongst all other things as described in various items
also include:
 Preparation of surfaces to receive the plaster, providing cement
plaster of the specified average thickness and proportions with specified
number of coats.
 All labour, materials, scaffolding, use of tools and equipment to
complete the plastering work as per specifications.
 Curing for 10 days. The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of at
least 7 days. During this period, it shall be suitably protected from all
damages at the contractor’s expense by such means as the Engineer-in-
Charge may approve. The dates on which the plastering is done shall be
legibly marked on the various sections plastered so that curing for the
specified period thereafter can be watched.
 Cleaning the surface of doors, windows, floors or any other surfaces
where plastering might have splashed.
 Finishing the portion of plaster left above any type of skirting work to
be finished rounded or as directed by the Engineer, in a separate operation
after laying of floor and skirting.
 The item shall also include rounding up of corner and angles making
sharp corners and angles finishing around ceiling rose and electrical
fittings etc. fixed by other agencies, junctions of roof and wall or beam
with the finish as specified in the item. Plastering of brick and concrete
cornice and copings and plastering in restricted areas if any shall not be
measured separately.
 Architectural bands and narrow widths of plaster over structural as
well as non-structural and the line when prepared in the same thickness of
plaster shall not be measured separately and shall be covered by
respective plaster items.

286
173
 All interior plaster shall be extended upto 12 mm below the skirting
or dado level at no extra cost wherever required.
Wall Putty Punning
 Unless otherwise specified, all internal wall & ceilings surface shall
be finished smooth with white cement-based wall putty.
 For surface preparation, remove all loosely adhering material from
the wall surface with the help of emery stone, putty blade or wire brush
and clean water. The substrate should be clean, free from dust, grease
and loose materials. Dry and absorbent surfaces should be moistened
with sufficient quantity of clean water.
 Wall putty shall be mixed with 30-35 % clean water slowly to make a
paste. Continue the mixing for 10-15 minutes till a uniform paste is
formed. Mixing may be done manually or by using a suitable electric
mixer. Only so much quantity of putty paste which can be used within an
hour after the addition of water shall be prepared at a time. Any putty
mixing which is fully or partially set shall be rejected and shall be
removed forthwith from the site. Application shall be done in layers.
Maximum layer thickness shall be within 1.5mm 3.0mm as instructed by
Engineer.
 It shall be the contractor's responsibility to ensure that cracks do not
develop during the execution or subsequently during the defect liability
period and the cracks if any observed shall be rectified including finishing,
white washing/painting as specified, without any extra cost to the Owner,
to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
Sand Faced Cement Plaster
 The surface to be plastered shall first be thoroughly cleaned down.
All joints shall have been raked out in case of brickwork/block
work/stone masonry as the work proceeds. Concrete surface shall also
be clearly hacked, and wire brushed if not already done before
plastering is taken up. The surface to be plastered shall be well wetted for
a minimum period of 6 hours before commencing the work. The mortar
for all plaster work shall be cement sand mortar of mix as specified in the
BOQ/schedule of items.
 Double scaffoldings required for facility of construction shall be
provided by the contractor at his own expenses wherever directed by the
Engineer. The contractor shall take all measures to ensure the safety of
the work and workmen. Any instruction of the Engineer in this respect
shall also be complied with. The contractor shall be entirely responsible
for any damage to property or injury to persons, resulting from faulty
scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his
default in, this respect. Proper scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy
approach for workmen and supervisory staff to every part of the work.
Base Coat - The surface to be plastered shall first be dabbed out with
cement mortar to cover all irregularities and faces upto proudest part.
The dabbing coat which shall be of proportion as specified in
BOQ/schedule of items and a 12 mm. thick layer shall then be
applied/scored and keys shall be formed on the surface by thoroughly
combing it with heavy horizontal lines about 12 mm apart and about 3 mm
deep when mortar has just set.
Second Coat - The cement mortar for sand faced plaster shall have
washed and approved sand with slightly larger proportions of course
materials, but not exceeding 3 mm. The proportion of cement to sand
shall be as specified in BOQ/schedule of items. The water is gradually
added to make the mixture homogenous. The thickness of finishing coat
excluding key shall be 6 mm. A reasonable time (not more than 48

287
174
hours) shall be allowed after application of base coat for thorough
drying before the application of second coat. After application the
surface should be finished with a wooden float lined with cork closely
pricked on with wet sponge tapped gently to bring sand particles into
prominence.
Water Proofing Compound / Admixtures
Whenever specified, waterproofing compound or admixtures of approved
make shall be added entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
Application of Plaster
Wall plastering shall be started only after the completion of ceiling
plaster from top and gradually worked down towards floor. It shall not, at
any place be thinner than as specified. To ensure even thickness and a true
surface plaster of about 15 cm x 15 cm shall be first applied horizontally
and vertically at not more than 2 m interval over the entire surface to
serve as gauges. The mortar shall then be applied to the wall / surface
between the gauges and finished even. All corners, junctions and
roundings shall be truly vertical or horizontal and finished carefully.
Generally, work in an enclosure shall be completed in one day. For larger
areas if the work has to be suspended at the end of the day, plaster
shall be cut clean to line. Where recommencing the plastering, edge of
old work shall be scrapped, cleaned and wetted with cement putty before
restarting plastering.
Precaution
Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound
hollow when tapped, or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall
be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
(i) When ceiling plaster is done, it shall be finished to chamfered edge
at an angle at its junction with a suitable tool when plaster is being done.
Similarly when the wall plaster is being done,
it shall be kept separate from the ceiling plaster by a thin straight groove
not deeper than 6 mm drawn with any suitable method with the wall
while the plaster is green.

(ii) To prevent surface cracks appearing between junctions of

column/beam and walls, 150 mm wide chicken wire mesh should be
fixed with U nails 150 mm centre to centre before plastering the junction.
The plastering of walls and beam/column in one vertical plane should be
carried out in one go. For providing and fixing chicken wire mesh with U
nails payment shall be made separately.

Piling Works
Indian Standards
Indian standards to be followed are:
All relevant standards as specified elsewhere in this volume are applicable.

456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete

S
516 Method of test for strength of concrete.
S
2911 Code of practice for design and construction of pile S
Foundation.
Part I Sec 1, 3 Concrete piles, driven cast-in-situ
Part I Sec 2, 4 Concrete piles, and Bored cast-in-situ concrete piles.
Material
Cement, Coarse Aggregate, Fine Aggregate, Water, Admixture and Steel
288
175
Reinforcement shall be as detailed in specification and in the BOQ.
Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall conform to IS: 1786 (latest version) grade Fe-500 for
mechanical properties and shall be Corrosion resistant steel and it should
be OPWD approved. it shall be either-M from Vizag (RINL) Steel or HCR
-M from SAIL only. The reinforcement in the pile shall consist of the
following:
a) Longitudinal/Ties/Spacer bar Reinforcement provided shall be
as per approved design with respect to diameter, numbers and should run
through the entire length of the pile. d) Cover Clear cover to reinforcement
shall be as per approved design (min 75mm).
Bentonite
Bentonite powder to be used by mixing with water in suspension shall
be such as to maintain the stability of excavation in trench/bore. Each
consignment of bentonite powder received by the contractor shall be
accompanied by the Test Certificate from the manufacturer stating its
properties as determined by the supplier / manufacturer. The Certificate
shall be submitted to the PM/Consultant for his record.

Polypropylene fabric
Fabric Type Non- woven
Material Composition 100% polypropylene Weight180-200
gm/Sqm
Thickness 1.6mm (Approximately)
Weft way 30 Kg
Warp way 30 Kg
Air permeability 110 lts/Sqm/Second at 100mm water
Min bursting strength 16 Kg/Sq.cm.

Equipment and Accessories

The equipment and accessories will have to be selected depending upon
strata, location of work, capacity, size and weight of pile to be
handled. These shall be approved by the PM/Consultant prior to being
brought to site and use shall be as approved by the PM/Consultant.
Scope Of Work
o This section covers for providing bored reinforced concrete load
bearing pile foundations including boring work, steel reinforcement,
cast-in-place concrete piles, finishing of pile heads and all other work
as required.
o The work included consists of all necessary services and furnishing of
all labour, material, tools, equipment and related items for full
performance of the contract items as shown on the drawings, or as
specified or reasonably implied or incidental to construction
developments between trades.
 In brief, items of work shall be as follows:
o Coordination of drawing and setting out at site.
o Boring for piles including chiseling hard strata like boulder/weathered
and hard rock, bentonite slurry, disposal of excavated material,
keeping the site clean, etc.
o Providing and fixing steel reinforced cage with or without anti-
corrosive treatment and fixing liner to reinforced cage as specified in
BOQ.
o Placing all work furnished by other trades informs before casting the
concrete, fixing liner to reinforced cage if any. Cast in-situ concrete
piles to required depths and heights Chipping and building up of pile
heads All other miscellaneous concrete and related work shown in the
289
176
 drawings and/or called for in the BOQ.
o The contractor shall be responsible for the safe load capacity of each
pile and/or group of piles and shall guarantee his workmanship and
materials against any damage resulting therefore to the building
superstructure erected on the pile foundation.
o The contractor shall, taking into account the site investigation
information available and his own local knowledge, submit, with his
tender, the full details of his proposals for the piles.
o The contractor shall include in his tender, provision for a qualified
site engineer experienced in piling construction to supervise the work
and who shall be approved by the PM/Consultant, and who will work
full-time at the site.
o During progress of works, all care shall be taken to safeguard nearby
existing structure, excavated areas, adjacent piles etc.
o The contractor shall take all care in spacing of piles Practical
movability and aspect of installation
o Nature of the load transfer to the soil and possible reduction in
bearing capacity of a group of piles thereby.
Founding Strata
 The pile should penetrate minimum 3 times the pile diameter into the
founding strata. The founding strata is defined as the strata in which
penetration by chiseling with a 3/4-ton chisel dropped from a height of 1
m continuously for half an hour does not exceed 15 cm.
 The contractor shall provide and maintain, during the progress of
his work, a suitable firm working surface at the site and as the work
proceeds shall remove from the site all excavated material and rubbish
arising thus to the satisfaction of the PM/Consultant.
 The contractor shall, during the progress of the works, maintain full
records of each pile constructed including the soil profile as bored, the
length and diameter of the pile and the quantity of concrete placed in the
pile in the proforma as detailed hereunder or as directed by the
PM/Consultant.
 The contractor shall take every precaution to avoid damage to the
existing structures in the vicinity as a result of piles. All claims arising
on account of any damage caused to the existing structures in the
vicinity as a result of construction of pile foundation shall be borne by
the contractor.
 The minimum grade of concrete to be used for piling shall be M30
and minimum cement content shall be 400kg/cum. Concrete in
aggressive surroundings due to presence of sulphates etc shall be as per
provision of IS 456.

Workmanship
Bored Cast In Situ Piles
Co-ordination of Drawings
The contractor shall co-relate all relevant Architectural, Structural and
Services drawings and satisfy himself that the information available
therein is complete and unambiguous. Any discrepancy in drawing shall
be brought to the notice of the PM/Consultant prior to execution of the
work. Any aspect overlooked by the contractor shall be corrected by the
contractor at his cost.

Setting Out
A benchmark shall be established by constructing a masonry pillar or
marking on a suitable structure at the site. Based on the drawing the

290
177
contractor shall prepare a layout drawing indicating pegs setting in both
direction for approval of the Engineer in charge. The approved setting out
shall be carried out at site with the use of Theodolite, steel tapes, etc. For
proper execution it is recommended that a well-built masonry pillar be
provided with top surfaces that are smooth finished to predetermined
levels and marked sharply with axis for cross reference. The contractor
shall ensure that all benchmarks, pillars and other marks used in setting
out are protected and preserved till the completion of operation. The
contractor shall be fully responsible for the accuracy and sufficiency of
layout, and to achieve the standard of work required.

Boring
Boring may be done by rotary or percussion equipment, grabbing
equipment or by reversed or directed mud circulation method.
Stabilization of the sides of the bore hole, if required, should be done by
the use of drilling fluids or casing.
The drilling fluid, where required should be used at least from the level of
subsoil water and the hole should then be always kept almost full of the
fluid which should preferably be kept in motion. The density and
composition of the fluid shall be such as to suit the requirements of the
ground conditions and to maintain the line materials from the borings in
suspension. A 5% bentonite suspension would be generally suitable.
Construction sequence from the centre onwards from a group of piles
shall be prepared and submitted for approval of the Engineer in charge.

Jetting
Jetting by means of water may use in fine grained soil having very
small percentage of clay. Jetting shall be carried out only after express
permission of the Engineer in charge.
Jet tubes may be casted into piles. There may be two or four jet holes
depending upon type of method approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Alternatively tow of more jet pipes may be attached to the sides of pile.
Balanced arrangement of jet is essential to avoid pile to lead off. Jet shall
be tested before driving commences.
The quantity of water required to make the jetting effective will vary
with the nature of the ground and the size of pile. Precaution shall be
taken to avoid collecting of water when it comes to ground surface. It
shall be ensured that stability of the piling and piling plant is not
endangered by softening of the ground.
Jetting shall be stopped before completing the driving.
Jetting shall be stopped when it any tendency of pile tips being drawn
towards the piles already driven in noticed.

Cleaning
The bottom of the bore holes shall be cleaned of all the spoils and
sediments before placing the concrete and after placing of cage
reinforcement so that the bases of piles shall be free from loose material.

Reinforcement
Reinforcement used shall be made up into cages sufficiently well-wired
to withstand handling without damage. Bars shall be placed at sufficient
distance to allow easy flow of concrete. The lateral ties and spiral binding
shall not be closer than 15 cm centre to centre. Care shall be taken to
preserve correct cover of 6.0 cm or as specified in drawings and alignment
of reinforcement throughout the whole operation of placing the concrete.

291
178
Concreting
 Concreting shall start as soon as possible after the completion of
boring. If bore holes are not concreted within two hours, they shall be
cleaned thoroughly prior to placing the concrete.
 Concreting shall be done so as not have any voids formed due to
faulty consolidation of entrapped air. The volume of concrete placed
shall be observed and checked to monitor any deviation in the volume of
the concrete placed.
 Concreting shall be placed by means of a tremie pipe.
 It shall be ensured that the concrete entering the termite pipe does
not get mixed up with slurry. The tremie pipe shall extend up to the
bottom of the bore hole at the start and shall be withdrawn in sections as
the level of concrete rises in the bore holes, but its discharge end shall at all
times be embedded in the concrete to a minimum depth of one metre or a
sufficient head to prevent the inflow of soil and water.
 All large bore piles shall be brought up to 60 cm or higher as directed
than the theoretical cut- off point to permit all laitance and weak concrete
to be removed and sound correct length keying in the pile cap.
Additional precautions shall be taken in tremie pipe concreting
a. Concrete shall be coherent, minimum cement content 400 kg/cum and
slump 150 mm.
b. When concreting is carried out under water a temporary casing to
full length of the bore or 2 M in non-collapsible strata shall be
installed to avoid drop of sides into concrete.
c. The hopper and tremie should be a closed system embedded in the
placed concrete, through which water cannot pass.
d. For tremie pipe concreting pipe shall be of minimum 200 mm dia.
and size of aggregate maximum 20 mm.
e. First charge should be placed with a sliding plug pushed down the tube
with a steel plate of adequate charge to prevent mixing of concrete and
water. Plug should not be left in concrete as lump.
f. Tremie pipe should always penetrate into concrete.
g. Pile should be wholly concreted with tremie method to avoid laitance
from being entrapped within the pile.
h. All tremie pipe shall be cleaned after use.

Withdrawal of Casing
Extraction of casing in the case of large dia. bore piles shall be done in
such a way that no necking or shearing of the concrete in the shaft takes
place.

Finishing Pile Heads

The top of the piles shall be brought up above the finished level to permit
all laitance and weak concrete to be removed. It shall be ensured that pile
heads are properly keyed into the pile cap. A minimum distance of 7.5 cm
or as specified in the drawings shall be maintained.
All large bore piles shall be brought up to 60 cm or higher as directed
than the theoretical cut- off point to permit all laitance and weak concrete
to be removed and sound correct length keying in the pile cap.

Tolerances
The contractor shall exercise every care to ensure that all the piles are
located at the correct assigned positions as indicated in the drawings.
The piles shall be, as accurately as possible, true to the vertical.
Permissible positional deviation for bored piles shall not be greater than

292
179
7.5 cm for piles up to 180 cm in diameter at the level of the bottom of
the pile cap. The deviation from the vertical shall not be more than 1 in
100.

Records
A competent supervisor shall be present to record the necessary
information when the pile is being driven. The data record shall be kept
in the form as prescribed in IS 2911 (Part I) Appendix H or as directed
by the Engineer in Charge.

Testing Of Piles Load Tests

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of IS 2911
(Part I).

Testing Procedure
Load tests on a pile shall not be carried out earlier than four weeks from
the time of casting of the pile. The contractor shall submit the description
of his procedure for carrying out the load test for the approval of the
PM/Consultant, at least one month prior to the first load test. The
Engineer in Charge reserves full rights for demanding modifications of
the test procedure proposed by the contractor.

Number of Tests
The number of load tests carried out by the contractor shall be carried out
as per IS 2911 Part IV.

Equipment
The contractor shall provide all necessary equipment for supplying
specified vertical loads on top of the test piles and measuring settlement
of the piles. The equipment provided shall be capable of slowly applying
and maintaining loads to within an accuracy of 1% and measure
deflection to accuracy of 0.02 mm.
Before commencing load testing of piles, all load testing equipment, e.g.,
hydraulic jacks, pressure gauges, deflector meters, etc. shall be tested
for their accuracy from an approved laboratory. The testing deflector
meters along with their test certificates shall be kept in the custody of
the Engineer in Charge until start of the test. The hydraulic jacks shall be
placed on the pile only on the date of testing in the presence of the
Engineer in Charge

Loading Device
The device for applying vertical load shall be suitably designed to avoid
impact, lateral forces, tilting, etc. And shall have an arrangement for
gradual applications of load by means of a hydraulic jack and for reading
at close intervals. The load shall be in the form of suitable ken
ledges/reactions.
In the absence of a loading platform, the loading device may be as under.
The hydraulic jack reacts against heavy RS joists or a suitable load frame
held down by anchor piles or other anchorages. The anchor piles may
be working piles, but they shall be sufficient in number and adequately
reinforced to take the full tension with proper factor of safety.

Apparatus for Measuring Settlement

The apparatus for measuring settlement shall consist of 4 dial gauges
permitting a reading of 0.02 mm accuracy. The dial gauges shall be fixed
to a datum bar whose ends rest upon non- movable supports. The
293
180
supports for the datum bar with reference to which the settlement of the
pile would be measured shall be at least 5 x d away clear from the piles,
'd' being the diameter of the pile.

Preparation of Pile Head for Testing

The pile head shall be at the cut-off level of the pile. However, if the cut-off
level is considerably below the ground level, the test pile may be made as
directed by the Engineer in Charge It shall be constructed up to ground
level and due deductions shall be made in the pile capacity to account
for the resistance offered by the soil from the theoretical cut-off level to
the test level of the pile. In this regard the decision of the Engineer in
Charge shall be final and binding. The head of the pile shall be capped in
such a manner as to produce a horizontal plane bearing surface.

Loading Procedure
The maximum test load shall be 1.5 times the anticipated working load on
the pile for routine and cyclic load tests and 3.0 times the anticipated
working load or load to destruction, as decided by the PM/Consultant for
initial load tests.

Procedure for Initial Tests

o Initial tests are specifically recommended for adequate investigation
in case of major projects. Tests shall be carried out as soon as possible.
o The tests shall be carried out by applying a series of loads on the
RCC cap over a pile or a group of piles unaided by any other support. The
load shall be applied by means of the hydraulic jack reacting against a
loaded platform (device as detailed earlier), which shall be preloaded to
not less than two and a half times the estimated safe load carrying capacity
of the pile. The hydraulic jack shall be of adequate capacity and shall
have a pressure gauge and remote-control pump.
o The test load shall be applied in equal increments of about one-fifth
of the estimated safe load or as directed by the . Engineer in Charge.
Alternate loading and unloading at each increment shall be performed and
the elastic and plastic settlements recorded.
o Readings of settlement and rebound shall be recorded with the help
of at least two dial gauges (preferably four) of 0.02 mm sensitivity and
resting on diametrically opposite ends of the pile cap. The dial gauge
shall be fixed to a datum bar whose ends rest on non- movable supports.
The supports for datum bar with reference to which the settlement of the
pile would be measured, shall be at least 5 d away, clear from the piles
where d is diameter of the pile.
o Each stage loading shall be maintained till the rate of movement of
the pile cap is not more than 0.02 mm per hour.
o Loading shall be continued till the settlement of the pile top
equals one-tenth of the diameter of the pile stem (one-tenth of the side in
case of square piles), or the load is three times the estimated safe load on
the pile, whichever is earlier.
o The full test load shall be maintained for 24 hours. If the
settlement has not reached a steady value within a period of 24 hours,
the full test load shall be retained until the settlement recorded for the
next 24 hours remains constant.
o The safe load on the pile shall be the least of the following:
o Two-thirds of the final load at which the total settlement attains a
value of not more than 12 mm. Unless it is established that a total
settlement different from 12 mm is permissible in a given case on the basis
of nature and type of the structure. In the latter case the actual total
294
181
settlement permissible shall be used for assessing the safe load instead of
12 mm.
o Two-thirds of the final load at which the net settlement attains a
value of 6 mm.
o 50% of the final load at which the total settlement equals one-tenth
of the pile diameter or one tenth of the side in square pile as the case may
be.

Procedure for Routine Test

 It shall be the same as in the case of the initial test detailed
above. If desired by the PM/Consultant, working load application shall
be in increments of 25, 50, 75, 100, 125 and 150 percent of the anticipated
working load. Full test load shall remain on the pile for 24 hours. The test
may be carried out on one or more working piles.
 The safe load shall be assessed as the least of the following:
 Two-thirds of the initial load at which the total settlement attains a
value of not more than 12 mm. Unless it is established that a total
settlement different from 12 mm is permissible in a given case on the
basis of the nature and type of the structure. In the latter case, the actual
total settlement permissible shall be used for assessing the safe load
instead of 12 mm.
 Two-thirds of the final load at which the net settlement increases to
6 mm, unless more settlement is permissible.
Procedure for Cycle Loading
 The loading shall be applied on the test pile or group of piles by the
hydraulic jack assembly with pressure gauge in increments of about one-
fifth of the assumed safe load. The reaction shall be obtained against a
loaded platform or heavy R.S. joist bolted down to anchor piles.
 Alternate loading and unloading shall be carried out at each
stage and subsequent elastic rebound in the pile shall be measured
accurately by a minimum of two (preferably four) settlement gauges
fixed at diametrically opposite ends to a datum bar resting on immovable
supports. In order to simulate the effect of future fluctuations of load, a
cycle of loading and unloading may sometimes be repeated at 5-to 10-
minute intervals before applying the next higher load.
 Loading shall be continued till there is a marked progressive
settlement of the pile. In the end full test load shall remain on the pile.

Tension Tests
If required, tension tests shall be done for a maximum test load of 2
times the safe tension capacity of the pile.
Two adjacent working piles shall be treated as reaction piles and tensile
loading applied by means of hydraulic jack against a steel joist (built-in if
necessary) resting on the reaction piles.
The contractor shall submit his proposal for testing along with detailed
sketches and computations pertaining to the test for the approval of the
PM/Consultant at least one month before the date of the test.
Alternate loading, unloading and recording of readings shall be done in the
same manner as for cyclic loading.

Low Strain Pile Integrity Testing

Conduct Low Strain Pile Integrity Testing on R.C. Bored Pile
Foundations using Pile Integrity Tester equipment manufactured by Pile
Dynamics Inc. of USA or TNO of Netherlands that conforms to ASTM
D5882.

295
182
The test shall be conducted by generating impact of handheld hammer
and the averaged curve shall be velocity record as a function of time. In
general, atleast 2 locations shall be tested for pile more than 600mm
diameter.
Test Preparation:
The test shall be conducted minimum 10 days after pile installation and
after the pile top concrete has been chipped off to sound concrete level
and made uniform. The pile top shall be free from water, dirt or other
debris.
The pile head shall be made smooth using carborundum stone or
grinder or chisel on atleast 2 locations one at the center of the pile and
other 300mm away from the center for data collection.

Result Preparation
The data must be displayed on the field such that atleast preliminary
evaluation can be made. An interim report shall be submitted within 3
days of field testing. A complete report to be submitted within 7 days
after the test showing graphical wave form indicating velocity versus
time plot, interpretation of results showing discontinuities, cross-
sectional or material changes if any, concrete quality etc. The test shall
be conducted in accordance with ASTM D5882.

High Strain Dynamic Pile Testing

Conduct High Strain Dynamic Pile Testing on R.C. bored piles using
Pile Driving Analyzer. The equipment shall have ability to record both
force and velocity. Both strain and acceleration sensors shall be used to
collect data & at least 2 pairs shall be connected at diametrically
opposite sides of the pile. The test and equipment shall conform to
ASTM D4945-1989. The test shall be conducted by an experienced
independent test agency.
Equipment and Site Arrangement:
High Strain Dynamic Testing shall be performed using Pile Driving
Analyzer, with its allied strain and acceleration sensors, cables etc. The
pile shall be tested minimum 14 days after installation.
The hammer weight and setup arrangements shall be as per specifications
of test agency; however, the following guidelines can be used. The test
shall be conducted by impacting the pile top with a hammer whose
weight is 1% to 1.5% of the test load. The drop height shall normally
vary from 1m to 3m. A single line crane or winch and tripod shall be
used for the impact.
The pile head for the test shall be rebuilt to 1.5 times pile diameter
using formwork or casing. If casing is used, windows 200mm x 200mm
shall be cut into the pile at 1.5diameters for fixing sensors. Plywood
cushion and steel plate shall be placed onto the pile head before impact
and this shall be based on test agency recommendations although
minimum 20mm thickness shall be used.
Test Results:
The report shall be submitted within 1 week of testing and shall include
force velocity curves, pile capacity, simulated static load test curve, net
& total pile displacement, pile integrity. A (Case Pile Wave Analysis)
CAPWAP analysis shall be conducted on the field data for correct
capacity estimation and to evaluate end bearing and skin friction
components of the pile.

Pile Integrity Test:

Pile integrity test is done to assess the continuity of piles. With this test
296
183
necking or bulging and uniformity of quality of concrete is checked. It is a
Non-Destructive integrity test method for foundation piles. (Low strain
method)
Test Equipment: The equipment shall have the following minimum
requirements: The analog to digital resolution shall be at least 24 bits,
The sampling frequency shall be at least 25,000 Hz.
Data shall be stored such that additional processing or further wave
analysis is possible.
Data shall be displayed in the field for evaluations of preliminary data
quality and interpretation.
The equipment shall allow attachment of a motion sensing device
capable of measuring acceleration, velocity or displacement due to the
impact of the pile top with a handheld hammer.

Test Preparation
For cast in place piles, integrity testing shall not be performed until the
concrete has cured for a minimum of seven (7) days unless otherwise
approved by the engineer. The pile head shall be free from water, dirt or
other debris. The concrete at the pile top surface must be relatively
smooth and provide sufficient space for attaching the motion sensing
device and for the hammer impact area.
100% of all piles shall be integrity tested. If less than 100% of piles are
initially tested, additional piles may be selected for testing at the
discretion of the engineer if circumstances either during or after pile
installation should make a piles' integrity suspect, or if the initial tests
reveal major defects.

Acceptance and Rejection

Shafts with no significant reflections from locations above the pile toe and
with a clear pile toe reflection may be accepted. Where no clear toe
reflection is apparent, the experienced test engineer shall state to which
shaft depth the test appears to be conclusive. Where reflections from
locations with significant reductions in pile area or pile material strength or
stiffness above the pile toe are observed, the pile has a serious defect. If
the record is complex, the results may be deemed inconclusive.
Construction records (concrete usage, grout pressure records, soil
borings) may be valuable in result interpretations or additional numerical
analysis modeling may be used to quantify the record. The decision to
reject and replace, or repair, any defective shaft is at the sole responsibility
of the engineer-of-record for the foundation.

Remedial Action
Rejected or questionable piles may be replaced. Questionable piles may
also be subjected to further testing, e.g., static load testing, dynamic load
testing, core drilling, ultra-sonic logging, etc. Remedial action may
include pressure grouting through core holes. If the pile top appears
questionable, further pile top cut-off and retesting may be advisable. If a
majority of piles diagnose as "inconclusive", partial or even complete
pile excavation or another test method may be necessary for pile
acceptance.

Failure of Test
If the tested pile does not satisfy the specified requirements of a
successful test and if the failure is attributed to defective workmanship or
297
184
negligence on the part of the contractor, all costs of the load test, the cost
of providing and installing additional piles, cost of additional or enlarged
pile caps and other work necessitated because of the defective pile, shall
be at the cost of the Contractor.

Defective Piles
The PM/Consultant reserves the right to reject any pile which, he
considers, has not been constructed according to specifications. The
contractor shall leave the rejected piles in place or pull them out as judged
appropriate and directed by the . Engineer in Charge . No extra payment
will be made on this account.
The cost of extra piles at new locations, their reinforcement, concrete,
etc. and any other additional work required as a result of rejection of
defective piles shall be borne by the contractor.

Sheet Piling Scope

The work shall consist of furnishing and placing the specified kinds and
types of piles at the location.

Site Preparation
All site preparation as may be required or as shown on the drawings and
any excavation within the area to be occupied by piles shall be completed
before the piles are driven.

Protection Of Pile Heads

The heads of all piles shall be protected during driving by suitable caps,
rings, heads, blocks, mandrels, and other devices
The heads of steel piles shall be cut square and fitted with a steel-driving
cap.
Driving heads, mandrels, and other devices shall be provided by the
Contractor as needed for special types of piles and shall conform to the
recommendations of the pile manufacturer.

Driving Sheet Piling

The piling shall be driven in such a manner as to insure perfect
interlocking throughout the entire length of each pile to the depth
specified. The piles shall be held in proper alignment during driving by
means of assembling frames or other suitable temporary guide
structures. Temporary guide structures shall be removed when they have
served their purpose.
At any time that the forward edge of the sheet pile wall is found to be out
of correct alignment:
(a) The piling already assembled and partly driven shall be driven to the
required depth, and
(b) Taper piles shall then be driven to bring the forward edge into
correct alignment before additional regular piling is assembled and
driven. The maximum permissible taper in a single pile shall be one-
fourth inch per foot of length.

Cutting Off Piles

The Contractor shall cut the piles off at the specified elevations. The
length of pile cut off shall be sufficient to permit the removal of all
damage material.
Steel sheet piles shall be cut off in clean, straight lines as shown on the
drawings. Any irregularities shall be leveled off with deposits of weld
metal or by grinding before placement of bearing caps.
298
185
Defective Piles
Any pile damaged in driving, driven out of its proper location, driven
below the specified cut off elevation, or inaccurately cut off shall be
corrected by one of the following methods, whichever is approved by the
Engineer:
The defective pile shall be pulled and replaced or re-driven; A new pile
shall be driven adjacent to the defective pile; or
The defective pile shall be spliced or built up or a sufficient portion of
the footing shall be extended to properly embed the pile.
All piles pushed up or dislocated by the driving of adjacent piles or by
any other cause shall be re-driven to the proper position.
Any sheet pile ruptured in the interlock or otherwise damaged during
driving shall be pulled and replaced.

2.0 TURN KEY CONTRACTOR CAN ALSO CHOOSE BASED ON

THEIR LOGISTICS

PRECAS T CONCRETE DRIVEN PILES

All cement used shall be type 1 and concrete shall contain not less
than 350 kg of cement per m3.

The cross sectional dimensions of the pile shall be not less than those
specified and shall not exceed them by more than 10 mm.

Any face of a pile shall not deviate by more than 6 mm from a

straight edge 3 metres long laid on the face, and the centroid of any
cross section of the pile shall not deviate by more than 1/1,000 of the
length of the pile from the straight line connecting the centroids of
the end faces of the pile.

Casting

Square piles shall be cast in a horizontal position. Special care shall

be taken to place the concrete so as to produce a pile free from any
air pockets, honeycombing or other defect.

Concrete shall be placed continuously and shall be compacted by

vibrating or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer. The forms
shall be slightly overfilled, the surplus concrete screeded off, and the
top surfaces finished to a uniform, even texture similar to that
produced by the forms.

Piles may only be constructed in separate shorter elements with the

approval of the Engineer. Joints made after casting and/or stressing
shall be at least as strong as the piles themselves in every respect.

Tensioning Procedure (Prestressed Piles Only)

Tensioning shall be carried out only in the presence of the Engineer,

or his representative, unless otherwise approved in writing.
As used here the word “tendon” shall be defined as any single
prestressing element used to apply prestressed forces to the concrete.
For pretensioning this shall be each strand or straight wire.

All tendons to be stressed in a group shall be brought to a uniform

tension of approximately 500 kilograms per tendon prior to being
299
186
 given their full tension. After this initial stressing the group shall be
stressed to a total tension as required on the Drawings by means of
hydraulic jacks or other approved appliances equipped with gauges
graduated to read directly to 1% of the total load applied, and
calibrated to measure accurately the stress induced in the steel. This
induced stress shall be measured by elongation of the tendons and
checked by gauge pressure. The results obtained shall be within 5%
of each other.
Means shall be provided for measuring the elongation to an accuracy
of one millimetre in twenty metres of length between jacking heads.
In the event of apparent discrepancies of more than five percent
between stresses indicated by gauge pressure and elongation, the
entire operation shall be checked carefully and the source of error
determined and corrected before proceeding further.

Independent references shall be established adjacent to each

anchorage to indicate any yielding or slippage that may occur
between the time of initial stressing
and final release of the tendons.

Curing

Curing of the concrete shall be commenced prior to the formation of

surface shrinkage cracks and as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent injury. Curing shall conform to the
requirements of IS STANDARDS.

Release (Pretensioned Piles Only)

For precast pretensioned members the tendon stress shall be

maintained between anchorages until the concrete has reached a
compressive strength equal to the “Transfer Strength” specified on
the Drawings. After strength requirements are attained, the tension in
the tendons shall be gradually and simultaneously released and the
tendons cut off as required in such a way as to prevent shock. It shall
be the
Contractor's responsibility to transfer the prestress safely and to the
Engineer's satisfaction in all respects.

A recess shall be cut at the ends of piles around each tendon to allow
cutting off the tendon and filling the recess with grout so that the
cover to the end of the tendon is not less than 20 mm.

Finishing

Piles shall present a true, smooth, even surface free from any surface
blemishes and true to the dimensions shown on the Drawings, within
the tolerance limits.

Marking of Piles

After a pile has been cast, the date of casting, reference number,
length and, where appropriate, the prestressing force shall be clearly
inscribed on the top surface of the pile and also clearly and legibly
marked on the head of the pile. In addition, each pile shall be marked
at intervals of 250 mm along the top 3 metres of its length before
300
187
 being driven.

Handling and Storage of Piles

The method and sequence of lifting, handling, transporting and

storing piles shall be such that the piles are not damaged. The lifting
point of each size of pile shall be proposed by the Contractor with
supporting calculations for approval of the Engineer which verifies
the pile will not be damaged during lifting, handling, transporting
and storage. During transport and storage, piles shall be stored on
adequate supports located under the lifting points of the piles.

Concrete shall at no time be subjected to loading, including its own

weight, which will induce a compressive stress in it exceeding one
third of its strength. For this purpose the assessment of the strength
of the concrete and of the stresses produced by the loads shall be
subject to the agreement of the Engineer.

All piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length.

Packings of uniform thickness shall be provided between piles at the
lifting points.

Spliced Piles

Where the Drawings do not detail any splices in piles, the Contractor
may adopt spliced piles provided details of the splicing method and
drawings are submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the
manufacture of the piles.

Driving Piles

Strength of Piles
Piles shall not be driven until the concrete has achieved the specified
28 day strength.

Leaders and Trestles

At all stages during driving and until incorporation in the

superstructure, the pile shall be adequately supported and restrained
by means of leaders, or other guide arrangements to maintain
position and alignment and to prevent buckling. These arrangements
shall be such that damage to the pile does not occur. Leaders shall be
of sufficient length to make the use of followers unnecessary.

Driving Equipment

Before any piling work is commenced the Contractor shall submit to

the Engineer full details of the pile driving equipment and the
method he intends to use in carrying out the work.

For special types of piling, driving head mandrels, or other devices

in accordance with requirements shall be provided so that piles may
be driven without injury.

The driving equipment shall be of a type which assures that the

energy needed to penetrate the pile to the required depth is
301
188
 transmitted to the pile head without damaging the pile. Efficiency
factor of the hammer, i.e. the relation between the theoretical energy
developed by the hammer and the energy submitted to the pile, shall
be minimum 0.7.

Piles shall be driven with steam, air, diesel or gravity hammers.

When diesel hammers are used, they shall be calibrated by load tests
if necessary.

When gravity hammers are used for driving concrete piles, the drop
of the hammer shall not exceed 1 metre and the hammer shall have a
weight of not less than 80% of the weight of the pile and the driving
head. The fall shall be regulated so as to prevent injury to the pile.

The minimum energy developed by other types of hammers shall be

the same as specified for gravity hammers.

Driving Procedure and Redrive Checks

Each pile shall be driven continuously until the specified or

approved set and/or depth has been reached, except that the Engineer
may permit the suspension of driving if he is satisfied that the rate of
penetration prior to the cessation of driving will be substantially re-
established on its resumption or if he is satisfied that the suspension
of driving is beyond the control of the Contractor. A follower (long
dolly) shall not be used.

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay if an

unexpected change in driving characteristics is noted. A detailed
record of the driving resistance over the full length of the nearest
available pile shall be taken if required.

At the start of work and in a new area or section, sets shall be taken
at intervals during the last 3 metres of the driving to establish the
behaviour of the piles.

The Contractor shall give adequate notice and provide all facilities to
enable the Engineer to check driving resistances. A set shall be taken
only in the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise approved.

Redrive checks, if required, shall be carried out to an approved

procedure.

Final Set

The final set of each pile shall be recorded either as the penetration
in millimetres per 10 blows or as the number of blows required to
produce a penetration of 250 mm.

When a final set is being measured, the following requirements shall

be met:

a) The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition without

damage or distortion.
b) The dolly and packing, if any, shall be in sound condition.
c) The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile axis and the impact
302
189
 surfaces shall be flat and at right angles to the pile and hammer axis.
d) The hammer shall be in good condition and operating correctly.
e) The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded if
required.

Driving Sequence and Risen Piles

Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise the

detrimental effects of heave and lateral displacement of the ground.

When required, levels and measurements shall be taken to determine

the movement of either the ground or of any pile which results from
the driving process.

When a pile has risen as a result of adjacent piles being driven, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for correcting
this and the avoidance of it in subsequent work.

Jetting

Water jetting shall not be allowed. Continuous vibratory percussive

methods shall be used to drive a pile to both its design depth as well
as the required set where the upper strata affords high resistance to
driving.

Length of Piles

The lengths of the piles shown on the Drawings are based on

information which has been obtained from a site investigation prior
to the driving of test piles.

Before pile lengths are finally settled, the Contractor shall construct
to the lengths shown on the Drawings such pilot piles as may be
found necessary and these piles shall be driven in the positions
specified by the Engineer who shall be notified in advance of the
driving. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer daily with a
detailed record of the pilot piles for the full depth of driving. After
attaining the approved set, driving shall be continued until the
Engineer directs that it shall cease. Driving of pilot piles beyond the
point at which the approved set is obtained shall be called for to
demonstrate that driving resistance continues to increase. The
Contractor shall then provide the remainder of the piles. In
determining the
lengths of piles the Contractor shall base his order list on the lengths
assumed to remain in the completed structure. The Contractor at his
own expense can increase the lengths to provide for fresh heading
and for such lengths as may be necessary to suit his method of
operation.

Reference is made to Section 4.4 with regard to load tests on

selected pilot piles.

Repair or Damaged Pile Heads

When repairing the head of a pile, the head shall be cut off square at
sound concrete, and all loose particles shall be removed by wire
303
190
 brushing, followed by washing with water. If the pile is to be
subjected to further driving, the head shall be replaced with concrete
of an approved grade.

If the driving of a pile has been accepted but sound concrete of the
pile is below the cut-off level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-
off level with concrete of a grade not inferior to that of the concrete
of the pile.

Repaired piles shall not be driven until the added concrete has
reached the specified characteristic strength of the concrete of the
pile.

Cut off and Extension

Prestressed concrete piles shall be cut off at such elevation that they
shall extend into the cap or footing as indicated on the Drawings. In
the case of hollow core piles starter bars shall be cast into the core at
the top of the piles and extended into the cap or footing, all as shown
on the Drawings. Extensions to prestressed concrete piles shall
generally not be permitted, unless a provision for lengthening
prestressed piles was incorporated at the time of manufacture. Any
method for lengthening shall be such that joints are capable of taking
safely the stresses during driving and under load.

Damage to Adjacent Structures and Services

The Contractor will take all necessary precautions to avoid damage

to any adjacent structures and services. If during the execution of the
work damage is, or is likely to be, caused to any adjacent structures
or services, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals
for repair or avoidance of such damage.

Records

The Contractor shall keep records as indicated below of the

installation of each pile and shall submit two signed copies of these
records to the Engineer not later than noon of the next working day
after the pile is installed. The signed records shall form a record of
the work.

The following data are required:

a) Pile location
b) Pile reference number
c) Pile type
d) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
e) Length of preformed pile
f) Date and time of driving or redriving
g) Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
h) Working level
i) Pile toe level
j) Type, weight, drop and mechanical condition of hammer and
equivalent information for other equipment
k) Number and type of packing used and type and condition of dolly
used during driving the pile
304
191
 l) Set of pile in mm per 10 blows or number of blows per 250 mm of
penetration
m) If required, the sets taken at intervals during the last 3 metres of
driving
n) If required, temporary compression of ground and pile from time
of a marked increase in driving resistance until pile reaches its final
level
o) All information regarding obstructions delays and other
interruptions to the sequence of work

SOIL ANCHORS
 Tieback holes to be drilled to depths at an angle of 10 degrees to
the horizontal. Auger must be positioned such that a projection of
the hole centerline coincides with the tieback. Angle of tieback can
be increased or decreased by approximately 5 degrees as necessary
due to field conditions encountered after obtaining prior approval
from the Engineer.
 High strength rods shall be installed in the holes using spiders to
center the rod in the hole. Rod is to project from hole so a coupler
can be readily fitted. High strength grout is to be immediately
injected into the primary penetration area. The high strength grout
shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi. at 28 days.
The slump at time of placement shall be more than 1 inch and less
than 3 inches.
 Contractor will be responsible for re-drills or tieback replacement for
those, which fail to meet test loads.
 The tieback rods shall extend through holes cut in the sheeting.
The installation of the stiffeners, and anchor plate with grout when
specified, shall follow with tightening the anchor nuts.
 When grout has attained the minimum strength specified, stress shall
be applied to the rod to 200 percent of the design load for 10 minutes.
After the test has been performed, the stress and certified by a testing
the laboratory.
 The Contractor shall install wedge washers as required to correct
any misalignment of anchor rod with wale seat. Anchors shall be
stressed straight and true. Kinking or sharp curvature in anchors
under tension shall be cause for rejection. Rod shall show no
excessive movement at the test load during testing time and the
testing jack shall be capable of holding test load for 10 minutes
without bleeding off of pressure.

305
192
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS STEEL STRUCTURES

5.0 TUBULAR / HOLLOW SECTION for BEAMS, COLUMNS AND TRUSSES

The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures :

1. Electric resistance or induction butt welded (ERW), (YST 350) type.

Conforming to the requirement of IS 4923 The steel tubes when analysed in
accordance with the method specified in IS 228 shall show not more than 0.06
percent sulphur, and not more than 0.06 per cent phosphorous. Hollow sections
shall be as per IS 4923.
Tubes shall be clean finished and reasonably free from scale. They shall be free
from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects. The ends shall be cut
clean and square with axis of tube, unless otherwise specified.

For Regular sizes, ERW tubes (upto500X500/600X400) as per IS4923 is preferred

and For the bigger sizes tubes shall be allowed to be made of two rolled
sections/bended Plates with maximum 2 side Complete joint penetration (CJP)
306
193
weld. i.e. tube made of two C shaped sections. The C sections should be
completely rolled or bent from plates.
Approved Make for Structural Steel: TATA, APL APOLLO, SAIL, RINL, JSW.

FIGURE NO-01

FIRURE NO-02

Intumescent fire retarding paint of approved make in minimum thickness of

required thickness as per design for fire rating of 2 hour/ 120 minutes to exposed
steel work at any height in its finally erected position as per Manufacturer’s
recommendations for surface treatment and application including primer cross
beams sprayed in position & at site including all scaffolding, primer, finish coat &
ancillary tools machinery required all as per manufacturers recommendation &
certification, etc. all completed to the entire satisfaction of Project Manager.
Fire / Intumescent Paint: Noble Paints, Juton, WAHSU

Deck Sheet

Galvanized profiled sheet of Minimum 0.9mm thickness of minimum grade

350 Mpa with total galvanization of 275gsm as per relevant IS codes including
edge strips, deck closure plates or equivalent including cutting, erecting at all
levels, providing openings including supplying and fusion welding shear
connector studs conforming to ASTM A 108-99 Grades 1010-1020 steel of
minimum ultimate tensile strength 450 Mpa and a minimum elongation of 20%
in 2 inches; Shear Studs shall be per design with minimum 2 nos 22mm &
25mm dia studs at 125mm c/c for DG & DC building respectively with min
height 35mm above deck as per required deck depth and all materials and
measures required to complete the job. The studs shall be placed such that the
centreline of the studs placed shall align with the beam web below. The deck
sheets shall be laid such that the placement of studs is not impacted and their
full capacity is developed.
Approved make Deck Sheets: Jindal (TR50), Tata Steel (CF80), APL Apollo,
or equivalent

5.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

307
194
5.2.1 This specification covers the fabrication and transportation to site
and erection on prepared foundations and structural steel work consisting
of beams, columns, vertical trusses, bracings,
shear connections etc.

5.2.2 Fabrication, erection and approval of steel structures shall be in

compliance with : These General Specifications and IS: 800 – 1984
Drawings and supplementary drawings to be supplied to the contractors
during execution of the work.

5.2.3 Providing shop primer coat for steel structures. Grouting of holding-
down bolt pockets and below base plates where required.

5.2.4 In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned here and the Indian
Standards, those expressed in this specification shall govern.

5.2.5 Pre delivery inspections are mandatory. The turnkey vendor shall
arrange visit to factories for IDCO official along with PMC members
before manufacturing & procurement to site.

5.3 Scope

5.3.1 The fabrication and erection of the steel work consists of

accomplishing of all jobs here-in enumerated including providing all
labour, tools and plant all materials and consumables such as welding
electrodes, bolts and nuts, oxygen and acetylene gases, oils for cleaning etc.
of approved quality as per relevant IS. The work shall be executed
according to the drawings, specifications, relevant codes etc. in an
expeditious and workman like manner, as detailed in the specifications and
the relevant Indian Standard Codes and Standard Practice and to the
complete satisfaction of the Project Manager.

5.4 Fabrication Drawings

5.4.1 The contractor shall prepare all fabrication and erection drawings on
the basis of design drawings supplied to him and submit the same in
triplicate to the Project Manager for review, Project Manager shall review
and comment, if any, on the same. Such review, if any, by the Project
Manager, does not relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees
responsibilities. The contractor shall however be responsible to fabricate
the structurals strictly conforming to specifications and reviewed drawings.

5.4,2 Fabrication drawings shall include the following:

Member sizes and details

Types and dimensions of welds and bolts
Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding
Details of shop and field joints included in assemblies.

Bill of material

Quality of structural steels, welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers

etc. to be used.
Erection assemblies, identifying all transportable parts and sub-
assemblies, associated with special erection instructions, if required.
Calculations where asked for, for approval.

5.4.3 Connections, splices etc. other details not specifically detailed in

design drawings shall be suitably given on fabrication drawings
308
195
considering normal detailing practices and developing full member
strengths. Where asked for calculations for the merit shall also be
submitted for approval.

5,4.4 Any alternate design or change in section is allowed when

approved in writing by the Project Manager.

5.4.5 However if any variation in the scheme is found necessary later,

the contractor will be supplied with revised drawings. The contractor
shall incorporate these changes in his drawings at no extra cost and
resubmit for review.

5.4.6 Project Manager review shall not absolve the contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness of dimensions, adequacy of details and
connections. One copy will be returned reviewed with or without
comments to the contractor for necessary action. In the former case
further three copies of amended drawings shall be submitted by the
contractor for final review

5.4.7 The contractor shall supply three prints each of the final reviewed
drawings to the Project Manager within a week since final review, at no
extra cost for reference and records.

5.4.8 The Project Manager will verify the correct interpretation of their
requirements.

5.4.9 If any modification is made in the design drawing during the

course of execution of the job, revised design drawings will be issued to
the contractor. Further changes arising out of these shall be incorporated
by the contractor in the fabrication drawings already prepared at no
extra cost and the revised fabrication drawings shall be duly got
reviewed as per the above Clauses.

5.5 Materials
5.5.1 Rolled Sections
The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures :
Structural steel will generally be of standard quality conforming to IS:
226. Whenever welded construction is specified plates of more than 20
mm thickness will generally conform to IS: 2062.

5.5.2 Welding Materials

Welding electrodes shall conform to IS: 814.
Approval of welding procedures shall be as per IS: 823.

5.5.3 Bolts, Nuts & Washers

Bolts and nuts shall be as per IS: 1367 and tested as per IS:1608. It shall
have a minimum tensile strength of 44 Kg/mm2 and minimum
elongation of 23% on a gauge length of 5.65 (A- Original cross
sectional area of the gauge length). Washers shall be as per IS: 2016.

5.5.4 All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. The

use of equivalent or higher grade or alternate materials will be
considered only in very special cases subject to the approval of the
Project Manager in writing.

5.5.5 Receipt & Storing of Materials

Steel materials supplied by the contractor must be marked for

identification and each lot should be accompanied by manufacturer's
309
196
quality certificate, conforming chemical analysis and
mechanical characteristics.

All steel parts furnished by supplier shall be checked, sorted out,

straightened, and arranged by grades and qualities in stores.

Structurals with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations etc.

shall be rejected if the defects exceed the allowable tolerances specified
in relevant standards or as directed by the Project Manager.

Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and

lots inside a dry and enclosed room, in compliance with IS: 816 - 1969
and as per instructions given by the Project Manager. Electrodes shall
be perfectly dry and drawn from an electrode even, if required.
Checking of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be
made conforming to relevant standards.

Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by

manufacturer's test certificate. The contractor may use alternative
materials as compared to design specification only with the written
approval of the Project Manager.

5.5.6 Material Tests

The contractor shall be required to produce manufacturer's quality
certificates for the materials supplied by the contractor. Notwithstanding
the manufacturer's certificates, the Project Manager may ask for testing
of materials in approved test houses. The test results shall satisfy the
requirements of the relevant Indian Standards.
Whenever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when
material quality differs from standard specifications the contractor shall
conduct all appropriate tests as directed by the Project Manager at no
extra cost.
Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test
results do not tally with relevant standard specifications, shall not be
used.

5.6 Fabrication
Fabrication shall be in accordance with IS: 800 Section V in addition to
the following:
Fabrication shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings adhering
strictly to work points and work lines on the same. The connections
shall be welded or bolted as per design drawings. Work shall also
include fabricating built up sections.
Any defective material used shall be replaced by the contractor at his
own expense, care being taken to prevent any damage to the structure
during removal.
All the fabricated and delivered items shall be suitably packed to be
protected from any damage during transportation and handling. Any
damage caused at any time shall be made good by the Contractor at his
own cost.
Any faulty fabrication pointed out at any stage of work shall be made
good by the contractor at his own cost.

Workmanship
5.6.1 Preparation of Materials
Prior to release for fabrication, all rolled sections warped beyond
allowable limit shall be pressed or rolled straight and freed from twists,
taking care that an uniform pressure is applied.
Minor warping, corrugations etc. in rolled sections shall be rectified by
310
197
cold working.

The sections shall be straightened by hot working where the Project

Manager so direct and shall cooled slowly after straightening.
Warped members like plates and flats may be used as such only if wave
like deformation does not exceed L/1000 but limited to 10 mm (L-
Length).
Surface of members that are to be jointed by lap or fillet welding or
bolting shall be even so that there is no gap between overlapping
surfaces.

5.6.2 Marking
Marking of members shall be made on horizontal pads, of an
appropriate racks or supports in order to ensure horizontal and straight
placement of such members.
Marking accuracy shall be atleast + 1 mm.

5.6.3 Cutting
Members shall be cut mechanically (by saw or shear or by oxyacetylene
flame).
All sharp, rough, or broken edges, and all edges of joints which are
subjected to tensile or oscillating stresses, shall be ground.
No electric metal arc cutting shall be allowed.
All edges cut by oxyacetylene process shall be cleaned of impurities
prior to assembly.
Cutting tolerances shall be as follows:
a)For members connected at both ends + 1 mm.
b) Elsewhere + 3 mm.
The edge preparation for welding of members more than 12 mm thick
shall be done by flame cutting and grinding. Cut faces shall not have
cracks or be rough.
Edge preparation shall be as per IS: 823 - 1964. (weldy & edge prep)

5.6.4 Drilling
Bolts holes shall be drilled.
Drilling shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings.
No enlarging of holes filling, by mandrolling or oxyacetylene flame
shall be allowed.
Allowed variations for holes (out-of-roundness, eccentricity, plumb-line
deviation) shall be as per IS:800.
Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same axis shall be
+ 1 mm.
Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not differ by more
than 1 mm.
Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming the holes to the next
upper diameter, provided that spacing of new hole centres and distance
of hole centres to the edges of members are not less than allowed and
that the increase of hole diameter does not impair the structural strength.
Hole reaming shall be allowed if the number of faulty holes does not
exceed 15% of the total number of holes for one joint.

5.6.6 Preparation of Members for Welding

Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and
fixtures to ensure correct positioning of members (angles, axes nodes
etc.)
Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities and fissures due to
faulty cutting shall be chipped or ground or filled over the length of the
affected area, deep enough to remove faults completely.
Edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so
311
198
as to facilitate a good joint.
Generally no special edge preparation shall be required for members
under 8 mm thick.
Edge preparation (bevelling) denotes cutting of the same so as to result
in V, X K or U seam shapes as per IS: 823.
The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding
edges. Under no circumstances shall wet, greasy, rust or dirt covered
parts be assembled. Joints shall be kept free from any foreign matter
likely to get in to the gaps between members to be welded.
Before assembly the edges to be welded as well as adjacent areas
extending for atleast 20 mm shall be cleaned (until metallic polish is
achieved).
When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding
shrinkage and distortions, as the drawing dimensions cover finished
dimensions of the structure.
The elements shall be got checked and approved by the Project Manager
or their authorised representative before assembly.
The permissible tolerances for assembly of members preparatory to
welding shall be as per IS: 823-1964.
After the assemble has been checked, temporary tack welding in
position shall be done by electric welding, keeping in view finished
dimensions of the structure.

5.6.7 Welding procedures

Welding shall be carried out only by fully trained and experienced
welders as tested and approved by the Project Manager. Any test carried
out either by the Project Manager of their representative or the
inspectors shall constitute a right by them for such tests and the cost
involved thereon shall be borne by the contractor himself.
Qualification tests for welders as well as tests for approval of electrodes
will be carried out as per IS: 823. The nature of test for performance
qualification of welders shall be commensurate with the quality of
welding required on this job as judged by the Project Manager.
The steel structures shall be automatically, semi-automatically or
manually welded.
Welding shall begin only after the checks mentioned in Clause 5.1 to
5.6 have been carried out.
The welder shall mark with his identification mark on each element
welded by him. When welding is carried out in open air, steps shall be
taken to protect the face of welding against headry wind or rain. The
electrodes, wire and parts being welded shall be dry. pre
Before beginning the welding operation, each joint shall be checked to
ensure that the parts to be welded are clean and root gaps provided as
per IS: 823.
For continuing the welding of seems discontinued due to some reason,
the end of the discontinued seem shall be melted in order to obtain a
good continuity. Before resuming the welding operation, the groove as
well as the adjacent parts shall be well cleaned for a length of approx.
50 mm.
For single butt welds (in V, 1/2 V or U) and double butt welds (in K,
double U etc.) the rewelding of the root is mandatory but only the metal
deposit on the root has been cleaned by back gouging or chipping.
The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The contractor shall not
be allowed to cool the welds quickly by any other method.
For multi-layer welding, before welding the following layer, the
formerly welded layer shall be cleaned metal bright by light chipping
and wire brushing. Backing strips shall not be allowed. The order and
method of welding shall be so that -
No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts.
312
199
Due margin is provided to compensate for contraction due to welding in
order to avoid any high permanent stresses.
The defects in welds must be rectified according to IS: 823 and as per
instruction of Project Manager.

5.6.8 Qualification and Testing of Welders:

The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer-in-charge that the welders are
suitable for the work for which they will be employed, and shall
produce evidence to the effect that welders, have satisfactorily
completed appropriate tests, as described in IS:817 Part I (1992). The
Engineer-in-charge may, at his own discretion, order periodic tests of
the welders and/or of the welds produced by them. Such tests shall be at
the expense of the Contractor.

5.6.9 Quality of Welds:

The weld metal, as deposited (including tack welds), shall be free from
cracks,
slag inclusions, porosity, cavities and other deposition faults. The weld
metal shall be properly fused with the parent metal without under
cutting or overlapping at the toes of the weld. The surface of the weld
shall have a uniform consistent contour and regular appearance.

5.6.10 Welding of stud shear connectors:

Unless otherwise provided the stud shear connectors shall be fusion
welded to the plate girder using stud welding machine as per the
manufacturer's instructions. No other type of welding shall be permitted.
The stud and the surface to which studs are welded shall be free from
scale, moisture, rust and other foreign material. The stud base shall not
be painted, galvanised or cadmium plated prior to welding. Welding
shall not be carried out when temperature is below 10 degrees Celsius or
surface is wet or during periods of strong winds unless the work and the
welder is adequately protected. The welds shall be visually free from
cracks and shall be capable of developing at least the nominal ultimate
strength of studs. The procedural trial for welding the stud shall be
carried out when specified by the Engineer-in-charge.

5.6.11 Weld Inspection

The weld seams shall satisfy the following:
shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions.
shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and
fusion, under-cuts, rough surfaces, burns, blow holes and porosity etc.
beyond permissible limits.
During the welding operation and approval of finished elements,
inspections and tests shall be made as shown in annexure-B.
The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS:
823.

5.6.12 Preparation of Members for Bolting

The members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and
fixtures to sustain the assemblies without deformation and bending.
Before assembly, all sharp edges, shavings, rust dirt, etc. shall be
removed.
Before assembly, the contacting surfaces of the members shall be
cleaned and given a coat of primer as per IS: 2074.
The members which are bolt assembled shall be set according to
drawings and temporarily fastened with erection bolts (minimum 4
pieces) to check the coaxiality of the holes.
The members shall be finally bolted after the deviations have been
corrected, after which there shall not be gaps.
313
200
Before assembly, the members shall be checked and got approved by
the Project Manager.
The difference in thickness of the sections that are butt assembled shall
not be more than 3% or maximum 0.8 mm whichever is less. If the
difference is larger, it shall be corrected by grinding or filling.
Reaming of holes to final diameter or cleaning of these shall be done
only after the parts have been check assembled.

As each hole is finished to final dimensions (reamed if necessary) it

shall be set and bolted up. Erection bolts shall not be removed before
other bolts are set.
5.6.13 Bolting up
Final bolting of the members shall be done after the defects have been
rectified and approval of joints obtained.
The bolts shall be tightened starting from the centre of joint towards the
edge.
5.6.14 Plaining of Ends
Planing of ends of members like column ends shall be done by grinding
when so specified in the design.
Planing of butt welded members shall be done after these have been
assembled, the spare edges shall be removed with grinding machines or
files.
The following tolerances shall be permitted on member that have been
planed.
On the length of the member having both ends planed, maximum + 2
mm with respect to design.
Level differences of planed surfaces, maximum 0.3 mm.
Deviation between planed surface and member's axis maximum 1/1500.

5.6.15 Templates:
Templates used throughout the work shall be of Steel. In cases where
actual materials have been used as templates for drilling similar pieces,
the Engineer-in-charge shall decide whether such materials are fit to be
used as parts of the finished structure.

5.6.16 Holes for Field Joints

Holes for field joints shall be drilled in the shop to final diameters and
tested in the shop, with trial assemblies.
When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes
for field joints may be drilled in shop and reamed on site after erection,
on approval by the Project Manager.
For bolted steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory.
The tolerance for spacing of holes shall be + 1 mm.

5.6.17 Tolerances
All tolerances regarding dimensions, geometrical shapes and sections of
steel structures, shall be as per Annexure B, if not specified in the
drawing.

5.6.18 Marking for Identification

All elements and members prior to despatch for erection shall be shop
marked.
The members shall be visibly marked with a weather proof light
coloured paint. The size and thickness of the numbers shall be chosen as
to facilitate the indentification of members.
For the small members that are delivered in bundles or crates, the
required marking shall be done on small metal tags securely tied to the
bundle, while the crates shall be marked directly.

314
201
Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members for one and the
same assembly; in the same bundle or crate, general utility members
such as bolts, quests etc. may be packed.
All bill of materials showing weight, quality and dimension of contents
shall be placed in the
crates.
The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location,
preferably at one end of the member so that these may be easily checked
during storage and erection.
All members shall be marked in the shop before inspection and
acceptance.
When the member is being painted, the marking area shall not be
painted but bordered with white paint.
The marking and job symbol shall be registered in all shop delivery
documents (transportation, for erection etc.)

5.6.19 Shop Test Pre-assembly

For steel structures that have the same type of welding the shop test pre-
assembly shall be performed on one out of every 10 members minimum.
187.
For bolted steel structures, shop test pre-assembly is mandatory for all
elements as well as for the entire structure in conformity with Clause
5.12.

5.7 Shop Inspection and Approval

5.7.1 General
The Project Manager or their representative shall have free access at all
responsible times to the contractors fabrication shop and shall be
afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the
fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
Technical approval of the steel structure in the shop by the Project
Manager is mandatory.
The contractor shall not limit the number and kinds of tests, final as
well as intermediate once, or extra tests required by the Project Manager.
The contractor shall furnish necessary tools, gauges, instruments etc.
and technical non-technical personnel for shop tests by the Project
Manager, free of cost.

5.7.2 Shop Acceptance

The Project Manager shall inspect and approve at the following stages:
The following approvals may given in shop:
Intermediate approvals of work that cannot be inspected later.
Partial approvals
Final approvals
Intermediate approval of work shall be given when a part of the work is
preformed later :
Cannot be inspected later
Inspection would be difficult to perform and results would not be
satisfactory.
Partial approval in the shop is given on members and assemblies of steel
structures before the primer coat is applied and includes:
Approval of materials
Approval of field joints
Approval of parts with planed surfaces
Test erection
Approval of members
315
202
Approval of markings
Inspections and approvals of special features, like Rollers, loading
platform mechanism etc.
During the partial approval, intermediate approvals as well as all former
approvals, shall be taken in to consideration.

5.7.3 Final approval in the Shop

The final approval refers to all elements and assemblies of the steel
structures, with shop primer coat, ready for delivery from shop to be
loaded for transportation, or stored.
The final approval comprises of:
Partial approvals
Approval of shop primer coat
Approval of mode of loading and transport Approval of storage (for
materials stored)

5.8 Painting and Delivery

5.8.1 Preparation of parts for shop painting

The primer coat will be applied to the final product as per IS-1477
(Part-1&2) followed by two coats of epoxy paint. The Minimum dry
film thickness should not be less than 350 micron. All steel members
should be properly cleaned by abrasive (Sand) blasting before applying
primer coat. The primer coat must be applied within two hours of
abrasive cleaning.
Painting shall consist of providing one coat of red oxide zinc chromate
primer to steel members before despatch from shop.
Primer coat shall not be applied unless:
Surface have been wire brushed, cleaned of dust, oil, rust etc.
Erection gaps between members, spots that cannot be painted or where
moisture or other aggressive agents may penetrate, have been filled with
an approved type of oil and putty.
The surface to be painted are completely dry.
The parts where water of aggressive agents may collect (during
transportation, storage, erection and operation) are filled with putty and
provided with holes for drainage of water.
Members and parts have been inspected and accepted
Welds have been accepted.
The following are not to be painted or protected by any other product:
Surface which are in the vicinity of joints to be welded at site.
Surfaces bearing markings
Other surfaces indicated in the design.
The following shall be given a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant
lubricant only.
Planed surfaces

Holes for links

The surfaces that are to be embedded or in contact with the concrete
shall be given a cost of cement wash.
The surfaces which are in contact with the ground, gravel or brick work
and subject to moisture, shall be given bituminous coat.
The other surfaces shall be given a primer coating.
Special attention shall be given to locations not easily accessible, where
water can collect and which after assembly and erection cannot be
inspected, painted and maintained. Holes shall be provided for water
drainage and in accessible box type sections shall be hermetically sealed
by welds.

If specified elsewhere, in the schedule of quantities, the contractor shall

316
203
paint further coats of red- oxide after erection and placing in position of
the steel structures.

5.8.2 Packing, transportation, delivery

After final shop acceptance and marking, the item shall be packed and
loaded for transportation. Packing must be adequate to protect item
against warping during loading and unloading.
Proper lifting devices shall be used for loading, in order to protect items
against warping.
Slender projecting parts shall be braced with additional steel bars,
before loading, for protection against warping during transportation.
Loading and transportation shall be done in compliance with
transportation rules.
If certain parts cannot be transported in the lengths stipulated in the
design, the position and type of additional splice joints shall be
approved by the Project Manager.
Items must be carefully loaded on platforms of transportation means to
prevent warping, bending or falling during transportation.
The small parts such as fish-plates, quests etc. shall be securely tied
with wire to their respective parts.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be packed and transported in crates.
The parts shall be delivered in the order stipulated by the Project
Manager and shall be accompanied by document showing:
Quality and quantity of structure or members
Position of member in the structure
Particulars of structure
Identification number job symbol.

5.9 Field Erection

5.9.1 The erection work shall be permitted only after the foundation or
other structure over which the steel work will be erected is approved
and is ready for erection.

5.9.2 The contractor shall satisfy himself about the levels, alignment etc.
for the foundations well in advance, before starting the erection. Minor
chipping etc. shall be carried out by the contractor on his expense.

5.9.3 Any faulty erection done by the contractor shall be made good at
his own cost.

5.9.4 Approval by the Project Manager or their representatives at any

stage of work does not relieve the contractor of any of his required
guarantees of the contract.

5.9.5 Storage and preparation of parts prior to erection

The storage place for steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got
approved by the Project Manager before the steel structures start
arriving from the shop.
A platform shall be provided by the Contractor near the erection site for
preliminary erection work.
The contractor shall make the following verifications upon receipt of
material at site.
for quality certificates regarding materials and workmanship according
to these general specifications and drawings.
Whether parts received are complete without defects due to
transportation, loading and unloading and defects, if any, are well
within the admissible limit.
For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area.
317
204
Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items during unloading.
The parts shall be unloaded, stored and stored so as to be easily
identified.
The parts shall be stored according to construction symbol and
markings so that these may be taken out in order or erection.
The parts shall be at least 150 mm clear from ground on wooden or steel
blocks for protection against direct contact with ground and to permit
drainage of water.
If rectification of members like straightening etc. are required, these
shall be done in a special place allotted which shall be adequately
equipped.
The parts shall be clean when delivered for erection.

5.9.6 Erection & Tolerances

Erection in general shall be carried out as required and approved by the
Project Manager.
Positioning and levelling of the structure, alignment and plumbing of
the stanchion and fixing every member of the structure shall be in
accordance with the relevant drawings and to the complete satisfaction
of the Project Manager.
The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before during
and after erection.
damage during transportation
accuracy of alignment of structures
erection according to drawings and specifications
progress and workmanship.
Minor
In case there be any deviations regarding positions of foundations or
anchor bolts, which would lead to erection deviations, the Project
Manager shall be informed immediately. rectifications in foundations,
orientation of bolts holes etc. shall be carried out as part of the work, at
no extra cost.
The various parts of the steel structure shall be so erected so to ensure
stability against inherent weight, wind and erection stresses.
The structure shall be anchored and final erection joints completed after
plan and elevation positions of the structural members have been
verified with corresponding drawings and approved by the Project
Manager.
The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire surface of the bolt
heads and nuts shall rest on the member. For parts with sloping surfaces
tapered washers shall be used.

5.10 Final acceptance and handing over the structure

5.10.1 At acceptance, the contractor shall submit the following

documents:
Shop and erection drawings - either in tracings or reproducible.
4 copies of each of the following:
shop acceptance documents
quality certificate for structurals, plates, etc. (electrodes, welding wire,
bolts, nuts, washers etc.)
List of certified welders who worked on erection of structures.
acceptance and intermediate control procedure of erection operations.
5.10.2 Approval by the Project Manager at any stage of work does not
relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.

5.11 Method of Payments

5.11.1 Payment for steel work shall be made on basis of admissible
318
205
weight of the structure accepted, the weight being determined as
described in such Clause 9.10.2 below:

The rate for supply, fabrication and erection, shall include cost of all
handling and transportation to Owner's store/site o work where supply
and fabrication only are involved, trimming, straightening, edge
preparation, preparation and getting reviewed of fabrication drawings,
and providing one or more coat of Red-oxide zinc chromate primer as
specified in the schedule of quantity.

In the case, Owner supplies materials the rate shall include cost of steel
materials taking delivery of the materials, from owner's store all
handling and rehandling, loading and unloading, transport to site or
work, returning of surplus materials to owner's stores etc. complete as
well as the cost of all handling and transport, scaffolding, temporary
supports, tools and tackles, touching up primer coat, grouting etc.

5.11.2 The actual lengths installed shall be measured and the weight of
structural material/plate shall be calculated wherever necessary on the
basis of IS handbook. If sections are different from IS section, then
manufacturers handbook shall be adopted. No allowance in weights
shall be made for rolling tolerance.

5.11.3 Sections built out of plates, structural shall be paid on the actual
weight incorporated except for gussets which will be paid on the weight
of the smallest rectangle enclosing the shape. No deductions shall be
made for skew cuts in rolled steel sections.

5.11.4 Welds, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. shall not be measured. Rate for
structural steel work shall be deemed to include the same.

5.11.5 No other payment either for temporary works connected with this
contract or for any other item such as welds, shims, pacing plates etc.
shall be made. Such item shall be deemed to have been allowed for in
the rate quoted for steel work.

5.12 Grouting of Pockets

5.12.1 Grouting of pockets and under base plates will be done only after
the steel work has been levelled and plumbed and the bases of
stranchions are supported by steel shims. The space below the base plate
and pockets shall be thoroughly cleaned.

5.12.2 The mortar used for grouting shall not be leaner than 1:2 (1
cement: 2 sand) (grade 300 in case of concrete) and shall be mixed to
the minimum consistency required. It shall be poured under suitable
head and tamped until the space has been completely filled.

5.13 Tolerances allowed in the erection of plant building

The maximum tolerances for line and level of the steel work shall be +
3.00 mm on any part of the structure. The structure shall not be out of
plumb more than 3.5 mm on each 10 M. section of height and not more
than 7.0 mm per 30 M. section.
These tolerances shall apply to all parts of the structure unless the
drawings issued for erection purposes state otherwise.

5.14. Materials
5.14.1. All materials to be supplied by the Contractor shall conform to
319
206
relevant Indian Standards as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

5.14.2. Structural Steel materials required for the work shall be free
from imperfections, mill scales, slag intrusions, laminations, pittings,
rusts etc. that may impair strength, durability and appearance. All
materials shall be of tested quality only. Test Certificates in respect of
each consignment shall be submitted to Engineer-in-charge before use
in work. Whenever the materials are permitted for procurement from
identified stocks, a random sample shall be tested at an approved
laboratory, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

5.14.3. Structural steel encased column shall be in high tensile steel

with a yield stress of 450 MPa conforming to IS: 2062. Structural steel
beam shall be built up section in high tensile steel with yield stress of
450 MPa conforming to IS: 2062. UB/ UC (secondary) sections shall be
of yield stress of 350 MPa; for ISMB/ISMC/ISA sections, the steel shall
have yield stress of 250 MPa. Deck sheet shall be comflor-60, TR-60 or
equivalent of 1mm thick with yield stressof 350 MPa with minimum
275 gsm galvanization of approved make. Shear studs shall have
Ultimate stress of 450 MPa. Unless otherwise specified all anchor bolts
shall be of property class of 8.8 (and size M40) and shall conform to IS:
1363 (1992), IS: 1364 (1992) and IS:1367, as applicable. Unless
specified otherwise, head of bolts shall be hexagonal. All nuts shall
conform to property class compatible with the property class of the bolt
used. Unless specified otherwise, on drawings washer for HSFG/High
Strength bolts shall be conforming to IS:6649 (1985). Also plain
washers shall be conforming to IS:5369 (1975).

Shearing, Cutting and Planning: Cutting shall be done automatically.

Cutting by shearing machine may be used for plates not exceeding 10
mm in thickness provided that the plate edges be fully enclosed in a
weld. For Plates above 10mm, CNC plasma cutting shall be used
provided a smooth and regular surface free from cracks and notches is
secured. Chipping of edges of plates, wherever necessary, shall be done
without damaging the parent metal.
Chipped edges shall be ground to a neat finish and sharp corners and
hammered rough faces shall be rounded off. The edges and ends of all
cut/sheared plates shall be plained/ ground. Edge preparation for
welding may be done by machine controlled flame cutting, with edge
free from burrs should be clean and straight. The butting surfaces at all
joints of girders shall be planed so as to butt in close contact throughout
the finished joint. The edges shall be prepared, with an automatically
controlled flame cutting torch, correctly to the shape, size and
dimensions of the groove, prescribed in the design and fabrication
drawings. In case of Ugroove joints, the edges shall be prepared with an
automatic false cutting torch in two phases, following a bevel out with a
gouging pass or by machining. The welding surfaces shall be smooth,
uniform and free from fins, tears, notches or any other defects, which
may adversely affect welding, and shall be free.

Plate Construction: Automatic metal arc welding or submerged arc

welding shall be employed for fabrication of all members. Metal Inert
gas welding may be done for short length where access to the location
of the weld does not permit metal arc welding subject to approval of
Engineer-in-charge.

Accuracy of Fit-Up: Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought into as

close contact as practicable, and the gap due to faulty workmanship or
incorrect fit-up shall not exceed 1.5mm. If greater separation occurs at
320
207
any position, the size of fillet weld shall be increased at such positions
by the amount of the gap.

Jigs and Manipulators: Jigs and manipulators shall be used, where

practical, and shall be designed to facilitate welding and to ensure that
all welds are easily accessible to the operators.

Ends of Butt Welded Joints: The ends of butt joints shall be welded so
as to provide full throat thickness. This may be done by the use of
extension pieces, cross-runs or other approved means.

Weld Face and Reinforcement of Butt welds: The weld face shall, at
all places, be deposited projecting the surface of the parent metal.
Where a flush surface is required, the surplus metal shall be dressed off.
Testing of Butt Welds: Butt-welded joints are to be radiographically
tested (or Phased Array ultrasonic Testing) by the Contractor at his own
cost in the presence of the engineer in charge or his authorized
representative, if desired by the engineer in charge. If such tests indicate
the joints to be defective, the cost of rectification of defective welds
shall also be borne by the Contractor. The agency for testing of welds
shall be specified for approval by engineering-charge. Minimum Leg
Length & Throat Thickness in Fillet Welds: The minimum leg length of
a fillet weld as deposited shall be not less than the specified size as per
codal provisions. In no case shall a concave weld be deposited, unless
specifically permitted. Where permitted, the leg length shall be
increased above that specified length, so that the resultant throat
thickness is as great as would have been obtained by the deposition of a
flat-faced weld of the specified leg length.

Dislodging: After making each run of welding, all slag shall be

thoroughly removed and the surface cleaned.

Quality of Welds: The weld metal, as deposited (including tack welds),

shall be free from cracks,
slag inclusions, porosity, cavities and other deposition faults. The weld
metal shall be properly fused with the parent metal without under
cutting or overlapping at the toes of the weld. The surface of the weld
shall have a uniform consistent contour and regular appearance.

Weather Conditions: Welding shall not be done under weather

conditions, which might adversely affect the efficiency of welding.

Qualification and Testing of Welders: The Contractor shall satisfy the

Engineer-in-charge that the welders are suitable for the work for which
they will be employed, and shall produce evidence to the effect that
welders, have satisfactorily completed appropriate tests, as described in
IS:817 Part I (1992). The Engineer-in-charge may, at his own discretion,
order periodic tests of the welders and/or of the welds produced by them.
Such tests shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Supervision: The Contractor shall employ competent welding
supervisors to ensure that the standard of workmanship and the quality
of the materials comply with the requirements laid down in this
document.

Machining of Butts and Bases: Splices and butt joints of compression

members, depending on contact for stress transmission, shall be
accurately machined over the whole section. In column bases, the ends
of shafts together with the attached gussets, angles. channels etc., after
bolting and/or welding together as the case may be, shall be accurately
321
208
machined so that the parts connected butt over the entire surface of
contact. Care shall be taken that connecting angles or channels are fixed
with such accuracy that they are not reduced in thickness by machining
by more than 0.8mm.
Requirement of Welded Joints: Apart from the requirements of
welding specified under the above sub clauses, sections above, the
Contractor shall ensure the following requirements in the welded joints.
a. Strength-quality with parent metal.
b. Absence of defects
c. Corrosion resistance of the weld shall not be less than that of parent
material in an aggressive environment.

Studs: Studs shall be used at interface of in-situ deck slab and plate
girder to transfer the longitudinal shear. Unless otherwise specified the
material used shall have characteristic yield strength of 385MPa,
minimum elongation of 18% and characteristic tensile strength of
495Mpa.

Welding of stud shear connectors: Unless otherwise provided the stud

shear connectors shall be fusion welded to the plate girder using stud
welding machine as per the manufacturer's instructions. No other type
of welding shall be permitted. The stud and the surface to which studs
are welded shall be free from scale, moisture, rust and other foreign
material. The stud base shall not be painted, galvanised or cadmium
plated prior to welding. Welding shall not be carried out when
temperature is below 10 degrees Celsius or surface is wet or during
periods of strong winds unless the work and the welder is adequately
protected. The welds shall be visually free from cracks and shall be
capable of developing at least the nominal ultimate strength of studs.
The procedural trial for welding the stud shall be carried out when
specified by the Engineer-in-charge.

All the drawings shall be prepared in metric units. The drawings should
preferably be in A-1 standard size, and the details shown therein shall
be clear and legible. These drawings shall include but shall not be
limited to the following:

Assembly drawings, giving exact sizes of the sections to be used and

identification marks of the various sections members.
Dimensional drawings of base plans, anchorage detail of bearing bolts
location etc.
Complete quantity schedule of materials and detailed drawings of all
sections.
Detailed shop drawings for proper co-ordination with the concrete
components to which the steel members shall be connected, as required.
Any other drawings or calculations that may be required for proper
completion of the works and clarification of the works or substituted
parts thereof.
All 'as-built' drawings in 4 prints and 1 plot on Garware film or
equivalent and in Pendrive

322
209
Applicable Codes of Practice:
The following specifications, standards and codes of practice are
included as part of this Specification:

Sl. IS CODE NO. DESCRIPCTION

No
01 IS: 226 Structural Steel (Standard Quality)
02 IS: 800 (1984) Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel.
03 IS: 808 (1989) Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column,
Channel and Angle Sections.
04 IS: 813 Scheme of Symbols for Welding
05 IS: 814 (1991) Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc Welding
of Carbon & Carbon -Manganese Steel.
06 IS: 815 Classification Coding of Covered Electrodes for
Metal Arc Welding of Structural Steel
07 IS: 816 (1969) Code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding for
General Construction in Mild Steel.
08 IS: 817 (1969) Code of Practice for Training and Testing of Metal
Arc Welders.
09 IS: 822 Inspection of Welded Connection
10 IS: 823 Specification for Workmanship of Steel Structure
11 IS: 919 (1993) ISO System of Limits & Fits (Part 1 & Part 2)
12 IS: 961 Structural Steel (High Tensile)
13 IS: 1024 Code of Practice for use of Welding in Bridges and
Structures subject to Dynamic Loading
14 IS: 1148 (1982) Hot Rolled Rivet Bars (upto 40mm) for Structural
Purposes.
15 IS: 1161 Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes
16 IS: 1182 (1983) Recommended Practice for Radio Graphic
Examination of Fusion Welded Butt Joints in Steel
Plates.
17 IS: 1363 (1992) Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product
grade C (Part 1 to Part 3)
18 IS: 1364 (1992) 1 to Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of
Product Grades A &B (Part 5)
19 IS: 1367 (1991) Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Steel
Fasteners.
20 IS: 1477 (Part-1&2) Code of Practice for Painting of Structural Steel.
21 IS: 1852 (1985) Rolling & Cutting Tolerances for Hot-Rolled Steel
Product.
22 IS: 1977 (1975) Structural Steel (Ordinary Quality).
23 IS: 2016 (1967) Plain Washers.
24 IS: 2062 (1992) Steel for General Structural Purposes.
25 IS: 2595 (1978) Code of Practice for Radio Graphic Testing.
26 IS: 3600 (1985) Methods of Testing Fusion Welded Joints (Part 1
to Part 9)
27 IS: 3613 (1974) Acceptance Tests for Wire Flux Combinations for
Submerged Arc Welding
28 IS: 3658 (1981) Code of Practice for Liquid Penetrant Flow
Detection.
29 IS: 3757 (1985) High Strength Friction Grip Bolts
30 IS:4000 (1992) High Strength Friction Grip Bolts in Steel
Structures-Code of Practice
31 IS: 4353 (1967) Recommendations for Submerged Arc Welding of

323
210
 Mild Steel and Low Alloy Steel.
32 IS: 4923 Hollow Steel Sections for Structural Use
33 IS: 4943 (1968) Assessment of Butt and Fillet Fusion Welds in
Steel Sheet, Plate and Pipe.
34 IS: 5334 (1981) Code of Practice for Magnetic Particle Flow
Detection of Welds
35 IS: 5369, 5370 General Requirements for Plain Washers and Lock
Washers (1975)
36 IS: 5372 (1975) Taper Washers for Channels
37 IS: 6610 Heavy Washers for Steel Structures
38 IS: 5374 (1975) Taper Washers for I Beams.
39 IS: 6227 Code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding in
Tabular Sections
40 IS: 6623 (1985) Specification for High Strength Structural nuts
41 IS:6649 (1985) Specifications for hardening and tempering
washers for high strength structural nuts
42 IS: 6755 (1980) Double Coil Helical Spring Washers.
43 IS: 7215 (1974) Tolerances for Fabrication of Steel Structure.
44 IS: 7205, 7273, Safety Requirements for Steel Construction
45 IS: 7269, 7293 Handling of materials & Equipments for Safe
Working
46 IS: 7307 (Part I) Destructive & Non-Destructive Test of Welds
47 IS: 7318 (1974) (Part Approval Test for Welders When Welding
I) Procedure Approval is not required -fusion
Welding of Steel.
48 IS:8500 (1991) Structural steel -Micro alloyed (Medium and High
Strength Qualities)
49 IS: 8613 Wise Flux Combinations for Welded Joints
50 IS:8910 (1978) General requirements of Supply of Weldable
Structural Steel.
51 IS: 9595 (1980) Recommendations for Metal Arc Welding of
Carbon & Carbon- Manganese Steels
52 IS: 12843 Tolerances for Erection of Structural Steel Works
53 IRC:24 Section V Standard Specifications and code of
Practice for Road Bridges: Steel Road Bridges
54 IRC:22-1986 Standard specification for road bridges Section VI
Composite construction

324
211
 Paver tiles
Providing and fixing of exterior paving tiles in 'LONDON OLD BRICK' finish in approved shade in
sizes of 280mm x 194mm. The thickness of the tiles should range between 20 to 22 mm, allowing
variance of ± 5mm in accordance with IS: 1237-1980. The tiles should be made with M40 Grade
concrete mix design having ’43’ grade Portland cement, reinforced with Alkali Resistant glass fiber
and the pigmentation should be done with exterior grade synthetic inorganic iron oxide pigments
manufactured by ‘BAYFERROX (Germany)’. The pigmentation should be homogeneous and in
accordance with British standard BS EN 12878:1999. The other additives should be fine washed
graded quartz, super plasticizers and integrated water proofers agents and others. The tiles should be
produced with high vibratory technology and their concrete mix design compressive strength should be
of M-40 grade@28days. The top surface of the tiles should be treated with acrylic lacquer resulting in
top surface water absorption of less than 1% and water absorption of less than 8% by 24 hours
immersion method. The beds where tiles are to be laid should be clean, debris free, wet and mopped.
The tiles should be laid to 1:4:8 PCC Concreting with cement mortar of 20mm thickness made with
(1:3) Cement: Coarse Sand, adequate grooves should be maintained between 8-10mm using spacers
and pointing work to be done with 1:3 (Cement: Fine Sand) mix.

UniStone GRC Customized Screens

Providing and fixing Glass Reinforced Concrete (G.R.C) Screens in approved size, pattern, design,
shadeand thickness of 50mm on frame and design element in 30mm thick have weight approximately
between 3.5 – 4 Kg per Sq. Ft. and color of M/S UniStone make or equivalent. The above weight and
thickness is considering dimensions of screens up to 2133mm in height and 1219mm in width and
having at least 50% void space. The screens should be made from ‘53 grade’ White Portland Cement
manufactured by ‘JK Cement’ or equivalent, Quartz, Fine Silica Sand, Alkali Resistant Glass Fiber
manufactured by ‘N.E.G JAPAN’ or equivalent, Super Plasticizers manufactured by ‘BASF’ or
equivalent, Polymers manufactured by ‘BASF’ or equivalent and U.V resistant Synthetic inorganic
pigments should be used for pigmentation manufactured by ‘BAYFERROX (Germany)’ or equivalent.
The material casting should take place in FRP Molds. The fixing of Screens should be ‘Dry fixing’ i.e.
to be done with M.S Galvanized Clamps, fixtures and fasteners of Hilti / Fischer.

Aluminum system Windows

Providing and fixing Anodized System Aluminum three track Sliding glazed windows of TOSTEM
/ NCL ALLURO / ALUMIL make suitable for 2.4 KPA windload with 50mm visible aluminium
section width in the centre interlock. The system offered must be ride-in system with two glass
panels moving inside the channel without any external overhung along with a provision for mesh
panel on the third track moving within the channel without overhung. The extruded aluminium
sections should be made from Grade 6063-T5 & Anodized with Texguard coating. Corner
connection will be Butt joint with using Nano gaskets for sealing. All other major Accessories
should also be made by the same manufacturer. All Slider doors & windows will be centre locking
with integrated Anti-lift in slider panel. Only EPDM gaskets should be used in all meeting points
instead of Brush Pile. The outer frame Depth will be 72 mm +/- 3 mm The bottom frame must use
a subframe and no direct grouting will be permitted on bottom frame directly . All glasses will be 6
mm clear toughened.

325
212
The system should qualify Airtightness ASTM E283: 10.7m3/h.m2 at 75Pa of pressure, Water
tightness ASTM E300: 240 Pa, Wind load resistance ASTM E330: 2400 Pa.

Clay Cladding
Modified Clay Material
Supply of MCM Modified Clay Material ‐ MCM A Series Brick (087089) ‐ 240 x 60 mm of PHOMI
make, as per company standard dimension, pattern, color as specified, manufactured through unfired
patented (Ref: US patent 8505840 B2 & European Patent 2157139) manufacturing technology,
bonded together by using low heat temperature and having CE approval with the thermal conductivity
of 0.0590 W/M.K — EN 12667 (2001), thermal resistance of 0.0568 M2 K/W— EN 12667 (2001)
and Fire Insulation ‐ Class A— ASTM E84‐ 15.
The product should be patented from United States and Europe and with certifications by IGBC,
Singapore Green Label and China Green Building material. MCM Materials should be fixed with
suitable Cement/ Polymer/Epoxy based adhesive as per adhesive chart and substrate and per directions
of Engineer in-charge. Grouting should be done using filling and pointing method as per installation
drawing provided, and colour of the grout should be as per the architect’s specification depending on
the substrate and as per the direction of Engineer in-charge.

Stone Cladding
Flexible Stone Technical (Rough Granite finish)
Providing and Fixing Unistone Flexible Stone (FSBV) Rough Granite stone finish in
approved shade, dimensions 2800mm X 300mm, thickness 3 mm, weighing approximately between
0.25 – 0.315 Kg per Sq. Ft on existing cured smooth plastered surface of 1:3 (Cement: Coarse Sand)
substrate with Unistone ‘Ultimate’ Polymer Modified cementitious tile adhesive with all grooves
vertical and horizontal (minimum 4mm width) to be treated with approved shade Unistone ‘Super
Grout’ material, an exterior polymer modified cementitious grouting material. The approximate
coverage of tile adhesive shall range between 2 – 2.5 Sq. Ft per Kg. The FSBV Panel shall be casted
and produced in controlled production environment & shall emulate textures and appearance of
natural cut stone. The material shall comprise of polymerized clay, quartz, fine graded sieved silica
aggregates, fine graded coarse sand, binders and UV resistant exterior grade synthetic inorganic Iron
oxide pigments. The material shall be free from any Volatile Organic Compounds or Formaldehyde.
The manufactured panels shall have an inherent property of being resistant to UV
Rays, mild acids or conventional thinners and shall be sustainable for extreme saline, polluted, or
industrial fumes environments. The product shall weigh approx. 2.69 – 3.39 Kg / M2. The product
shall have superior flexibility for it to be cladded to any curved or rounded surface. All
application work shall take place in accordance to manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by
project in charge, at project site.

Clay Brick Cladding

Modified Clay Material ‐ Brick (A-Series)

Supply and fixing of MCM Modified Clay Material ‐ MCM A Series Brick ‐ 240 x 60 mm of PHOMI
make, as per company standard dimension, pattern, colour as specified, manufactured through unfired
patented (Ref: US patent 8505840 B2 & European Patent 2157139) manufacturing technology,
bonded together by using low heat temperature and having CE approval with the thermal conductivity
of 0.0590 W/M.K — EN 12667 (2001), thermal resistance of 0.0568 M2 K/W— EN 12667 (2001)
326
213
and Fire Insulation ‐ Class A— ASTM E84‐ 15.
The product should be patented from United States and Europe and with certifications by IGBC,
Singapore Green Label and China Green Building material. MCM Materials should be fixed with
suitable Cement/ Polymer/Epoxy based adhesive as per adhesive chart and substrate and per directions
of Engineer in-charge. Grouting should be done using filling and pointing method as per installation
drawing provided, and colour of the grout should be as per the architect’s specification depending on
the substrate and as per the direction of Engineer in-charge.

Modified Clay Material ‐ Slate Stone

Supply of MCM Modified Clay Material ‐ MCM Slate Sunnye and Vocanoe ‐ 1200 x 600 mm ,
thickness 2.5mm to 3mm, as per company standard dimension, pattern, colour as specified,
manufactured through unfired patented (Ref: US patent 8505840 B2 & European Patent
2157139) manufacturing technology, bonded together by using low heat temperature and
having CE approval with the thermal conductivity of 0.0590 W/M.K — EN 12667 (2001),
thermal resistance of 0.0568 M2 K/W— EN 12667 (2001) and Fire Insulation ‐ Class A—
ASTM E84‐ 15.

The product should be patented from United States and Europe and with certifications by
IGBC, Singapore Green Label and China Green Building material. MCM Materials should be
fixed with suitable Cement/ Polymer/Epoxy based adhesive as per adhesive chart and
substrate and per directions of Engineer in-charge. Grouting should be done using filling and
pointing method as per installation drawing provided, and colour of the grout should be as per
the architect’s specification depending on the substrate and as per the direction of Engineer
in-charge.

Metal False Ceiling (8mm & 16mm groove)

Supply of Schepper® makes 84C Plain Panel formed out of 0.50mm TCT Galvalume with
8mm/ 16mm groove between two panels acting as False Ceiling with Plain/ Wooden Powder
Coating on Visible Surfaces of Panels to enhance the interior of a building and supporting
structure to be coated black.
Carrier: 20 mm wide at the bottom x 45 mm deep formed out of 0.60 mm thick galvanized
steel black Powder Coated with protruding ears to hold the panels in a module of centre‐to‐
centre 68mm/ 76mm.
Gi rod 4 mm shall be fixed on Anchor Fastener into the slab at distance, not more than 1.2 mtr.
center-to-center on which will be laid with corrosion proof ss clip and on this rigid structure
carrier shall be fixed horizontally at a distance of 1 mtr. To 1.2 mtr. center-to-center. The
panel shall be clipped in carriers. Customized Angles shall be fixed on the periphery of the
wall.

60C Metal False Ceiling (8mm & 16mm groove)

Supply of Plain Panel formed out of 0.50mm TCT Galvalume with 8mm/ 16mm groove
between two panels acting as False Ceiling with Plain/ Wooden Powder Coating on Visible

327
214
Surfaces of Panels to enhance the interior of a building and supporting structure to be coated
black.
Carrier: 20 mm wide at the bottom x 45 mm deep formed out of 0.60 mm thick galvanized
steel black Powder Coated with protruding ears to hold the panels in a module of centre-to-
centre 68mm/ 76mm.
Gi rod 4 mm shall be fixed on Anchor Fastener into the slab at distance, not more than 1.2 mtr.
centre-to-centre on which will be laid with corrosion proof ss clip and on this rigid structure
carrier shall be fixed horizontally at a distance of 1 mtr. To 1.2 mtr. centre-to-centre. The
panel shall be clipped in carriers. Customised Angles shall be fixed on the periphery of the
wall.

METAL DOOR
Fire Doors (Double / Single Leaf) :
Providing and fixing 120 minutes of metal fire rated doors with vision panel of size
300X400mm as per IS 3614 part-2:1992 for stability and integrity. Pressed Galvanized steel
confirming to IS 277 specifications. Door tested & approved in ARAI (Automotive Research
Association of India, Pune) for maximum rating of 2hrs. Door frame shall be Double rebate
profile of size 139 x 57 mm made out of 1.20mm minimum thick galvanized steel sheet
depends on single & double leaf door. There should be bottom membrane in the frame for
proper alignment. Provision should be kept for grouting with cement & sand slurry necessary
for fire doors on the clear masonry opening. Door leaf should be 43mm thick fully flush
double skin door. Door leaf shall be manufactured from 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel sheet
depends on single or double leaf door. The internal construction of the door should be rigid
reinforcement pads for receiving appropriate hardware. The infill material shall be resin
bonded honeycomb core. All doors shall be factory prepared for receiving appropriate
hardware and provided with necessary reinforcement for hinges, Mortise locks with handle,
and door closers. single panic bar painting system will be powder coating finished. The cost
includes all materials, labour, conveyance, scaffolding, T&P etc. complete in all respect as per
direction of EIC.

Wood finish steel Doors (Single Leaf) :

Supply and fixing of 46mm thick GI doors and frame conforming to IS 277 galvanized
plain skin passed sheets of 0.8 mm in shutter and 1.2 mm in frame with minimum 120 gsm
zinc coating with profile dimension of 100mmX58mm. Frame filled with Polyurethane
foam and shutter duly filled with Honeycomb and both coated with minimum 60 microns
of WOOD FINISH powder coating. Accessories will be provided with doors. Hinges,
Mortise lock, Tower Bolt & Door Stopper.

Wood finish steel Doors (Double Leaf) :

Supply and fixing of 46mm thick GI doors and frame conforming to IS 277 galvanized plain
skin passed sheets of 0.8 mm in shutter and 1.2 mm in frame with minimum 120 gsm zinc
coating with profile dimension of 100mmX58mm. Frame filled with Polyurethane foam and
shutter duly filled with Honeycomb and both coated with minimum 60 microns of WOOD
328
215
FINISH powder coating. Accessories will be provided with doors. Hinges, Mortise lock,
Tower Bolt & Door Stopper Door Closer 2sets.

Fire Stop
Wall Opening(min 100mm wall thickness)
Wall opening

Fire barrier for sealing of wall openings application with Water based Hybrid Firestopping
System which shall have both ablative and intumesent properties shall be used in combination
with Mineral Wool Board tested in accordance to EN 1366-3 or BS 476 standards and
capable of providing a fire resistance for 120 min. The Product shall have a valid ETA and
shall be designed for use with cables, cable bundles, cable trays, combustible and non-
combustible pipes, to prevent the spread of smoke and fire.

The system shall be tested for a maximum opening size of 1000 mm width and 3000 mm
height and openings larger than this shall be done with the help of separation elements.

The mineral wool of 140 Kg/m3 shall be used as backing material and the thickness of coating
shall be as per the tested system of the manufacturer subjected to minimum 0.7 mm DFT
including 50mm on the perimeter of the mineralwool board overlapping on the wall on all 4
sides, sealed thoroughly on both the sides and identical services to be bunched. On the cable
trays, cable ladders (plates & flanges), metal pipes to be back coated minimum100 mm with a
dry film thickness of 1mm for 120 minutes fire rating.
The system shall be tested with the through penetrents and shall have a valid report.
Engineering Judgement based on the test report can be submitted for any openings which are
not tested.

Acrylic sealent to be provided around metal penetrants like ducts, pipes etc.
Work needs to be carried out by a trained agency only who shall have a valid training letter
from the manufacturer.

Rate shall be for doing the work on both sides of the wall and shall include both apply and
supply including labour cost.

Combustable Pipes

For PVC/ PE / PPH/ PPR Penetrations intumesent wrap shall be used as per the valid ETA
document to provide fire rating of 2 hours

Work needs to be carried out by a trained agency only who shall have a valid training letter
from the manufacturer.

Rate shall be for doing the work on both sides of the wall and shall include both apply and
supply including labour cost.

Floor Opening

Floor Opening

329
216
 Fire barrier for sealing of floor openings applying Gypsum/Cement basedSystem tested in
accordance with to EN 1366-3 or BS 476 standards and capable of providing a fire resistance for 120
minutes.
The system shall be tested with or without mineral wool system with a minimum thickness of
40 mm or as per test report (F & T / E & I rating of 120 minutes) with atleast one penetrant passing
through it.
For other penetrants a Engineering judgement has to be submitted based on the test report for
120 min of fire rating.

The instellation shall be done on the rebar mesh of 10 mm bars with spacing of 200 mm C/C
for load bearing along with a wire mesh to support rock wool. In case of Small penetrants only wire
mesh along with Z clips can be used to support rock wool. Rockwool with density of minimum 145
Kg/m3 shall be used with a thickness of 100mm on the top of witre mesh.
Chalk the perimeters joints between rockwool and floor-slab with Acrylic sealant.
Chalking of metal penetrants to be done where ever required.
Work needs to be carried out by a trained agency only who shall have a valid training letter
from the manufacturer.
Rate shall include both apply and supply including labour cost. and any other material being
used.

Combustable Pipes

For PVC/ PE / PPH/ PPR Penetrations intumesent wrap shall be used as per the valid ETA document
to provide fire rating of 2 hours

Work needs to be carried out by a trained agency only who shall have a valid training letter from the
manufacturer.

Rate shall include both apply and supply including labour cost.

Linear Joint

Top of the wall joint

Fire barrier system for the linear joint formed between top of wall and slab/beam/ roof
bottom shall be tested as per EN 1366/BS 476 standard and shall have a valid test report for
the same. The product shall be classified in class E with respet to its reaction to fire as per EN
13501
The acrylic sealent shall be tested for 120 minutes of fire rating along with movement
capabality up to 7.5%. The product shall be tested for gap width up to100mm.

The application for the acrylic sealent shall be done with Engineering judgement to
provide integrity and insulation for 120 minutes.
Work needs to be carried out by a trained agency only who shall have a valid training
letter from the manufacturer.
Rate shall be for doing the work on both sides of the wall considering gap width of 25
mm and shall include both apply and supply including labour cost.

Vertical Joint between walls or Column and a wall

330
217
Fire barrier system for the linear joint formed between wall to wall or Column to wall shall be
tested as per EN 1366/BS 476 standard and shall have a valid test report for the same. The
product shall be classified in class E with respet to its reaction to fire as per EN 13501
The acrylic sealent shall be tested for 120 minutes of fire rating along with movement
capabality up to 7.5%. The product shall be tested for gap width up to100mm.

The application for the acrylic sealent shall be done with Engineering judgement to provide
intigrity and insulation for 120 minutes.

Work needs to be carried out by a trained agency only who shall have a valid training letter
from the manufacturer.

Rate shall be for doing the work on both sides of the wall considering gap width of 25 mm
and shall include both apply and supply including labour cost.

Spandrel wall

Gap in the curtain wall

The gap in the curtain wall needs to be closed with a fire rated material Promaseal A spray
such that the joint has a fire rating of 120 minutes. The product shall be tested as per EN
1366/ BS 476/ASTM and product shall confirm to use in category Y1. The product shall also
have reaction class E as per EN 13501. The product shall be tested for 30% movement
capabality and shall have applied with a minimum DFT of 1mm or as per the manufacturers'
specification.
The product shall be coated on the rock wool of minimum density of 64Kg/m3. the mineral
wool shall be compressed to minimum 40 % during instalation so as to accomodate the
movement capabality of 30%. The rockwool shall be supported with the help of Z clamps to
keep it in place.
The manufacturer shall provide a test certificate or Engineering Judgement based on a tested
system for the execution of the job.

Anchoring
Post installed Rebar

Chemical rebaring for post installed rebar from ø 8mm to ø 40mm

The post installed rebaring shall be done with Wuerth PE 510/Wuerth PE 1000/ Hilti
RE 500V3/Ripple R Fix chemical. The chemical shall be classified as pure epoxy and shall
have valid ETA approval for post installed Rebarring application. The chemical shall be
manufactured in a way to have a shelf life in Excess of 18 months and shall come with airtight
cap for reusability. The chemical shall come in hard catradge foil so that the storage and
331
218
transit damages can be avoided.
The drill holes shall be properly cleaned both by brushing and compressed air before
injecting the chemical.
The product shall be 2 component styrene -free pure epoxy which shall be used as per
the manufacturers' specification.
The rates shall be qouted for 20D including apply (drilling of hole, cleaning of hole,
labour cost etc.) and supply of chemical and the work shall be carried out as per the design
and instruction from the engineer incharge. ( rebar to be in the scope of civil contractor).The
Indian Subsideray of the manufacturing company shall have ISO 9001 certificate

Chemical Anchoring

Chemical anchoring From M8 to M27

Chemical Anchor Fasteners:
Providing and supplying pure epoxy injection adhesive PE 510/PE 1000/RE 500V3/Ripple R
fix of Wurth/Hilti make with 5.8/8.8 grade threaded Rod. The Chemical shall be approved as
well as tested as per ETAG (Part 1 to 5), Fire performance, cracked concrete applications,
tested for service temperature of -40 deg. C to +80 deg. C. All the Anchoring connections to
be designed as per guidelines of EN 1992-4 & the report to be submitted to the EIC / design
engineer for approval.
The chemical shall be manufactured in a way to have a shelf life in Excess of 18 months and
shall come with airtight cap for reusability.The chemical shall come in hard catradge foil so
that the storage and transit damages can be avoided.
The drill holes shall be properly cleaned both by brushing and compressed air before injecting
the chemical.
The product shall be 2 component styrene -free pure epoxy which shall be used as per the
manufacturers' specification. Filling resin and hardener using serrated nozzle, to eliminate
mixing error and optimum use of chemical while insallation, The rates to include all the
preparations which needs to be done like marking, scafolding, safety,cleaning the area after
the work is done, all complete, the anchors will be measured in the relevant tender item All
instructions as per EIC.The Indian Subsideray of the manufacturing company shall have ISO
9001 certificate

Mechanical Anchoring

Mechanical anchoring From M8 to M27

Mechanical Anchor Fasteners:

Supplying, drilling/cleaning of hole and fixing of Wurth/ Hilti Torque Controlled
Expansion Anchor W-FAZ/FAZ Pro, of sizes ranging from M8 to M27 anchors. The Anchor
should possess ETA certificate and should be pre-assembled with a galvanized bolt. The
anchor should be approved for use in Cracked Concrete. Anchor must be tested and approved
as per Seismic C1 and C2 Category of TR045. ETA to have Fire Resistance values and shall
be fixed at right embedment depth and activated using calibrated torque wrench to ensure
332
219
adequate torque as per manufacture’s torque tolerance published in ETA . Design of Anchor
should be done as per ETAG 001 Annex C / EN 1992-4 and site conditions as provided by
structural consultant and the report to be submitted to the project manager and design engineer
for approval. The rates to include all the preparations which needs to be done like marking,
scafolding, safety,cleaning the area after the work is done, all complete. The Indian
Subsideray of the manufacturing company shall have ISO 9001 certificate.

Metal Ceiling & façade

OPEN CELL SIZE 100MM

Supply & Fixing Open cell ceiling with cell size of 85mm made out of 0.3mm thick
GMS. The assembled cell ceiling panels shall be in size of 595x1190 made out of blades in
9mm (W) x 40mm (H). The assembled cell ceiling panels are then clipped into U-94 carriers
in GMS, coated in black enamelled finished at 1190mm c.c. Wire clips shall hold the cell
ceiling panels into the U-94 carriers. Once the U-94 carriers are installed then primary angles
made out of GMS, type U1040 are cross connected to the U-94 carriers at 1200mm c.c. for
lateral bracing The whole ceiling shall be suspended by M6 threaded rods installed 1200mm
c.c. All panel modules must be hinge able through wire clips. The panels are fully downward
demountable / hinged from the proprietary U 94 carrier section using C 94 spring panels. The
system should be in accordance with Material class A2-s1, d0 according to EN 13501-01
“non-combustible”, as per the Direction of Arch-in-charge. The system will meet fire
retardant standards of BS 476: Part 6 & Part 7. Tolerance.
Finish: Powder coated to RAL finish

MULTIPERFORATED
Supply & Fixing of Hook on custom made perforated linear ceiling System. The
Panels are made to 1200-mm(L)x600mm(W) manufactured out of minimum 0.6mm thick
GMS, powder coated in selected RAL finish with minimum 80 microns paint thickness.
Panels to be custom perforated. All panels are hooked onto a secondary grid known as U1005
installed at shorter side of the panel to ensure individual demounting of panels for easy
accessibility of services. A primary grid of perforated L- Angle in 30x30x1.2mm thick
galvanized steel known as U1040 is installed perpendicularly to hook on profiles at maximum
centers at 1200mm. The entire ceiling shall be suspended with M6 threaded rod using Hilti
M6 fastener with minimum load of at least 0.5kn per anchor. The suspension system shall be
as per manufacturer specification. Supporting system shall be fully concealed in accordance
with TIAM standards and tolerance according to DIN EN 13964 The panels shall include the
site cutting / making openings for services e.g. lights for information boards, smoke detectors,
speakers, diffusers, grills etc. Manufacturing shall be quality controlled as per ISO 9001:2015
approved by SIS. Manufacturer shall use officially approved anchor fasteners as per the
requirement of DIN. All ceiling shall be LEAD certified by IGBC. Measurement to be done
on edge to edge basis without any deductions for AC grills or any other services integrated
within the false ceilings. Manufacturer shall have the fully automatic powder coating system
with power and free conveyorize 3mtr/minute capacity. Powder coating plant shall be
equipped with latest modern technology with fully automatic inline Pre-treatment using nano
technology, Inline automatic water Drying system after pretreatment.
Finish: Electrostatically powder coated to RAL finish with minimum 80 microns
coating thickness, gloss rate 20% as per EN 13964/ 10152/10346

333
220
300 C GI PLAIN
Supply and fixing of GI Plain Panel Ceiling manufactured by as per approved RAL
shade by architect, consisting of panels 300 mm wide x 31mm deep GI Perforated panel
desired length up to 6 mtr, Panel Shall be fabricated 0.50mm thick Roll formed with good
Roll Forming characteristics with beveled edges, with 50-60 micron powder coating, Powder
coating test result should pass, Pencil hardness ASTM D3363-05, Scratch resistance ISO
1518-1/ SIS 83 91 17, Impact resistance ASTM D2794, Resistance to neutral salt spray
ASTM B117, Resistance to humid atmospheres ISO 6270-2, Adhesion ISO 2409,
Two sides of each panel to be raised and piped and stopped / demounting of individual
panel. Panel shall be clipped to a baked enameled GI Panel Carrier of 34.5mm wide x 63mm
Deep made of 0.6mm thick in standard lengths of 5mtrs made Black colour with cut outs to
hold the panels in a module of 300mm at a distance of 1.2mtrs c/c. The panel carrier shall be
suspended by means of G.I. suspension rod 4mm diameter and galvanized spring clip at a
distance of 1.5 mtr. c/c. Mode of Measurements: Measurements shall be wall to wall without
deductions for Lights, diffusers, columns etc.

75C GIPLAIN
Supply & Fixing of 75 C ceiling System, GI finish Powder Coated panel false ceiling
system Round edge panels, 75mm wide x 15mm deep x length upto 5mtr. Made out of 0.5mm
thick GI sheet . The top coat of panel shall RAL finish powder coated. The panels shall be
powder coated with 50-60 micron powder coating, Powder coating test result should pass,
Pencil hardness ASTM D3363-05, Scratch resistance ISO 1518-1/ SIS 83 91 17, Impact
resistance ASTM D2794, Resistance to neutral salt spray ASTM B117, Resistance to humid
atmospheres ISO 6270-2, Adhesion ISO 24on external surface only. The panel shall be fixed
on GI carriers made of 0.5 mm thick GI sheet. Carrier with black paint having cut out to hold
on panel in a module of 75mm closed.

300X1200 CLIP PLAIN

Supply & Instalation of GI Clip in Metal Ceiling System of 300x1200 mm module
which includes providing and fixing wall angle of size 20x20 mm made of 0.4 mm thick pre
painted steel along the perimeter of the room with help of nylon sleeves and wooden screws at
300 mm centre to centre, suspending the main C carrier of size 10x50x10 mm made of G.I
steel 0.7 mm thick from the soffit with help of soffit cleat 37x27x25x1.6 mm, rawl plugs of
size 38x12 mm and C carrier suspension clip and main carrier bracket at 1200 mm c/c. Clip in
profile main runner having height of 40 mm and width of 19 mm made of GI steel 0.5 mm
thick is then fixed to the main C carrier and in direction perpendicular to it at 600 mm centres
with help of suspension brackets & with L profile size of 24x24x0.40mm. Wherever the main
C carrier and Clip in Profile have to join, C carrier and Clip in Profile connectors have to be
used, fixing with clip in tiles into Clip in Profile with : GI Metal Ceiling Clip in plain
Beveled edge global white color tiles of size 300x1200 made out of 0.5 mm thick Galvanized
Sheet and with RAL finish 60-80-microns powder coating.

300X1200MM LAYIN PERFORATED

. Providing tiled false ceiling of approved material of 300 x1200mm in true horizontal
level, suspended on inter locking matal gid of hot dipped galvanized steel sections (galvanized
334
221
@ 120 grams/sqmtr, both side inclusive) consisting of main "T" runner with suitably spaced
joints to get required length and of size 24x38mm made from 0.30mm thick (minimum) sheet,
spaced at 1200mm centre to centre and cross "T" of size 24x25 mm made of 0.30 mm thick
(minimum) sheet, 1200 mm long spaced between main "T" at 600mm centre to centre to form
a grid of 1200 x 600 mm and secondary cross "T" of length 600 mm and size 24x25 mm made
of 0.30 mm thick (minimum) and wall angle of size 24x24x0.3mm and laying false ceiling
tiles of approved texture in the grid including, required cutting/making, opening for services
like diffusers, grills, light fittings, fixtures, smoke detectors etc. Main "T" runners to be
suspended from ceiling using GI slotted cleats of size 37 x 25 x 1.6 mm fixed to ceiling with
12.5mm dia and 50mm long dash fasteners, 8mm GI adjustable rod with galvanized butterfly
level clips of size 85x30x0.8mm spaced at 1200 mm center to center along main T, bottom
exposed width of 24 mm of all T-sections shall be pre-painted with polyester paint, all
complete for all heights as per specifications, drawings and as directed by Engineer-in-
charge.GI Metal Ceiling Lay in perforated Tegular edge global white colour tiles of size
300x1200 mm, and 0.5 mm thick with 8 mm drop; made of GI sheet having galvanizing of
100gms/sqmtr (both side inclusive) and 20% perforation area with 1.8 mm dia holes and
having NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of 0.5, electro statically polyester powder coated
of thickness 60 microns (minimum), including factory painted after bending and perforation,
and backed with a black Glass fiber acoustical fleece.

Supply & fixing Tubeline system comprising special extruded aluminium tubular
sections( 50mm Dia X 1.60mm thick) located with a precision formed U1040 Slotted Angle
Carrier sec- tion(30x30x1.5mm thk GMS powder coated), slots at precise 175 mm centre to
centre in accordance as per the design requirement .Tubes shall be connected in length by
dedicated splice connector sections and se- curely locked into positions in the carrier sections
with a specialist locking spring clip device. Tubes & carrier sections shall be finished to
polyester powder coating minimum 60 microns, electro-statically applied as per the approved
color with the matching end caps used to close off the tub- ular sections. The tubular sections
shall be specialist extruded AA 6063 as per the requirement. The suspension system is
Precisian made ,pre slot- ted galvanized steel U1040 angle carrier sections positioned at
1200mm c/c ,M6 hangers suspended from structural soffit at 1200mm centre. Tubeline
sections shall be positioned at precise 175mm centres by posi- tioning each leg securely
locked into place with nuts and bolts at ap- proved centers .Products must be fully tested in
accordance with BS476 parts 6 & 7 with regard to fire propagation and surface spread of
flame and virtue of their performance be designed Class O in accordance with U.K Building
regulations.

Supply & fixing of 2mm Thick Aluminium Mesh Panel with 40% open area with
10mm wide mesh, minimum 2mm thick aluminium. Minimum 40mm Border, Screw Fix to
Secondary Frame using SS Screws, Panel & Secondary Frame should be Powder coated to
External Grade.

BAFFLE CEILING
Supply & Fixing of Baffle ceiling system comprises of 30 mm x 100 mm (30 mm
width & 100 mm Height) U Shape panels installed at 150mm C/C spacing between baffles.
Panels shall be made of 0.5 mm thick galvanized steel with polyester powder coating 0f 60
microns and length up to 5000 mm. Panel shall be high corrosion resistance and good color
stability.Panels are fixed on to roll formed C Profile 20 mm wide x 40 mm deep out of 0.80
mm G.I sheet powder coated with cutouts to hold the panels in module design by Architect.
Profile are suspended from the roof or truss by 4 mm dia. galvanized steel wire rod hanger
335
222
with special height adjustment suspension clip at max. 1200 mm c/c. Hangers are fixed to the
roof by ‘J’ hooks or ceiling brackets and nylon inserts. Panels are factory cut in lengths up to
maximum 3.6 m to suit site dimensions or shop drawings. Top cap and side cap are used to
cover the edges of the panels.

75C
Supply & Fixing of 75 C ceiling System, GI finish Powder Coated panel false ceiling
system Round edge panels, 75mm wide x 15mm deep x length upto 5mtr. Made out of 0.5mm
thick GI sheet . The top coat of panel shall RAL finish powder coated. The panels shall be
powder coated with 50-60 micron powder coating, Powder coating test result should pass,
Pencil hardness ASTM D3363-05, Scratch resistance ISO 1518-1/ SIS 83 91 17, Impact
resistance ASTM D2794, Resistance to neutral salt spray ASTM B117, Resistance to humid
atmospheres ISO 6270-2, Adhesion ISO 24on external surface only. The panel shall be fixed
on GI carriers made of 0.5 mm thick GI sheet. Carrier with black paint having cut out to hold
on panel in a module of 75mm closed.

Supply & fixing Tubeline system comprising special extruded aluminium tubular
sections( 50mm Dia X 1.60mm thick) located with a precision formed U1040 Slotted Angle
Carrier sec- tion(30x30x1.5mm thk GMS powder coated), slots at precise 175 mm centre to
centre in accordance as per the design requirement .Tubes shall be connected in length by
dedicated splice connector sections and se- curely locked into positions in the carrier sections
with a specialist locking spring clip device. Tubes & carrier sections shall be finished to
polyester powder coating minimum 60 microns, electro-statically applied as per the approved
color with the matching end caps used to close off the tub- ular sections. The tubular sections
shall be specialist extruded AA 6063 as per the requirement. The suspension system is
Precisian made ,pre slot- ted galvanized steel U1040 angle carrier sections positioned at
1200mm c/c ,M6 hangers suspended from structural soffit at 1200mm centre. Tubeline
sections shall be positioned at precise 175mm centres by posi- tioning each leg securely
locked into place with nuts and bolts at ap- proved centers .Products must be fully tested in
accordance with BS476 parts 6 & 7 with regard to fire propagation and surface spread of
flame and virtue of their performance be designed Class O in accordance with U.K Building
regulations.

Design, Supply and Install Extruded aluminum coated fin system custom designed to
with stand the design wind pressure of 120 kg/sq.mtr confirming to IS -875 part III. (The
system must pass the proof test at 1.5 times design wind pressure i.e.180 kg/sq.mtr without
any failure) , Bracketing system with MS hot dip galvanized bracket system designed to
accommodate three dimensional movements with serrations in bracket and washers, SS 316
grade fasteners and anchor bolts of approved make, nylon separators to prevent bi-metallic
contacts, 2.0 mm thk aluminium trims and flashings to seal the gaps between curtain wall and
the building structure all complete required to perform as per specification and drawing in
conjunction with BOQ. The system design shall be based on system and design that shall
include MS horizontal load bearing coated member running continously at the slab periphery,
and the fins installed with custom brackets on and below . The system shall incorporate details
required to fix top flashing as shown in perspective with termination detail. The system shall
be designed considering surface temperatures of 80-90 deg Cel and temperature differential of
25 deg cel without creating excess stress in the system. The system shall be designed of floor
height units spanning between the floors with slab/steel mounted bracket with provision to
accommodate movement at all floor levels and at every grid panels horizontally. The system
336
223
performance test shall be mandatory to verify the design performance meeting the requirement
as per technical specification including all material tests. The price shall be seperately shown
in the BOQ. The design to accommodate building movements, thermal expansions and the
seismic movementsshould have performaning air seal and water seal alongwith fulfilling
windload serviceability requirement . Performance Requirements:
1. Wind Loads: Completed system shall withstand wind pressure loads normal to
wall plane indicated above.
2. Deflection: Maximum allowable deflection in any member when tested in
accordance with AAMA Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
a. For spans up to and including 4.1m deflection shall be limited to L/175.MS
horizontal load bearing coated member running continously at the slab periphery, grouted /
fastened into slab face surface .Bracketing system designed to accommodate three
dimensional movements with serrations in bracket and serrated washers, SS 316 grade
fasteners and anchor bolts of approved make,
nylon separators to prevent bi-metallic contacts, mechanism to be able to maintain line
and level .The extruded aluminium sections of Alloy 6063 T5 / T6 and tolerances confirming
to DIN standard from approved extruder. The structual profiles shall have minimum 2mm
wall thickness. All the external visible surfaces shall have minimum 60-80 microns Super
durable powder coating finish in solid color or as per
architect approval. The non visible aluminium surfaces shall have minimum
chromadizing treatment. Quote rate for complete louver system as mentioned above under
item (a) , fin of depth 650mm

Design, Supply and Install Extruded aluminum coated fin system custom designed to
with stand the design wind pressure of 120 kg/sq.mtr confirming to IS -875 part III. (The
system must pass the proof test at 1.5 times design wind pressure i.e.180 kg/sq.mtr without
any failure) , Bracketing system with MS hot dip galvanized bracket system designed to
accommodate three dimensional movements with serrations in bracket and washers, SS 316
grade fasteners and anchor bolts of approved make, nylon separators to prevent bi-metallic
contacts, 2.0 mm thk aluminium trims and flashings to seal the gaps between curtain wall and
the building structure all complete required to perform as per specification and drawing in
conjunction with BOQ.

The system design shall be based on system and design that shall include MS
horizontal load bearing coated member running continously at the slab periphery, and the fins
installed with custom brackets on and below . The system shall incorporate details required to
fix top flashing as shown in perspective with termination detail. The system shall be designed
considering surface temperatures of 80-90 deg Cel and temperature differential of 25 deg cel
without creating excess stress in the system. The system shall be designed of floor height units
spanning between the floors with slab/steel mounted bracket with provision to accommodate
movement at all floor levels and at every grid panels horizontally. The system performance
test shall be mandatory to verify the design performance meeting the requirement as per
technical specification including all material tests. The price shall be seperately shown in the
BOQ. The design to accommodate building movements, thermal expansions and the seismic
movementsshould have performaning air seal and water seal alongwith fulfilling windload
serviceability requirement . Performance Requirements:
1. Wind Loads: Completed system shall withstand wind pressure loads normal to
wall plane indicated above.
2. Deflection: Maximum allowable deflection in any member when tested in
337
224
accordance with AAMA Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
a. For spans up to and including 4.1m deflection shall be limited to L/175

MS horizontal load bearing coated member running continously at the slab periphery,
grouted / fastened into slab face surface .Bracketing system designed to accommodate three
dimensional movements with serrations in bracket and serrated washers, SS 316 grade
fasteners and anchor bolts of approved make, nylon separators to prevent bi-metallic contacts,
mechanism to be able to maintain line and level

The extruded aluminium sections of Alloy 6063 T5 / T6 and tolerances confirming to

DIN standard from approved extruder. The structual profiles shall have minimum 2mm wall
thickness. All the external visible surfaces shall have minimum 60-80 microns Super durable
powder coating finish in solid color or as per architect approval. The non visible aluminium
surfaces shall have minimum chromadizing treatment.

Aluminium Customised multiperforated sheet for facade with an open area of more
than 50% and to the flare [5mm] of the perforation pattern [RV-50-40] the panel has a three-
dimensional visual effect and hides the insight into the plenum. Bypassing the perforation, the
elements are installed with a circumferential 1 mm joint, thus compensating tolerances in x
and y direction. panel size as per project specific 1200mm wide x 1375mm high x minimum
2.0mm thick Aluminium is perforated with 60mm deep drawn holes .The substructure
consists of Cleats minimum 2.0mm thick GMS powder coated to external grade. Subfrme of
size 40x40x1.5mm Thick rectngular hollow section to be fized vertically shall not be visible
after the installation of perforated aluminium panel. The subframe should be powder coated to
external grade powder with no less than 120mm mincron of coating thickness on all sides.
The spacing of the grid profile is according to the requirements of DIN EN 13964. On profiles
angles, Z-band raster as secondary profiles are bolted on by means of C channel hanger
bracket with M6 bolts. Only construction parts approved by the manufacturer may be used.
Provide necessary supports, provisions as per the architects / PM’s Instructions. Tolerances
according to TAIM, DIN EN 13964 and quality controlled to ISO 9001:2008 approved by
TUV.Finish of sheet is in RAL solid colour exyerior grade powder coated with minimum 60-
80 microns paint thickness.

Supply & fixing Tubeline system comprising special extruded aluminium tubular
sections( 50mm Dia X 1.60mm thick) located with a precision formed U1040 Slotted Angle
Carrier sec- tion(30x30x1.5mm thk GMS powder coated), slots at precise 175 mm centre to
centre in accordance as per the design requirement .Tubes shall be connected in length by
dedicated splice connector sections and se- curely locked into positions in the carrier sections
with a specialist locking spring clip device. Tubes & carrier sections shall be finished to
polyester powder coating minimum 60 microns, electro-statically applied as per the approved
color with the matching end caps used to close off the tub- ular sections. The tubular sections
shall be specialist extruded AA 6063 as per the requirement. The suspension system is
Precisian made ,pre slot- ted galvanized steel U1040 angle carrier sections positioned at
1200mm c/c ,M6 hangers suspended from structural soffit at 1200mm centre. Tubeline
sections shall be positioned at precise 175mm centres by posi- tioning each leg securely
locked into place with nuts and bolts at ap- proved centers .Products must be fully tested in
accordance with BS476 parts 6 & 7 with regard to fire propagation and surface spread of
338
225
flame and virtue of their performance be designed Class O in accordance with U.K Building
regulations.

Supply & fixing of 2mm Thick Aluminium Mesh Panel with 40% open area with
10mm wide mesh, minimum 2mm thick aluminium. Minimum 40mm Border, Screw Fix to
Secondary Frame using SS Screws, Panel & Secondary Frame should be Powder coated to
External Grade.The substructure consists of Cleats minimum 2.0mm thick GMS powder
coated to external grade. Subfrme of size 40x40x1.5mm Thick rectngular hollow section to be
fized vertically shall not be visible after the installation of perforated aluminium panel. The
subframe should be powder coated to external grade powder with no less than 120mm
mincron of coating thickness on all sides. The spacing of the grid profile is according to the
requirements of DIN EN 13964. On profiles angles, Z-band raster as secondary profiles are
bolted on by means of C channel hanger bracket with M6 bolts. Only construction parts
approved by the manufacturer may be used. Provide necessary supports, provisions as per the
architects / PM’s Instructions. Tolerances according to TAIM, DIN EN 13964 and quality
controlled to ISO 9001:2008 approved by TUV.Finish of sheet is in RAL solid colour
exyerior grade powder coated with minimum 60-80 microns paint thickness.

ACOUSTIC WORK

WALL PANELING WITH WOODEN SLAT HDF PLANK

Supply & installation of wall paneling of slats surco high density fiberboard made out
of pure pinewood particles , Fire Resistance - Pink in colour core with test FR Grade BS
476 part 5 , BS 476 part 6 , BS 476 part 7 ISO 1182 ASTM E662 Smoke Density - Melamine
laminated finish, perforated wooden grooved HDF slats L16-2 (2 mm grooves @ 8 mm
centers),tongue-groove edge for a seamless look of lineal dimension size 128 mm x 2440 mm
x 16 mm thick Teak Teca / Haya Beech Shade having density 700 Kg /m3, weight -9
Kgs/m2 ,2mm Front Side Sound Abstroctor &1076 Distractor Hole nonwoven acoustic to be
pasted on slats surco is to be installed by using GI strut system. The technical parameters are
as follows Core Variants - Fiberboard, Climate (OC RH) – 50, 70 Light reflectance –
75%,Green (RC %) – 25, Hygiene (VoC, Clean room) – Low, Class 1, NRC-0.85,Strength,
Load capacity (Kg) - Anti sag, Ball-Impact. The concealed wall paneling system shall include
GI Wall channel (WC25) having thickness 0.45mm, length 3600mm, unequal flanges of 15 &
20mm and web of 25mm should be fixed along the perimeters of the wall with nylon sleeves
and suitable fasteners at every 300mm centers. Then fixed Main channels (MC45) having
thickness 0.8mm, length 3600mm, equal flanges of 15mm and web 45mm from the side wall
& fixed at every 1200mm centers with GI cross channel(CC25) having thickness 0.45mm,
length 3600mm, knurled web 35mm, depth of 25mm and equal flanges 9.5mm is fastened to
the Main channel in the direction perpendicular to the Main Channel at every 600mm centers.
The framework will maintain 50 / 75 mm gap from the walls. Now clad the wooden Anatone
slats surco on the CC 18 with the help of center & edge clips to get better locking of slats. The
tongue & groove are to be properly aligned to get flush look . Synth Anuton poly fiber PF 5 x
50 wool of 500 gsm to be filled between the horizontal & vertical studs as in filler with the
help of wire / stick 7 adhesive. Test certificate of the use products shall be submitted after
procurement of materials.

GLASSFIBER TILES CEILING IN GRID SUBTEX NUBBY STEP EDGE

339
226
Supply and Installation of Uno Panel 15 mm glassfiber steppe edge Glass fibre core ceiling
tile of size 595 x 595 x 15mm having all edges encapsulated with chemical treated paint &
having density 100-120 Kgs/ m3, weight 1.5 - 3.0 kg/m2 which is suspended by using 0.3mm
thick and 15 mm wide pre coated metal T15/24 grid system. The technical parameters are as
follows :Core - Glassfibre, Fire – Class 1 & P , Acoustics – NRC 0.95,Climate (OC RH) – 40,
95,Termite resistance ,Light reflectance – 85 %,Green (RC %) – 35, Hygiene (VoC, Clean
room) – Low, Class 3 Strength, Load capacity (Kg) - Antisag. The T15/24 Grid system of
600 x 600 mm module shall include wall angle(WA15) with unequal flanges of size 14 x 20
x3000mm wide, length 3000mm, 0.43 mm thick fixed along the perimeter of wall with the
help of nylon sleeves and suitable fasteners at 300mm centers. Then suspend the Main
T15(MT15W36) having flange width 15mm /24 mm , height 32/38 mm and length 3600mm
thickness 0.30 mm from the soffit with help of soffit cleat and wire at 1200mm c/c. Cross T15
(CT15W12) with flange width 15 mm, height 32 mm and length 1200 mm is then interlocked
into the pre-cut slots in the Main T15 at 600mm centers in the direction perpendicular to the
Main T15. Finally Cross T15 (CT15W06) having flange width 15 mm, height 32mm and
length 600mm are then interlocked into the pre cut slots in the 1200 mm Cross T15 at
1200mm centers and in direction parallel to the Main T15. Anatone Subtex Nubby steppe
edge of size 595 x 595 x 15mm thick shall be placed into the grid size of 600 x 600 mm.
Ensure arrow marks behind subtex panels are orianted in one direction to achieve uniform
shade. Test certificate will be submitted after procurement of materials.

GYPSUM CEILING
Providing and fixing False ceiling as per Saint Gobain Specifications made of standard G.I.
Sections and 12mm thick gyp board sheets inclusive of all hangers, edge members and other
clips complete, with sheets fixed with proper Philip fastner by power drills and joints duly
finished ensuring level in line, complete with putty, primer and painting of approved make
and colour. Cost includes cutouts for electrical fittings, materials, labour, T&P etc complete as
per direction of the Engineer-in-charge.

PLYWOOD PANELLING
Providing & fixing Plywood Paneling with 12mm thick BWP IS:710 grade plywood with
1mm thick antibacterial laminate of approved make fixed on plywood/GI framework of
section 19mm x 50mm or as required @ 600mm c/c bothways including all hardwares all
complete as per direction of the EIC. (Make - GreenPly /Merino / Century , Laminate-
Greenlam/Merino/Century) As Per Requiredment Of Wooden Bit For Segriagtion.

340
227